Mk Vi Workshop Manual
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Mk Vi Workshop Manual as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 47,824
- Pages: 223
Loading documents preview...
WORKSHOP MANUAL TECHNICAL, INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION for MkVI TRANSCEIVERS and ANTENNAS
PUBLICATION KH1250 Issue 4, February 2000
KELVIN HUGHES Kelvin Hughes Ltd. is the Naval and Marine Division of Smiths Industries Aerospace Registered Office: 765 Finchley Road, London NW11 8DS. Incorporated in England No. 1030135
New North Road, Hainault, Ilford, Essex IG6 2UR, England Telephone: 0208 500 1020 Telefax: 0208 559 8522 Telex: 896401
CP 225 CODE OF SAFE WORKING PRACTICES FOR THE INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING OF KELVIN HUGHES LIMITED MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
This code must be followed when installing or commissioning any Kelvin Hughes Limited product. Failure to follow this code invalidates the equipment warranty.
SAFETY Reference must be made to the Safety Warnings located at the beginning of each Kelvin Hughes Limited Manual and must be read and understood. These include but are not limited to, the knowledge and understanding of: ‘Electric Shock Resuscitation’, the safety interlock system, all lethal voltages present, source of supply to all equipment, any hazardous material in the equipment or area of work, radiation hazard from the beam of a Radar Antenna and any antenna rotation hazard. Before working on antennas the following conditions must be met: •
A responsible person (such as the officer of the watch) must be informed that there will be an engineer working on the system.
•
The system interlock must be activated.
•
The source of power to the system must be isolated.
•
Warning notices must be posted at the system power source and at all displays showing ‘MAN WORKING ALOFT DO NOT SWITCH ON’. Local language considerations must be taken into account and included with the English statement above.
•
When working above a height of 1.5 metres safety harnesses must be worn and must be clipped in to the superstructure.
•
All tools must be securely lashed to ensure that they can not present a drop hazard.
Original May 03
1
CP 225 INSPECTION Before commencing work, the proposed installation locations must be inspected and accepted as being suitable for the equipment to be mounted securely following the installation procedures which can be found in the relevant Kelvin Hughes Limited manual under ‘installations’. All characteristics of the equipment must be taken into account when inspecting the proposed location such as weight and torque of turning mechanisms, regulation height of Radar display units and type, length and specification of cables or waveguide. All equipment must be inspected and checked off against the indent on unpacking, if practicable, for completeness and damage. Any discrepancies against the indent or damage to equipment must be reported to Kelvin Hughes Limited as soon as possible but in any case within 24 hours. TECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS Earthing: Earthing is to be completed by following the appropriate installation instructions, ensuring that all screws and bolts are tightened sufficiently and that any cable or braid is routed correctly. Cabling: Cables are to be of correct specification and rating and are to be run in suitable cable trays or guides. Any bulkhead penetrations, which are opened, must be closed thus maintaining existing fire proofing precautions. Metal cable ties must be used when running cable in any deckhead or bulkhead areas. Cables are to be terminated as per current IEEE regulations thus ensuring correct practices are followed. Siting and Mounting of Equipment: The equipment must be mounted following the relevant Kelvin Hughes Limited installation manual. Particular attention must be paid to the tightening of bolts and the use of ‘Nylon’ locking nuts in areas of vibration such as on antennas and turning mechanisms. Stainless steel nuts, washers and bolts must be used for all outdoor installations. No modifications are to be made to any Kelvin Hughes Limited equipment unless previously authorised in writing by Kelvin Hughes Limited and a copy of such authorisation kept with the equipment manual(s). Maintenance and Care of Equipment: Kelvin Hughes Ltd recommends inspection on a three monthly basis of all equipment. Particular attention is to be paid to turning mechanisms and scanners, which must be kept clean using only a soft cloth and soap and water - No chemical agents or corrosive cleaning agents are to be used. Any excessive end-to-end play, or excessive noise in scanners should be reported to Kelvin Hughes Limited within 24 hours of discovery.
Original May 03
2
CONFORMITY STATEMENT This equipment has been designed to comply with IMO regulations and IEC standards.
COPYRIGHT ã
Copyright Kelvin Hughes Ltd. 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, translated or stored in any form or by any means, without the written permission of Kelvin Hughes Limited. Technical details contained in this publication are subject to change without notice.
Page ii
Issue 4
CONTENTS PRELIMINARY PAGES Title Page Contents (this page) Health and Safety Notice Page Emergency Resuscitation Electrostatic Caution Page Amendment Record Page
iii iv vi vii viii
CHAPTERS Chapter 1 - General Description Chapter 2 - Installation Chapter 3 - Commissioning Chapter 4 - Technical Introduction Chapter 5 - Technical Description Annex A - Log Receiver CTX-A297 Chapter 6 - Maintenance Chapter 7 - Specification Chapter 8 - Parts
Issue 4
Page iii
IMPORTANT NOTICES HEALTH AND SAFETY 1
All personnel are required to study these notices and familiarise themselves with all applicable safety precautions and bring them to the attention of others in the vicinity. HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING
CD-0845
LETHAL HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE TRANSCEIVER 2
A current of 100 mA passing through the human body for one second can kill. This can occur at voltages as low as 35 Vac or 50 Vdc. Some equipment in the system uses electrical power that can be lethal. Whenever practical, before carrying out installation, maintenance or repair, personnel involved must: (1)
Isolate the equipment from the electrical supply.
(2)
Make tests to verify that the isolation is complete.
(3)
Ensure that power cannot be accidentally reconnected.
DO NOT OPEN ANY OF THE UNITS WHEN THE RADAR IS OPERATIONAL UNLESS FULLY QUALIFIED TO DO SO. 3
If it is essential to work on the equipment with power connected, work must only be undertaken by qualified personnel who are fully aware of the danger involved and who have taken adequate safety precautions to avoid contact with dangerous voltages. HEALTH HAZARD
CD-0844
4
This equipment contains materials which produce toxic fumes when ignited.
5
The inhalation of dust and fumes or any contact with lubricants when cleaning the equipment may be temporarily harmful to health, depending on individual allergic reactions. Components which are broken or overheated may release toxic fumes or dust and must be treated with caution. Do not inhale the fumes and ensure that the dust and debris do not enter open cuts or abrasions. It is prudent to regard all damaged components as being potentially toxic, requiring careful handling and appropriate disposal.
Page iv
Issue 4
RADIATION HAZARD: NON-IONISING AERIAL RADIATION HAZARD: INJURY CAN RESULT FROM EXPOSURE TO THE MAIN BEAM OF A STATIONARY RADAR AERIAL. DO NOT STAND LESS THAN 2m FROM THE CENTRAL FRONT FACE OF THE AERIAL. 6
It is accepted in most countries that no significant hazard is presented by radio frequency mean power density levels up to 10mW/cm. RF power levels in excess of this may cause harmful effects, particularly to the eyes. 7
Users of cardiac pacemakers should be aware that radio frequency transmissions, can damage some such devices or cause irregularities in their operation. Persons using a pacemaker should ascertain whether their device is likely to be affected before exposing themselves to the risk of malfunction. SAFETY ALOFT AERIAL ROTATION: BEFORE MAINTENANCE TO THE TURNING MECHANISM TAKES PLACE, DISABLE AERIAL ROTATION. 8
When working aloft, ensure that it is brought to the attention of someone in authority at deck or at ground level and that suitably placed warning notices are posted warning that work aloft is in progress. Ensure that the means of access aloft is secure and beware of wet or slippery ladder rungs and working areas. 9
When working on or near a radar scanner and other moving or r.f. radiating equipment, ensure that it is switched off and that the fuses have been removed and retained. PERSONAL PROTECTION
10
Personal protection must be used whenever the possibility of an uncontrolled hazard exists. For example, a suitable face visor, gloves and a body apron should be worn when handling cathode ray tubes, as a precaution against injury in the event of breakage.
Issue 4
Page v
ELECTRIC SHOCK RESUSCITATION
1
SHOUT FOR HELP. SWITCH OFF ELECTRICITY IF POSSIBLE.
2
3
REMOVE FROM DANGER.
REMOVE OBVIOUS OBSTRUCTION TO BREATHING.
Do this immediately. If not possible, don't waste time Safeguard yourself when removing casualty from hazard. If casualty is not breathing start If casualty is still in contact with electricity, and the supply resuscitation at once. searching for a switch. cannot be isolated, stand on a dry non-conducting material (rubber mat, wood, linoleum). Use rubber gloves, dry clothing, length of dry rope or wood to pull or push casualty away from the hazard.
LOOSEN NECKWARE TILT HEAD BACKWARDS AND PUSH CHIN UPWARDS
PINCH THE NOSE COMMENCE VENTILATION FOUR GOOD INFLATIONS MOUTH TO MOUTH
IF CHEST DOES NOT RISE RE-CHECK AIRWAY. REMOVE OBSTRUCTION AND RE-INFLATE
CHECK PULSE
POSITION OF PULSE
PULSE PRESENT
PULSE ABSENT
HEART HAS STOPPED BEATING LAY ON BACK ON FIRM SURFACE eg FLOOR COMMENCE EXTERNAL CHEST COMPRESSION AND CONTINUE MOUTH-TO-MOUTH VENTILATION
ONE FIRST AIDER
15 Compressions of 80 per minute followed by two inflations
CONTINUE INFLATIONS UNTIL RECOVERY OF NORMAL BREATHING
TWO FIRST AIDERS
One conducts chest compressions, without pause at 60 per minute. The other administers mouth-to-mouth ventilation - after each 5th compression
WHEN NORMAL BREATHING COMMENCES PLACE CASUALTY IN RECOVERY POSITION
Check heart beat after first five minutes and then after every three mintutes. Continue external chest compression and mouth-to-mouth ventilation until a normal pulse is felt and colour improves
CONTINUE INFLATIONS UNTIL RECOVERY OF NORMAL BREATHING Keep casualty at rest. Remove on a stretcher. Watch closely, particularly for difficulty in breathing. Lightly cover with blankets or other materials.
MEDICAL ASSISTANCE MAY BE OBTAINED ON / AT............................... CD-1265
Page vi
Issue 4
ATTENTION OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES
CAUTION Handling of Electrostatic-Sensitive Semiconductor Devices Certain semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to static voltage. Observe the following precautions when handling these devices in their unterminated state, or sub-units containing these devices: (1) Persons removing sub-units from an equipment using these devices must be earthed by a wrist strap and a resistor at the point provided on the equipment. (2) Soldering irons used during the repair operations must be low voltage types with earthed tips and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer. (3)
Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static charges.
(4) Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored and transported in anti-static bags. CD-1100
Issue 4
Page vii
AMENDMENT RECORD When an amendment is incorporated into this publication, the details should be recorded below. Where the equipment has been modified, the modification number shown on the Amendment Instruction Sheet is also to be recorded. Amdt. No.
Page viii
Date Inserted
Initials
Mod. No.
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTENTS Paragraph 1 Introduction 3 Upmast Configuration 4 Downmast Configuration 5 Transceiver
Page 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2
Page Upmast Transceiver Configuration Downmast Transceiver Configuration
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
1.5 1.6
Page 1.1
KH1250 Chapter 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 1.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION 1
The MkVI Transceiver is available as: (1)
(2)
Upmast - where the transceiver electronics are incorporated in the turning mechanism. Two versions are available: (a)
Low Speed - 25rpm
(b)
High Speed - 40 rpm
Downmast - where the transceiver electronics are remote from the turning mechanism, being located in a separate enclosure located below deck. Two versions are available: (a)
Low Speed - 25rpm
(b)
High Speed - 40 rpm
2
A Soft Start Unit, which is required for both versions of the transceiver, switches three phase mains to the antenna motor. A thermal overload trip unit, mounted in the soft start unit, protects the supply to the motor. Access to the trip unit reset button is achieved by removing the soft start unit front cover. The soft start unit may also be fitted with an in-line single phase mains supply, for installations with long cable runs, or installations which are interswitched. UPMAST CONFIGURATION 3
The upmast configuration, shown in Figure 1, is provided with a +27V dc supply for the transceiver electronics and a three phase supply for the antenna motor, via the soft start
unit. DOWNMAST CONFIGURATION 4
The downmast configuration, shown in Figure 2, is provided with a +27V dc supply, from the soft start unit, for the transceiver electronics. The soft start unit also switches the three phase supply for the antenna motor.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 1.3
KH1250 Chapter 1 TRANSCEIVER 5
Both versions of the transceiver are fitted with a logarithmic amplifier and employ fan cooling for the magnetron, AFC tuning, a common modulator control design and common terminal connections. 6
The transceiver is muted whenever the antenna ceases to rotate. Pulse jitter, muting and sector transmission are standard facilities, with options for pre-pulse generation and external synchronisation. 7
Both versions of the transceiver may be interfaced with any of the NUCLEUS Series displays.
8
On the upmast version of the transceiver, one VIDEO and one SYNC coaxial output are accessible. The downmast transceiver provides two SYNC and two VIDEO coaxial outputs.
Page 1.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 1
KELVIN HUGHES CABLE: CODE L
30kW TRANSCEIVER/ TURNING MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE N
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2
* NOTE:
CABLE CODE N IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES UP TO 60m.
CABLE: CODE L
CABLE CODE G IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES GREATER THAN 60m.
DISPLAY
INTERSWITCH UNIT
LOW LOSS CO-AX (2 OFF)
* CABLE:
OR
CODE N OR G
CABLE: CODE K
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN CABLE CODE L
1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES TRANSCEIVER
ANTENNA
25rpm CAE-A37
3.9m CAE-A36
40rpm CAE-A45
2.8m CAE-A39
CABLE G - 25 CORE CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER CABLE N - 38 CORE CABLE P - LOW LOSS CO-AX
CD-5104
Figure 1 - Upmast Transceiver Configuration
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 1.5
KH1250 Chapter 1
KELVIN HUGHES TURNING MECHANISM SEMI-RIGID CO-AXIAL CABLE
* NOTE: S BAND
CABLE: CODE N
CABLE: CODE L *CABLE: CODE N OR G
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2
CABLE: CODE E
CABLE: CODE L
TRANSMITTER (CTX-A7)
CABLE CODE N IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES UP TO 60m. CABLE CODE G IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES GREATER THAN 60m.
DISPLAY
INTERSWITCH UNIT
LOW LOSS CO-AX (2 OFF)
OR
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR 80-261-600
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN CABLE CODE L
1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES TURNING MECHANISM 25rpm CAE-A42
ANTENNA 3.9m CAE-A36
40rpm (minimum) CAE-A41 2.8m CAE-A39
CABLE B - 3 CORE SMALL CABLE E - 12 CORE CABLE G - 25 CORE CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER CABLE N- 38 CORE CABLE P - LOW LOSS CO-AX
CD-5105
Figure 2 - Downmast Transceiver Configuration
Page 1.6
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION CONTENTS Paragraph 1 2 3 4 7 9 13 18 21 23 24 25 25 31 32 36 37 42 46 49 50 58 59 60 62 63 65 66 67 74 75 76 77 78 79
General Transceivers Upmast System Downmast System Soft Start Uni Safety Notes EQUIPMENT LOCATION Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) and Turning Mechanism CAE-A41/42) Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14, CZZ-A14-2) Optional Mains Isolator (80-261-600) Head/Receiver Line Amplifiers (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) INSTALLATION Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) Fitting Thermal Overload Trip Unit to Soft Start Unit Fitting the Soft Start Unit Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) and Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41/42) Optional Tx Monitor Arm (CAE-A38) Connection of Tx Mon to Upmast Transceiver Connection of Tx Mon to Downmast Transceiver Turning Mechanism Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Construction Mounting Downmast Transceivers H.F. Co-axial Cable Optional Mains Isolator (80-261-600) Head/Receiver Line Amplifiers (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Cable Specifications 38-Core Custom Built Cable Small Multi-Core Cables Power Cables Co-axial Cable General Cover Removal Upmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism Downmast Transceiver Soft Start Unit Optional Mains Isolator PCB Locations and Cable Routing
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.1
KH1250 Chapter 2 CONTENTS (continued) Paragraph 80 82
Wiring Diagrams CHECKS AFTER FITTING
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4
Page Trip Unit Cableform Connections Trip Unit Dial Positions Cable Codes and Specification Cable Colour Abbreviations
2.7 2.8 2.26 2.27
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Page Thermal Overload Trip Unit Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*): Installation Dimensions Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*): Component Layout Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): Installation Dimensions Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42): Installation Dimensions Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): Installation Dimensions Downmast Transceiver to Turning Mechanism Connection Deck Gland: Fitting Deck Gland: Fitting Mains Isolator (80-261-600): Installation Dimensions Line Head/Receiver Amplifier: Installation Dimensions Cable Gland: Assembly Upmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Downmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Motor Connection Display/DIU/Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2)/Upmast Transceiver Installation: Wiring Display/DIU/Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2)/Downmast Transceiver Installation: Wiring Soft Start Unit With In-Line Power Supply Upmast Transceiver - Interswitched Installation: Wiring Downmast Transceiver - Interswitched Installation: Wiring Nucleus 3 Display to Radar Interface Unit to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Page 2.2
2.6 2.9 2.10 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.19 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.31 2.33 2.34 2.35 2.38 2.39/40 2.41/42 2.43 2.45/46 2.47/48 2.49/50
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION GENERAL 1
This section provides installation information for MkVI Upmast and Downmast S-Band Transceivers.
TRANSCEIVERS 2
There are three versions of the MkVI S-Band Transceiver: (1)
30kW S-Band, Upmast 25 rpm (CAE-A37).
(2)
30kW S-Band, Upmast 40 rpm (Min) (CAE-A45).
(3)
30kW S-Band, Downmast (CTX-A7).
Upmast System 3
The upmast systems, shown in Chapter 1, Figure 1 and Figure 2, incorporate the transceiver electronics in the antenna turning mechanism.
Downmast System 4
The electronics for the downmast system, shown in Chapter 1, Figure 3 and Figure 4, are housed in a separate bulkhead mounted enclosure. The downmast transceiver is connected to the turning mechanism, via semi-rigid co-axial cable. 5
6
Two versions of the turning mechanism are provided with downmast systems: (1)
25 rpm CAE-A42.
(2)
50 rpm CAE-A41.
The 25 rpm turning mechanism is used for normal applications. The 50 rpm turning mechanism is used for high speed craft.
SOFT START UNIT 7
All installations utilise CZZ-A14/2 Soft Start Unit with an in-line power supply unit.
8
Installations with interswitched units, or with long cable runs, i.e. those greater than 60m, utilise Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2), as shown in Chapter 1, Figure 2. This version of the Soft Start Unit is fitted with an in-line power supply.
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.3
KH1250 Chapter 2 SAFETY NOTES Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the front of this manual. 9
Mains supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are to be isolated during installation.
10
A suitable safety platform or harness should be used when siting the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism aloft.
11
Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not enter the area of work.
12
Earthing straps must be connected at the point shown in the appropriate illustration, prior to switching on the transceiver. EQUIPMENT LOCATION
UPMAST Tx/Rx (CAE-A37/A45) AND TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A41/42) 13
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism should be installed in such a position where Blind Arcs, caused by obstructions, i.e. masts, funnels etc, are eliminated or minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other large obstructions can also reflect energy and give rise to spurious echo returns especially in close proximity to land. 14
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must not be mounted where the temperature exceeds 70oC.
15
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must be kept clear of ship’s flexible communication aerials to avoid damage to both.
16
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must be mounted more than 914 mm above any flat surface, when the flat surface is greater than the diameter swept by the antenna. 17
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must not be positioned in the close proximity of any magnetic compass or D/F aerial, etc.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A7) 18
The following points must be considered when selecting a suitable site for the Downmast Transceiver: (1)
The transceiver is designed for bulkhead mounting.
(2)
Consideration must be given to accessibility for servicing and protection from adverse conditions. For ease of maintenance, the top of the transceiver should not be mounted more than 1.6m above the deck.
(3)
Ensure that there is sufficient space below the unit for cable entries, and above the unit to allow for connection of the semi-rigid co-axial cable coupling.
NOTE The semi-rigid co-axial cable has a minimum bend radius of 100mm (4") Page 2.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 (4)
The transceiver should be mounted in a position which allows for ventilation and cooling.
NOTE The transceiver circulation fan must not be obstructed. (5)
Do not fit the transceiver in an acoustic, noise sensitive area, i.e. Bridge or Operations Room.
(6)
Do not fit the transceiver in close proximity to any magnetic compass or D/F aerial.
19
Connecting cables between the display and the transceiver should be limited to a length of 60 metres. Where the distance between transceiver and display exceeds 60 metres, special low loss co-axial cable and Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2 should be used. Where the distance between transceiver and display exceeds 180 metres, special low loss co-axial cable, Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2 and line amplifiers for video and sync must be fitted. 20
Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum length, i.e. less than 30m, with as few bends and twists as possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to be used to eliminate the effects of vibration. SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2) 21
22
The Soft Start Unit must be sited as follows: (1)
Upmast installation, using Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) - near the display.
(2)
Upmast installation with long cable run, using Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) - near the transceiver/turning mech.
(3)
Downmast installation, using Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) - near the transceiver.
The Soft Start Unit must be sited to allow removal of the front cover.
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 23
The mains isolator must be sited adjacent to the display or in the area of the operators control room and connected in parallel with the main display.
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.5
KH1250 Chapter 2 HEAD/RECEIVER LINE AMPLIFIERS (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) 24
The Head line amplifier should be sited as close to the transceiver as possible. The Receiver line amplifier should be sited as close as possible to the display, or interswitch
unit. INSTALLATION SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14 and CZZ-A14-2) WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE VICINITY OF THE SOFT START UNIT ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. Fitting Thermal Overload Trip Unit To Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*) 25
The thermal overload trip unit is supplied with the gearbox fitting kit.
26
Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the four captive screws.
27
The trip unit, shown in Figure 1, clips on the side of the contactor and is secured in position with relay termination screws 2T1, 4T2, 6T3, 14NO and A2.
3'
2
H
A O
2'
2
2' 2T1
7
I
4T7
6T3 A2/96NC
14/22
95NC
CD-0224
Figure 1 - Thermal Overload Trip Unit
Page 2.6
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 28
Connect the cableform wires as shown in Table 1. TABLE 1: Trip Unit Cableform Connections TERMINAL No.
29
WIRE COLOUR
WIRE No.
MARKERS
FROM
14/22
P
16
BN/BU
A2
95NC
P
28
R/S
KEYSWITCH
2T1
BK
-
-
NEON
P
10
BN/BK
TB1-1
4T2
P
11
BN/BN
TB1-2
6T3
P
12
BN/R
TB1-3
A2/96NC
P
23
R/O
PCB SKA
P
16
BN/BU
14/22
Set the blue trip button to the H (handset) position.
H
A CD-0225
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.7
KH1250 Chapter 2 30
Set the dial position on the trip unit to the position shown in Table 2 TABLE 2: Trip Unit Dial Positions
ANTENNA SPEED
25 rpm
MOTOR VOLTAGE
440 V
THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIP UNIT - PART NO.
DIAL POSITION
1.5A
45-617-1156-04 GM-0152
25 rpm
415 V
1.6A
45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
25 rpm
380 V
1.7A
45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
2.5A 25 rpm
220 V
45-617-1156-06 GM-0157
1.5A 40 rpm
440 V
45-617-1156-04 GM-0152
1.6A 40 rpm
415 V
45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
1.7A 40 rpm
380 V
45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
2.5A 40 rpm
220 V
45-617-1156-06
GM-0157
Fitting the Soft Start Unit 31
Fit the soft start unit to the securing bulkhead using the installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to Figure 2 for dimensions.
Page 2.8
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
CD-1343
368
342
180
119
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00) 9.5kg
o
At Relative Humidity 0% : -15 C to +55 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
o
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Grade I Standard Compass : 1.0 m Grade II & III Steering Compass : 0.7 m Grade IV : 0.5 m
Compass Safe Distances
Soft Start Unit Weight :
3 x M10 FIXINGS
KH1250 Chapter 2
237
159
Figure 2 - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Installation Dimensions
Page 2.9
KH1250 Chapter 2
PSU
TB4
TB2 THREE PHASE SWITCHING PCB CZZ-A159
TB6
TB5 TB3 TB1
THERMAL TRIP OVERLOAD UNIT
CONTACTOR
SOFT START UNIT WITH INLINE PSU CZZ-A14/2
CD-5106
Figure 3 - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Component Layout Page 2.10
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2 UPMAST TRANSCEIVER (CAE-A37) AND TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A42/41) WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER/TURNING MECHANISM ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. CAUTION When Unpacking The Antenna, Ensure That The Semi-rigid Co-axial Cables Are Not Kinked, Crushed Or Bent. Support The Antenna Near Its Centre When Lifting It Out Of Its Packing And When Fitting It Into Position On The Turning Mechanism. Do Not Handle The Antenna By The Semi-rigid Co-axial Cable Input. 32
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism is supplied in two parts: (1)
Transceiver with gearbox (Upmast System), or gearbox only (Downmast System Turning Mechanism).
(2)
Antenna
33
The ship’s mounting structure must be capable of withstanding the high starting and stopping torque generated by the 0.375 motor fitted in the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism. 34
When mounting the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism observe the following: (1)
Use the fitting pack supplied with the equipment (refer to Figures 4 and 5). The fitting pack contains fixings that have been tested to withstand the stresses detailed in paragraph 33.
(2)
Recommended tensile strengths and torque loadings for the fixings are stated on the installation diagram.
(3)
For upmast transceivers/turning mechanisms mounted in excess of 1.8m above the deck, it is recommended that a service platform and guard rail are fitted.
(4)
Use a suitable jointing compound or sealant to prevent corrosion between the platform and upmast transceivers/turning mechanism.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.11
KH1250 Chapter 2 CAUTION The Antenna Window Must NOT Be Painted. (5) 35
Any chipped or damaged surfaces must be painted with polyurethane paint.
With reference to Figures 4, 5 and 6, install the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism as follows: (1)
Fit the coupling element and sealing ring to the antenna connector.
(2)
Fit the antenna to the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism, ensuring that the connectors are aligned, and loosely secure using the eight M10 retaining bolts, washers and nuts. Cautions when Rotating The Antenna Do Not Apply Excessive Force.
ensure The Semi-rigid Coax Assembly, On The Underside Of The Antenna, Is Not Crushed Or Damaged. (3)
Secure the co-axial connector using the three M6 bolts and washers provided.
(4)
Tighten and torque load the eight antenna retaining bolts to 25 Nm.
CAUTION Failure To Fit Antenna Spoilers Will Reduce System Life And Render The Radar Inoperative In High Winds. (5)
Fit the spoilers to the antenna using the fittings supplied.
(6)
Mark out and drill four 17mm gearbox mounting holes at the mounting position.
(7)
For semi-rigid cable access, on a downmast system, mark out and drill a 100 mm hole in the mounting platform, as shown on Figure 5.
NOTE: The upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is supplied with four M12 bolts, washers and fibre washers. These may be removed, but not discarded, and replaced with eye bolts. Once the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is in position, the eye bolts are to be removed and replaced with the original bolts.
Page 2.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 WARNINGS THE UPMAST TRANSCEIVER/TURNING MECHANISM MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE ANTENNA AND MUST BE HOISTED TO THE FIXING POSITION USING A SECURED BLOCK AND TACKLE, OR, IF NO EYE BOLTS ARE FITTED, BY ROPE STROPS. DO NOT FIT EYE BOLTS IF THERE ARE NO EXISTING FITTINGS. (8)
Install the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism at the mounting position, ensuring correct orientation. Use the shim washers supplied, to take up any distortion in the mounting platform. Failure to do so may cause the casting to crack when bolts are tightened to the correct torque.
(9)
Secure the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism with the four M16 bolts supplied and torque load them to 120Nm.
Optional Tx Monitor Arm (CAE-A38) Note: For an Upmast Transceiver, the Tx Monitor Arm is connected to the Control PCB. For a Downmast Transceiver the Tx Monitor Arm is connected to the Heading Line PCB in the turning mechanism. 36
The Monitor Arm is an optional item and is fitted to outer casing. The monitor arm cable feeds through the small gland beside the aerial motor.
Connection of Tx Mon to Upmast Transceiver 37
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
38
Route the Tx Monitor Arm cableform as shown in Figure 14. To ease routing, proceed as follows: (1)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(2)
Slide the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
39
Connect the Tx Monitor Arm cableform to the Control PCB (CTX-A246) as follows: red to 3PLM 1 and blue to 3PLM 2.
40
Return the electronic chassis to its original position and secure with the six captive screws.
41
Refit the rear cover and secure with the six bolts.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.13
KH1250 Chapter 2 Connection of Tx Mon to Downmast Transceiver Turning Mechanism 42
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
43
Route the Tx Monitor Arm cableform as shown in Figure 15.
44
Connect the Tx Monitor Arm cableform to the Heading Line PCB (CAE-A180) as follows: red to 9PLA 7 and blue to 9PLA 8.
45
Refit the rear cover and secure using the six bolts.
Page 2.14
Issue 4
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
50 kg 110 kg
Compass Safe Distances: Standard Compass Grade I : 4.0 m Steering Compass Grade II & III : 2.5 m Grade IV : 2.0 m
Antenna Weight Tx & Turning Mech -
EARTHING STUD
ON/OFF SWITCH
38 CORE CABLE
o
CD-1344
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 12 OFF WASHER M16 PLAIN 6 OFF WASHER M16 SPLIT 8 OFF NUT M16 FULL 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
}
418
INSTRUCTIONS TIGHTEN BOLT TO PRODUCE A SMALL DEFLECTION IN RUBBER MOUNTING PADS
BOLTS TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE OF 120 Nm. PROTECT AGAINST CORROSION BY PAINTING
MATERIAL MUST BE HIGH TENSILE STEEL. (MIN.80kg f / mm 2 )
SHIP
474
180
200
480
540
2750 or 3910
C/L ROTATION
4 FIXING HOLES O17
7
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED ( ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET FITTED) 4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 4 OFF NUT M16 NYLOC 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
USE SHIM WASHER(S) CAE-1189 AS HEIGHT SPACER UNDER ANTI-NOISE BLOCK IF REQUIRED
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEARBOX FITTED WITH ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED (NO ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET)
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 C to +70 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
o
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
890
672
190
430
MOTOR POWER CABLE FED IN UNDERNEATH THROUGH LARGE HOLE IN BOTTOM PLATE
TX MONITOR ARM (PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 4 - Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): Installation Dimensions
Page 2.15
Page 2.16
o
CD-1345
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 12 OFF WASHER M16 PLAIN 6 OFF WASHER M16 SPLIT 8 OFF NUT M16 FULL 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
}
418
INSTRUCTIONS TIGHTEN BOLT TO PRODUCE A SMALL DEFLECTION IN RUBBER MOUNTING PADS
BOLTS TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE OF 120 Nm. PROTECT AGAINST CORROSION BY PAINTING
MATERIAL MUST BE HIGH TENSILE STEEL. (MIN.80kg f / mm 2 )
SHIP
7
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 4 OFF NUT M16 NYLOC 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED ( ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET FITTED)
180
C/L ROTATION
150
MOTOR POWER CABLE FED IN UNDERNEATH THROUGH LARGE HOLE IN BOTTOM PLATE
190
430
* 100mm HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE REQUIRED FOR S BAND CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
200
540 480
FWD
TX MONITOR ARM (PART OF CAE-A38)
* IF S BAND CO-AX NOT FED THROUGH HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE RAISE UNIT TO ALLOW 150mm CLEARANCE
2750 or 3910
S BAND CO-AX
474
4 FIXING HOLES O17
USE SHIM WASHER(S) CAE-1189 AS HEIGHT SPACER UNDER ANTI-NOISE BLOCK IF REQUIRED
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEARBOX FITTED WITH ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED (NO ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET)
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 C to +70 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
o
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Compass Safe Distances: Standard Compass Grade I : 4.0 m Steering Compass Grade II & III : 2.5 m Grade IV : 2.0 m
45kg 50 kg 100 kg
EARTHING STUD
12 CORE CABLE ON/OFF SWITCH
Antenna Weight (2.8m) (3.9m) Tx & Turning Mech
890
672
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 5 - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42): Installation Dimensions
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
FWD
MOTOR CABLE 38 CORE CABLE
50mm HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE REQUIRED FOR MOTOR CABLE ENTRY
S BAND CO-AX
45
830
0
540 480
200 674 TUBE THICKNESS 12 MM MINIMUM
MAX 2M
4 FIXING HOLES O17
430
474 30 100mm HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE REQUIRED FOR S BAND CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
50
490
750
500
CD-1348
MOUNTING PLATE AND STIFFENING PIECES 15mm STEEL
Figure 6 - Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.17
KH1250 Chapter 2 DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A7) WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. Construction 46
The general construction of the downmast S-Band transceiver comprises a sheet-metal rear plate which is formed, to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two ‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the plate, providing the bulkhead fixing points. 47
The PCBs are mounted both sides of the modulator chassis and are removed as a complete assembly.
48
A wrap-around cover made from sheet-metal, encloses the unit and is fixed by six captive screws. Removing the cover gives access to the front and sides of the Transceiver electronics. Cable entry is at the bottom of the unit. Mounting 49
Fit the transceiver to the securing bulkhead using the installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to Figure 7 for dimensions.
Page 2.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 TOP VIEW
250
85
BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
250
420 88
117 19
720
670 BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
645
15.8mm SLOT
29
CUTOUT SWITCH RESET ACCESS
SYNC. & VIDEO SOCKETS
CABLE ENTRIES
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE o
Transmitter Weight :
30kg
o
At Relative Humidity 0% : -15 C to +55 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
Power Consumption :
200VA
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES :Standard Compass
1.9m (Grade I)
Steering Compass
1.1m (Grade II)
CD-1346
Figure 7 - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): Installation Dimensions
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.19
KH1250 Chapter 2 DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVERS H.F. CO-AXIAL CABLE 50
A semi-rigid co-axial cable is used to connect the S-Band Downmast Transceiver to the Antenna (refer to Figure 8). The cable is supplied cut to length with a connector fitted to each end. It’s general specification is as follows: (1)
Impedance: 50 Ohms
(2)
Attenuation @ 3GHz: 0.1dB per metre
51
The cable is supplied cut to length and with a special coupling fitted to each end. The cable must not be cut, or shortened - any cable surplus should be accommodated in a 900 mm (3 ft) coil along its length. 52
The minimum bend radius is 100 mm (4"); the cable must be worked gradually to achieve the minimum bend and must not be bent across a radius sharper than the minimum bend
radius. 53
The cable must be suitably supported and secured along its length by special plastic cable cleats (Code No. 80-283-605-07) positioned at 1m (39") intervals. On vertical cable runs, where due to its own weight the cable might creep, the intervals between cable cleats at the top of the run should be reduced to 300 mm (12"). 54
The cable may be run with other cables on a common channel plate or cable tray but it must be secured separately using the special plastic cable cleats.
55
Protect the cable from accidental damage by ensuring that any sections exposed to risk are protected by suitable covers. Pay particular attention to protecting the cable entries into transitions. 56
Do not run the cable on any surface or in any area where a temperature of 70oC is exceeded.
57
Use deck gland TCR-1345 (refer to Figures 9 and 10) to pass the cable through watertight decks, etc.
Page 2.20
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2
MK6 TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A42 BOTTOM OF ROTATING JOINT
ROTATE UNTIL 2mm - 5mm OF THREAD IS PROTRUDING
MINIMUM BENDING RADIUS 80mm
ALL PART Nos AS SHOWN FOR TX END
CONNECTOR ZV 9759
*3 BOLTS (FLANGE BOLTS)
*3 SPRING WASHERS
*"O" RING
*COUPLING ELEMENT RF (INNER MALE COUPLING)
*THESE ITEMS SUPPLIED AS FITTING PACK CODE ZV 9758
SEAL PLATES CAE-1437
TOP OF TRANSCEIVER CTX-A2 OR CTX-A7
BOTTOM OF TURNING MECH CAE-A42
CD-1347
3mm THICK SPONGE CAE-1438
Figure 8 - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) to Turning Mechanism Connection
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.21
KH1250 Chapter 2
12 BOLTS HEX. HEAD M6 25mm STEEL (20-251-1200-11) 6 WASHERS M6 STEEL (20-281-1063-11) CLAMP PLATE (2 HALVES) (TCR 1345)
SPACER (2 HALVES) (TCR 1343)
SEAL (2 HALVES) (TCR 1344)
SPACER (2 HALVES) (TCR 1343)
DECKGLAND BODY (TCR 1340)
GASKET (TCR 1342)
DECK PLATE (TCR 1341)
6 WASHERS M6 STEEL (20-281-1063-11)
(A) (see next Figure) CD-1218
Figure 9 - Deck Gland: Fitting
Page 2.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 150
FITTING THE COAXIAL DECK GLAND (TCR A37)
(B)
STEEL DECK
1)
Weld the deck plate (TCR 1341) to the deck.
2)
Pierce the deck with a 64 mm (2.5") diameter hole, concentric with the deck plate.
3)
Place the gasket (TCR A1342) between the deck plate (TCR 1341) and the deck gland body (TCR 1340). Bolt the deck gland body to the deck plate using six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws with spring washers.
67
To fit the deck gland to a steel deck, refer to diagrams (A) (see previous figure) and (E) and proceed as follows:
64
4)
Assemble the gland components in the deck gland body and temporarily secure clamp plates (TCR 1345) using the remaining six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws with washers.
BODY COACH BOLTS GASKET (TCR 1342) WOOD BLOCK
(C)
COMPOSITION
WOODEN OR COMPOSITION & STEEL DECKS
DECK
To fit the deck gland to a wooden, or composition & steel deck, refer to previous figure and Diagrams (C) and proceed as follows: 1)
Where the composition has been removed, a wooden block is secured to the deck (diagram C).
2)
A 64 mm (2.5") diameter hole is bored through the wooden block and the deck. The deck gland body (TCR 1340) and the gasket (TCR 1342) are secured to the wooden block using suitable coach bolts.
3)
Assemble the gland components in the deck gland body and temporarily secure the clamp plates (TCR 1345) using six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws with washers.
DECK PLATE (TCR 1341) WELD
COMPOSITION DECKS To fit the deck gland to a composition deck, refer to previous figure and Diagram (D) and proceed as follows: 1)
A threaded deck tube (shipyard supplied) with a flange at one end is attached to the deck (Diagram D).
2)
The deck plate (TCR 1341) is then welded to the flange and the the deck gland is assembled as for a steel deck fitting.
FLANGED TUBE SHIPYARD SUPPLY
(D)
COMPOSITION
(E)
DECK PLATE (TCR 1341)
DECK
ASSEMBLING THE DECK GLAND TO THE COAXIAL CABLE Refer to previous figure and proceed as follows: 1)
Part the transition from the cable end connector and wrap the transition in a protective cover. DO NOT REMOVE THE END CONNECTOR FROM THE CABLE.
2)
Remove the six screws securing the two halves of the clamp plate (TCR 1345) and remove the gland components.
3)
Pass the coaxial cable through the gland.
4)
Reassemble the gland components as shown (Figure 28) to ensure tat the join between the two halves of each gland component is at 90o to its neighbour.
5)
Fit and tighten the six M6 x 25 mm screws in the clamp plate (TCR 1345) to expand the seal. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN as this may cause distortion of the cable.
6)
Coat the assembled gland with a protective finish.
7)
The transmission is now bolted back on to the cable connector at the most convenient stage of running the coaxial cable.
WELD STEEL DECK
64
CD-1219
Figure 10 - Deck Gland: Fitting
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.23
KH1250 Chapter 2 OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 58
With reference to Figure 11, secure the Mains Isolator in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
80
205
120
160
160
30
WIRING FOR 3 PHASE
WIRING FOR SINGLE PHASE CABLE 211K
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
L1
L1
L2
L2
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
L3
L1
L3
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
CONNECT SCREENS TO EARTH
FIT 20 AMP FUSES
CD-1157
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
FIT 20 AMP FUSES
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
SHIP'S SUPPLY SINGL PHASE 110V/220V
Figure 11 - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions Page 2.24
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 HEAD/RECEIVER LINE AMPLIFIERS (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) 59
With reference to Figure 12, secure the Line Amplifier in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
220
VIDEO IN
DC SUPPLY
SYNC IN
120
VIDEO OUT
SYNC OUT
60
204
82 O 5mm
CD-1158
Figure 12 - Head/ Receiver Line Amplifier: Installation Dimensions Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.25
KH1250 Chapter 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 60
Each cable is identified by a letter code which defines the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code M is a 38-core cable. Table 3 provides specifications for each cable type. Table 4 provides 38-core cable, colour code abbreviations. 61
The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes equipment are to be to the following specification. Failure to use the correct specification cables may result in impaired equipment performance. TABLE 3: Cable Specification CABLE
DESCRIPTION
CODE
CORE
DIAMETER
A
2-core small multi-core
1344-718
16/0.2
6.1mm 7.7mm
B
3-core small multi-core
1344-719
16/0.2
6.4mm 7.2mm
C
4-core small multi-core
1344-720
16/0.2
6.9mm 7.7mm
D
6-core small multi-core
1344-721
16/0.2
7.9mm 8.7mm
E
12-core small multi-core
1344-722
16/0.2
10mm 11mm
F
18-core small multi-core
1344-723
16/0.2
11.5mm 12.3mm
G
25-core small multi-core
1344-724
16/0.2
13.6mm 14mm
H.
TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
J
Co-axial 75 ohms d/s
5344-705
7/0.07
7mm
K
2-core Power
5344-787
7/0.67
12mm
L
3-core Power
5344-788
7/0.67
13mm
N
38-core small multi-core
5344-701
P
Co-axial (Low Loss) Type ECL 125
5344-719 (for long cable lengths only)
Varies
8.3mm
38-Core Custom Built Cable 62
The 38-core composite cable (KH code number 5344-701) is made for Kelvin Hughes and comprises the following: (1)
4 cores of 32/0.2 mm copper wire.
(2)
32 cores of 16/0.2 mm copper wire.
(3)
2 cores of co-axial cable.
Page 2.26
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2 TABLE 4: 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations ABBREVIATION
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
COLOUR
R
RED
B
BLUE
G
GREEN
Y
YELLOW
W
WHITE
Bk
BLACK
Bn
BROWN
V
VIOLET
O
ORANGE
P
PINK
T
TURQUOISE
S
SLATE (grey)
R/B
RED/BLUE
R/G
RED/GREEN
R/Y
RED/YELLOW
R/W
RED/WHITE
R/Bk
RED/BLACK
R/Bn
RED/BROWN
B/Y
BLUE/YELLOW
B/W
BLUE/WHITE
B/Bk
BLUE/BLACK
B/O
BLUE/ORANGE
G/Y
GREEN/YELLOW
G/W
GREEN/WHITE
G/Bk
GREEN/BLACK
G/O
GREEN/ORANGE
G/S
GREEN/SLATE
Bn/Bk
BROWN/BLACK
Bn/Y
BROWN/YELLOW
Bn/W
BROWN/WHITE
S/B
SLATE/BLUE
S/Bn
SLATE/BROWN
V/Bk
VIOLET/BLACK
V/Y
VIOLET/YELLOW
Page 2.27
KH1250 Chapter 2 ABBREVIATION
COLOUR
V/W
VIOLET/WHITE
W/R
WHITE/RED WHITE CO-AX SLATE CO-AX
N/C
NO CONNECTION
Small Multi-Core Cables 63
These cables conform to DEF STAN 61-12 (part 5). Each cable consists of a number of insulated cores, collectively screened and clad in a PVC outer sheath.
64
Core Details (1)
The core details are as follows: Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2 mm diameter tinned copper wire. Nominal cross-section area of conductor = 0.5 mm2. Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93 mm Nominal thickness of insulation = 0.45 mm Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40 mm Minimum diameter of core = 1.75 mm Maximum diameter of core = 1.90 mm
(2)
Braided Screen The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape over which is woven a braiding of 0.2 mm diameter tinned copper wire.
(3)
Outer Sheath A PVC outer sheath is applied by extrusion over the wire braiding.
(4)
Maximum Current Rating The maximum current ratings are as follows: 2.5 A at 1000 V dc 2.5 A at 440 V ac at 1600Hz.
Page 2.28
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 Power Cables 65
These cables are used for services requiring a moderate current carrying capacity, i.e. main supplies.
2-Core E.P. Rubber (Power): Cable Code K:
KH Reference No. 4344-787
250/440V grade:
7 x 0.67mm (7 x 0.026") cores cross linked polyethylene insulation, braided with 0.2mm (0.0078") diameter tinned copper wire, 79% coverage low smoke, zero halogen outer sheath
Outer diameter:
10mm (0.39 in.).
3-Core E.P. Rubber (Power): Cable Code L: (250/440 V grade): Outer Diameter:
KH Reference No. 5344-788 Specification as for 2-core cable. 11 mm (0.44")
Co-axial Cable 66
Where the distance between the Display and the Transceiver exceeds 60 metres, special co-axial cables and/or Sync and signal amplifiers may be required to obtain optimum results, consult Kelvin Hughes prior to installation of the cables. Co-axial 75 ohms double screened Cable Code J: Specification: Inner Conductor: Dielectric: Screen: : Overall Dia: :
KH Reference No. 5344-705 2003A to CW1229C (BT1229B) TBD 0.61 mm single conductor Polyethylene Close knit braid - double screen 6.9 mm
Electrical Attenuation: Attenuation: Impedance:
Issue 4, Amdt. 2 (Mar 01)
60MHz 9dB/100m MAX 200MHz 18.5dB/100m MAX 75 Ohm
Page 2.29
KH1250 Chapter 2 Co-axial Cable 75 ohms low loss (for extended cable runs) Co-axial Cable: Specification: Inner Conductor: Dielectric: Screen: Overall Dia:
CODE No. 5344-719 Type ECL 125 (Manufacturer’s code) TBD 1.25 mm Single Conductor Air spaced Polyethylene Tape Screen 8.3 mm
Electrical Attenuation: Attenuation: Impedance:
60MHz 3.4dB/100m MAX 100MHz 4.9dB/100m MAX 75 Ohm
GENERAL 67
Before starting electrical connection observe the following: WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TAKES PLACE.
68
Isolate power supplies as follows: (1)
Turn the Soft Start Unit keyswitch to OFF and remove the key.
(2)
Ensure that the associated display is turned off.
(3)
Remove fuses from mains isolators.
69
The casing of the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism must be securely earthed to the platform with braided copper wire.
70
The casing of the downmast transceiver must be securely earthed to the deck or bulkhead with braided copper wire.
71
Allow sufficient length on all cables to allow for routing through the transceiver. Make sure that there is sufficient slack to allow for extreme movements during sudden shock to the vessel. 72
Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated entry point and that screened cables are earthed to their respected units.
73
Fit glands to cables in accordance with the diagram shown on Figure 13.
Page 2.30
Issue 4
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
CD-0278
BRAID
RUBBER GLAND
640 mm 700 mm
FOR 38-CORE CABLE REMOVE 700 mm OF OUTER COVER AND 640 mm OF BRAID
CABLE OUTER INSULATION
BRASS BUNG NYLON WASHER
CLAMPING NUT
OUTSIDE OF CASTING CASTING
INSIDE OF CASTING
DISCS ARE TO BE LEFT IN UNUSED CABLE GLANDS.
NOTE: SCREENING DISC IS TO BE FITTED IN PLACE OF THE FERRULE UNTIL CABLE INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE.
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS THROUGH GLAND
FERRULE PUSHED INSIDE CABLE OUTER INSULATION
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 13 - Cable Gland: Assembly
Page 2.31
KH1250 Chapter 2 COVER REMOVAL 74
Before any electrical connections can be made, covers have to be removed from the following equipment. (1)
Upmast Transceiver, or
(2)
Downmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism.
(3)
Soft Start Unit.
(4)
Optional Mains Isolator.
Upmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism 75
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
Downmast Transceiver 76
Release the six captive screws securing the cover to the Downmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
Soft Start Unit 77
Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the six captive screws.
Optional Mains Isolator 78
Open the mains isolator cover by releasing the captive screw.
PCB LOCATIONS AND CABLEFORM ROUTING 79
Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the upmast transceiver are shown on Figure 14. Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the turning mechanism are shown on Figure 15. Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the downmast transceiver are shown on Figure 16.
Page 2.32
Issue 4
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
CD-0211
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
RX MON PCB
COAX FROM 38-CORE CABLE
38-CORE
3PLK
TBI
3PLM
3PLB
CONTROL BOARD
PSU PLA
CONTROL BOARD
3PLM
CONTROL BOARD
MODULATOR PCB
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
COAX FROM 38-CORE CABLE
PSU
PSU PLA
TBI
CONTROL BOARD
3PLB
3PLM
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 14 - Upmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing
Page 2.33
Page 2.34
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
CD-0212
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
TBI
12-CORE CABLE
TBI
PLA
12-CORE CABLE
PLA
HEADING LINE PCB
TBI
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
PLA
HEADING LINE PCB
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 15 - Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2
RF CO-AX TO ANTENNA
RF HEAD
MODULATOR ON BACK OF ELECTRONICS PANEL
CONTROL BOARD
R x
PLB
M O N
PLK PLM
PSU PLA
CO-AXES FROM 38 CORE
3 CORE TO SOFT START UNIT (IF REQUIRED)
12 CORE TO ANTENNA GEARBOX
38 CORE TO DISPLAY OR SOFT START UNIT
CD-0213
Figure 16 - Downmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.35
KH1250 Chapter 2 WIRING DIAGRAMS 80
Electrical connections for upmast and downmast transceiver systems are detailed on the following wiring diagrams: (1)
Figure 17 - Motor Connection.
(2)
Figure 18 - Upmast Transceiver System Wiring.
(3)
Figure 19 - Downmast Transceiver System Wiring.
(4)
Figure 20 details the electrical connections for a soft start unit with an in-line power supply.
(5)
Figure 21 details the electrical connections for an interswitched system with an Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37) and a Soft Start Unit with an in-line power supply (CZZ-A14-2).
(6)
Figure 22 details the electrical connections for an interswitched system with a Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) and a Soft Start Unit with an in-line power supply (CZZ-A14-2).
(7)
Figure 23 details the electrical connections for a Nucleus 3 interswitched system with an Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37) using the Radar Interface Unit (NNR-A55) and a Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus link from the RIU to the display.
CAUTION There are two different types of Brown motor which may be used in the MkVI Turning Mechanism. Each type of motor has different connections. (Refer to Figure 17 for details). Take care to ensure that 3-phase motor connections are made correctly for the tyep of motor used. If the motor is identified as an “old style” Brown motor (see below), DO NOT use the wiring disgram on the inside of the cover, as this could damage the motor. The “old style” Brown motor MUST be wired as shown in Figure 17. If there is any doubt about which type of motor is being installed, assume that it is the “old style” type and wire it accordingly (see Figure 17). If the motor does not turn when wired as the “old style” motor, then fit the links as shown for the “new style” motor. 81
The type of motor can be identified as follows: (1)
First remove the wiring cover from the motor.
(2)
Old dtyle motors have wires U5, V5, W5 connected to connectors U1, V1, W1 respectively.
(3)
New style motors DO NOT have any wires marked U5, V5, W5.
Page 2.36
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2 CHECKS AFTER FITTING 82
The upmast transceiver/turning mechanism must be checked for security and freedom to rotate. The downmast transceiver must be checked for security, accessibility, and cabling
‘runs’. 83
Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated entry point and that screened cables are earthed to their respected units.
84
All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting, chafing or damage, and subsequently sealed with a mastic compound.
85
Commissioning instructions are described in Chapter 3.
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.37
KH1250 Chapter 2
TX MONITOR ARM (PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
U1 V1
FROM SOFT START UNIT
W1
MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
TO MONITOR ARM CONTROL BOARD PLM 1
TX MON SIG
2
TX MON 0V
U1
W2
U1
W2
V1
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
3 4
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
5 6
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
W2
U1
W2
V1
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1
CABLE GLAND
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
U1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
PLM
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
U1
W2
W5
U5 V1
V1 U2
U2
U5
V5
MONITOR ARM FITTING & CABLE RUN
W1
W1 W5
V2
V5 V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CD-4845
Figure 17 - Motor Connection
Page 2.38
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2) CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY SHIPS MAINS SINGLE PHASE 230V CABLE K
FILTER INPUT TB1
110/220V OUTPUT TB2
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL) 2-CORE POWER CABLE K
N L TB1
CABLE K
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
1 PHASE MAINS IN
1 2 3
1 2 3
BN or 1 BL or 2
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
N L TB2
NOTE 1 FROM DISPLAY TO TRANSCEIVER PLDA-2 or PLDB-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
TO TB2 SKP VIDEO SKO SYNC
WHITE COAX GREY COAX
INTERSWITCH PLT G/Bk SELECT DATA 1 W/Bn RADAR SOURCE 2 Y/Bn Tx CONTROL 3 S/B STATUS 1 4 S/G STATUS 2 5 G/B 0V 6
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PLTA-2 or PLTB-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SK8(10)
SK7(9)
SK2(5)
SK1(4)
PLDA-3 or PLDB-3 6 4 5 7 8 9
U1 U2 U3
LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
SEE INSERT A
1 +27V TO CONTACTOR 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 3 0V
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT (HRC-A9) Tx CONTROL PLV S Tx RUN 1 R/G Tx MUTE 2 B/Y MED PULSE 3 B/W LONG PULSE 4 R/Y TUNE 5 R/W TUNE INDICATOR 6 T or Lt/G READY 7 G/O AZIMUTH 8 9 B/Bk Rx MON 10 G/W HEADING LINE 11 12 13 R/B 0V 14
AERIAL MOTOR
TB
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
TB1
R B G
TO TB6
TB3
TB1
B G R
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT COAX (W)
TB6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO
0V 1 0V 2 0V 3 0V 4 0V 5 0V 6 +26V 7 +26V 8 +26V 9 +26V 10 +26V 11 +26V 12
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2 TB4
U1
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK W/V W/BN R/BK BN
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V Y B Y/V Y/BN O W G R
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK Y B W/V W/BN R/BK BN W G R
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
S/G B/O S/B
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V
Y/V Y/BN O
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
CONTROL BOARD LOCATION 3
PLB
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y R/B
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
S/B B/O S/G
Tx MON 0V Tx MON NEON SIG
6 5 4 3 2 1
B R
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1
W2
U5 V1
U2
V5 W1 V2
W5
PLK CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
COAX (W)
PLM
U1
5 4 3 2 1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
U1
V1
W2
U2
W1
W5
U5
V5 V2
COAX (S)
SYNC
COAX (S)
COAX'S W S
4 3 2 1
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
38-CORE CABLE (CABLE M) NOTES: 1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
CD-3844
Figure 18
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
Display to Dual Interswitch Unit to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 18
Page 2.39/40
KH1250 Chapter 2
MK6 GEARBOX (CAE-A42) (CAE-A41)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2)
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
CABLE K
FILTER INPUT TB1
110/220V OUTPUT TB2
2-CORE POWER
CABLE K
CABLE K
N L
N L
TB1
TB2
R or 1
B or 2 Y or 3
2 3 TB2
2
B or 2
3
Y or 3
B G
1 PHASE MAINS IN
BN or 1 BL or 2
1 2 3
4 5
4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
TO TB2
WHITE COAX
SK7(9)
SK8(10)
GREY COAX
SK1(4)
SK2(5)
COAX
SK3(6)
INTERSWITCH PLT G/Bk 1 SELECT DATA W/Bn 2 RADAR SOURCE Y/Bn 3 Tx CONTROL S/B STATUS 1 4 S/G 5 STATUS 2 G/B 6 0V
PLDA-3 or PLDB-3 6 4 5 7 8 9
B G R
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB6 1 2 3 4 5 6
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V
TB4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NOTES: 1) BLANKING IS USED ONLY IF 2 S-BAND OR 2 X-BAND TRANSMITTERS ARE USED 2) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
10 11 12
T or Lt/G B/BK
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
V/BK G/Y G/BK S/BN BN/BK G/B V P BK Y B Y/V W/V Y/BN W/BN O R/BK BN W G R
U1
W2
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
U1
U5
0V 0V 0V
V1
V5
V2
4 5
0V 0V 0V
W1
W5
W2
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
PLB
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y R/B
COAX (S)
FOR LONG CABLE RUNS LOW LOSS COAX TO BE USED IN PLACE OF 38 COAX TO DISPLAY
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX U2
1 2 3
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
U5 U2
U1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
LOCATION PLM 3 +27V 6 5 0V 4 AZ 3 HL 2 Tx MON 0V 1 Tx MON NEON SIG
PLK 5 4 3 2 1
CABLE E (12-CORE) BK W Y G B R
V2
W5
W1
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
U1
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V U1
W2
U5
CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
4 3 2 1
V5 V1
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
V1
COAX (W)
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
PLA
CONTROL BOARD
S
W5 W2
V1
U2
U2
U5
V5 V2
W1
W1
V2
V5
W5
V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
BN V BK
1 2 3 4
BN B R R B
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
}
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
W2
V1
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2
COAX'S W
Figure 19
U1
MK6 Tx DOWNMAST (CTX-A7)
B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W
S/G B/O S/B
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
R/B R/Y R/W
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
G/BK G/B BN/BK P V BK Y B W/V Y/V W/BN Y/BN R/BK O BN W G R
S/B B/O S/G
CD-3845
SEE INSERT A
V/BK
SYNC COAX (S) 38-CORE CABLE (CABLE M)
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
G/Y S/BN
10 11 12 VIDEO
V1 W1
A
7 8 9
COAX (W)
TB U1
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 0V
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AERIAL MOTOR
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) FROM CZZ-A14/2
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
+27V TO CONTACTOR
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
NOTE 2 FROM DISPLAY TO TRANSCEIVER PLDA-2 or PLDB-2 PLTA-2 or PLTB-2 1 1 2 2 3 3
Tx CONTROL PLV S 1 Tx RUN R/G 2 Tx MUTE B/Y 3 MED PULSE B/W 4 LONG PULSE R/Y 5 TUNE R/W 6 TUNE INDICATOR T or Lt/G 7 READY G/O 8 AZIMUTH 9 B/Bk Rx MON 10 G/W HEADING LINE 11 12 13 R/B 0V 14
BLANK (NOTE 1)
1
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
DISPLAY
VIDEO SCREEN VIDEO SYNC SYNC SCREEN
TB3
1
R
TO TB6 SHIPS MAINS SINGLE PHASE 230V
TB1 R or 1
Y G W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAFETY SWITCH POLE 1
CONT +ve CONTACTOR
SAFETY SWITCH POLE 2
+27V
HL PCB Tx MON 0V Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (0V) +27V AZ HL 0V
CABLE A (2-CORE) TO Tx MON ARM
Display to Dual Interswitch Unit to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Downmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 19
Page 2.41/42
KH1250 Chapter 2
CZZ - A14/2 TB1
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
{
3 PHASE SHIP’S SUPPLY
TB3
R or 1
1
1
R or 1
B or 2
2
2
B or 2
Y or 3
3
3
Y or 3
}
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
TB2 R B G CABLE K (2-CORE POWER) 1 PHASE MAINS IN
{
BN or 1 BL or 2
1
+27V TO CONTACTOR
2
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN
3
0V
L 24V N POWER E SUPPLY SET FOR + 220V OR - 110V INPUT
CABLE G (25 CORE) OR CABLE N (38 CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB4 0V
1
0V
2
0V
3
0V
4
0V
5
0V
6
+26V
7
+26V
8
+26V
9
+26V 10
R/B
TB5 1
R/Y
2
R/Y
R/W
3
R/W
G/Y S/BN G/B P
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V
BK W/V W/BN R/BK
Y B Y/V Y/BN
BN
O W
+26V 11
G
+26V 12
R
0V
R/B
TUNE TUNE IND MP
B/Y
4
B/Y
B/W
5
B/W
S
6
S
R/G
7
R/G
G/O
8
G/O
G/W
9
G/W
T or Lt/G
10
T or Lt/G
B/BK
11
B/BK
LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
12
B G R
TB6 1
S/G
2
B/O
3
S/B
CONTACTOR 0V +27V
CABLE N (38 CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
4 5 6 USE CABLE N (38 CORE) CABLE
7
BETWEEN THE SOFT START UNIT AND
8
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT
9
FOR CABLE RUNS OF UP TO 60 m
10 11
USE CABLE G (25 CORE) CABLE AND TWO
12
CABLE N (LOW LOSS COAXES) BETWEEN THE SOFT START UNIT AND
CO-AX (W)
VIDEO
CO-AX (W)
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT FOR CABLE RUNS GREATER THAN 60 m CO-AX (S)
SYNC
CO-AX (S)
CD-0235
Figure 20 - Soft Start Unit with In-Line Power Supply
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.43
KH1250 Chapter 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2.44
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2
MK6 Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2) CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
TB1
TB3
1 2 3
1 2 3
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
AERIAL MOTOR
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) FROM CZZ-A14/2
TB U1 V1 W1
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
SEE INSERT A
TB2 R B G
TO TB6
E.S.U (CZZ-A1)
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL) L N
Tx MAINS
Tx READY Tx RUN 0V Tx MUTE TUNE CONTROL OUT TUNE INDICATOR SHORT PULSE MEDIUM PULSE LONG PULSE VERY LONG PULSE Rx MONITOR Tx MONITOR SIGNAL Tx MONITOR 0V
HEADING LINE AZIMUTH PHASE 1 AZIMUTH PHASE 2 EARTH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4
CABLE K 2-CORE (POWER) 1 PHASE MAINS IN
BN or 1 BL or 2
T or Lt/G S R/B R/G
1 2 3
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
R/Y R/W CABLE M (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
B/Y B/W B/BK
*
TB5
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
G/W G/O
W VIDEO COAX S SYNC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A
+27V TO CONTACTOR CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 0V
TB4 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
G/Y V/BK S/BN G/BK G/B BN/BK P V BK Y B W/V Y/V W/BN Y/BN R/BK O BN W G R R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2 V/BK G/Y G/BK S/BN BN/BK G/B V P BK Y B Y/V W/V Y/BN W/BN O R/BK BN W G R
TO TB2
B G R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
*DIODES TO BE FITTED ON INSTALLATION
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
S/G B/O
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
S/B
CABLE N 38-CORE TO TRANSCEIVER
0V 0V
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y
COAX (W)
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U1
U5
V1
V5
V2
W1
W5
W2
U2
U5 U2
U1
0V 0V 0V
V5 V1
V2
+27V +27V +27V +27V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
+27V +27V
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
+27V
U1
W5
W1
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V U1
W2 V1
PLB
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U5
R/B
U2
W5 W2
V1
U2
U5
V5 W1
V2
W1
V2
V5
W5
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
LOCATION 3
Tx MON 0V Tx MON NEON SIG
PLM
6 5 4 3 2 1
B R
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
PLK
SYNC COAX (S)
U1
U2
0V 0V
CONTROL BOARD
VIDEO COAX (W)
W2
V1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
TB6
COAX
U1
PLA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
COAX (S) CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR
S/B B/O S/G
FOR LONG CABLE RUNS LOW LOSS COAX TO BE USED IN PLACE OF 38 COAX TO DISPLAY
COAX'S W S
4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
CD-3846
Figure 21
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
ESU (CZZ-A1) to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 21
Page 2.45/46
KH1250 Chapter 2 MK6 GEARBOX (CAE-A42) (CAE-A41)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2)
AERIAL MOTOR
}
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3 R B G
TO TB6
E.S.U (CZZ-A1) L N
Tx MAINS
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
T or Lt/G S R/B R/G R/Y R/W
SHORT PULSE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MEDIUM PULSE LONG PULSE VERY LONG PULSE Rx MONITOR
9 10 11 12
B/Y B/W
Tx MONITOR SIGNAL Tx MONITOR 0V
13 14
Tx READY Tx RUN 0V Tx MUTE TUNE CONTROL OUT TUNE INDICATOR
HEADING LINE AZIMUTH PHASE 1 AZIMUTH PHASE 2 EARTH
1 2 3
B/BK
CABLE K 2-CORE (POWER) 1 PHASE MAINS IN
} }
SYNC
BN or 1 BL or 2
1 2 3 TB2 1 2 3
*
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
G/W G/O
G/O
4
G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
COAX S COAX TO TB2
}
B G R
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TB6 1 2 3
1
R or 1
2
B or 2
3
Y or 3
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V
7 8 9 10 11 12
*DIODES TO BE FITTED ON INSTALLATION
TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL
}
SEE INSERT A
R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
S/G B/O S/B
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U1
W2
U1
W2
V1
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
V/BK G/Y G/BK S/BN BN/BK G/B V P BK Y B Y/V W/V Y/BN W/BN O R/BK BN W G R
PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
COAX (W) B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G
COAX (S)
S B/W B/Y
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE
COAX'S W S
LOCATION PLM 3 +27V 6 5 0V 4 AZ 3 HL 2 Tx MON 0V 1 Tx MON NEON SIG
U5
U2
V1
V5
V2
W1
W5
W2
CABLE E (12-CORE)
U5
Y G B R
V5
U2
V5 V1
V2
W5
W1
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V U1
U1
BK W
U5 U1
V1
V1
U2 V2
W1
W5 W2
W2
W1
U2 V2
U5
V5
W5
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
4 3 2 1
U1
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
CONTROL BOARD PLB 14 13 12
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
+27V +27V
S/B B/O S/G
PLK 5 4 3 2 1
V
BN V BK
1 2 3 4
BN
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
SAFETY SWITCH POLE 1 SAFETY SWITCH POLE 2
} }
CONT +ve CONTACTOR +27V
1 2
HL PCB Tx MON 0V Tx MON (SIG)
Y
3 4 5 6
Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (0V) +27V AZ
G W
7 8
HL 0V
B R R B
}
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
R/W R/Y R/B
Figure 22
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
MK6 Tx DOWNMAST (CTX-A7)
FOR LONG CABLE RUNS LOW LOSS COAX TO BE USED IN PLACE OF 38 COAX TO DISPLAY
CD-0256
TB U1 V1 W1
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
SYNC COAX (S)
}
FROM CZZ-A14/2
G/Y V/BK S/BN G/BK G/B BN/BK P V BK Y B W/V Y/V W/BN Y/BN R/BK O BN W G R R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S
0V
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO
3-CORE (POWER)
A TB4 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 5
COAX (W)
}
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
+27V TO CONTACTOR CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 0V
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
W VIDEO
TB3
TB1
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIP’S SUPPLY
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
ESU (CZZ-A1) to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Downmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 22
Page 2.47/48
KH1250 Chapter 2
PLC CAN HI CAN LO GND HEADING LINE AZIMUTH
GREY COAX
NOTE 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
BLACK WHITE BLUE ORANGE RED YELLOW GREEN
PLW +24V 1 (MOTOR) 2
SK7 - 12 SK19 - 24
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
SYNC OUT
SYNC IN
SK13 - 18
WHITE COAX GREY COAX CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
PLA-F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TB3
TB1 1 2 3
1 2 3
CAN ADAPTER PCB NNR-A981 RUN MUTE MP LP TUNE CONTROLS TUNE INDICATORS Tx READY AZIMUTH N/C Rx MON HEADING LINE N/C N/C GROUND
1 2 PLB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
S R/G B/Y B/W R/Y R/W T G/O B/Bk G/W
TO TB2
BN or 1 BL or 2
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
B G R
R/B
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT COAX (W)
COAX (S)
TB6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO
SYNC
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2 TB4 0V 1 0V 2 0V 3 0V 4 0V 5 0V 6 +26V 7 +26V 8 +26V 9 +26V 10 +26V 11 +26V 12
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK W/V W/BN R/BK BN
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V Y B Y/V Y/BN O W G R
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK Y B W/V W/BN R/BK BN W G R
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
S/G B/O S/B
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V
Y/V Y/BN O
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
Nucleus 3 Display to Radar Interface Unit to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
V2
4 3 2 1
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
Tx MON 0V Tx MON NEON SIG
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
PLM 6 5 4 3 2 1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
B R
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1
W2
U5 V1
U2
V5 W1 V2
W5
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
PLK CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
COAX (W) COAX'S W
U2
W1
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
LOCATION 3
S/B B/O S/G
COAX (S)
W2
V1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
PLB
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y R/B
U1
PLA
CONTROL BOARD
S
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
SEE INSERT A
U1
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
CD-4555
Figure 23
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
1 +27V TO CONTACTOR 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 3 0V
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
B/O G/Y
U1 U2 U3
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
MAINS RELAY
PLC
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
AERIAL MOTOR
TB
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES
TB1
R B G
TO TB6
1 PHASE MAINS IN
12
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY
SK1 - 6
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SKO SYNC
WHITE COAX
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
PLL-S
VIDEO
MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SKP
38-CORE CABLE
RIU NNR-A55
PLA
NUCLEUS 3 5000, 6000, 7000 INPUT PCB
COMPOSITE 12-CORE CABLE
5 4 3 2 1
U1
V1
W2
U2
W1
W5
U5
V5 V2
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
Figure 23
Page 2.49/50
KH1250 Chapter 3
CHAPTER 3 COMMISSIONING CONTENTS Paragraph 1 2 5 7 13 13 15 16 17 18 19
Introduction Power Supplies Links/Switch Settings Setting To Work Heading Line Adjustment General Checking the Alignment To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) To Correct an Error (Coarse Adjustment) Performance Monitoring Checks Setting-Up Procedure for Line Amplifiers RAN-A26 and RAN-A27-2
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4 5 6
Page Control Board CTX-A246 Factory Set Link/Switch Settings Modulator Board CTX-A247 Factory Set Switch Settings Power Unit CAE-202 Factory Set Switch Settings Rx Monitor Board CTX-A252 Factory Set Switch Settings Soft Start Unit Neon Indicator Voltage LED Functions
3.4 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.6
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4
Page Soft Start Unit: Link and Fuse Locations Transmission/Receiver Monitor Responses PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Circuit Diagram PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Location of Link 1
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
3.3 3.9 3.13/14 3.15/16
Page 3.1
KH1250 Chapter 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 3.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3
CHAPTER 3 COMMISSIONING INTRODUCTION 1
Interswitched equipments, or equipments interfaced with other radar equipments, are described in their respective Handbooks. CAUTION The transceiver RF output must not be operated into an open circuit or poorly matched feed cable. Damage to the RF head will result.
POWER SUPPLIES 2
Check that all cables have been installed and connected.
3
In the Soft Start Unit check that the thermal overload trip button is set.
4
In the Soft Start Unit check the voltage and fuse settings of the Power Supply (factory set to 220V input). For 110V operation, short out the link pins located beside C6 on the PSU.
LINKS
FUSE
C6
- - - L
N
E
R3**
R20**
R4**
R21** R22##
R5##
A2
A1
CD-1360
Figure 1 - Soft Start Unit: Link and Fuse Locations
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.3
KH1250 Chapter 3 LINK AND SWITCH SETTINGS 5
Ensure that the correct links are fitted to the Display Unit to enable it to work with the MkVI Transceiver.
6
Check that the MkVI Transceiver link/switches are set in accordance with Tables 1 to 4 and ensure that the turning mechanism safety switch is set to ON. TABLE 1: Control Board CTX-A246 Factory Set Link/Switch Settings LINK/SWITCH
NORMAL SETTING
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
LK1
(RUN)
A9
Run or Standby AE start
LK2
(NORM)
F2
High voltage soft start
LK3
(3000)
C4
SP 3000/1500 pps
LK4
(NORM)
E3
Norm/delayed prf (pre-pulse)
LK5
(750)
E5
MP 1500/750 pps
LK6*
(S)
F4
S/X heater current turndown
LK7
(INT)
C4/5
INT/EXT Trig
LK8
(NORM)
E6
H/L sense (trig) Enable
LK9
(GND)
B8
Jitter Enable
LK10
(180)
D7
90/180 secs warm-up time
LK11
B4
Ext Trig Format
LK12
D7
75W
A7
AE Switch
SW1
ON
Termination
* Set to (X) if a Mute Sector of 180º or more is set. TABLE 2: Modulator Board CTX-A247 Factory Set Switch Settings SWITCH
SW1
Page 3.4
NORMAL SETTING
ON
CIRCUIT REF
C7
FUNCTION
Recharge TRIG ON
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3 Table 3: Power Unit CAE-202 Factory Set Switch Settings LINK/SWITCH
NORMAL SETTING
SW1
ON
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
C5
High voltage ON/OFF
RV1
C7
Set SHORT PULSE HT Volts
RV2
C7
Set LONG PULSE HT Volts
RV3
B4
Set CURRENT TRIP
F4
Set HEATER VOLTS
LK
S
Table 4: Rx Monitor Board CTX-A252 Factory Set Switch Settings NOTE: The following are pre-set in the factory and only need to be changed to move the Rx Monitor fingers to a different part of the display (refer to Figure 1). SW1 Pole 4 is not used. SW1 POLE 1
SW1 POLE 2
SW1 POLE 3
FINGERS START
FINGERS STOP
ON
ON
OFF
70º
110º
ON
OFF
ON
127º
167º
OFF
ON
ON
260º
300º
Table 5: Soft Start Unit Neon Indicator Voltage MOTOR VOLTS
PROCEDURE
220 V NOM
Connect a wire link between TP3 and TP4 on PCB (located behind the heatsink). Connect a wire link across one of the two resistors mounted below the keyswitch.
380 TO 440V
No links required.
SETTING TO WORK 7
8
Carry out the following: (1)
Switch on the mains at the Isolators; Single phase for the Display, three phase for the aerial motor.
(2)
Set the Soft Start Unit switch to ON.
(3)
Set the display power switch to ON.
At the display ensure that the Transceiver is entered as MkVI in the installed equipment parameters.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.5
KH1250 Chapter 3 9
Verify that the display indicates TX READY after the warm up period of approximately 3 minutes.
10
Transceiver status is indicated by LEDs located on the power supply and control board. The LEDs may only be viewed with the transceiver cover removed (applies for both Upmast and Downmast versions). 11
On the Tx Power Supply (CAE-A202) all four green LEDs are illuminated.
12
Table 6 details the status of the LEDs on the Control Board (CTX-A246). Table 6: LED Functions
LED REFERENCE
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
COLOUR
STATUS
FUNCTION
D6
D5
GREEN
ON
+27V OK
D24
D5
GREEN
ON
PRF ON
D26*
D5
RED
OFF
MUTE OFF*
D4
D4
RED
OFF
HEATER CURRENT OK
D27
D4
GREEN
FLASHING
HEADING LINE INDICATOR
D36
D4
GREEN
ON AFTER 3 min
Tx READY
D17
D3
GREEN
ON
ON TUNE INDICATOR
* If D26 is illuminated, the Mute facility has been activated by one of the following: - No Heading Line - Mute signal ON - Rx Mon Mute active HEADING LINE ADJUSTMENT NOTE: This procedure is not required for Nucleus 3 Displays. Heading line errors are corrected by the Display ‘skew’ setting. General 13
This section provides procedures for the following: (1)
Checking the alignment of the Antenna and Heading Line and adjustment to give maximum bearing accuracy.
(2)
Checking the orientation of the monitor neon (if fitted) to give a satisfactory plume on the display (approximately 6nm long on the 12nm range). See Figure 1 for a typical response plume. NOTE When the plume has been checked, and it is established that the transmission shows maximum performance, the plume length should recorded for future reference. Page 3.6
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
KH1250 Chapter 3 14
During the Heading Line alignment procedure, the ship must be stationary on a known fixed heading and must have bearing information from the gyro compass. The ship should be alongside; less accurate results will be obtained if at anchor or at a buoy. Checking the Alignment 15
With the vessel stationary, proceed as follows: (1)
Switch ON the Display.
(2)
Select HEAD UP mode and a 6 mile range.
(3)
Select a stationary target which can be seen by the eye and which paints an echo on the screen.
(4)
Take a compass bearing of the target, and compare this with the bearing of the echo paint on the display. Note the degree and direction of discrepancy.
To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) 16
Any error is present in the Heading Line may be adjusted as follows: (1)
Switch the Gearbox Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Switch all supplies to STANDBY.
(3)
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
(4)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(5)
Slide the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(6)
Slacken the two pillars securing the HL PCB assembly.
(7)
Hold the antenna secure.
(8)
Move the pcb assembly the required amount to correct the mis-alignment. (Graduations on the bracket are at 2 degree intervals).
Note: Movement of the PCB in the direction of the aerial rotation will cause the bearing reading of the echo paint to move in a counter clockwise direction and vice versa. (9)
Tighten the two pillars to secure the HL PCB assembly.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis back to its normal position and secure with the six captive screws.
(11)
Refit the outer cover. DO NOT TIGHTEN.
(12)
Set the safety switch to ON.
(13)
Set the display to RUN and check the visual and PPI display bearing of the known target.
(14)
To make any further adjustment, repeat step (8)
(15)
Secure the rear cover.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.7
KH1250 Chapter 3 To Correct an Error (Coarse Adjustment) 17
The Heading Line Opto Disc is factory set, however if the fine adjustmet does not achieve the required correction, proceed as follows: (1)
Perform Paragraph 14, steps (1) to (5).
(2)
Disconnect the plug to the Heading Line PCB.
(3)
Remove the Heading Line PCB, ensuring that the opto sensor does not foul against the opto disc.
(4)
With the array facing forward, check that the leading edge of the heading line disc recess is in line with the array centre line.
(5)
The heading line disc recess may be corrected by slackening the three M4 retaining bolts. Do not remove the bolts completely.
(6)
Manually rotate the disc to the new position required and retighten the bolts.
(7)
Refit and reconnect the Heading Line PCB by sliding the opto device over the edge of the opto disc.
(8)
Refit the retaining pillars and reconnect the plug.
(9)
To check that the Heading Line is correct, refer to the Fine Adjustment Paragraph.
Page 3.8
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3 Performance Monitoring Checks 18
A performance monitor check is carried out to check the efficiency of the Transceiver magnetron and RF component.To carry out the performance monitor check, proceed as follows : (1)
Switch the display power to ON.
(2)
After waiting 3 minutes, the screen should indicate TX READY, select GO TO RUN and then select TX A.
(3)
Select the 12 nautical mile range and PERF.MON, (indicated on the top left hand side of the screen).
(4)
Using the VRM facility, measure the diameter of the radar fingers (Figure 2) that appear at the 130 to 160 degrees sector of the display.
(5)
For future reference, record the diameter in the operators record under the PERFORMANCE MONITOR heading. RX.... nm
(6)
Using the VRM facility, measure the plume (Figure 2), at a bearing of approximately 320 degrees and record as in (5) under TX.........nm. heading.
RAD 1
MP
MON
350
000
010
340
12
RANGE
020
330
GYRO 130 deg SPD16.5 kts L(M)
2
RINGS 030
N UP 320
CORR 1 VIDEO NORM
040
310
CD 050
300
HL 060
Tx MON
19.0 deg
STAB
SEA
SET
SEA
DRIFT
SEA
2.0 min
TCPA LIMIT
20.0 min
LONG 270
3 min (R/T)
CPA LIMIT
080 LAT
nom 6 miles
15 min (R/T)
TRAILS
070
Rx MON
280
000 deg
SMG
VECTOR
nom 6 miles only
290
CMG
050
00.45 N
001
23.45 E
090
100
260
110
250 120
240
VRM 7nm EBL 105.6
130
230 140
220
4 9 9 R5 S G
210
150 200 190
180
170
160
WAY Pt
NAV
PLOT
MAPS
TRIAL
CRT
CD-1361
Figure 2 - Typical Tx/Rx Monitor Responses
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.9
KH1250 Chapter 3 SETTING UP PROCEDURE FOR LINE AMPLIFIERS RAN-A26 AND RAN-A27-2 19
The setting up procedure requires the following: (1)
a square wave to be transmitted from RAN-A26.
(2)
the value of some of the components in Line Receiver RAN-A27 to be altered to restore the shape of the received waveform to a square wave.
Note: If the Line Receiver is being used with a Nucleus display, resistors R7 and R23 in the Line Receiver must be changed from 1K to 680R to allow it to operate from 12V. 20
Proceed as follows: (1)
Set Line Amp (RAN-A26) switches to ‘Test’ (SW1 set to Position 2, SW2 set to Position 1), to generate the square wave test signal. Monitor the outputs from both the Sync and Video sockets and adjust potentiometers RV1 (sync) and RV2 (video) to give an output of 5V peak at both.
(2)
In Line Receiver RAN-A27 connect a 10nF capacitor across position C5.
(3)
Connect an oscilloscope to the input side of resistor R9. The distorted test wave should have a rounded leading edge.
(4)
Connect another 10nF capacitor across the capacitor at position C5 and check the effect on the displayed waveform. If the waveform is degraded, reduce the value of the second capacitor to 5nF and re-check the waveform. Continue to increase or decrease the capacitance at C5 until a waveform with minimum distortion is achieved.
Note: The resultant waveform does not need to be too precise, as the signal is ‘fine tuned’ later in the procedure. (5)
Connect a 2.2nF capacitor across position C1 and a 22W resistor position R16, and check the effect on the displayed waveform. If the waveform is degraded, reduce the size of the capacitor until the waveform improves.
(6)
Using the same procedure as step (5), add capacitors across positions C2 and C4, to restore the leading edge of the test signal to a square wave (each capacitor should be smaller than the previous one in the chain). The process is designed to match the amplifier to the cable and the process of adding the extra capacitors ‘fine tunes’ the circuit. It is not necessary to have all the capacitors fitted if the best waveform is found without them.
(7)
Once the optimum waveform has been achieved, connect a 10nF capacitor across position C8 and connect the oscilloscope to the Line Receiver Sync output, at the top of R14. Monitor the test waveform.
(8)
Adjust RV1 to give an output of 5V.
(9)
To optimise the waveform, repeat the procedure decribed in step (4), but for position C8.
Page 3.10
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3 21
The Video driver circuit also requires setting-up. Normally, the same procedure used for the Sync driver setting-up will provide the required waveform. However, if this does not give a similar waveform, repeat steps (1) to (8) for the Video driver circuit, substituting the following components in the text: C1 = C12 C2 = C13 C3 = C14 22
C4 = C15 C8 = C19 RV1 = RV2
R9 = R25 R14 = R30 R16 = R32
On completion, return the switches in Line Amplifier RAN-A26 to the normal position.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.11
KH1250 Chapter 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 3.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3
Figure 3
Issue 4
In-Line PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Circuit Diagram
Figure 3
Page 3.13/14
KH1250 Chapter 3
Ensure that Link1 is fitted.
Figure 4
Issue 4
In-Line PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Location of Link 1
Figure 4
Page 3.15/16
KH1250 Chapter 4
CHAPTER 4 TECHNICAL INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Paragraph 1 4 8 9
Upmast Transceiver Downmast Transceiver Antenna Turning Mechanism Soft Start Unit
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6
Page Upmast Transceiver Block Diagram Upmast Transceiver System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 1) Upmast Transceiver System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 2) Downmast Transceiver Block Diagram Downmast Tx System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 1) Downmast Tx System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 2)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
4.5/6 4.7 4.8 4.9/10 4.11 4.12
Page 4.1
KH1250 Chapter 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 4
CHAPTER 4 TECHNICAL INTRODUCTION UPMAST TRANSCEIVER 1
The upmast transceiver is mounted in a fabricated enclosure, which also houses the Antenna Turning Mechanism. The enclosure has a front cover which can be removed to provide access to the AE motor. 2
The rear cover provides access to the RF head, electronics and cable terminations. The electronic chassis provides mounting for the Control PCB with its terminal strips, the Rx Monitor PCB, the Modulator PCB and power components. The chassis may be removed/hinged down to provide access to the modulator and RF head components. 3
A block diagram of the Upmast Transceiver is shown in Figure 1. A system interconnection diagram is shown on Figure 2, sheets 1 and 2.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER 4
The downmast transceiver comprises a sheet metal rear plate which is formed to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two ‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the rear plate to provide the bulkhead fixing points. 5
The main sub units are bolted to the rear plate. The PCBs are located on the electronic chassis. The electronic chassis has to be removed to gain access to the modulator and pulse transformer. 6
A sheet metal wrap-around cover, secured in position by six captive screws, provides access to the front and sides of the unit. Cable entry is at the bottom of the unit. An earth bonding point is situated on the top. 7
A block diagram of the Downmast Transceiver is shown in Figure 3. A system interconnection diagram is shown on Figure 4, sheets 1, 2 and 3.
ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 8
A separate Antenna Turning Mechanism is required when a Downmast Transceiver is used. The unit is based on the same gearbox as the Upmast Transceiver. The Antenna Turning Mechanism is available as 25 r.p.m. with a 3.9m antenna or as 40 r.p.m. (minimum) with a 2.8m antenna. SOFT START UNIT 9
The soft start unit comprises a sheet metal rear plate which is formed to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two ‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the rear plate to provide the bulkhead fixing points.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 4.3
KH1250 Chapter 4 10
The main sub units are bolted to the rear plate.
11
A sheet metal wrap-around cover is secured in position by six captive screws.
12
The RESET button for the Antenna Motor overload trip is located on the contactor, inside the unit.
Page 4.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 4 S-BAND ANTENNA Mk2 CAE-A36 OR CAE-A39 MONITOR ARM PART OF CAE-A38 (OPTIONAL) LOC. 11 TX. MON NEON
2 CORE CABLE A
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2 MOTOR PROTECTION & ISOLATION SWITCH
220/440V MOTOR
GEARBOX ROTATING JOINT
AZ/HL PCB LOC 9
DELAY
INLINE PSU
HEATSINK
PLB
PLH
NOT USED
PLC
4mm 3mm
MAGNETRON LOC.5
BRAID HEATSINK
RECEIVER LOC. 7
PLA
PLA
RX MONITOR LOC. 8
1 TB LOC. 1 VIDEO O/P
PLA TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 LOC. 6
PART OF 38 CORE CABLE
PLJ
PLC
SYNC. O/P
PLM
(NOT USED PRE. PULSE O/P)
CTX-A248 MODULATOR & POWER SUPPLY HV MON SUPPLY LOC. 4
TP's
HEATSINK
CTX-A246 CONTROL CIRCUITS Tx MON DETECTOR & POWER SUPPLY/SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION PANEL LOC.3
PLG
PLB
TERMS
PLD
PLA
PLK
(NOT USED EXT. TRIG. IN)
PLA
EXTERNAL SAFETY SWITCH LOC.1
RF HEAD CIRCULATOR LIMITER MIXER L.N.F.E. LOC. 5
HEATSINK
PLB
NOISE DIODE
PLB
PSU CAE-A202 LOC. 2
PLC
PLA
RF HEAD LOC. 5
PLC
PART OF CAE-A38 OPTIONAL
TB2
PLA
TB4
PLB
TB5,6
3 CORE POWER CABLE L
PLB
CABLE M
L N E
SOFT START LOC 10
PLC
1 PHASE MAINS FROM DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH
TRANSCEIVER CAE-A37 CAE-A45
TP's
3 PHASE MAINS IN FROM ISOLATOR
38 CORE FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
AERIAL START LOC 10
TB3 LOC 1
PLA
CONTACTOR TB1
PLJ
PLE
PLF
PLD
FAN
CD-3803
Figure 1
Issue 4
Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): System Block Diagram
Figure 1
Page 4.5/6
KH1250 Chapter 4
POWER SUPPLY CAE-A202 2PLA
FROM DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
MODULATOR CTX-A248
2PLC 0V -350V 0V +9.5V
4PLB
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
0V -350V 0V +9.5V
CURRENT PULSE
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
0V 1 -15V 2 3 +15V 4 0V 5 +27V 6 7 SPV 8 SOFT START 9 HV OFF 10
SAFETY SWITCH (TURNING MECH CHASSIS) FROM DISPLAY
FROM DISPLAY
3PLA 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SYNC (SIG) 1 0V 2
3PLC -150V MP RELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON-VE
1 2 3 +15V 4 5 0V 6 +27V +27V 7 8 SPV 0V 9 SOFT START HTR MON 10 HV OFF 11 12 0V -15V
3PLK
DUMMY TRIG 4 LINK 0V 1 CONT & VE Rx TRIG 2 CONTACTOR 0V 3 0V CSR2 TRIG 5 LINK 0V CSR1 TRIG 3PLB 0V 1 0V 2 TUNE 3 TUNE IND. 4 M.P. 5 L.P. 6 Tx RUN 7 8 MUTE 9 AZ 10 HL 11 Tx READY 12 Rx MON 13 14
BRAID
4PLC
(PART OF)
2PLB
0V
Y GN
MAGNETRON CTX - A309
TB1 2 SYNC 1 0V
}
TO DISPLAY
4PLA 5 10 11 3 7
-150V MP RELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON-VE
12 +27V 8 0V 9 HTR MON 1 4 6 8
4PLD 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DUMMY TRIG 0V Rx TRIG 0V CSR2 TRIG 0V CSR1 TRIG 0V
CD-1366
Figure 2 - Upmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 1)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 4.7
KH1250 Chapter 4
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
RECEIVER CTX-A297
(PART OF)
7PLA
3PLD +15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND. RX TRIG RX TRIG 0V LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V -15V TX MON PULSE +27V 1 NEON (SIG) LPVLP SP 2 NEON (0V) +6V
3 2 12 10 14 13
5 7
3 4 5 6
FOR PRE-PULSE OPTION
FOR EXT. TRIGGER OPTION
CD-1367
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6PLB
6PLJ
HL AZ 0V +27V
3PLG
4 6 5 1 2 3
3PLE +27V 1 FAN ON 2
+15V 0V PRF DELAY PRF LSP LMP 3PLF LLP RX MON 1 LVLP +27V 2 +15V 3 0V 4 -15V 5 AZ 6 HL 7 3PLH MON TRIG 8 1 +15V RX TRIG 0V 9 2 RX MUTE 10 3 EXT TRIG SYNC 11 4 EXT TRIG 12 5 3000Hz 6 0V
LNFE CAE-A217
TUNE SUPPLY CTX-A250
9PLA 7 6 8 5 1 2 3 4
7PLB 1 2 VIDEO 3 0V 4
-15V VIDEO 5 Tx MON PULSE 0V 6
TB1 3 VIDEO 4 0V
TO Rx MON
HL/AZ CAE-A180 HL AZ 0V +27V 0V TX MON (SIG) TX MON (SIG) 0V
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND Rx TRIG Rx TRIG 0V
}
3PLM FROM TX MON ARM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FAN
VARACTOR +VE 0V 0V TUNE LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V +12V +27V
}
1 2 3 4
5PLB 5 6 7 4 3 2 1
5PLA
0V 4 - 24V 0V +12V
IF 0V
COAX
6 4 8 1 9 11
SP +6V (NOT USED) VARACTOR +VE LP TUNE IND (NOT USED) NOISE IND (NOT USED) 7PLC
7PLD1
IF 0V
NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
7PLD2 NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
FROM RECEIVER PLB
Rx MONITOR CTX-A252 8PLB 1 2
VIDEO 0V
8PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MON 0V +27V +15V 0V -15V AZ HL RX TRIG 0V TX MUTE
8PLC DIODE DRIVE 0V
NOISE DIODE CAE-A213
(PART OF CIRCULATOR)
Figure 3 - Upmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 2) Page 4.8
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 4 S-BAND ANTENNA Mk2 CAE-A36 OR CAE-A39 MONITOR ARM PART OF CAE-A38 (OPTIONAL) LOC. 11 TX. MON NEON
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2
38 CORE FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
CABLE M
L N E
220/440V MOTOR
AZ/HL PCB LOC 9
GEARBOX ROTATING JOINT
EXTERNAL SAFETY SWITCH (TB1) LOC.1
DELAY
INLINE PSU
TB5,6
3 CORE POWER CABLE L
TB4
RF CO-AX
1 PHASE MAINS FROM DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH
SOFT START LOC 10
2 CORE CABLE A
TB1
MOTOR PROTECTION & ISOLATION SWITCH
3 PHASE MAINS IN FROM ISOLATOR
TB3 LOC 1
AERIAL START LOC 10
PLA
CONTACTOR TB1
TB2
TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42
PLB
PLA PLH NOT USED
PLC PLJ
PLE
PLF
MAGNETRON LOC.5
BRAID HEATSINK
PLA
PLA PLB
PLC
PLA PLB
RX MONITOR LOC. 8
1 TB LOC. 1 VIDEO O/P
PLA TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 LOC. 6
PART OF 38 CORE CABLE
PLJ
PLC
SYNC. O/P
PLM
(OPTION PRE. PULSE O/P)
4mm 3mm
HEATSINK
CTX-A246 CONTROL CIRCUITS Tx MON DETECTOR & POWER SUPPLY/SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION PANEL LOC.3
PLG
PLB (OPTION EXT. TRIG. IN)
TERMS
PLD
PLA
CTX-A248 MODULATOR & POWER SUPPLY HV MON SUPPLY LOC. 4
TP's
RECEIVER LOC. 7
PLB
HEATSINK
PLB
PLK
RF HEAD CIRCULATOR LIMITER MIXER L.N.F.E. LOC. 5
PLC
HEATSINK
NOISE DIODE
TP's
PLA
PSU CAE-A202 LOC. 2
PLC
RF HEAD LOC. 5
3 CORE CABLE B
38 CORE CABLE M
PART OF CAE-A38 OPTIONAL
12 CORE CABLE E
PLD
FAN
TRANSCEIVER CTX-A7
CD-3796
Figure 4
Issue 4
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): System Block Diagram
Figure 4
Page 4.9/10
KH1250 Chapter 4
POWER SUPPLY CAE-A202 2PLA
FROM DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
MODULATOR CTX-A248
2PLC
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
0V -350V 0V +9.5V
4PLB
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
0V -350V 0V +9.5V
CURRENT PULSE 0V
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
0V 1 -15V 2 3 +15V 4 0V 5 +27V 6 7 SPV 8 SOFT START 10 9 HV OFF
3PLA 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3PLC -150V MP RELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON-VE
1 2 3 +15V 4 5 0V 6 +27V +27V 7 8 SPV 0V 9 SOFT START HTR MON 10 HV OFF 11 12 0V -15V
BRAID
4PLC
(PART OF)
2PLB
Y GN
4PLA
SYNC (SIG) 1 0V 2
MAGNETRON CTX - A309
TB1 2 SYNC 1 0V
}
TO DISPLAY
5 -150V 10 MP RELAY 11 LP RELAY 3 HTR RELAY 7 MON-VE 12 +27V 8 0V 9 HTR MON 1 4 6 8
4PLD
3PLB
FROM DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V TUNE TUNE IND. M.P. L.P. Tx RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
DUMMY TRIG 0V Rx TRIG 0V CSR2 TRIG 0V CSR1 TRIG 0V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DUMMY TRIG 0V Rx TRIG 0V CSR2 TRIG 0V CSR1 TRIG 0V
CD-1365
Figure 5 - Downmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 1) Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 4.11
KH1250 Chapter 4
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
RECEIVER CTX-A297
(PART OF)
7PLA
3PLD
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND. RX TRIG RX TRIG 0V LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V
TO TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A42 OR CAE-A41
3PLK 2 3 4 1 5
CONTACTOR 0V LINK CONT +VE LINK
1 2 3 4 5 6
FOR EXT. TRIGGER OPTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LNFE CAE-A217
TUNE SUPPLY CTX-A250 6PLB
6PLJ 4 6 5 1 2 3
VARACTOR +VE 0V 0V TUNE LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V +12V +27V
3PLE +27V 1 FAN ON 2
7PLB 1 2 VIDEO 3 0V 4
TB1
}
3 VIDEO TO 4 0V DISPLAY
TO Rx MON
NEON (SIG) NEON (0V) HL AZ 0V +27V
+15V 0V PRF DELAY PRF LSP LMP LLP LVLP
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND Rx TRIG Rx TRIG 0V
5 VIDEO 5 7 -15V 0V 6 Tx MON PULSE
3PLM
3PLG FOR PRE-PULSE OPTION
+27V LPVLP SP +6V
3 2 12 10 14 13
}
TO SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14
-15V TX MON PULSE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
}
FAN
5PLB 5 6 7 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
0V 4 - 24V 0V +12V
5PLA IF 0V
6 4 8 1 9 11
COAX
SP +6V (NOT USED) VARACTOR +VE LP TUNE IND (NOT USED) NOISE IND (NOT USED) 7PLC
7PLD1
IF 0V
NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
7PLD2 NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
FROM RECEIVER PLB
Rx MONITOR CTX-A252 8PLB 1 2
8PLC
8PLA
3PLF
RX MON +27V +15V 0V -15V AZ HL 3PLH MON TRIG 1 +15V RX TRIG 0V 2 RX MUTE 3 EXT TRIG SYNC 4 EXT TRIG 5 3000Hz 6 0V
VIDEO 0V MON 0V +27V +15V 0V -15V AZ HL RX TRIG 0V TX MUTE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DIODE DRIVE 0V
NOISE DIODE CAE-A213
(PART OF CIRCULATOR)
TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A41 CAE-A42 CAE-A180 Tx MON (0V)
9PLA 1
Tx MON (SIG)
2
Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (0V)
3 4
+27V
5
AZ
6 7
HL PCB
HL
8
0V
}
}
TO Tx MONITOR ARM
TO TRANSCEIVER
SAFETY SWITCH CONT +ve
TB1 1
CONTACTOR
2
+27V
3
SW +27V
4
}
CD-1363
Figure 6 - Downmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 2)
Page 4.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
CHAPTER 5 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION CONTENTS Para 1 3 4 5 10 12 14 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 34 35 36 37 40 43 44 45 46 49 54 56 56 68 69 71 72 72 81
INTRODUCTION POWER UNIT CAE-A202 Functional Description Circuit Description Low Voltage Power Supplies (+15 V to -15 V) High Voltage Power Supply Voltage Control Shutdown and Overload Trip Soft Start Output CONTROL/TERMINALS PCB CTX-A246 Functional Description Circuit Description Magnetron Heater Timer 3kHz Oscillator 42Hz Oscillator and 3kHz Jitter Frequency Pulse Length Decoding Heater Current Sense Magnetron Heater Turndown MUTE Functions HL Sense AE Switch FAN ON Local Oscillator Voltage Pre-Pulse External Trigger Tx Monitor MODULATOR UNIT CTX-A247/248 Functional Description Circuit Description Charging Cycle Modulator Waveforms -150 V Supply for Tx Monitor Neon RECEIVER MONITOR CTX-A252 Functional Description Circuit Description Sector Enable Noise Level Measurement
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.1
KH1250 Chapter 5 CONTENTS (Continued) Para
88 89 92 93 97 100 103 105 106 108 109 112 113 121 122
TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 Functional Description Circuit Description HL PCB CAE-A180 Functional Description Circuit Description Azimuth Pulses Heading Line Pulses LOG RECEIVER ASSEMBLY CTX-A297 Functional Description Circuit Description RF HEAD Signal Paths High Power Low Power ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM SAFETY SWITCH SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/*
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4 5
Page LED Functions Test Point Functions Link Functions Modulator Test Points Switch SW1 Settings
5.10 5.10 5.11 5.13 5.16
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Page Power Unit CAE- A202 Block Diagram Power Unit CAE- A202 Circuit Diagram Control PCB CTX-A246 Block Diagram 1 Control PCB CTX-A246 Block Diagram 2 Control PCB CTX-A246 Circuit Diagram Sheet 1 Control PCB CTX-A246 Circuit Diagram Sheet 2 Modulator Unit Block Diagram Modulator Unit Circuit Diagram Receiver Monitor CTX-A252 Block Diagram Receiver Monitor CTX-A252 Circuit Diagram Tune Supply PCB CTX-A250 Circuit Diagram HL PCB CAE-A180 Circuit Diagram Log Receiver Assembly CTX-A297 Block Diagram Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14 Block Diagram Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14 Circuit Diagram
Page 5.2
5.23/24 5.25/26 5.27 5.29/30 5.31/32 5.33/34 5.35/36 5.37/38 5.39/40 5.41/42 5.43 5.45/46 5.47 5.48 5.49/50
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
CHAPTER 5 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION 1
This chapter provides functional and technical descriptions for the electronic units comprising the Mk VI S-Band Transceiver. The transceiver is used for both Upmast and Downmast installations. Upmast and Downmast Transceivers comprise the following electronic units:
2
(1)
Power Unit CAE-A202.
(2)
Control/Terminals PCB CTX-A246.
(3)
Modulator Unit CTX-A248.
(4)
Rx Monitor PCB CTX-A252 (optional) and Noise Diode with Mount.
(5)
Tune Supply PCB CTX-A250.
(6)
HL/AZ PCB CAE-A180 (part of the Mechanism for a Downmast System).
(7)
Assembly of True Log Receiver CTX-A297.
(8)
Magnetron and RF Head with Low Noise Front End.
Antenna
Turning
A brief description is also provided for the following: (1)
Antenna Turning Mechanism.
(2)
Safety Switch.
(3)
Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/* (which also forms part of the system).
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.3
KH1250 Chapter 5 POWER UNIT CAE-A202 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 1) 3
The Power Unit CAE-A202 comprises PCB CTX-A283 mounted on a chassis. A +27 V dc input to the power unit is normally provided from a display. The power unit derives all the supplies required by the transceiver from the +27 V dc input, using switching regulators. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 2) 4
The following paragraphs provide a circuit description for the Power Unit.
Low Voltage Power Supplies (+15 V, +9.5 V and -15 V) 5
The +15 V dc supply is derived by applying +27 V dc to a switching regulator, comprising IC2, L1 and their associated components. Overcurrent protection is provided by self resetting fuse FS1. The fuse resets, provided the fault is cleared, when the PSU is switched off and then on. The +15 V dc supply output is via PLB pin 4. The +15 V dc supply is also used to derive the +9.5V and -15 V dc supplies. 6
The +9.5 V dc supply required to power the S-Band magnetron heaters is derived by applying +15 V dc to a switching regulator, comprising IC3, L2 and their associated components. The +9.5 V dc supply output is at PLC pin 4 via self resetting fuse FS2. The fuse resets when the PSU is switched off and then on, provided the fault is cleared. 7
The +8.5 V dc supply required to power the X-Band magnetron heaters is achieved by shorting out R2 in the IC3 feedback loop.
8
The -15 V dc supply is derived by applying +15 V dc to a switching regulator comprising IC4 and L3 and their associated components. The -15 V dc supply output is via PLB pin 2.
9
Low voltage supply indication is provided by the following LEDs: (1)
D18-A, +15 V.
(2)
D18-B, +9.5 V.
(3)
D17-A, +27 V HV Supply (S1) ON.
(4)
D17-B, -15 V.
Page 5.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 High Voltage Power Supply 10
The HT supply of -350 V for the 30 kW modulator is produced from a Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS), comprising control and drive circuit IC5, HEXFETs TR1 and TR2, Transformer T1, diodes D6 to 9, choke L7 and capacitor C31. The 30kHz pulse width modulation frequency is controlled by R15, R16 and C33. Capacitors C24, C25 and C27 are used to limit Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) across diodes D6 to 9. Spike suppression is provided by voltage dependent resistor R20. 11
Operation of Switch S1 disconnects the 27 V supply from transformer T1, so that the control circuit may be tested with the high voltage section disabled.
Voltage Control 12
The output voltage across C31 is divided by the resistor network R18, R21 and R9 relative to the +5 V dc reference supply. The voltage dropped across R9 is compared with the output of RV2 at pins 1 and 2 of pulse width modulator IC5. The pulse width modulator adjusts the pulse width drive to TR1 and TR2 to provide the stabilised output voltage of -350 V. 13
The relative amplitude of the short pulse current compared to the medium and long pulse currents may be adjusted using RV1. With the short pulse selected, R11 changes the reference voltage applied to RV2 when D4 is held at +15 V dc. This provides a lower output voltage of approximately -320 V for a short pulse. Shutdown and Overload Trip 14
The SMPS is shut down, during magnetron warm up and at standby, by TR3 which drives pin 10 of IC5 high.
15
Any over-currents in TR1 and TR2 are sensed by the voltage developed across the current sensing resistor R26. This voltage is compared with the current trip voltage set by RV3. An over-current condition triggers IC6 and repeatedly shuts down the SMPS for a period of 0.5 s until the fault recovers or is rectified. Soft Start Output 16
When IC5 pin 10 goes low, capacitor C35 slowly charges, gradually increasing the pulse width at IC5 pins 11 and 14. This soft start function limits the rate at which the output current and voltage are applied to C31. The output voltage from comparator IC8 pin 7 is held high until C35 is charged to approximately 3.8 V at which point the pin 7 goes low to activate the charge trigger circuit on the control board. This ensures that the full working voltage is available for the modulator before the Pulse Forming Network can be charged up.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.5
KH1250 Chapter 5 CONTROL PCB CTX-A246 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figures 3 and 4) 17
External cables from the Display/Interswitch Box, Tx Monitor Arm and the Scanner (Downmast Systems only) are terminated on the Control/Terminals PCB. The PCB receives standby, run, pulse length, tune, Rx monitor and Tx monitor commands from the display and converts them to the correct format to produce the triggers for the rest of the transceiver units. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figures 5 and 6) 18
The following paragraphs provide a circuit description for the Control/Terminals PCB.
Magnetron Heater Timer 19
The 90/180 second timer circuit, comprising IC24, IC25, IC26, IC27, IC28 and their associated components, is initialised at power-up. The timer circuit inhibits all transmit triggering functions to allow sufficient time for the magnetron valve to ‘warm up’. 20
At switch on, reset pin 6 of IC27 is held in reset mode until power up reset gate IC6C is triggered low. Output pin 8 of the single cycle timer IC27 is low. The frequency of oscillator IC24 is set by R76, RV4, R82 and C43 and is used to trigger programmable divider IC26. A four channel change-over switch IC25 acts on the data pins of IC26 to set the division rate. The A inputs of IC25 are active at switch on, giving the correct ratio for 180 or 90 second timing depending on the setting of Link 10. 21
Once output pin 8 of IC27 timer has switched to high, capacitor C44 is charged via D34 and R77. The next time the supply is turned off, D34 is reverse biased, causing C44 to slowly discharge via R84, R81 and the input current of Schmitt trigger IC28A. The four channel change-over switch, IC25, is switched to B inputs and R85 connected across IC24 timing resistors, for a period equal to the time C44 has high enough potential to trigger IC28A. Provided that power down is not more than three seconds this mechanism allows the timer to reduce the warm up time to less than five seconds. If power down is greater than three seconds the timer runs for the full 90 or 180 seconds, depending on the setting of Link 10. Green LED D36 illuminates at the end of the warm-up period. 3kHz Oscillator 22
Timer circuit IC23 provides the basic 3kHz oscillator frequency to produce the required pulse repetition frequency. Diode D31 ensures that the output is an approximate square
wave.
Page 5.6
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 42 Hz Oscillator and 3kHz Jitter Frequency 23
Timer circuit IC22 provides the basic 42Hz oscillator frequency to control the latching sequences. Diode D32 ensures that the output is an approximate square wave. The ramp waveform of the timer circuit at RV1 is fed via Link 9 and C41 to the 3kHz oscillator IC23, to produce a jitter frequency on top of the 3kHz. Pulse Length Decoding 24
Two encoded pulse length input lines MP and LP enter the board via PLB pins 4 and 5 respectively and are decoded by IC9C, IC11B, IC11C, IC18A and TR9 to give four control lines as follows:
25
(1)
Short.
(2)
Medium.
(3)
Long.
(4)
Long Pulse Low p.r.f.
The four outputs are fed to state latch IC16 and exclusive OR gates IC8A and IC12A to D. The associated outputs from IC16 are also fed to IC8A and IC12.
26
At switch on IC16 is cleared by holding pin 1 low, via the power-up reset circuit comprising R30, C15, D10, IC6C and IC4B. When C15 is charged enough to trigger IC6C, IC16 pin 1 is enabled with the correct output information. 27
If an input is different to an output (e.g., as pulse length is changed) the appropriate exclusive OR gate is switched to provide a positive output at TP4. This positive input to IC14A pin 5 starts a trigger sequence in IC14A and IC14B which shuts down the charge triggers, via IC10A, and applies 3kHz trigger pulses to IC16 latch for 1.5 timing cycles of the 42Hz oscillator (approximately 36 ms). 28
The triggers to IC16 change the latch output to match the new input data. The 36 ms shut down of the charge trigger allows time for any relays to change over in the modulator. Discharge triggers for the modulator run all the time, ensuring that the modulator pulse forming network is discharged before the relays have time to respond. 29
The latching cycle and CSR1 triggers are inhibited, via TR5 and D18, if the +27 V supply is low (approximately +20 V) or if the HVPS (-350 V) soft start output is high from the power supply. Link 2 overrides the input for testing purposes. 30
The pulse length outputs from IC16 latch are used to program p.r.f. divider IC17. The output can be set to 3000, 1500, 750 or 375 pulses per second. Links 3 and 5 allow a choice of p.r.f. to be set for short and medium pulse. 31
When Link 4 is set to NORM, IC17 triggers the 10 m s monostable IC15, which switches driver TR10 (CSR2 Trigger Pulse Output).
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.7
KH1250 Chapter 5 32
IC17 is also used to trigger dummy sync monostable IC5, which is enabled by RUN, MUTE, Timer and Mag Heater Current Sense inputs via IC7A, B and C. The output from IC5 is used to trigger TR6 and TR4 drivers to give low impedance sync pulses. The dummy trigger pulses are OR gated with the modulator trigger pulse on the modulator to keep the display triggered for Sector Mute. The two pulses are OR gated on the Control PCB to give the Rx monitoring at PLF-8. 33
IC17 also triggers re-triggerable monostable IC20A to illuminate green LED D24.
Heater Current Sense 34
The input voltage (HTR MON) from the modulator circuit enters the board at PLC pin 10 and is the input to comparator IC3. If the input voltage is low, IC3 output is low, causing the HV output, CSR1 triggers and dummy sync pulses to be inhibited. Magnetron Heater Turndown 35
The LP selector line from IC16 latch is gated by IC18B with the Run input to turn on TR11, which operates the modulator circuit heater relay RLC. With Link 6 set to ‘X’, TR11 will always be off. Turndown only works for S-Band. MUTE Functions 36
There are three MUTE inputs as follows: (1)
Sector Mute (Mute from the display).
(2)
Mute from the Receiver Monitor Circuit - to enable the receiver monitor sector to stand out when selected.
(3)
Mute as a result of loss of the HL input due to no aerial rotation.
HL Sense 37
HL pulses from the HL PCB are routed with the AZ pulses, via the Control PCB. HL pulses are used to trigger 10s monostable IC21A. IC21A, Pin 7 (Q output) is low and D29 reversed, provided HL pulses occur more frequently than every 10s. If the HL pulses stop, D29 goes high, muting the other circuit and turning green LED D27 off. 38
Green LED D27 flashes for 0.4 seconds for every HL pulse to indicate that the HL is triggering via IC21B. With Link 8 set to the TEST position 42 Hz is fed to IC21A trigger, to operate the HL sense circuit for board test. 39
If a mute condition occurs Red LED D26 illuminates for the muted period.
AE Switch 40
The three phase contactor in the Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*) is operated by the AE switch circuit, via PLK.
Page 5.8
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 41
The +27V is fed to the contactor, via resetable fuse FS1 and the external safety switch. The return is controlled on the PCB by S1 and TR2.
42
With LK1 in the ‘FIXED’ position, the AE rotates all the time the transceiver is switched on. With LK1 in the ‘RUN’ position the AE rotates when the transceiver is set to RUN and stops when set to STANDBY. FAN ON 43
TR7 switches the fan on when the transceiver is set to run.
Local Oscillator Voltage 44
IC2 is an adjustable positive voltage regulator configured to provide a +9V output. R10 is connected in parallel with R11 to produce +12V when an S Band local oscillator is connected to PLD (Receiver) cableform. Pre-Pulse 45
A pre-pulse is provided by setting LK4 to the DELAY position and connecting a delay circuit to PLG.
External Trigger 46
An external trigger is provided by setting LK7 to EXT and connecting an external trigger to PLH.
47
A simple circuit comprising R19, D42 and D43 is fitted. LK11 may be set to provide a direct input or a protected input. LK12 enables the 75W termination.
48
A positive pulse (EXT TRIG SYNC) enters the board at PLH pin 3 to reset counter IC17 so that EXT TRIGGER PULSES can be pre-synchronized.
Tx Monitor 49
PLM pins 1 and 2 provide connection for the neon signal from the optional Tx Monitor arm.
50
With the monitor turned OFF, PLB-11 is open circuit, TR25 is OFF and TR24 is ON, causing a short circuit across the neon.
51
With the monitor turned ON, PLB-11 is at -12V, TR25 is ON and TR24 is OFF. The neon is partially ionized from the -350V supply and the current limiting resistors on the modulator board, which is connected to TR24 collector via C71 and R121. With no neon connected the voltage is limited to -150V by a voltage regulator diode on the modulator board. 52
The struck neon voltage is approximately 56V to 70V with a current of 0.6mA through it.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.9
KH1250 Chapter 5 53
Capacitor C71 holds the supply voltage stable. The microwave energy from the AE passing over the neon, causes the neon to strike harder and consequently the current to increase. This current increase changes the voltage across R121 producing a 1 to 2V positive pulse on top of the -56V at TR24 collector. Capacitor C72 ac couples TR24 collector to the input of comparator IC31A. The positive comparator reference input is the voltage across D59. When a positive input signal from R121 exceeds the voltage at D59, IC31A output goes from positive to 0V for the signal duration. The output of IC31A is fed via PLD-11 into the output circuit of the receiver to produce a Tx monitor plume. TABLE 1: LED Functions LED REFERENCE
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
COLOUR
D4
D6
Heater current OFF
RED
D6
D5
+27V OK
GREEN
D17
D3
Tune Indicator
GREEN
D24
D5
prf ON
GREEN
D26
D5
Mute ON
RED
D27
D6
HL I/P OK
GREEN
D36
D6
Tx Ready
GREEN
TABLE 2: Test Point Functions TEST POINT
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
TP1
D1
Dummy Trig
TP2
F3
Charge S-D
Charge trig shutdown
TP3
F2
CSR1 Trig
Recharging trig
TP4
D6
Change sensor
State change
TP5
D2
CSR2 Trig
Magnetron trig
TP6
C3
Prf
Divider o/p
TP7
E4
Run
TP8
A5
Trig Sync
EXT trig synchronizing pulse
TP9
C5
Latch Clock
State latch clock
TP10
C4
Trig In
prf divider input
TP11
F3
Mute
Mute and AZ mute
TP12
E6
42Hz
TP13
A3
3kHz
TP14
F7
Tx Ready
End of warm-up time
TP15
E6
LF Osc
Timer circuit
TP16
D8
HF Osc
Timer circuit
TP17
N/A
TP18
G4
AZ In
AZ input from opto PCB
Page 5.10
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 TABLE 2: Test Point Functions (Continued) TEST POINT
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
TP19
N/A
TP20
G4
HL In
HL input from opto PCB
TP21
G9
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP22
A9
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP23
A1
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP24
E6
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP25
B2
Rx Mon
Rx Mon enable
TP26
C1
Neon Sig
TP27
A2
Tx Mon
Tx Mon O/p pulses
TABLE 3: Link Functions LINK
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
LK1
A9
Run or Standby AE start
LK2
F2
High voltage soft start
LK3
C4
SP 3000/1500 pps
LK4
E3
Norm/delayed prf (pre-pulse)
LK5
E5
MP 1500/750 pps
LK6
F4
S/X heater current turndown
LK7
C4
INT/EXT Trig
LK8
E6
H/L (sense - trig) Enable
LK9
B8
Jitter Enable
LK10
D7
90/180 secs warm-up time
LK11
B4
Ext Trig Format
LK12
D7
75W
Termination
MODULATOR UNIT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 7) 54
The modulator unit comprises chassis CTX-A248 and PCB CTX-A247. This equipment utilises a line type modulator circuit where the Pulse Forming Network (PFN) capacitors are charged to double the HT supply by the resonance of the charging choke with the PFN capacitance. The line impedance is matched to the magnetron impedance by the pulse transformer. 55
The modulator circuit comprises a Charging Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) CSR1, Charging Choke L5, Saturable Reactor SL1, Pulse Forming Network, Pulse Transformer T4, Discharge SCR CSR2, and “Tail Biter” SL2 which is used for short pulses. Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.11
KH1250 Chapter 5 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 8) Charging Cycle 56
Charging SCR CSR1 applies -350V to the resonant circuit formed by L5 and PFN capacitors, when triggered by a positive pulse from T3. When the charging current falls to zero, diode D7 prevents the PFN discharging and the line remains charged at double the supply voltage. Switch S1 may be used to switch off CSR1 triggers. 57
When CSR2 is turned ON by the positive mod trigger pulse from isolating trigger transformer T2, SL1 holds the main discharge current off. Capacitor C10 is discharged into CSR2, via resistor R12, to ensure CSR2 is correctly primed before the main current, in excess of 200A, is switched by Saturable Reactor SL1. 58
When SL1 switches, the energy stored in the PFN is discharged via Pulse Transformer T4 into the magnetron. Any residual energy at the end of the pulse causes the current to reverse flow through SL1, via D12 and ‘reset’ the magnetic flux ready for the next transmission. Voltage reversal on Pulse Transformer T4 primary winding is prevented by D11. 59
Mismatch of the PFN and Pulse Transformer T4 to the magnetron causes overswing voltage and current in the secondary winding of T4. This is dissipated via R10, D14, D15 and D16 in the overswing unit. 60
The secondary winding of T4 is also shunted by C12, C13 and C14, located in the overswing unit, increasing the rate of rise of current into the magnetron.
61
The PFN comprises capacitors and inductors connected together as a lumped element transmission line. Relays RLA and RLB select the components required for each of the three pulse lengths. RLA also switches in Saturable Reactor SL2, to divert the tail current from the magnetron when in the short pulse mode. 62
The discharge SCR CSR2 is triggered at the required PRF via Isolating Transformer T2. CSR2 cathode and gate are at a high negative voltage (700 V).
63
The magnetron heater current is fed via R4, R5 and T4 secondary windings to allow the magnetron terminals to swing to -8.5 kV.
64
Resistor R4 is shorted out, except when LP and RUN modes are selected for an S-Band magnetron. The heater volts to the magnetron are then reduced to compensate for the heat generated by the magnetron operation. 65
The dc voltage drop across R5 is fed to the control board to indicate that heater current is flowing. If no current is flowing the control board inhibits the charging pulses. C9 across R5 provides an ac short circuit for pulses generated at R5. 66
The discharge current of the PFN through T1 primary winding, produces a Sync Pulse for the Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) and to trigger the Display.
Page 5.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 67
Dummy sync pulses are diode gated with transmission sync pulses by D5 and D4. Dummy sync pulses are generated by the Control Board if the Sector Mute function is in
use. Modulator Waveforms 68
Modulator Waveforms are as follows: (1)
Modulator Trigger (CSR2) Input to T2 is a positive pulse at the PRF. +15V
10m s
0V
CD-1374
(2)
Modulator SCR (Cathode) CSR2
0V
-700V PULSE INTERVAL
CSR1 TRIGGERED PFN DISCHARGED TO MAGNETRON
CD-1375
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.13
KH1250 Chapter 5 (3)
Charging Voltage (CSR1 end of the charging choke L5) Low charging current (40mA) to prevent main CSR2 latching on. 0V
-350V
-700V CD-1376
-150V Supply for Tx Monitor Neon 69
This supply is derived on the Modulator PCB using a 150V diode regulator, R14 and R16 connected to the -350V dc supply.
70
Sensing resistors R11, R15, and R17 and diode D8 may be used for monitoring the -350V supply, e.g. as an alternative HVPS control route. TABLE 4: Modulator Test Points TEST POINT
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
TP1
B1
Dummy Trigger Pulse I/P from Control PCB
TP2
A1
Sync Pulse and Dummy Trig Pulse O/P to Display
TP3
B1
Rx Trigger Pulse. AFC Trigger Pulse to Receiver
TP4
B1
CSR2 Trigger. -ve going pulse from Control PCB
TP5
B5
CSR1 Trigger. -ve going pulse from Control PCB
TP6
H4
Heater Voltage Supply
TP7
G7
Heater Current Monitor Voltage
TP8
C4
-350V Supply Input from Power Supply Unit
TP9
H3
Scope/Meter Earth
TP10
A6
Scope/Meter Earth
Page 5.14
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
RECEIVER MONITOR CTX-A252 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 9) 71
The Rx Monitor circuit utilises a noise diode fitted in the receiver waveguide branch of the RF Head Circulator. When enabled the noise diode is switched on for a sector of the Display Azimuth. The ratio of the Receiver noise to the noise diode output is compared using a ramp, which provides a time related noise sector. As the noise ratio reduces the noise sector becomes a shorter radius on the display. The noise sector is split into ‘fingers’ to enable it to stand out from the Tx Monitor plume and any land masses. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 10) Sector Enable 72
The sector enable section of the circuit produces a pulse to enable the noise diode to be switched ON.
73
Azimuth and Heading Line pulse inputs to the board are shaped by schmitt trigger input gate IC3, to prevent erratic triggering.
74
Counters IC4 and 6 are cascaded and clocked by the azimuth pulses. The Heading Line pulse resets the counters to zero each aerial revolution. The parallel outputs of the counters are fed to the ‘A’ inputs of comparators IC1, 5, 7, 8. 75
SW1 and hard wired inputs set the B inputs of IC1 and 5. When the A inputs match the ‘B’ inputs, the A=B pulse is activated to produce the ‘Start Sector’ pulse. IC7 and 8 produce the ‘Stop Sector’ in a similar manner. 76
The actual sector produced is approximately 40º wide and is moved to pre-determined positions relative to the Heading Line, using SW1.
77
The ‘START SECTOR’ Pulse triggers the set input of ‘D’ type flip-flop IC2A and the ‘STOP’ Pulse triggers the reset input. The set pulse must occur before the reset pulse. The input to IC2A is inhibited by TR3 ‘ON’ when the monitor function is OFF. 78
The ‘SECTOR ENABLE’ Pulse from IC2A is used as the Reset input for IC2B. IC2B is triggered by the Azimuth Divider and toggles to split the 40º pulse into approximately 3.5º ON/OFF sections. 79
The ‘SECTOR ENABLE’ Pulse is buffered by IC10A as an output to the control board to give a transmission mute signal for the sector period.
80
The ‘WEDGE ENABLE’ output of IC2B is diode gated into IC12A to enable the noise diode circuit.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.15
KH1250 Chapter 5 Noise Level Measurement 81
The Rx and Dummy trigger inputs from the Modulator, via the Control PCB, are voltage limited by R21, D12 and D13, to trigger 150m s monostable IC12A. When IC12A is enabled by the MON ON and sector enable circuits, its output pin 6 and IC10E output go high, switching off opto IC11A emitter current. This causes IC11B to turn OFF, enabling C12 to charge up via the constant current circuit of TR1 and op-amp IC14A and produce a linear ramp at TP6 (IC9 pin 2). 82
The pulse at IC12A pin 6 also switches on the noise diode via TR4 and TR2. The video signal from the Receiver is connected to PLB. The noise signal is filtered from the video by C16, L1, C17, L2, C18 and R29. The filter output is connected, via R32, to IC9 pin 3 and analog switch IC13. IC13 is switched OFF for the 150m s period of IC12A, stopping the large video signals at close range from influencing the noise floor level integrator, which comprises R27 and C15. 83
With IC13 enabled, the noise floor level integrator charges C12, which has a time constant of 20 ms. The level at C12 is buffered by IC14A to give the same voltage at a higher current capability. Using floating output opto device IC11A enables this voltage level to be the starting level of the ramp. When IC11B switches OFF the capacitor charges from dc level at IC14A output to the level set by the noise diode output at IC9 pin 3. Resistors R32 and R31 ensure that IC9 pin 3 is more positive than pin 2, to prevent noise switching IC9 at low signal levels. 84
When the ramp and noise diode signal level cross, IC9 pin 7 goes high, producing a negative pulse at IC10C pin 6. This resets Monostable IC12A causing the noise diode to switch off and IC11B to switch ON, discharging C12. 85
The time for which the noise diode is on determines the radius of the ‘fingers’ on the display. As the noise floor increases or the Rx noise ratio reduces, the ramp time reduces and the finger radius become shorter. A good plume will be 8 Nm, reducing by 2 Nm for 10 dB loss of performance. 86
The settings of SW1 set the start of the 40º sector as follows: TABLE 5: Switch SW1 Settings Pole 1
87
Pole 2
Pole 3
Start Angle (degrees)
OFF
ON
ON
260
ON
OFF
ON
127
ON
ON
OFF
70
Link LK1 provides selection of either +15 V or +27 V for the noise diode drive. The link is normally set to +15 V.
Page 5.16
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 88
This board is used to dc offset the Receiver AFC tuned output voltage (approximately 5.5V) to the voltage required to tune the Low Noise Front End (approximately 12V).
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 11) 89
The 20V supply for IC3 is derived by regulating the + 27 V input supply using D1.
90
IC3 is connected as a unity gain buffer so that the original receive circuit is not loaded. The output level of IC3 is the reference level of the adjustable voltage regulator IC1. The resultant output level is used as the tune supply for the LNFE via PLB-2. 91
PLJ pins 1 and 5 are connected to the Control PCB to set the LO supply regulator to +12V. HL PCB CAE-A180
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 92
Heading Line and Azimuth data is produced by interrupting two opto coupler devices with a slotted disk mounted on the antenna final drive shaft.
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 12) 93
The scanner unit is fitted with a slotted disk to give azimuth pulses from a ring of 180 slots and Heading Line from a single slot.
94
The PCB contains two opto coupler devices IC1 and IC2 to read the slots.
95
The ICs are powered by 12V, derived from the +27V supply using voltage regulator diode D2 and resistor R1. D1 provides reverse polarity protection.
96
The opto emitters IC1A and IC2A are connected in series and via R2 to the 12V supply to give a constant emitter current.
Azimuth Pulses 97
Opto emitter IC1 scans each of the 180 slots on the slotted disk. Output pin 4 of IC1 is high for a slot and goes low when interrupted.
98
When the output goes low, TR1 switches ON to produce a positive pulse at its collector.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.17
KH1250 Chapter 5 99
Capacitor C4 and resistor R7 provide ac coupling to PLA-4. Capacitor C3 and resistor R5 provide Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) suppression and short circuit protection.
Heading Line Pulses 100
Opto emitter IC2 scans the single slot. Output pin 4 of IC2 is high for the slot and low when interrupted. As the output goes high at the start of the slot, TR3 and TR2 switch
ON. 101
Capacitor C6 and resistor R13 ac couple the output to PLA-3. Capacitor C5 and resistor R11 provide RFI suppression and short circuit protection.
102
The +27V supply input and AZ/HL outputs are connected to the Transceiver Control PCB SKM. LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 13) 103
The Receiver comprises a logarithmic IF amplifier, Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) circuitry and tuning indicator circuitry.
104
Received radar returns are mixed in the RF head with the local oscillator output to provide a 60 MHz Intermediate Frequency (IF) which is applied to the receiver input
SKC. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 105
For a full technical description, layout and parts list, refer to Annex A. RF HEAD
106
The RF Head comprises the following: (1)
30kW ‘S’ Band Magnetron
(2)
Ferrite Circulator
(3)
Pulse Limiter
(4)
Low Noise Front End (LNFE)
107
The Low Noise Front End combines an RF amplifier, balanced mixer, electronically tuned local oscillator and IF head amplifier. Therefore, there is no means to mechanically tune the local oscillator, or to replace mixer crystals.
Page 5.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 SIGNAL PATHS 108
There are two types of signal path: (1)
High Power
(2)
Low Power
High Power 109
The modulator provides a high voltage low impedance pulse to drive the magnetron. Typical pulse conditions for the magnetron are as follows: (1)
Short Pulse : 30 to 60ns at 5 A (peak)
(2)
Medium Pulse : 220 to 300ns at 7 to 8 A (peak)
(3)
Long Pulse : 850 to 1000ns at 7.5 to 9 A (flat top)
110
The magnetron energy is fed into port 2 of the circulator, and due to the rotational properties of the circulator, emerges at port 3 and out of the rotating joint or RF co-axial cable to the antenna. 111
A small amount of the magnetron energy leaks across the ferrite junction and into the pulse limiter. The limiter in turn limits this energy to a safe level for the low noise front end to use as a tune signal. Low Power 112
Signals which are target returns are received by the antenna and are fed to port 3 of the circulator, via the rotating joint. The signals emerge at port 1, and are then fed to the pulse limiter. These signals are normally of low amplitude and will not be limited by the pulse limiter. The limited signals are amplified by the LNFE, mixed, and then down converted to 60MHz, to interface with the main IF receiver. ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 113
This unit is used for both Upmast and Downmast Transceiver installations. Two versions are provided (1)
25rpm
(2)
40rpm
114
The 25 rpm and 40 rpm versions are fitted with different motors.
115
The basic unit contains the Antenna Motor, Gearbox, RF Rotating Joint and Mount for the Antenna.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.19
KH1250 Chapter 5 116
A slotted disc on the final drive provides 180 azimuth pulses and a heading line pulse per revolution of the antenna.
117
The HL PCB (CAE-A180) is mounted so that the slotted disc rotates within the opto coupler slots on the PCB.
118
The PCB is fitted to an adjustable mounting bracket assembly. Loosening the mounting pillars allows the assembly to be moved positive or negative six degrees for fine heading line adjustment. The slotted disc can be rotated if the fine adjustment is not enough. 119
For Downmast Transceiver installations, a semi-rigid co-axial cable is connected to the rotating joint, via an access hole fitted with a seal.
120
For Upmast Transceivers, the casing also contains the RF head and electronic units. The access hole is fitted with a bung. SAFETY SWITCH
121
An ON/OFF switch is located by the cable entries on the outside of the case provides: (1)
Switching for the motor.
(2)
Control of the supply voltage to the HL PCB, so that the Transmitter mutes when there is no heading line pulse (Downmast Transceivers only).
(3)
Control of the High Voltage Power Supply enable line (Upmast Transceivers only). SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14 (/2) (Figures 14 and 15)
122
The soft start unit comprises a three phase contactor, thermal overload, three sets of power resistors and a controlling PCB. At switch on, the contactor coil is energised via the transceiver Control PCB CTX-A246. The coil current is fed through the thermal overload switch to the contactor coil, which turns ON. The three phase supply to the motor passes through the current limiting resistor chain to reduce the motor start torque. 123
As the contactor switches on, its auxiliary contact connects the coil supply voltage to IC1 on the Control PCB, providing a 1.5 s delay at switch on.
124
At the end of the 1.5 s delay, the output from IC1 goes low, causing transistor TR1 to switch off, transistor TR2 to turn on and Relays RLB, RLC and RLD to energise. The relays short out the resistor chain to apply full current to the motor. 125
The CZZ-A14/2 version of the Soft Start Unit, used for interswitched installations, or installations with 60m+ cable runs, is provided with a mains power supply and terminal blocks for use as an in-line power unit.
Page 5.20
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 126
The neon indicators for the three phase supply are provided with series resistors which may be shorted out to allow for different motor voltages.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.21
KH1250 Chapter 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
+27V TO CONTROL BOARD +15V TO CONTROL BOARD GREEN LED D18-A
FILTER C19, L4, C2 +27V dc
GREEN LED D18-B
FS4 5A
POWER IN RF1 FILTER L5, C21
27V FLT 1
SWITCHING REGULATOR IC2, L1
FS1 +15V 3A
SWITCHING REGULATOR IC3, L2
LK1
HV ON/OFF SW1
SWITCHING REGULATOR IC4, L3
+9.5V MAG. HEATERS TO MODULATOR
X S
GREEN LED D17-A
FS2 2.5A
FILTER L5, C46
GREEN LED D17-B
FS3 0.3A
-15V TO CONTROL BOARD
-350V SENSING FEEDBACK FROM CONTROL BOARD
SPV
TRIM SP VOLTS RV1
SWITCH MODE CONTROLLER IC5 SENSE V
SET VOLTS RV2
VOLTAGE REF FROM IC1
POWER SWITCHES TR1, TR2
SET V
POWER TRANSFORMER T1 27V IN -350 V OUT (1400 V PEAK)
SHUTDOWN
BRIDGE RECTIFIER WITH RFI CAPACITORS & SURGE SUPPRESSOR D6-9, C24, C25, C27, C28, R20
SMOOTHING CHOKE & CAPACITOR
-350V TO MODULATOR
L1, C31
CURRENT SENSE R26
FROM CONTROL BOARD
HV OFF
HV SWITCH CIRCUIT TR3
SHUTDOWN OR GATE D13, D15
CURRENT TRIP IC6, IC7
SOFT START SENSE CIRCUIT
SET CURRENT TRIP LEVEL RV3
CD-1377
Figure 1 Issue 4
SOFT START (INHIBIT TO CONTROL BOARD)
Power Unit CAE-A202: Block Diagram
Figure 1 Page 5.23/24
KH1250 Chapter 5
C48 100uF 25V
+15V PLB-4
C44 100NF
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES TP2
TP1 HEATSINK +27FILT1
5 C1 470uF 63V
C2 100NF
2
VIN VSW 4 MAX724 IC2 VC COM FB 1
+15V C5 470uF 25V
R40 2K7 C3 100NF
1nF R7 2K2
C18 1nF
5
FS1
13k C13
MBR745 D2
C15 2n2F
3A
47uH R1
3 R5 2K7
HEATSINK
L1
C4 470uF 25V
VIN VSW MAX724 IC3 VC COM FB
2
3 R4 2K7
C14 2n2F
MARL D18-A
L2
4
47uH
1
MBR745 D3
2.5A
+9V5 C6 1nF
R2 1K
LK1
+9V5
FS2
C7 100NF
C8 470uF 25V
R3
PLC-4 L3 50uH
MARL D18-B
5K6
R6 2K2
MAG HTR
R41 1K5
5
VIN
VSW MAX724 IC4 VC COM FB 3
2
C17 1nF
C45 10OnF
4
C16 4u7F 25V
C12 100NF
PSU INPUT (22 TO 27V DC)
R46 R43 2K7
D1 BYV10-60
R47 4K7
C47 10NF
L9
L5
T5A
+27V IN
FS4
R49 V33 ZA5
C21 100nF
HV ON/OFF
47uH
R10 4K7
PLB-8
1N916 D4
R11
C42 10UF 16V
R9 4K7
3
SET HT VOLTS RV2
22K
BZY79C3V3
TR3 BC547B
D14 R28 4K7
SWITCH MODE CONTROLLER
R14 4K7
R15 22K
R16 100
16 2 1 6 7 5 8
Vref +Vin +INP Vc -INP OUTB RT OUTA DIS COMP CT GND S/ST S/DWN
MARL D17-A
R8 220
13 15 14 11 9 12 10
TP5
BZT03 C15V D5
C23 100UF 25V
SG3525AN
10K
C33 2200PF
R23 4K7
R42 4K7
RV1 200K
C29 10uF 16V
TP7
S1
C22 4700UF 63V
R50 V33 ZA1
5K
R24
-15V PLB-2
FS3
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES
+27FILT1 +27V
SPV
HVOFF PLB-10
0.3A
TP4
PLA
TP6
MARL D17-B
47K
220uH 14KL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
C46 100uF 25V
24K
1
R48 1K8
R44 43K
R45
HEATSINK D IRF540
R12 10K
BZT03 C82V D10
L6 R17 22K
IC5
C34 1UF
R19 56K
C35 1UF 35V
TR1
S
HEATSINK D IRF540
R22 10K
L8
HT SHUTDOWN TP9
BAT85
TR2
2 BYV27100 D11
C28 470PF 1000V R20 VDR Z21L -821
BZT03 C82V D12
G
FERRITE BEAD
3
C41 47UF 63V
C32 100NF
D6-9 BYW96E
C27 470PF 1000V
7 8
14
C25 470PF 1000V
1 4
T1
TP8
C24 470PF 1000V
2
15 16
C26 4.7NF 1000V
G
FERRITE BEAD
C30 100NF
17
R13 4R7
R18 330K
C31 33UF 450V 4KL
R21 390K
L7
-VE350V
17mH +9V5
S
D13
1 2 3 4
TO MODULATOR
PLC BAT85 D15
R25 33K
C43 2N2F
R26 0.1
C36 10NF
R27 8K2
10KL HT SHUTDOWN TIMER
R29
R32 10K SET CURRENT TRIP
RV3
R33
5K
8K2
C37 1NF
220
5 6 8 3 2
-
7 311 + IC7 1 4 -15V
R31 1M
R30 22K 2 3
8
4
IC6 7555 1 5
L4 330uH
6 7 C38 100NF 63V
+27V
C19 100nF C39 1UF 35V
C20 100nF
TO CONTROL BOARD
PLB
+15V
C40
TP11
TP10
0V 1 -15V 2 3 +15V 4 0V 5 +27VFILT2 6 7 SPV 8 SOFTSTART 9 HVOFF 10
22NF 1N916
R35
D16
820K
R34 2K2
5 6 8 3
R36
2
15K
-
7 311 + IC8 1 4
TP12
SOFTSTART PLB-9
R37 47K
CD-1386
Figure 2
Issue 4
-15V
Power Unit CAE-A202: Circuit Diagram
Figure 2
Page 5.25/26
KH1250 Chapter 5
180 90 SEC LK10
WARM-UP TIMER 180, 90, 3 SECONDS IC24, 25, 26, 27 RV4 TIMER SET
POWER ON RESET (SHEET 2)
3 SECOND SELECT
TX READY TO DISPLAY
PSU INTERRUPT SENSE C44, IC28A, B
HEATER 1 SENSE IC3
HTR I MON FROM MODULATOR
HEADING LINE FROM GEARBOX
HV OFF GATING IC7A, B, C
HEADING LINE SENSE IC21A & LK8 OVERRIDE 42Hz
HV OFF TO POWER UNIT
DUMMY SYNC GATE IC7C MUTE OR GATE D25, D29, D39
TO DUMMY TRIG PULSE GENERATOR (SHEET 2) TO CHARGE SHUTDOWN GATE (SHEET 2)
MUTE 1 FROM DISPLAY Rx MON MUTE +24 V
AE MOTOR CONTACTOR SWITCH TR2 WITH LK1 SELECTED
FAN ON TR7
RUN From Display
FROM RF HEAD TO RECEIVER
FS1 0.3A
TO SOFT START UNIT VIA Tx/Rx SAFETY SWITCH FROM SOFT START UNIT
TO FAN
L.O. +ve SELECT L.O. 9/12V
+15V
LOCAL OSCILLATOR REGULATOR IC2 (ADJUSTABLE)
R11
R10
SET VOLTAGE RESISTORS
CD-1378
Figure 3 - Control PCB CTX-A246: Block Diagram (Sheet 1)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.27
KH1250 Chapter 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5.28
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
TX MONITOR BLOCK ON SWITCH TR25, TR24
RX MON ON (FROM DISPLAY) NEON (SIG) TO MONITOR ARM
SENSE RESISTOR R121
-150V FROM MODULATOR
AC COUPLING C72
COMPARATOR IC13A
TX MON PULSE TO RECEIVER
STORAGE CAPACITOR C71
PULSE LENGTH/PRF SWITCHING BLOCK SOFT START FROM MODULATOR
STATE COMPARATOR IC8, 12
SOFT START GATE & LK2 IC9A
LATCH ENABLE GATING IC7, 10, 14 42Hz
MP LP
PULSE LENGTH DECODE CIRCUIT IC9, 11, 18, TP9
BANDWIDTH SWITCHING IC9D, TR12
MUTE GATE (SHEET 1)
RECEIVER
CHARGE SHUTDOWN GATE IC9B, 11A
CHARGE DELAY TIMER IC5
CSR1 TR1G DRIVER TR8
CSR1 TRIG TO MODULATOR
TRIG MONO IC15
CSR2 TR1G DRIVER TR10
CSR2 TRIG TO MODULATOR
DUMMY TRIG. PULSE GENERATOR IC5
DUMMY TRIG DRIVER TR4
3KHz
PRF DIVIDER IC17 LK3, 5
STATE LATCH IC16
PRE-PULSE LK4 PLG
PRF
PRE-PULSE OPTION
POWER ON RESET
DUMMY SYNC GATE (SHEET1)
WARM-UP TIMER SHEET 1
RUN
DUMMY TRIG TO MODULATOR
Rx TRIG FROM MODULATOR Rx MON TRIG GATE D40, 41
MAG HEATER RELAY DRIVE IC18, TR11 LK6
HEATER RELAY
Rx TRIG TO Rx MON TRIG TO Rx MONITOR TO MODULATOR
EXT TRIG. SYNC EXT TRIG.
CD-1379
Figure 4 Issue 4
TRIG SELECT LK7, 11, 12
42 Hz OSC IC22, IC22
3 kHz OSC IC23
JITTER ENABLE LK9, RV1
Control PCB CTX-A246: Block Diagram (Sheet 2)
Figure 4 Page 5.29/30
KH1250 Chapter 5 +15V
+27V
5KL
S1 +15V
T O R E C E I V E R
16NH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3KL 1 2 OV 3
C47 100NF
SIG
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND RX TRIG RX TRIG 0V LO+VE SELECT LO9/12V
R3
D1 LM317T O/P IC2 ADJ
I/P PLC-15 PLC-16
LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
C2 100NF
R10
R11 150
R12 680
R19 1K
HTR MON
AE ON RUN
TR5 BC557B
6K8 BZX79 18V D5
-15V
MV52 GREEN 1N916 D6
BD675 TR2
D7
R29 2K7
R6 470
R8 15K
PLC-3
TR3 BC547B
PLC-10
R4 22k
R7 12k
R13 22K
C45 100NF
R23 1K
3
-
2
+
40106
R28
7
311
MV55A RED D4
IC3
7555 RS Vcc 8 TR OP 3 DIS CV 5 THR 0V 1 IC5
4 2 7 6
HTR I SENSE
R17 C4
R25
TR6 BC637
1K
100PF
R27 680
TP1
TR4 BC638
470
C5 2U2 35V
R26 75
1N916 D8
C7 10NF
C8 470PF
+15V
120
6N8
DUMMYSYNC +15V
R22 2K2
-15V
IN916 D2
R14 10K
C6 100NF TR7 BC637
4K7
R9
+15V R15 22K
MPRELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON -V
R5 100
+15V
HTR OFF
20NH -150V [2] 1 2 3 4 5 6 +27V +27V 7 8 9 HTRMON 10 11 12 DUMMYTRIG 13 DUMTR OV 14 RX TRIG 15 RXTR 0V 16 CSR2 TRIG 17 CSR2 TR 0V 18 CSR1 TRIG 19 CSR1 TR 0V 20
+15V
C3
R24 220
FAN ON PLE-2
TO SOFT START UNIT
PLK
C1 100NF
1 4
+15V
1 2 3 4 5
R90 22K
+15V
5 6 8
1N916 D3
14 IC6A 1 2
TR4 +15V
1 IC4A R16 2 22K 4049
3
R21 100K
LPRELAY
CONT+VE CONTACTOR
2
0.3A
AE SWITCH
LK1
FIXED
+15V
+15V
R20
+27V
+27V LPVLP SP +6V
R1 47K
+27V
390 R18 15K
-15V TX MON PULSE [2]
PLC-2
TR1 BC547B
22K
PLJ RXTRIG RXTRIG 0V
MP RELAY
BYV27100
+15V RX TRIG O/P
FS1
1
CONTACTOR
+27V PLD (RX)
L1 1 2 100uH
R87 470R
F R O M P O W E R U N I T
10KL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C53 100nF
HV OFF SOFT START SPV
C10 100UF 50V
C9 100NF
C13 100NF
C54 100nF
C55 100nF
R30 470K
STATE CHANGE SENSOR
5
IC6C
D I S P L A Y
R40 47K
R X M O N
+15V 4081 IC18A 3
40174 D0 Q0 D1 Q1 D2 Q2 D3 Q3 D4 Q4 D5 Q5 CLR CK IC16
2 5 7 10 12 15 16
LSP LMP LLP LVLP
6 5 4 3
6 5
IC14A 40106 11
R36 22K
42HZ
C21 10NF
IC18B
R53 10K
C50 100nF
LK6 'X'
+15V
1500 +15V
10
R58
D25 1N916
10K
-15V
D18 IN916
R45 100K
R46 100K
R47 100K
IC18C
10
R52
DUMMY TRIG PLC-13
100NF
1OK
4071 12 13 IC9D
R55 100K
3 4 5
R60
R61
47R
1M
1 2 C RC VDD 16 6 A1 4538 Q Q 7 A0 IC21A
13 12
R49 68R
4049 11 5
4
R56 22K
TR12 BC557B
4K7
+15V
R68
D29
4K7
15 14 13 C RC 10 R Q 12 A1 4538 11 A0 Q 9
NORM LK8
H/L
MUTE ON
MV52 GREEN D27
TEST
42HZ
470R R76 D60 22K RV4
TIMER ADJ 20K 1N916 D38
IN916 D37 R82 6K8
C40 100NF
R128 HF OSC 4 7 6 2
7555 8 RS Vcc 3 DIS OP THR CV 5 1 TR 0V IC24
TP16 180SEC LK10 90SEC C42 10NF
C43 100NF
R85 6K8
C56 2n2F
6 7 4 5 2 3 15 1 9 14
4019 A0 B0 Q0 A1 B1 Q1 A2 Q2 B2 Q3 A3 B3 SA SB IC25
IC10B
+15V
16 10 11 12 13
180/90 OR 10SEC SELECT
+15V
PRF TP6 NORM
R39 9K1
C26
LK4
4 2 7 6
1NF
DELAY
C22 10uF 50V
C23 100UF 25V
7555 RS Vcc 8 TR OP 3 DIS CV 5 THR 0V 1 IC15
PLC-19
CSR1 TR 0V
PLC-20
TP5
R37 470
C24 470NF
C25
R42 4K7
C28 10NF
C27 680PF
CSR2 TRIG
100NF
R41 27R
C29 1NF
TR10 BC637
PLC-17
D19 BYV27- 100 CSR2TR 0V
PLC-18
BYV27- 100 D44
1N916 D21
PREPULSE +15V
8NH C30
+15V 1 0V 2 PRF 3 DELAY PRF 4 LSP 5 LMP 6 LLP 7 LVLP 8
100NF
+15V 3 4 5
R48
PRF
100K
1 2 C RC R VDD 16 Q 6 A1 4538 7 A0 Q
MV52 GREEN D24 R50 2K2
3
1 4049 2 EXT TRIGGER
IC19A +15V
IC20A
TP8
TRIG SYNC
6NH +15V 1 2 EXT TRIG SYNC 3 EXT TRIG 4 3000HZ 5 0V 6
R54
EXTB +15V BYV27100 D42
TP10 TRIG IN
C46 330pF
EXTA
LK11
PLH
R91 OPEN
BYV27100 D43
330R
LK12
3K3
3KHZ TP13
INT EXT
75
R92 75R
R89
42HZ
MV55A RED D26
LK7
+15V
12 IC4E R70 20K
R69 18K
JITTER SET RV1
90/180 SEC TIMER
PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDER
CSR1 TRIG
+27V
TP13
IC4F
4526 16 CF PE DP0 12 DP1 '0' DP2 DP3 INH MR CK IC26
+15V
4
R74 5K6
50K
13 3 5 11 14 2 4 10 6
1N916 D13
1NF
10K
TP12
+15V
C19 10NF
C20 10NF
R64 2K2
4049 11
15
TR8 BC638
4K7 C16
8
IC6D
11
8 3 5 1
C12 100UF 25V
C11 470NF
1N916 D11 R32
LPVLP
LATCH CLOCK
R65 2K2
4049 14
4 2 7 6
TP3
PLD-14
IC21B
1 +27V 2 FAN ON +15V
40106 9
+15V
470K
4
IC9B
7555 RS Vcc TR OP DIS CV THR 0V IC13
R57 22K
R63
47R C34 1UF 35V
PLC +15V
4011
5 6
+15V C31 2.2NF
PLA-1
R33 680
2NH
PLE (FAN)
5 6
PLG
+15V
1N9I6
HV OFF
R31 8K2
4071
42HZ TP12 R62
R
R73 +27V
2 1
MUTE/AZ
+15V
R71 22K
4011 IC10A 3
TP2
+15V
C33 10UF 25V
1N916 D30
R88 1K
10 IC4D
CHARGE TRIG
+15V 4001 IC11A 3
14
TP11
+15V
R66
4526 CF VDD 16 PE DP0 12 DP1 '0' DP2 DP3 INH MR CK IC17
TR11 BC547B
22K HEATER TURNDOWN
+15V
1N916 D28
13 3 5 11 14 2 4 10 6
HTR RELAY PLC-4
TP9
D39
C35
9
M O D U L A T O R
+15V
3KHZ
D20 IN916
LK5 750
14
4081 12 13 IC7D
IC14B
4081
R59 47K
RX TRIG PLC-15
6
MUTE/AZ 4013 8 S Q 9 D 10 R 11 Q
PRF DIVIDER
3000 1500 750 375
1500
IC19B
H/L SENSING BYV27100
4 8 9
+15V 'S'
1N916
4049
4049
CHARGE TRIG S/D
IC6E
TP12
IN916
LK3
D22 IN916
MAG HEATER VOLTS TURNDOWN
4081
1K
12NH 1 RX MON[1][2] 2 +27V 3 +15V 4 0V 5 -15V 6 AZ [2] 7 HL [1][2] 8 MONTRIG 9 RX TRIG 0V RXMUTE 10 11 12
10
CHARGE SHUTDOWN
+15V
4013 14 S D Q 1 R Q 2
3000
STATE LATCH
14
1 2
R51
D41
4
IC11B
10
IC11C
R44 47K
RUN TP7
D40 BYV27100
4001
5 6
C32 100nF
IC7C
PLA-2
1 2
STATE CHANGE
D23
PLF
T O F A N
3 4 6 11 13 14 1 9
4001
10K
+27V
T O
IC12D 11
TEST
D15 1N916
R35 22K
10
IC9C
8 9
PLB
4081
8 9
+15V
4071 3 IC9A
4071
8 9
R43
4070
TP4
D16
10K
C49 100nF
4081 3
7
SOFT START
14
2 1
4070 1N916 IC12A 3 D12 4070 1N916 6 5 IC12B 4 D14 4070 1N916 9 8 IC12C 10 12 13
R34 22K
C48 100nF
IC7A
LK2
14
1 2
RESET IC27-6
TR9 BC557B
MV52 D17
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP TXRUN MUTE AZ [2] HL[1][2] TXRDY RXMON
14
1 2
NORM
D9
TUNE IND
F R O M
4
IC7B
+15V
R86 100K
+15V
IC4B
PULSE LENGTH DECODING
R38
4070 1N916 IC8A 3
4
+15V
-15V
14
4049 6
POWER-UP RESET
1 2 100uH
14KL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
+15V
4081
+15V 2 1
C18 100UF 25V
L3
PLA
1N916 D10 40106 5
C15 100NF
C14 100UF 25V
C17 100NF
5 6
C51 100UF 25V
IC4C
+15V
1 L2 2 100uH
+27V(IN) 0V +15V(IN) +6V -15V(IN) 0V
C52 100NF
T O
LFOSC TP15
RESET IC6C-6
R75 68K
+15V 4541 1 RTC 14 VDD 2 CTC Q 8 3 RS 5 ARST 6 MR 10 MODE 9 Q/ QS 12 A 13 B IC27 SINGLE CYCLE TIMER
TIMER TP14
1N916 D33
R81
TX READY
PSU INTERRUPT RESET +15V 1
14 IC28A 2
220K R84 1M
40106 C44 22uF 25V
42Hz ADJ
7555 RS Vcc OP DIS THR CV 0V TR IC22
C36 100NF
8 3 5 1
C38 1UF 35V
R67 22K
R72 18K C37 100NF
RV3 20K
3KHz ADJ
BAT85 D31
4 7 6 2
7555 RS Vcc DIS OP THR CV TR 0V IC23
8 3 5 1
3KHZ
C39 10NF
+15V
1N916 D34 R77 6K8
RV2 20K
BAT85 D32
4 7 6 2
40106 3
4
R80 22K
MV52 GREEN D36 R79 1K2
42HZOSC
ON BZX79 4V7 D35
OFF
3KHZ OSC
C41 LK9 220NF
R78 1K
IC28B R83 4K7
TR13 BC547B
330HZ OSC
CD-4590
Figure 5 Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
Control PCB CTX-A246: Circuit Diagram (Sheet 1)
Figure 5 Page 5.31/32
KH1250 Chapter 5
+15V
C73 100UF 25V
C74 10NF
C76 100UF 25V
C77 10NF
TP25 1 PLB-11
-15V
NEON SIG
TO OPTO pcb
1
NEON SIG
2
NEON 0V
3
HL [1]
4
AZ [1]
1N916
R120
D50
10K
TP20
TP18
1
1
1
TR25 BC638 TR24 MPSA92
R127 10K
AZ IN
TP26 6KL TO TX MON ARM
HL IN
RX MON [1]
R119 2K2
-15V
5 6
PLC-1
+27V
R121
-150V [1]
22K C71 470nF 250V
PLM
0V
0V
0V
0V
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP24
1
1
1
1
+15V
C72 220nF 250V
TX MON COMPARATOR
R124 3K3
1N916 D56
R122 10K
R123 15K 3 2
8 LM393N 1
+ 4 IC31A
C75 47pF
R126 100K
1N916 D58
1N916 D59
-15V 6 5
CD-4591
Figure 6
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
TP27 MON O/P 1
R125
TX MON PULSE [1]
PLD-11
2K2 1N916 D57
LM393N 7 + IC31B
Control PCB CTX-A246: Circuit Diagram (Sheet 2)
Figure 6
Page 5.33/34
KH1250 Chapter 5
RELAY COIL
RELAY HEATER TURN DOWN
RELAY COIL
MP RELAY (FROM CONTROL BOARD) LP RELAY (FROM CONTROL BOARD) HEATER TURNDOWN. (FROM CONTROL BOARD) DUMMY TRIGGER (FROM CONTROL BOARD)
SYNC PULSE OR GATE D4, D5
SYNC PULSE TO DISPLAY
Rx TRIGGER (TO CONTROL BOARD)
FROM POWER UNIT -350 V
-150 V (TO CONTROL BOARD)
MON -ve VOLTAGE (TO CONTROL BOARD)
CHARGE CSR1
CHARGING CHOKE L5
BLOCKING DIODE D7
HOLD OFF REACTOR SL1
TX MON SUPPLY
PULSE FORMING NETWORK AND RELAYS L1, L2, L3, C1 TO C6
SYNC PULSE TRANSFORMER T1
SHORT PULSE TAILBITER SL2
CSR2 TRIGGER (FROM CONTROL BOARD)
DC HEATERS FROM POWER UNIT
HEATER RFI FILTER L4 HEATER MONITOR R5
HV MONITOR
HEATER I MONITOR
CHARGE TRIGGER TRANSFORMER T3
CSR1 TRIGGER (FROM CONTROL BOARD)
HEATER TURNDOWN RELAY & RESISTOR RLC, R4
PULSE TRANSFORMER
OVERSWING NETWORK & COMPENSATING CAPACITORS
S1
DISCHARGE TR2 TRANSFORMER
DISCHARGE CSR2 & PRIMING CIRCUIT
MAGNETRON LEADS
MAGNETRON
CD-3823
Figure 7 Issue 4
Modulator Unit CTX-A247/CTX-A248: Block Diagram
Figure 7 Page 5.35/36
KH1250 Chapter 5
TP2
TP1 DUMMY TRIG
D4 BYV27-100
8NH 1 2 3 FROM 4 CONTROL 5 BOARD 6 7 8
DUMMY TRIG DUMMY TR OV RX TRIG RX TR OV CSR2 TRIG CSR2TR OV CSR1 TRIG CSR1TR 0V
R2
4R7
R4
TP4 CSR2 TRIG
PULSE FORMING NETWORK
5 1
T1 L1
CHARGE TRIG ON/OFF OV TP10
R8 S1
100R
TP5 CSR1 TRIG
C7 33NF
6
2
5
1
T3
4KL 1 MAG HTR +VE 2 MAG HTR 0V 3 -VE 350V 4
R7 10R
R9 100R
TX MON V
R14 270K
R15 330K
BZT03 C150 D13
L3C
C3 33NF 1500V
C4 47NF 1500V
C5 82NF 1500V
RLB-1 LP RELAY
D7
MAG HTR 0V PLB-2
C6 82NF 1500V R5 0R68
FO810NH CSR1
5
6
7
MF121200 D9
BYW96E D10
C10 10NF
PRIMING CURRENT AND RRV LIMIT
RLA-1 MP RELAY
R12 150
HTR I MON PLA-9
C8
C9 470NF
*NOT FITTED
HOLD-OFF REACTOR
R10
SL2A
47R 1
2 T4a
T4b
D11 BYT30PI1000
SL1
R13 D12 BYT30PI1000
8
2R2
OVERSWING LOAD
HEATSINK
TP7
SL2B
470NF
DISCHARGE SWITCH
PLB
L3B
BYW96E
-350V TP8
R17 330K
C2 33NF 1500V
L3A
HTR TURNDOWN RELAY
RLC-1 3
L4 38 uH
XT2116 -1201-3 CSR2
R16 150K
L2 C1 22NF 1500V
T2
150K L5 25mH
BYV27100 D6
MAG HTR +VE PLB-1
0R68
R6
DISPLAY SYNC
HTR V TP6
R3
47R
2NH 1 2
PLC
BYV27100 D5
TP3 RXTRIG
RESONANT CHARGING
FROM POWER SUPPLY UNIT
SYNC (SIG) SYNC 0V
R1 1K
PLD
OV TP9
SYNC PULSE AND DUMMY TRIG
C11
PULSE TRANSFORMER CTX-A104
100NF 4mm
3mm
GN
Y
3
4
C12 68pF 6kV
BYX90G OR PF75 D14
C13 68pF 6kV
BYW96E D15
C14 68pF 6kV
BYX90G OR PF75 D16 CTX-A109
D8 1N916
OVERSWING UNIT
R11 1K MAGNETRON LEADS 7
12NH 1 2 3 4 FROM 5 CONTROL 6 BOARD 7 8 9 10 11 12
7 RLC HTR RELAY
8 HTR RELAY
BYV27100 D3
RLA 8 MP RELAY
BYV27100 D1
7 RLB 8
BYV27100 D2
LP RELAY
-VE 150V MON -V 0V HTR I MON MP RELAY LP RELAY +27V
PLA
CD-1409
Figure 8 Issue 4
Modulator PCB CTX-A247/A248: Circuit Diagram
Figure 8 Page 5.37/38
KH1250 Chapter 5
HEADING LINE FROM CONTROL PCB AZIMUTH FROM CONTROL PCB
180 PULSE COUNTER IC4, 6
START COMPARATOR IC1, 5
START/STOP DATA LINES SW1 Tx MUTE TO CONTROL PCB INHIBIT TR3
Rx MON ON FROM CONTROL PCB
Rx TRIG FROM CONTROL PCB
VIDEO IN FROM RECEIVER
STOP COMPARATOR IC7, 8
START PULSE STOP PULSE
CURRENT SOURCE TR1
AND GATE D5, 7, 10
100 s MONOSTABLE IC12A
OPTO COUPLER IC11
RF FILTER L1, L2 C16, 17, 18
ANALOGUE SWITCH IC13
RAMP C12
NOISE FLOOR INTEGRATOR R27, C15
START/STOP ENVELOPE FLIP FLOP IC2A
WEDGE FLIP FLOP IC2B
COMPARATOR IC9
DIFFERENTIATOR C8, R18, IC10C
NOISE FLOOR LEVEL BUFFER IC14
NOISE DIODE DRIVER TR2, 4 LK1
+15V
TO RF HEAD NOISE DIODE
CD-3848
Figure 9
Issue 4
Receiver Monitor PCB CTX-A252: Block Diagram
Figure 9
Page 5.39/40
KH1250 Chapter 5 +15V +15V
+15V C1 100µF 25V
+27V
+15V
C2 10nF
4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
C3 10nF
+15V
+15V
-15V
12NH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C5
R2
4n7
4K7
1N916 D1
MONON
1N916 D3
R7 2K2
4 12 13 3 1 10 9 5 15
40106 IC3A 2 3 4
40106
IC3B
Q0 P0 Q1 P1 Q2 P2 Q3 P3 PL TC U/D MR CE CP IC4
+15V
6 11 14 2 7
+15V 4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
+15V
16
5
40106
4 12 13 3 1 10 9 5 15
IC3C
1N916 D4
4516 Q0 P0 Q1 P1 Q2 P2 Q3 P3 PL TC U/D MR CE CP IC6
10K
D6
1N916 D9
4049
12
4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
+15V
4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
+15V
4585 A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
1K C13 220PF
+15V
1N916 D13
PLB
L1 220µH C16 15nF
3
1 IC10A 2 4049
1K
12
R9 1K
+15V C6 10nF R36 100K
C20 0.47µF 35V
1N916 D15 4049
15
IC10F
D16 1N916
12
R14 1K
BZX79C5V1 D8
C7 10nF
R31 56K RAMP TP6
+15V
-
2
+
1 4
IC9
1nF
1
4049
9
+15V
4049 11 12
10
IC10D
6N136
3
Vb 7
7
6 IC11B 6N136 5
R23 10K
4
VL
+V
IC13 DG417
NC
1 IP
+27V
220µH -V 7
GND 3
2 3
R27 ANALOG SWITCH
NOISE BASE TP9
+15V
C14 10nF
OP 8
10K
R28 1M
IC10C
-15V
IC10E
+15V
5
R18 10K
1
6
C12 220nF
+15V
6 EN
R29 75R
8 Vcc
IC11A
7 1N916 D11
4049
C11 47µF 25V
C10 10nF
2
TP7
TP5 C8
7
311
PULSE END
R16 10K
5 6 8 3
R20 2K2
NOISE DIODE ON
1
C18 15nF
+15V
+15V
5K
+
8 TL082
1
LK1
R26
R24 22K
R32 1K
TR4 BC107B R25 2K2
1
22K
R33 2K2 TR2 BCY70
R35 22K
R34 22R
BZX79C24 D14
SKC
TO NOISE DIODE
4 IC14A
C15 100nF -15V
C19 10nF
1 -15V
Issue 4
TR3 BC107B
15K
R10
3
RV1
0V TP12
Figure 10
1
1C2B
13
+15V
1 2 6 C RC R Q 4538 16 A1 7 Q A0
L2
C17 47nF
1
+15V
+15V
FILTERED VIDEO TP11
1
TP1 4013 13 8 Q 9 S D 10 R 12 11 Q
16
1
IC12A 100µS PULSE
VIDEO TP10 2NH 1 2
4 5
R30
8
IC3D
3
+15V
10nF
3
8 7 6 5
13
BAT85
C9
1
40106 9
14
R17 15K
VIDEO INPUT
R5 47K
16
+15V
1N916 D12
14 1 Q Q 2
4585
R15 2K2
R22 10K
R4 47K
1 2 3 4
D10
SYNC TP8
4013
IC2A
D5 BAT85
+15V
WEDGE ENABLE
SECTOR ENABLE TP2
+15V
D7
IC10B
R21
6 S 5 D 4 R 3
R3 47K
+15V
R11 10K
BAT85
4
+15V
13 3
TR1 BCY70
RXTRIG
C4 10nF
+15V
16
+15V
+15V
5
1K
12
4585 A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
16
+15V
R12 10K
R1
3
+15V
6 11 14 2 7
+15V
BAT85
16 13
SW1
6
PLA
R13
A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
+15V
1
R8 10K
TXMUTE
1
AZ TP4
+15V AZ HL RXTRIG
14
1
1N916 D2
R6 22K
+15V
+15V
H/L TP3
4516
4585
Receiver Monitor PCB CTX-A252: Circuit Diagram
6 5
+
TL082
7
IC14B
CD-1410
Figure 10 Page 5.41/42
KH1250 Chapter 5
TP1 4WAY 1 1
3 R1 560
6WAY 1
+VE SUPPLY
BZX79 C18V D2
BZX79 C20V D1
LM317 IN IC1 OUT ADJ V(8-15V) 1
3 +VARACTOR V Vo SELECT
4
R4
5
470R
1
R5
0V + TUNE
2 3
1K5
4 R2 33OR
R6 22K
+12VSUPPLY
PLB
RV1
C3 100nF
2K
2
+27V
2
2 7 3 + 4
1
TL081 6 IC3
R3
330R
TP2
6
0V
PLJ CD-1414
Figure 11 - Tune Supply PCB CTX-A250: Circuit Diagram
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.43
KH1250 Chapter 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5.44
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 8KL
BYV27-100 +27VB
+27V
D1
R1 390 +12V
C2 10uF 63V
BZX79- C12 D2
C1 100nF
1
TXMON0V
2
TXMONSIG
3
TXMONSIG
4
TXMON0V
5
+27V
6
AZ
7
HL
8
0V
FROM MON ARM
PLA
0V
0V
+12V
+27VB
R3 1K5
R2 1K 1
AZ OPTO
3
IC1B
IC1A H21L1 2
BZX79- C18 4 D3
5
TR1 2N2904A
R4
C3
1K
10nF
H21L1
R6 1K5
C4
R5
10UF 63V
22R
AZ
R7 22K 0V
+12V
+27VB TP1
R8 10K R14
TR2 2N2904A
R9 10K
1 HL OPTO
3
IC2B
IC2A H21L1 2
4 5
22R
C5 R10 2K2 TR3 BC107B
1
C6
R11
10UF 63V
22R
10nF
R12 4K7
H21L1
HL
R13 22K 0V
CD-1412
Figure 12
Issue 4
Heading Line PCB CAE-A180: Circuit Diagram
Figure 12
Page 5.45/46
KH1250 Chapter 5
+14V -14V +14V -14V 0V
I/P AMP & BANDPASS FILTER TR34
I/F I/F SCR.
5 STAGE LOG AMP
SELECTABLE BANDPASS FILTER
BAND SELECT
3 STAGE LOG AMP
DETECTOR TR33/TR37
IC5 DISCRIMINATOR
MOD SYNC
IC6 SAMPLE & HOLD
LOWPASS FILTER
3 x VIDEO OUTPUT IC2 TUNE AMP
VIDEO VID.SCR.
IC3 AMP
TUNE
IC3 SUM
IC4 TUNE AMP
TUNE INDICATOR
LNFE TUNE
CD-3795
Figure 13 - Log Receiver Assembly CTX-A297: Block Diagram
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.47
KH1250 Chapter 5
CURRENT AND PHASE SENSING OVERLOAD
3 PHASE MAINS IN
CONTACTOR
STARTING CURRENT LIMITING RESISTORS
CON 1
R3, 20 R4, 21 R5, 22
MAINS IN NEON & 440/220V LINK
CONT +ve
3 PHASE TO AERIAL MOTOR
RL1
MOTOR ON NEON & 440/220V LINK
STARTER ON LED
KEY-SWITCH
CONTACTOR
SOFT START OVER LED
VOLTAGE REGULATOR R12, D5
0V
0.5 sec TIMER IC1
RELAY DRIVER TR1, 2
RLB RLC RLD
RELAYS RLB, RLC & RLD
0V
3 PHASE SWITCHING PCB CZZ-A159 NOTE: CZZ-A14/2 HAS AN ADDITIONAL MAINS POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND TERMINAL BLOCK
FITTED TO VERSION CZZ-A14/2 SINGLE PHASE MAINS 25 CORE FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
PSU (+27V)
27V
TB4 TB5
TB6 UHF CONNECTOR
38 CORE TO TRANSCEIVER
SYNC COAX UHF CONNECTOR VIDEO COAX
CD-1382
Figure 14 - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Block Diagram
Page 5.48
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
3PH MAINS IN
P1
3 PHASE SUPPLY FROM ISOLATOR
150K LINK FOR 220V MOTOR R2
TP1
NEON LP1 GREEN
TP2
150K P2
SW1
1
SW1 KEYSWITCH
CONTACTOR
OVERLOAD
3WAY 1 2 3
2 3
R3
R20
2
1
2
1
18R 50W
10R 25W
4
3
4
3
R4
R21
6
5
6
5
18R 50W
10R 25W
14
14
13
A2
A2
TB1
FROM TRANSCEIVER VIA 38 CORE
PINBOARD
R1
95
R5
R22
18R 50W
10R 25W
3WAY 1 2 3
TO AERIAL MOTOR
TB3
A1 CON1 24V
THERMAL RL1
3WAY 1 CONT+VE 2 CONTACTOR 3 0V TB2
P3
3PH SWITCHING PCB (CZZ-A159)
P4
P5
P6
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
P7
P8
N/O
RUN
MV52 D1 GREEN
COILONV OV COIL-V COIL+V COIL+V LEDA
KLBP8 1 2 3 4 5 6
KLV8 1 2 3 4 5 6
SKA-1
PLA-1
RLB-1 COILONV OV COIL-V COIL+V D3 COIL+V LEDA BYV27-100
R6 V480LA -40A VDR
R7 V480LA-40A VDR
TP3
N/O
TP4 LINK FOR 220V MOTOR R8
RLC-1
150K
R10 V480LA -40A VDR
R9 150K
KLV3 1 2 3
KLBP3 1 2 3
PLB
SKB
N/O
R11
RLD-1
3K3
KLV8 COILONV 7 LEDB 8 BYV-27 100 D4
RLB
RLC
R12 1K
SOFT START OVER MV52 D2 GREEN
PLA-2 SKA-2
RLD
R13 3K3
C1 100nF
BZX79C12V D5
KLBP8 7 8
MOTOR ON B NEON LP2 GREEN A
C2 10uF 25V
R15 47K C3 100NF
C4 10uF 25V
7555
R16 10K
C5 10uF 25V
R14 10K
4 7 6 2 R18 10K
RS Vcc DIS OP THR CV TR 0V IC1
1.5 SECOND MOTOR ON TIMER
8 3 5 1
R17
TR1 BC107B
10K C6 100nF
BD675 TR2
R19 2K2
CD-1413
Figure 15
Issue 4
Soft Start PCB (CZZ-A159): Circuit Diagram
Figure 15
Page 5.49/50
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
ANNEX A LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297 CONTENTS Para 1 2 2 3 7 9
Introduction Technical Description RF Input Stages Logarithmic Amplifier with Switchable Bandwidths Video Detector and Amplifier AFC and Tune Indication
TABLE Table 1
Page Log Receiver CTX-A297 Parts List
5A.9
ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1 2
Issue 4
Page Log Receiver CTX-A297: Component Layout Log Receiver CTX-A297: Circuit Diagram
5A.5 5A.7/8
Page 5A.1
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5A.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
ANNEX A LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297 INTRODUCTION 1
The receiver comprises the following: (1)
RF input stages.
(2)
Logarithmic amplifier with switchable bandwidths.
(3)
Video detector and amplifier with three independent outputs.
(4)
Tune indicating and AFC functions.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION RF Input Stages 2
The input signal at SKA is fed to FET amplifier TR34, via a source matching network comprising inductor L24 and capacitor C98. Resistor R127 and capacitor C97 set the source self bias. FET amplifier TR34 forms a pre-amplifier and roofing filter function prior to main amplification by an eight stage logarithmic amplifier. The Drain load, comprising inductor L23 and capacitors C67 and C99, provides a filter of approximately 12MHz bandwidth and an additional skirt selectivity for the primary filter (see paragraph 6). The drain load is damped to provide wideband operation by switching diode D8 via inverting amplifier IC2b. Logarithmic Amplifier with Switchable Bandwidths Logarithmic Amplifier 3
There are eight broadly similar amplifier stages, therefore only the first is described in detail.
4
Transistor TR22 forms an input buffer emitter follower. Transistor TR1 forms a unity gain amplifier with the net collector load impedance equal to the emitter resistor, R30. Transistor TR8 operates in parallel with TR1, with a gain of approximately 12dB and forms an emitter coupled limiting amplifier in conjunction with transistor TR15. The bias potential for each stage is nominally 9V, obtained via voltage regulator IC1. This also provides a reference for the switching functions (see paragraph 6). 5
Issue 4
Diode D17 is unique to this stage and is used to limit the signal excursion in order to prevent undesirable log amplifier characteristics.
Page 5A.3
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A Switching 6
Link LK6 is set to position B for the MkVI transmitter. When switching line SP is taken high (12-15V), the wideband operation is selected via analogue switching logic IC2 and IC9. Diode D5 is always biased off for the MkVI transmitter. When narrowband operation is selected (long transmitter pulse), transistors TR12 and TR5 collector loads are shunted via diode D4 with a tuned circuit, comprising inductor L20 and capacitors C27 and C40, to provide selectivity and reduce the pre-detector wideband noise floor. When wideband operation is selected (medium or short transmitter pulses), diode D1 shunts inductor L20 to prevent undesirable coupling, and diode D19 substitutes a resistive load with a higher than normal impedance to offset the gain reduction at FET amplifier TR34 drain, due to damping resistor R113. Video Detector and Amplifier Detector 7
Transistor TR35 provides drive from the final log. stage to T1 phase splitter, which in turn drives a balanced detector circuit comprising transistors TR33 and TR37. The collector load, comprising inductor L11 and capacitors C46 and C45, forms a fixed bandwidth video filter . Video Amplifier 8
Transistors TR29 and TR45 form level shifting unity gain buffer amplifiers. Three video outputs at the collectors of transistors TR39, 41 and 44 provide a 5.5V drive into a 75 ohm
load. AFC and Tune Indicator Function 9
The main transmitter pulse breakthrough is fed in parallel with the input signal to buffer amplifier TR36. A phase shift network, comprising inductor L21, capacitors C44 and C49 and variable capacitor CV1, provide a 90 degree phase difference between the inputs to double balanced mixer IC5, which forms a discriminator function. The circuits following are all referenced to 5.6V zener diode D11. Analogue gate IC6 is switched via monostable IC8b after suitable delays, which are selected via links LK2 LK3 and LK4, in order to accommodate time differences between the main system sync. pulse and the RF appearing at SKA. 10
The sampled pulse is integrated by capacitors C71 and C78 and fed via difference amplifier IC3a to AFC limiter amplifier IC3b and tune indicator amplifier IC4a.
AFC function 11
The degree of control to be applied by limiting amplifier IC3b may be selected via link LK5. The signal is applied to level shift amplifier IC3c which ground references the input signal. This signal is summed with the manual tune voltage input via offset/summing amplifier IC3d. The tuning voltage to the low noise front end varactor tuning control is routed via resistor R117.
Page 5A.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A Tune indication 12
The amplified tune signal at IC4a output is fed to a rectifier stage IC4b and IC4c. The output from this stage (still referenced to 5.6V) is then fed to another amplifier/buffer stage IC4d/TR32. The main indication is available via R101 series limiting resistor.
Issue 4
Page 5A.5
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
CD-1416
Figure 1- Log Receiver CTX-A297: Component Layout
Page 5A.6
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A C36 10nF
PLD-1
PLD-2 1 2 +15V
R129 390R
R8 2K2
L24 220nH C98 68pF
d
g
TR34 SST310
R29 2K2
D8 BAT18
L12
R43 1K5
C20 1nF
C33 1nF
+15V
A
8
IC2A
2 B
TL072ID
IC9A
8
2
D6 LP1
___ MED
1
3
SP1
IC2B
6
TR18 BFS19
R37 2K2
R38 240R
TR26 BFT92
10nF
R46 1K5
L6 1uH
C6 100nF
R27 100K
C21 10nF
10nF R48 1K5
10nF R62 5K1
R49 1K5
R61 11K
R60 5K1
C37 10nF
C34
TR28 BFT92
R146 240R
R148 2K2
3
6
3
T1 616PT-1028 6
2
TR33 BFS19
10nF R134 5K1
C41 10nF
D12 BAT18 R131 11K
C23 100uF 6V3
C35 100nF
R108 100K
R136 100K
+15V
C52 AFC
TR36 BFR92
C44 10pF
560R
C49 5.6pF
1 CV1 2-6pF
R100 180R +9V R107 3K9
OSCIN
100pF
L21 560nH
R75
R105 10M
C74 10nF
IC5 NE612AD 1
VCC 6
R79 150R C73
I/PA
IC6A HEF4016BT A B 2
4
O/PB
5
2 3
3 2
100pF R89 56R
B
A
4
IC6C HEF4016BT C76 1nF 8
R120 IC3A 1
1 1
C71 100nF
IC6D HEF4016BT A B 9
D13 BAT18
R69 100K R22
R78
C62
100K
1K R99
22nF
220K R103
7
5
100K
IC3B TL074ID
IC3C
9
8
10
TL074ID
R64
R157
56K
56K
C72 100nF
C51 100nF
C85 10nF
1
C60 100nF
REXT/CEXT
5 4 3
B A CLR
C42 4.7uF 35V
Note: Short LK1 for S Band
C59 100nF
SYNC 330R R122 75R
R142 10K
D15 BAT18
+15V
IC8A HEF4528BT 1 R81 4K7
LP
110K 13
B
6
Q
7
LK3 2
REXT/CEXT
5 4 3
B A CLR
Q
6
Q
7
LK4
LK2
R87 4K7
15 C47 56pF 14 11 12 13
R98 43K
Noisemon
Tuning voltage in
R155
NEG
A
11
Q
9
R23 390K
15 C58
R65 330R
R73 +5V6
100nF 14 11 12 13
6
IC4B 7 TL074ID
IC4A
2
10K
5
4 1
3
R104 10K
12 R86 22K
IC4D
D3 TR32 BFS19
14
13
TL074ID
D9
BAT18
TP3
TP1 R101
R85 10K
220R
Tuning indicator
TL074ID
REXT/CEXT B A CLR
R74 10K
10nF R77 27K
CEXT
Note: NEG1 = -12 to -15V
R83
+5V6
IC7B HEF4528BT
C56 1nF
C55 1nF
C102 10nF
D14
+15V
TP4 10
NEG1 L8
+15V
Q
PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4.7uH
C79
REXT/CEXT B A CLR
SP
C110 10nF
L22 4.7uH
C84 10uF 25V
BAT18
CEXT
POS
14
12
C31 100nF
IC6B HEF4016BT Q
VSS
R135 22K
56K
IC8B HEF4528BT
+15V
CEXT
TP2
NEG
+15V
+15V
C91 1nF
Tune voltage out
100K +15V
0R0
C92 1nF
1 2 10
R106
Tune supply
4.7uH
R117 220R
C
CEXT
2
TR31 SST310
LK1
R28 100K
6 IC7A HEF4528BT
+15V
L19
d
IC3D TL074ID
C NEG
g R130 180R
R95
6
10K
TL074ID
R96 10M
C
+5V6
10M 4
s
C101 10nF
R97
1 3
Note: R130,TR31,C42,C92,C91,L19,R106 for evaluation purposes only +15V
A
1nF
R94 10M C78 100nF
C O/PA
I/PB
3
TXMON
*IC9B noise monitor not used on MkVI
D2 BAV99
C100
5
GND
5
+5V6
LK5 B
8
R121 10K
D18 BAV99
C87 10nF
+5V6
R118 1K5
C70
VIDEO OUTPUT 75ohm 5V pk
TL072ID +15V
10nF
R133 150R
*IC9B 7
6
D11 BZX84C5V6
R132 150R
D16 BAT17
R112 120R
7
C64 10uF 10V
R88 150R
R25 100K
R124 100R
+5V6
PLB 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
C105 TR30 BFT92
R63 11K
C38 10nF
25V
160R
C45 27pF
C46 3.3pF
C15 10uF
R80 33R BFG31 TR41
160R R91
TR29 BF550
4.7uH
TR37 BFS19
R76 33R BFG31 TR39
160R R137
L11
4
R66 33R BFG31 TR44
R90
TR45 FMMT720
R68 680R
R154 680R
TR42 BFS19
R147 1K5
R128 560R
L13 2.2uH
R71 560R
TR35 BFT92 TR43 BFS19
R126 47R
TR21 BFS19
R102 560R
D20 BAT18
R156 33R
C88 10nF 2
D10 BAT18
R116 3K9 ____ WIDE
R59 11K
C93 10nF
L36 1uH
TR40 BFS19
C54 10nF
R42 240R
R93 1K
C83 10uF 25V
R70 390R
C61 100nF TR14 BFS19
R41 2K2
C32
+9V 1
4.7uH
C7 100nF
L7 1uH
C63 100uF 6V3
RV1 100R
C29 100nF
TR7 BFS19
R125 47R
TR27 BFT92
IF
VDD IC1 LM78L05ACM
R21 390R
TR13 BFS19 R40 240R
R39 2K2
8
R20 2K2
C14 10nF
TR6 BFS19
C13 10nF
TL072ID
L17
R7 390R
R141 2K2
TR20 BFS19
R114
C40 56pF
IF
10nF R58 5K1
R47 1K5
R57 11K
R56 5K1
C25 100nF
BAT18
C57 10nF
TR19 BFS19 C30
C19
C28
C27 68pF
L20 220nH BAT18 TR12 BFS19
R158 47R
TR25 BFT92
R55 11K
NEG
____ WIDE
7
5
R92 10K
C86 1nF
C65 1nF
D1 R24 3K9
TR5 BFS19
10nF
R6 390R
+9V
R19 390R
BAT18
4.7uH
C66 1nF
R45 1K5
R53 11K
C12 10nF
R36 240R
R35 2K2
10nF
10nF R54 5K1
+9V R18 2K2
SP1
NEG
+15V
L5 1uH
TR11 BFS19
C18
TR24 BFT92
C17 10nF
R5 390R
+9V
4 TL072ID
BAT18 D7
L16
POS
R72 680R
+15V
4
WIDE (SP) = ACTIVE HIGH
C81 1nF
___ NRW
1
3
SP
R16 2K2
C5 100nF
+5V6
R139 3K9
+5V6
LK6
Note: LK6 Naval A Commercial B
R52 5K1
R44 1K5
C4 100nF
BAT18
2.2uH
C69 10nF +15V
R109 10K
R51 11K
L4 1uH
TR4 BFS19
R153 47R
R34 240R
C26
C24 10nF
R15 390R
C11 10nF
TR17 BFS19
TR23 BFT92
C16 10nF
C22 10nF
R50 5K1
R31 2K2
R33 2K2
TR16 BFS19
TR22 BFT92
LP1
4.7uH
R151 47R
+9V L18 2.2uH C48 10nF
R26 680R
D4 TR10 BFS19
R152 47R
R32 240R
R14 2K2
C3 100nF
L3 1uH
C50 10nF
L10
C77 100nF
TR3 BFS19
C10 10nF
TR2 BFS19
R13 390R
R4 390R
___ NRW
BAT18 D5
R127 180R
C97 1nF
NARROW (LP) = ACTIVE HIGH
R30 240R
C99 4.7pF
R12 2K2
L2 1uH
+9V
R3 390R
TR9 BFS19
TR15 BFS19
R113 1K2 LP
C2 100nF
R11 390R
TR8 BFS19
C67 6.8pF
s
R10 2K2 C9 10nF
R17 39R
TR1 BFS19
L23 820nH
AFC
D17 BAS16
L1 1uH
C1 100nF
R9 390R
C8 10nF
C39 100nF
SKA RF
R1 390R
+9V
C82 10nF
+9V
R2 390R
D19
C68 10nF
R138 3K9
___ MED +9V
R67 1K
R123 3K9
____ WIDE
1 2
Q
10
Q
9
1 1
C75 10nF
+5V6
9 10
BAT18 8 IC4C TL074ID
R82 100K C43 100nF
NEG
CD-1417
Figure 2
Issue 4
Log Receiver CTX-A297: Circuit Diagram
Figure 2
Page 5A.7/8
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
PCB PANEL RECEIVER BOARD
CAPACITORS C1
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C2
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C3
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C4
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C5
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C6
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C7
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C8
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C9
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C10
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C11
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C12
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C13
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C14
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C15
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 25V TAJC106K025 AVX-KYOCERA
C16
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C17
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C18
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C19
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C20
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C21
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C22
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C23
100uF TAJD TANT 10% 6V3 TAJD107K006 AVX-KYOCERA
C24
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C25
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C26
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C27
68pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A680KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C28
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C29
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C30
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C31
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C32
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C33
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C34
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C35
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
Issue 4
Page 5A.9
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
C36
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C37
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C38
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C39
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C40
56pF C0805 COG 5% 08055A560KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C41
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C42
4.7uF TAJD TANT 10% 35V TAJD475K035 AVX-KYOCERA
C43
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C44
10pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A100KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C45
27pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A270KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C46
3.3pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A3R3KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C47
56pF C0805 COG 5% 08055A560KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C48
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C49
5.6pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A5R6KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C50
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C51
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C52
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C53
NOT USED
C54
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C55
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C56
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C57
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C58
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C59
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C60
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C61
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C62
22nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C223KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C63
100uF TAJD TANT 10% 6V3 TAJD107K006 AVX-KYOCERA
C64
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 10V TAJC106K010 AVX-KYOCERA
C65
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C66
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C67
6.8pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A6R8KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C68
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C69
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C70
100pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055C101KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C71
100nF C0805 X7R 10% 25V 08055C104KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
Page 5A.10
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
C72
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C73
100pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055C101KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C74
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C75
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C76
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C77
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C78
100nF C0805 X7R 10% 25V 08055C104KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C79
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C80
NOT USED
C81
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C82
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C83
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 25V TAJC106K025 AVX-KYOCERA
C84
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 25V TAJC106K025 AVX-KYOCERA
C85
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C86
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C87
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C88
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C89
NOT USED
C90
NOT USED
C91
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C92
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C93
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C94
NOT USED
C95
NOT USED
C96
NOT USED
C97
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C98
68pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A680KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C99
4.7pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A4R7KAT00JAVX-KYOCERA
C100
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C101
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C102
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C103
NOT USED
C104
NOT USED
C105
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C106
NOT USED
C107
NOT USED
C108
NOT USED
C109
NOT USED
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.11
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
C110
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
CV1
2-6pF TZBX4Z060BA110 25V MURATA
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
RESISTORS
R1
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R2
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R3
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R4
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R5
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R6
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R7
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R8
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R9
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R10
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R11
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R12
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R13
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R14
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R15
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R16
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R17
39R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R18
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R19
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R20
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R21
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R22
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R23
150K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R24
3K9 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R25
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R26
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R27
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R28
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R29
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R30
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R31
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R32
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Page 5A.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R33
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R34
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R35
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R36
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R37
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R38
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R39
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R40
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R41
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R42
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R43
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R44
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R45
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R46
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R47
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R48
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R49
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R50
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R51
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R52
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R53
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R54
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R55
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R56
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R57
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R58
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R59
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R60
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R61
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R62
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R63
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R64
56K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R65
330R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R66
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R67
1K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R68
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R69
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R70
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.13
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R71
560R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R72
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R73
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R74
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R75
560R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R76
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R77
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R78
1K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R79
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R80
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R81
4K7 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R82
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R83
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R84
NOT USED
R85
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R86
22K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R87
4K7 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R88
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R89
56R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R90
160R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R91
160R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R92
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R93
1K R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R94
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R95
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R96
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R97
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R98
43K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R99
110K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R100
180R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R101
220R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R102
560R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R103
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R104
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R105
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R106
0R0 R0805 RC11 0.125W PHILIPS
R107
3K9 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R108
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Page 5A.14
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R109
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R110
NOT USED
R111
NOT USED
R112
120R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R113
1K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R114
330R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R115
NOT USED
R116
3K9 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R117
220R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R118
1K5 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R119
NOT USED
R120
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R121
22K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R122
75R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R123
3K9 R1206 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R124
100R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R125
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R126
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R127
180R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R128
560R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R129
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R130
180R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R131
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R132
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R133
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R134
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R135
22K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R136
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R137
160R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R138
3K9 R1206 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R139
3K9 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R140
NOT USED
R141
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R142
1K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R143
NOT USED
R144
NOT USED
R145
NOT USED
R146
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.15
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R147
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R148
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R149
NOT USED
R150
NOT USED
R151
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R152
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R153
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R154
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R155
56K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R156
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R157
56K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R158
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
RV1
100R 3304W 101 BOURNS
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
DIODES D1
BAT18 SOT23
D2
BAV99 SOT23
D3
BAT18 SOT23
D4
BAT18 SOT23
D5
BAT18 SOT23
D6
BAT18 SOT23
D7
BAT18 SOT23
D8
BAT18 SOT23
D9
BAT18 SOT23
D10
BAT18 SOT23
D11
BZX84C5V6 SOT23
D12
BAT18 SOT23
D13
BAT18 SOT23
D14
BAT18 SOT23
D15
BAT18 SOT23
D16
BAT17 SOT23
D17
BAS16 SOT23
D18
BAV99 SOT23
D19
BAT18 SOT23
D20
BAT18 SOT23
Page 5A.16
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS IC1
LM78L05ACM
IC2
TL072ID
IC3
TL074ID
IC4
TL074ID
IC5
NE612AD PHILIPS
IC6
HEF4016BT
IC7
HEF4528BT
IC8
HEF4528BT
IC9
TL072ID
INDUCTORS L1
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L2
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L3
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L4
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L5
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L6
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L7
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L8
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L9
NOT USED
L10
2.2uH 32CS 380LB2R2K 10% TOKO
L11
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L12
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L13
2.2uH 32CS 380LB2R2K 10% TOKO
L14
NOT USED
L15
NOT USED
L16
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L17
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L18
2.2uH 32CS 380LB2R2K 10% TOKO
L19
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L20
220nH 5CE 432AN1056Z 5% TOKO
L21
560nH 32CS 380NBR56M 20% TOKO
L22
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L23
820nH 5CE 432AN1063Z 5% TOKO
L24
220nH 32CS 380NBR22M 20% TOKO
L25
NOT USED
L26
NOT USED
Issue 4
Page 5A.17
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
L27
NOT USED
L28
NOT USED
L29
NOT USED
L30
NOT USED
L31
NOT USED
L32
NOT USED
L33
NOT USED
L34
NOT USED
L35
NOT USED
L36
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
LINKS LK1
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK2
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK3
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK4
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK5
HEADER M20-977-0306 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK6
HEADER M20-977-0306 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
CONNECTORS PLA
BS14P-SHF-1AA JST
PLB
BSP-SHF-1AA JST
PLD-1, PLD-2
B-2P-SHF-1AA JST
SKA
GE65207 SMB GREENPAR
TRANSFORMERS T1
616PT-1028 B5FL TOKO
TRANSISTORS
TR1
BFS19 SOT23
TR2
BFS19 SOT23
TR3
BFS19 SOT23
TR4
BFS19 SOT23
TR5
BFS19 SOT23
Page 5A.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
TR6
BFS19 SOT23
TR7
BFS19 SOT23
TR8
BFS19 SOT23
TR9
BFS19 SOT23
TR10
BFS19 SOT23
TR11
BFS19 SOT23
TR12
BFS19 SOT23
TR13
BFS19 SOT23
TR14
BFS19 SOT23
TR15
BFS19 SOT23
TR16
BFS19 SOT23
TR17
BFS19 SOT23
TR18
BFS19 SOT23
TR19
BFS19 SOT23
TR20
BFS19 SOT23
TR21
BFS19 SOT23
TR22
BFT92 SOT23
TR23
BFT92 SOT23
TR24
BFT92 SOT23
TR25
BFT92 SOT23
TR26
BFT92 SOT23
TR27
BFT92 SOT23
TR28
BFT92 SOT23
TR29
BF550 SOT23
TR30
BFT92 SOT23
TR31
SST310 SOT23 SILICONIX
TR32
BFS19 SOT23
TR33
BFS19 SOT23
TR34
SST310 SOT23 SILICONIX
TR35
BFT92 SOT23
TR36
BFR92 SOT23
TR37
BFS19 SOT23
TR38
NOT USED
TR39
BFG31 SOT223 PHILIPS
TR40
BFS19 SOT23
TR41
BFG31 SOT223 PHILIPS
TR42
BFS19 SOT23
TR43
BFS19 SOT23,
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.19
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
TR44
BFG31 SOT223 PHILIPS
TR45
FMMT720 SOT23 ZETEX
Page 5A.20
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE CONTENTS Para 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Introduction Preventive Maintenance Diagnostic Maintenance Pre-Requisites Failure Messages Test Equipment Indicators Corrective Maintenance Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) Access Electronic Assembly - Removal Control Board - Removal Rx Monitor Board - Removal Fan Assembly - Removal Receiver Board - Removal Tune PCB - Removal Power Supply Assembly - Removal Heading Line Assembly - Removal Heading Line Assembly - Refitting Magnetron - Removal Magnetron - Refitting RF Head Assembly - Removal RF Head Assembly- Refitting Heading Line Setting-up Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Access Electronic Assembly - Removal Control Board - Removal Rx Monitor Board - Removal Receiver Board - Removal Tune PCB - Removal Power Supply Assembly - Removal Magnetron - Removal Magnetron - Refitting Fan Assembly - Removal RF Head Assembly - Removal RF Head Assembly - Refitting
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.1
KH1250 Chapter 6 CONTENTS (continued) Para 41 42 43 44
Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41 or CAE-A42) Heading Line Assembly - Removal Heading Line Assembly - Refitting Heading Line Setting-up
TABLES Table 1 2 3
Page Failure Messages Fuses Indicators
6.4 6.4 6.4
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page Flowchart 1 Flowchart 2 Flowchart 3 Flowchart 4 Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations Power Supply Assembly RF Head Assembly Rotating Joint Downmast Transceiver: Module Locations
Page 6.2
6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.22 6.23 6.24 6.25 6.26
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION 1
This Chapter is divided into two parts: (1)
Preventive Maintenance.
(2)
Diagnostic Maintenance.
(3)
Corrective Maintenance.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2
The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance, however periodically (around every 6 months) check that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free from corrosion, and wipe the scanner clean using a soft cloth with mild detergent. DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT. ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE CARRIED OUT BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN. 3
The Algorithms in this chapter provide an aid to fault diagnosis in the transceiver. The algorithms enable fault diagnosis down to module level and also identify wiring faults. Entry to the algorithms is via Failure Messages generated by the display. Pre-Requisites 4
Before any rectification is carried out, the radar system must be in a configuration, as shown at the top of the algorithm.
standard
Failure Messages 5
These failure messages appear in the data field of the display monitor if certain signals are missing. See Table 1 for details.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.3
KH1250 Chapter 6 TABLE 1: Failure Messages
6
SIGNAL
FAILURE MESSAGE
SIGNAL
FAILURE MESSAGE
Sync.
No Sync.
Azimuth
No Azimuth
Video
No Video
Heading Line
No Heading Line
Fault diagnosis algorithms covering these failures are provided in Figures 1 to 4.
Test Equipment 7
Routine field maintenance requires fault location down to fuse replacement level. The only test equipment required for fault finding is a high impedance Multimeter. TABLE 2: Fuses FUSE No
LOCATION
RATING
FS1
Power Unit
Resettable
FS2
Power Unit
Resettable
FS3
Power Unit
Resettable
FS1
Control Board
Resettable
FS1
Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/2
Time Lag 5A for 220V Time Lag 6.3A for 110V
Indicators 8
Indicators provided on PCBs are detailed in Table 3. TABLE 3: Indicators PCB
Component Ref.
Indication
PSU
D18-A
+15 V Low Supply
PSU
D18-B
+9.5 V Low Supply
PSU
D17-A
+6 V Low Supply
PSU
D17-B
-15 V Low Supply
Control
D4
Heater current OFF
Control
D6
+27V OK
Control
D17
Tune Indicator
Control
D24
prf ON
Control
D26
Mute ON
Control
D27
HL I/P OK
Control
D36
Tx Ready
Page 6.4
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 6
START DISPLAY ON
AFTER 3 MINUTES Tx READY?
YES
SWITCH TO RUN
NO
IS +27V SUPPLY AVAILABLE AT Tx?
NO
CHECK +27V FROM DISPLAY OR IN-LINE PSU & CABLES
YES
ARE PSU LEDs ON?
FAILURE MESSAGE
FAILURE MESSAGE
NO SYNC NO VIDEO
NO AZIMUTH NO HEADING LINE
TO FIGURE 3
NO
YES
CHECK CONNECTIONS TO CONTROL PANEL REPAIR CONNECTIONS WHERE NECESSARY
ARE ALL 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & +27V LED (ON CONTROL BOARD) OFF?
NO
TO FIGURE 2
DISCONNECT PSU PLB & PLC. SWITCH OFF TO COOL FUSE LINKS
YES
CHECK THAT PSU SW1 IS ON
ARE ALL 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & +27V LED (ON CONTROL BOARD) OFF?
NO
PSU FAULT
YES
CONNECT PLB & PLC. DISCONNECT ALL BOARDS FROM CONTROL PCB RETRY
ARE ALL 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & +27V LED (ON CONTROL BOARD) OFF?
NO
CONTROL PCB FAULT
YES
CD-0293 25.04.01
CONNECT OTHER UNITS ONE AT A TIME TO FIND FAULTY UNIT REPLACE FAULTY UNIT
Figure 1 - Flowchart 1 Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 6.5
KH1250 Chapter 6 FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE NO AZIMUTH NO HEADING LINE
IS THE ANTENNA TURNING?
YES
FAULT IN HL PCB OR INTERCONNECTIONS
NO
IS TURNING MECHANISM SAFETY SWITCH ON?
NO
SWITCH ON
YES
IS SOFT START UNIT SWITCHED ON?
NO
SWITCH ON
YES
ARE ALL FOUR SOFT START INDICATORS ON?
YES
NO
IS MAINS IN INDICATOR ON?
NO
CHECK 3-PHASE SUPPLY
YES
IS STARTER ON INDICATOR ON?
NO
NO
HAS THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIPPED?
YES
CHECK WIRING, SWITCH S1 (ON CONTROL BOARD) ON, RUN SIGNAL TO TRANSCEIVER
YES
RESET WITH BLUE BUTTON
IS SOFT START OVER INDICATOR ON?
NO
3-PHASE SWITCHING PCB FAULT OR CONNECTION FAULT
NO
HAS THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIPPED?
YES
IS MOTOR ON INDICATOR ON?
YES
CD-0294 25.04.01
YES
RESET WITH BLUE BUTTON
NO
FAULTY WIRING TO AE MOTOR OR MOTOR FAULT
Figure 2 - Flowchart 2 Page 6.6
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 6 FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE SET TO LONG PULSE
NO SYNC NO VIDEO
POOR SIGNALS BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
NO VIDEO
NO SYNC
TO FIGURE 4
ARE CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS OK?
NO
ARE CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS OK?
REPAIR FAULTY CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS
YES
REPAIR FAULTY CO-AX CABLE CONNECTION(S)
NO
IS PSU +9.5V LED ON?
NO
NO
RECEIVER FAULT
YES
NO
CHECK CONTROL BOARD LEDs
IS LED D4 OFF (HEATER CURRENT OK)?
YES
ARE RECEIVER CONNECTIONS OK FROM LOW NOISE FRONT END & CABLEFORMS?
REPAIR CONNECTIONS
SET TO STANDBY BY SWITCHING OFF GEARBOX SAFETY SWITCH
IS PSU +9.5V LED ON?
NO
PSU FAULT
REMOVE PSU PLC YES
YES
INTERCONNECTION OR MAGNETRON HEATER OPEN CIRCUIT
CHECK CONTROL BOARD LEDs
IS LED D26 OFF (MUTE OFF)?
YES
NO
INTERCONNECTION OR MAGNETRON HEATER SHORT CIRCUIT
SET SWITCH S1 TO ON
MUTE INPUT FROM Rx MON PCB
HL OVERRIDE FAULT
YES NO
IS PSU +27V LED ON?
NO
SET LK8 (CCT REF E6) TO TEST
IS PSU SWITCHED ON?
REMOVE CONTROL BOARD SKF
YES
YES
SWITCH TO STANDBY BY SWITCHING OFF GEARBOX SAFETY SWITCH, THE AE WILL STOP
IS LED D26 OFF (MUTE OFF)?
PSU FAULT
NO
NO
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
YES
TURN AE AWAY FROM YOU. SWITCH CONTROL BOARD S1 OFF (AE TURNING INHIBIT). SET CONTROL BOARD LK8 (CCT REF E6) TO TEST. SET TO RUN. SAFETY SWITCH ON
IS MODULATOR FIRING? (CONTINUOUS AUDIBLE NOTE, 800MHz)
YES
IS THERE A MODULATOR PLC CONNECTOR OR CONNECTON FAULT TO CONNECTOR?
Rx MON PCB FAULT OR CABLEFORM FAULT
CABLE FAULT
NO
INTERMITTENT NOTE?
YES
NO
MODULATOR FAULT
NO
AT RUN, IS -350V AT PSU PLC-2, WRT TO CHASSIS OK?
IS PSU PLB-10 AT LEAST +10V WRT CHASSIS?
NO
YES
NO
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
IS PSU PLB-9 AT LEAST 1V WRT CHASSIS?
CABLEFORM MODULATOR OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
REPAIR FAULT
IS LED D26 OFF (MUTE OFF)?
NO
PSU FAULT
YES
PSU FAULT OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT OR MODULATOR FAULT
CD-0295 25.04.01
Figure 3 - Flowchart 3 Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 6.7
KH1250 Chapter 6
POOR SIGNALS BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
SWITCH MON ON AT DISPLAY 12m RANGE
IS Tx MON PLUME GOOD? (5 MILES)
NO
POOR MAGNETRON OR WAVEGUIDE FAULT
YES
ARE Rx MON FINGERS GOOD? (3 MILES OR MORE RADIUS. ADJUST TUNE FOR STRONGEST SIGNAL)
NO
IF 3 MILES OR LESS FAULTY LIMITER, LNFE, OR RECEIVER
YES
SIGNAL STRENGTH NOT AFFECTED BY TUNE CONTROL. TUNE INDICATOR NOT WORKING SET TO STANDBY USING SAFETY SWITCH
CHECK VOLTAGE AT TUNE SUPPLY PCB
IS VOLTAGE AT TP2 +12V w.r.t. CHASSIS?
NO
DISCONNECT SKB FROM TUNE PCB
YES
IS VOLTAGE AT TP2 +12V w.r.t. CHASSIS?
YES
FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
NO
IS 12V FROM CONTROL BOARD PRESENT AT PLD-8?
CHECK VOLTAGE AT TUNE SUPPLY PCB
AFTER DISCONNECTING CONTROL BOARD SKD IS PLD-8 9V?
NO
YES
IS VOLTAGE AT TP1 APPROX 9.5V +11V w.r.t. CHASSIS?
YES
FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
NO
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
USE METER PROBE TO SHORT PLD PINS 8 & 7 TOGETHER.
TUNE SUPPLY PCB FAULT
NO
ADJUST DISPLAY TUNE (ONLY POSSIBLE DURING WARM UP TIME WITH TRANSMISSION INHIBITED)
IS TP1 BETWEEN +3V & +13V MIN?
YES
RECEIVER FAULT
YES
FAULTY TUNE SUPPLY PCB, OR FAULTY CONNECTIONS
NO
DISCONNECT SKB FROM TUNE SUPPLY PCB
. DOES VOLTAGE AT TP1 CHANGE?
NO
YES
FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
IS 12V PRESENT?
NO
CAN TUNE INPUT TO CONTROL PCB NO PLB-2 BE VARIED BETWEEN 0 & -10 VIA THE DISPLAY DURING WARM UP?
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
DISPLAY OR INTERCONNECTION FAULT
YES
RECEIVER OR CABLEFORM FAULT
CD-0296 25.04.01
Figure 4 - Flowchart 4 Page 6.8
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT. ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE CARRIED OUT BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN. CAUTIONS (1)
Handling Of Electrostatic Sensitive Semiconductor Devices. Semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to static voltage. Observe the following precautions when handling these devices in their unterminated state, or modules containing these devices. Persons removing modules from an equipment using these devices should be earthed by a wrist strap and a resistor. Soldering irons used during repair operations must be low voltage types with earth tips and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer. Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static voltages. Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored and transported in anti-static bags. Fit new devices in a special handling area. For detailed information, refer to British Standard BS 5783 or other equivalent standard.
9
(2)
Open waveguides must be kept free of dirt and moisture by moisture by using plastic aperture seals when left unattended.
(3)
Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. When a module is to be refitted, or a new one fitted, the refitting process is in the reverse order of the removal procedure unless stated otherwise.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.9
KH1250 Chapter 6 UPMAST TRANSCEIVER (CAE-A37/A45) 10
The locations of the modules and assemblies in the upmast transceiver are shown on Figure 5.
Access 11
Access to the modules and assemblies is attained by using a 12 mm spanner to remove the six bolts securing the cover in position and then hinging the cover down.
Note: When securing the cover, take care not to damage the RF sealing strip. Electronic Assembly - Removal 12
The electronic assembly is the assembly of the control board and Rx monitor board onto the modulator unit, ie the modulator unit is what is left after the control board and Rx board are removed. The assembly may be removed as one unit, or the boards comprising the assembly may be removed separately. To remove the electronic assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Hinge the cover down.
(3)
Disconnect the external cableforms from plugs PLB and PLK on the Control board.
(4)
Disconnect the internal cableforms from plugs PLA, C, D, E and M on the Control board.
(5)
Disconnect PLB and PLC on the Rx Monitor board, if fitted.
(6)
Release the cableforms from the quick release cable clamps.
(7)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic assembly in position. Slide the electronic assembly forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(8)
Disconnect PLC from the Modulator and note the position of the two magnetron cables which connect the RF Head magnetron to the modulator.
(9)
Remove the safety block and then disconnect the two cables from the modulator.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis off of the hinge pins.
Page 6.10
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 Control Board - Removal 13
The Control Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Control Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Hinge the cover down.
(3)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(4)
Remove the nine pillars securing the Control Board to the electronic assembly.
Rx Monitor Board - Removal 14
The Rx Monitor Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Rx Monitor board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Hinge the cover down.
(3)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(4)
Remove the five pillars securing the Rx Monitor board to the electronic assembly.
Fan Assembly - Removal 15
To remove the Fan Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(2)
Note the position of wiring to the fan and disconnect.
(3)
Loosen the two bolts securing the Fan Assembly to the transceiver casing and remove the Fan Assembly.
Receiver Board - Removal 16
To remove the Receiver Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.11
KH1250 Chapter 6 (2)
Note the position of wiring to the Receiver Assembly and disconnect.
(3)
Remove the three pillars securing the cover to the Receiver Assembly.
(4)
Remove the five pillars securing the Receiver Board to the chassis and remove the board.
Tune PCB - Removal 17
To remove the Tune PCB, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(2)
Remove the three pillars securing the Receiver assembly to the R.F. Head Low Noise Front End (LNFE). Support the Receiver Assembly.
(3)
Disconnect wiring to the Tune PCB.
(4)
Remove the two pillars securing the Tune PCB to the rear of the Receiver Assembly and remove the pcb.
Power Supply Assembly - Removal (See Figure 6) 18
To remove the Power Supply Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove the Electronic Assembly as detailed in paragraph 12.
(2)
Remove the Fan Assembly as detailed in paragraph 15, steps (2) and (3).
(3)
Remove connectors from the Power Supply Assembly.
(4)
Refer to Figure 6 and release the four captive screws securing the Power Supply Assembly to the bottom of the transceiver casing. Remove the Power Supply Assembly.
Heading Line Assembly - Removal 19
To remove the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of the pointer on the heading line scale.
(2)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(3)
Remove the connector from the Heading Line Assembly.
(4)
Remove the cableform from the quick release cable clamp.
Page 6.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 (5)
Release the two shouldered pillars and remove the assembly.
Heading Line Assembly - Refitting 20
To refit the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Butt the assembly up against the top of the casting.
(2)
Slide the assembly towards the disc. when the assembly is in position loosely secure with the shouldered pillars.
(3)
Adjust the position of the assembly so that the pointer is in the same position as prior to removal. Secure the pillars.
(4)
Refer to Heading Line Setting-up, paragraph 25.
Magnetron - Removal (See Figure 7) CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 21
To remove the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(2)
Disconnect wiring to the Magnetron.
(3)
Remove the power supply assembly as detailed in paragraph 18.
(4)
Remove the four bolts, (two located at the front, two located at the back), securing the Magnetron to the RF Head assembly.
(5)
Remove the Magnetron and retain the RFI gasket.
Magnetron - Refitting CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 22
To refit the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Fit the RFI gasket between the Magnetron and Circulator.
(2)
Perform the reverse of paragraph 21, ensuring that the earth braid is connected.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.13
KH1250 Chapter 6 RF Head Assembly - Removal (See Figure 7) 23
To remove the RF Head Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove the Electronic Assembly as detailed in paragraph 12.
(2)
Remove the Power Supply Assembly as detailed in paragraph 18.
(3)
Remove the three screws securing the rotating joint to the circulator.
(4)
Loosen the bolts securing the RF Head angle brackets in position.
Note: When removing the RF Head angle brackets support the RF Head. (5)
Remove the angle brackets.
(6)
Lower the RF Head to release the coupling element.
(7)
Swivel the RF Head to remove it from the transceiver casing.
RF Head Assembly - Refitting 24
To refit the RF Head assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Fit the coupling element to the EIA output on the RF Head assembly.
(2)
Adjust the collar on the rotating joint until the bottom of the collar is approximately 2 mm above the bottom of the rotating joint (see Figure 8).
(3)
Fit the coupling element to the rotating joint, ensuring that the coupling element is positioned correctly.
(4)
Fit the three screws and washers into the collar and EIA connector.
(5)
Support the RF Head by loosely securing the bracket assemblies in position.
(6)
Tighten the three rotating joint screws.
(7)
The gap between the collar and EIA connector must be set so that the joint between the two is not at an angle.
(8)
Tighten the bracket assembly screws to secure the RF Head in position.
Heading Line Setting-up 25
Check the heading line alignment after Heading LIne PCB replacement. During the Heading Line alignment procedure, the ship must be stationary on a known fixed heading and must have bearing information from the gyro compass. The ship should be alongside; less accurate results will be obtained if at anchor or at a buoy.
Page 6.14
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 Checking the Alignment 26
With the vessel stationary, proceed as follows: (1)
Switch ON the Display.
(2)
Select HEAD UP mode and a 6 mile range.
(3)
Select a stationary target in visual range and which paints an echo.
(4)
Compare a compass bearing of the target with the bearing of the echo paint on the display. Note the degree and direction of discrepancy.
To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) 27
Any error present in the Heading Line may be adjusted as follows: (1)
Switch the Gearbox Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Switch all supplies to STANDBY.
(3)
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
(4)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(5)
Slide the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(6)
Slacken the two pillars securing the HL PCB assembly.
(7)
Hold the antenna secure.
(8)
Move the pcb assembly the required amount to correct the mis-alignment (graduations on the bracket are at 2 degree intervals).
NOTE: Movement of the PCB in the direction of the aerial rotation will cause the bearing reading of the echo paint to move in a counter clockwise direction and vice versa. (9)
Tighten the two pillars to secure the HL PCB assembly.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis back to its normal position and secure.
(11)
Refit the outer cover. DO NOT TIGHTEN.
(12)
Set the safety switch to ON.
(13)
Set the display to RUN and check the visual and PPI display bearing of the known target.
(14)
To make any further adjustment, repeat step (8) and secure the cover.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.15
KH1250 Chapter 6 DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A7) 28
The locations of the modules and assemblies in the Downmast transceiver are shown on Figure 9.
Access 29
Access to the modules and assemblies is attained by releasing the six captive screws securing the cover in position and then removing the cover.
Note: When securing the cover, take care not to damage the RF sealing strip. Electronic Assembly - Removal 30
The electronic assembly is the assembly of the control board and Rx monitor board onto the modulator unit, ie the modulator unit is what is left after the control board and Rx board are removed. The assembly may be removed as one unit, or the boards comprising the assembly may be removed separately. To remove the electronic assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Disconnect the external cableforms from plugs PLB and PLK on the Control board.
(3)
Disconnect the internal cableforms from plugs PLA, C, D, E and M on the Control board.
(4)
Disconnect PLB and PLC on the Rx Monitor board, if fitted.
(5)
Release the cableforms from the quick release cable clamps.
(6)
Disconnect PLC from the Modulator and note the position of the two magnetron cables which connect the RF Head magnetron to the modulator.
(7)
Remove the safety block and then disconnect the two cables from the modulator.
(8)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic assembly in position and remove the assembly.
Page 6.16
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 Control Board - Removal 31
The Control Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Control Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(3)
Remove the nine pillars securing the Control Board to the electronic assembly and remove the board.
Rx Monitor Board - Removal 32
The Rx Monitor Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Rx Monitor board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(3)
Remove the five pillars securing the Rx Monitor board to the electronic assembly and remove the board.
Receiver Board - Removal 33
To remove the Receiver Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of wiring to the Receiver Assembly and disconnect.
(2)
Remove the three pillars securing the cover to the Receiver Assembly.
(3)
Remove the five pillars securing the Receiver Board to the chassis and remove the board.
Tune PCB - Removal 34
To remove the Tune PCB, proceed as follows: (1)
Disconnect wiring to the Tune PCB.
(2)
Remove the two pillars securing the Tune PCB to the rear of the Receiver Assembly and remove the pcb.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.17
KH1250 Chapter 6 Power Supply Assembly - Removal (See Figure 6) 35
To remove the Power Supply Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove connectors from the Power Supply Assembly.
(2)
Refer to Figure 9 and release the four captive screws securing the Power Supply Assembly to the transceiver casing. Remove the Power Supply Assembly.
Magnetron - Removal (See Figure 7) CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 36
To remove the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Disconnect wiring to the Magnetron.
(2)
Remove the six bolts, (three located at the front, three located at the back), securing the Magnetron to the RF Head assembly.
(3)
Remove the Magnetron and retain the RFI gasket.
Magnetron - Refitting CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 37
To refit the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Fit the RFI gasket between the Magnetron and Circulator.
(2)
Perform the reverse of paragraph 36, ensuring that the earth braid is connected.
Fan Assembly - Removal 38
To remove the Fan Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of wiring to the fan and disconnect.
(2)
Loosen the four bolts securing the Fan Assembly to the RF Head and remove the Fan Assembly.
Page 6.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 RF Head Assembly - Removal (See Figure 7) 39
To remove the RF Head Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove the three screws securing the semi-rigid co-ax cable to the RF outlet.
(2)
Remove the bolts securing the sealing flange to the top of the case.
(3)
Remove the bolts securing the circulator to the top of the case.
(4)
Remove the bolts securing the RF Head angle brackets to the back of the case.
Note: When removing the RF Head angle brackets support the RF Head. (5)
Lift the semi-rigid co-ax and/or lower the RF Head to release the coupling element.
(6)
Remove the RF Head from the transceiver.
RF Head Assembly - Refitting 40
To refit the RF Head assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Loosely secure the RF Head assembly in position on its mounting brackets.
(2)
Fit the bolts to secure the circulator to the top of the case and tighten.
(3)
Tighten the bracket securing bolts.
(4)
Refit the top seal.
(5)
Refit the semi-rigid co-ax, ensuring that the joint is touching all the way round and is not at an angle.
(6)
Ensure that the gap between the flanges is not at an angle.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.19
KH1250 Chapter 6 TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A41 or CAE-A42) 41
Access to the Heading Line PCB is attained by using a 12 mm spanner to remove the six bolts securing the cover in position and then hinging the cover down.
Heading Line Assembly - Removal 42
To remove the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of the pointer on the heading line scale
(2)
Remove the connector from the Heading LIne Assembly.
(3)
Remove the cableform from the quick release cable clamp.
(4)
Release the two shouldered pillars and remove the assembly.
Heading Line Assembly - Refitting 43
To refit the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Butt the assembly up against the top of the casting.
(2)
Slide the assembly towards the disc. when the assembly is in position loosely secure with the shouldered pillars.
(3)
Adjust the position of the assembly so that the pointer is in the same position as prior to removal. Secure the pillars.
(4)
Refer to Heading Line Setting-up, paragraph 44.
Heading Line Setting-up 44
Check the heading line alignment after Heading LIne PCB replacement. During the Heading Line alignment procedure, the ship must be stationary on a known fixed heading and must have bearing information from the gyro compass. The ship should be alongside; less accurate results will be obtained if at anchor or at a buoy. Checking the Alignment 45
With the vessel stationary, or at anchor, proceed as follows: (1)
Switch ON the Display.
(2)
Select HEAD UP mode and a 6 mile range.
(3)
Select a stationary target which can be seen by the eye and which paints an echo on the screen.
(4)
Take a compass bearing of the target, and compare this with the bearing of the echo paint on the display. Note the degree and direction of discrepancy.
Page 6.20
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) 46
Any error present in the Heading Line may be adjusted as follows: (1)
Switch the Gearbox Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Switch all supplies to STANDBY.
(3)
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
(4)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(5)
Move the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(6)
Slacken the two pillars securing the HL PCB assembly.
(7)
Hold the antenna secure.
(8)
Move the pcb assembly the required amount to correct the mis-alignment. (Graduations on the bracket are at 2 degree intervals).
Note: Movement of the PCB in the direction of the aerial rotation will cause the bearing reading of the echo paint to move in a counter clockwise direction and visa versa. (9)
Tighten the two pillars to secure the HL PCB assembly.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis back to its normal position and secure with the six captive screws
(11)
Refit the outer cover. DO NOT TIGHTEN.
(12)
Set the safety switch to ON.
(13)
Set the display to RUN and check the visual and PPI display bearing of the known target.
(14)
To make any further adjustment, repeat step (8)
(15)
Secure the rear cover.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.21
KH1250 Chapter 6
HEADING LINE PCB MODULATOR ASSEMBLY ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY (HINGED DOWN)
RECEIVER BOARD
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
RF HEAD ASSEMBLY
ROTATING JOINT
CONTROL BOARD
CD-0282
Figure 5 - Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations
Page 6.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
FOUR CAPTIVE SCREWS
CD-0280
Figure 6 - Power Supply Assembly
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.23
KH1250 Chapter 6
CIRCULATOR/MAGNETRON SUPPORT BRACKET
MAGNETRON
MAGNETRON EARTH BRAID CABLE
RECEIVER BOARD
TUNE SUPPLY PCB
RECEIVER/LNFE SUPPORT BRACKET LOW NOISE FRONT END
OPTIONAL NOISE SOURCE
CD-0281
Figure 7 - RF Head Assembly Page 6.24
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
BOTTOM OF ROTATING JOINT
ROTATE UNTIL 2mm - 5mm OF THREAD IS PROTRUDING
COUPLING ELEMENT
CD-0298
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.25
KH1250 Chapter 6
RF HEAD ASSEMBLY
1
3
6SKB
DANGER High Voltage
CONTROL BOARD
RECEIVER BOARD
16kV 8PLA
MODULATOR ASSEMBLY
TUNE SUPPLY PCB
3PLA
FAN ASSEMBLY
3PLB 3SKF 3PLC
3PLM
RECEIVER MONITOR PCB
8PLB
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
DANGER
3SKD
CD-0297
Figure 9 - Downmast Transceiver: Module Locations
Page 6.26
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 7
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATION CONTENTS
Para 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Transmitter Frequency Magnetron Rating Magnetron Life Pulse Length and PRF Sync Output Receiver Type I.F. Video Output System Overall Noise Figure Operating Temperature Ranges Turning Mechanism, Upmast Transceiver Soft Start Unit, Downmast Transceiver
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 7.1
KH1250 Chapter 7
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 7.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 7
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1
The technical specifications for the MkVI Transceiver are as follows:
Transmitter: Frequency:
3050 ±10MHz
Magnetron Rating:
30kW nominal
Magnetron Life:
10,000 Hours typical
Pulse length and P.R.F: Short(S)
nominal 0.055m s 3000pps ±100 or 1500pps ±40
Medium(M)
nominal 0.25m s 750pps ±20 or 1500pps ±40
Long(L)
nominal 0.95m s 750pps ±20
Long-Low PRF(VL)
nominal 0.95m s 375pps ±10
Sync. Output:
NOTE
1 x 75 Ohm output (Upmast) 2 x 75 Ohm outputs (Downmast) not less than +12V amplitude
(1) The PRF oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency range of 2400-3400 Hz (nominal 3000 Hz). (2) Short pulse can be set to 3000 or 1500 Hz base. (3) Medium pulse can be set to 1500 or 750 Hz base. (4) Pulse to pulse jitter can be selected and set to ±15ms from nominal.
Receiver specifications are detailed overleaf.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 7.3
KH1250 Chapter 7 Receiver: Type
Logarithmic Receiver
I.F.
60MHz
Video Output
1 x 75W (Upmast) 2 x 75W( Downmast) +5.5 V to 6 V peak signal
System Overall Noise Figure
Nominal 4.5dB
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES Turning Mechanism, Upmast Transceiver Ambient Range 95% Humidity
-25° C to +70°C +40°C
Soft Start Unit, Downmast Transceiver Ambient Range 95% Humidity
Page 7.4
-15°C to +55°C +40°C
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CHAPTER 8 PARTS LIST CONTENTS Paragraph 1
Introduction
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Page MkVI Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190/*) Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41(40RPM), CAE-A42 (25RPM) Antenna (CAE-A36 (3.9m)), (CAE-A39 (2.8m High Speed)) Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Control PCB (CTX-A246) Modulator Assembly (CTX-A248) Modulator PCB (CTX-A247) Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) MKIV Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250) HL PCB (CAE-A180) Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*) Soft Start Unit 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159)
8.5 8.6 8.6 8.9 8.11 8.13 8.23 8.25 8.29 8.33 8.38 8.41 8.43 8.45
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Page MkVI Gearbox Assembly Turning Mechanism/Upmast Transceiver Assembly Downmast Transceiver Assembly Control PCB (CTX-A246): Layout Modulator Assembly (CTX-248): Layout Modulator (CTX-A247): Layout Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252): Layout Power Supply PCB (CTX-A238): Layout Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250): Layout HL PCB (CAE-A180): Layout Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*): Layout 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159): Layout
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
8.4 8.8 8.10 8.12 8.22 8.24 8.28 8.32 8.38 8.40 8.42 8.44
Page 8.1
KH1250 Chapter 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 8.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CHAPTER 8 PARTS LIST INTRODUCTION 1
This Chapter provides Parts Lists and drawings, showing layout and location information, to support the two versions of the MkVI Transceiver.
2
The Parts Lists are presented in tabular form and provide a description and Kelvin Hughes part number for each item labelled on the associated drawing. Items are cross referenced to the parts list by a number within a circle, or by a circuit reference.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.3
KH1250 Chapter 8
15 16 17 11
2
34
8
27
32
6
30 9 37 7
35 25
29 10
24 36 33
39 40
18
5 13 14 1 20
19
23
26 41 42 44 3
22
21
43
12
28 38
2
4 45
31
CD-0656
Figure 1
Page 8.4
Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190-*): Layout Diagram
Figure 1
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 Table 1: MkVI Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190/*) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
1
OPTO UNIT ASSY
CAE-A188
2
OPTO DISC
CAE-1027
3
SCREENING DISC (A225 GLAND)
CAE-1317
4
SCREENING DISC (A216 GLAND)
CAE-1319
5
LABEL 440V
CAE-1324
6
GEARWHEEL & PINION 2ND STAGE (HELICAL)
CAE-1355
7
GEARWHEEL 3RD STAGE (HELICAL)
CAE-1356
8
TOP PLATE
CAE-1357
9
BEARING SPACER (UPPER)
CAE-1359
10
BEARING CLAMP (LOWER)
CAE-1402
11
BEARING CLAMP (TOP)
CAE-1361
12
OPTO DISC HOLDER
CAE-1363
13
BOLT SPECIAL (COVER PLATE)
CAE-1366
14
WASHER M8 RETAINING (FIBRE)
CAE-1367
15
SHIM (0.05)
CAE-1368/2
16
SHIM (0.13)
CAE-1368/3
17
SHIM (0.25)
CAE-1368/4
18
TOP COVER
CAE-1370
19
MOTOR COVER
CAE-1371
20
OPTO POINTER
CAE-1395
21
BEARING CLAMP (LOWER
CAE-1558
22
CABLE BLANK (M16)
CAE-1510
23
PILLAR OPTO BRACKET
CAE-1511
24
PINION & SHAFT
CAE-1548
25
GEARWHEEL & PINION 1ST STAGE (HELICAL)
CAE-1359
26
MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE
CAE-1550
27
SEALING RING
TCR-1205
28
CIRCLIP TYPE 1300-55-CS-ZD ANDERSON
35-581-012
29
NILOS RING TYPE 7213AVH RING BELT LTD
35-613-004
30
NILOS RING TYPE 7217AVH RING BELT LTD
35-613-005
31
SEAL TYPE A65 x 80 x 8 NBR-02 BARNWELL
35-781-741
32
BEARING ANGULAR CONTACT 85 x 150 x 28 TYPE 7217B TVP FAG
45-173-1552
33
BEARING ANGULAR CONTACT 65 x 120 x 23 TYPE 7213B TVB FAG
45-173-1553
34
BEARING 30 x 62 x 16 TYPE 6206-2RSR FAG
45-173-1554
35
BEARING 12 x 28 x 8 TYPE 6001-2RSR FAG
45-173-1557
36
BEARING 20 x 47 x 14 TYPE 6204-2RSR FAG
45-173-1558
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.5
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 1: MkVI Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190/*) Parts List (continued) ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
37
BEARING 25 x 52 x 15 TYPE 6205-2RSR FAG
45-173-1555
38
BEARING 30 x 55 x 13 TYPE 6006-2RSR FAG
45-173-1556
39
LOVEJOY JAW COUPLING No.U4-26-480 SIMPLATROLL LTD
ZM1757
40
COUPLING SPIDER (STANDARD) No.U4-26-736 SIMPLATROLL LTD
45-176-003
41
CAE-A190 (25 rpm) MOTOR 3PH 0.37kW 4 POLE 220/440V 50 Hz GORTON ENG
45-682-2007
42
CAE-A190/2 (40 rpm) MOTOR 3PH 0.37kW 2 POLE 220/440V 50 Hz GORTON ENG
45-682-2008
43
TUBE CARBON LOADED 6.75 O/D x 1 mm WALL RFI SHIELDING LTD
5445-928
44
CABLE GLAND 85-267-885 BRIGHT NICKEL PLATE TO BS1224 LAPP CABLE
ZM-1672
45
CABLE GLAND 85-267-887 BRIGHT NICKEL PLATE TO BS1224 LAPP CABLE
ZM-1674
TABLE 2: Turning Mechanism CAE-A41 (40 RPM), CAE-A42 (25 RPM) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
ASSY OF ROTATING JOINT (Mk 6)
CAE-A181
ASSY OF COAX TERMINALS BRACKET
CAE-A205
ASSY OF FITTING KIT FOR S BAND Mk 6
CAE-A220
ASSY OF CABLEFORM (SW1)
CAE-A227
SHIM WASHER
CAE-A1189
SEAL PLATE (Mk 6)
CAE-A1437
SEAL (Mk 6)
CAE-A1438
ASSY OF Mk 6 GEARBOX (25 RPM)
CAE-A190
FITTING KIT
CAE-A223
SPARES KIT
KSK-A2/23
ASSY OF Mk 6 GEARBOX (40 RPM)
CAE-A190/2
FITTING KIT
CAE-A222
SPARES KIT
KSK-A2/22
TABLE 3: Antenna (CAE-A36 (3.9m)), (CAE-A39 (2.8m High Speed)) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
Page 8.6
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
SPARES KIT 3.9m (CAE-A36)
KSK-A1/40
SPARES KIT 2.8m (CAE-A39)
KSK-A1/41
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION SEMI-RIGID RF CO-AXIAL CABLE S-BAND RF CABLE FITTING KIT
KELVIN HUGHES Part No. CAE-A43
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.7
KH1250 Chapter 8
1
8
2
5 12
11
10
6
3
7
4
9
CD-1418
Figure 2
Page 8.8
Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): Layout Diagram
Figure 2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 4: Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) Parts List ITEM NUMBER 1
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
ASSY OF ROTATING JOINT
CAE-A181
COVER ROTATING JOINT
CAE-1430
2
ASSY OF MK VI GEARBOX
CAE-A190 or A190/2
3
ASSY OF PSU
CAE-A202
4
ASSY OF (UPMAST) RF HEAD ‘S’ BAND
CAE-A203
ASSY OF L.N.F.E. UNIT
CAE-A217
ASSY OF TUNE SUPPLY PCB
CTX-A250
ASSY OF RECEIVER UNIT
CTX-A296
ASSY OF EARTH BRAID MAGNETRON
CTX-A308
ASSY OF MAGNETRON
CTX-A309
ASSY OF OPTO/CONTROL BD C/FORM
CAE-A204
ASSY OF CO-AX TERMINAL BRACKET
CAE-A205
ASSY OF PSU/MODULATOR C/FORM
CAE-A207
ASSY OF CONT/RECEIVER C/FORM
CAE-A208
ASSY OF R.X. MON. BD TO NOISE DIODE C/FORM
CAE-A213
FITTING KIT FOR S-BAND MK VI
CAE-A220
ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-A294
5
6
ASSY OF CONTROL PCB
CTX-A246
ASSY OF (CHASSIS) MK6 MODULATOR 25kW
CTX-A248
ASSY OF CONTROL BD/RX MON. C/FORM
CTX-A300
TUNE VOLT BD TO LNFE C/FORM
CTX-A303
ASSY OF FAN
CTX-A312
SHIM WASHER
CAE-1189
BRACKET FAN
CAE-1421
8
SHROUD ROTATING JOINT
CAE-1431
9
BUNG
CAE-1436
LABEL UNIT
CAE-1493
10
BRACKET ELECTRONICS PANEL (RIGHT)
CAE-1513
11
BRACKET ELECTRONICS PANEL (LEFT)
CAE-1514
12
HOOK-ELECTRONICS UNIT SUPPORT
CTX-1289
SPARES KIT A COASTAL
KSK-A1/18
SPARES KIT B DEEPSEA
KSK-A2/20
7
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.9
KH1250 Chapter 8
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
17 11
3
4 10
5
6
8
7
9 18
19
20
22
21
CD-0267
Figure 3
Page 8.10
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): Layout Diagram
Figure 3
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 5: Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
1
CLIP WIRE HARNESS PT.No.WHC-375-01 (9.5 DIA) RICHCO
35-766-512
2
ASSY OF RF HEAD ‘S’ BAND DOWN MAST
CTX-A290
ASSY OF L.N.F.E. UNIT
CAE-A217
ASSY OF TUNE SUPPLY PCB
CTX-A250
ASSY OF RECEIVER UNIT
CTX-A296
ASSY OF EARTH BRAID MAGNETRON
CTX-A308
ASSY OF MAGNETRON
CTX-A309
3
MOUNTING BAR R.H.
CTX-1302
4
SEAL PLATE-LOWER
CTX-1263
4
SEAL PLATE UPPER
CTX-1264
5
MOUNTING BAR L.H.
CTX-1303
6
ASSY OF ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-A294
ASSY OF CONTROL PCB
CTX-A246
ASSY OF (CHASSIS) MK6 MODULATOR 25kW
CTX-A248
7
ASSY OF PSU/CONTROL BOARD CABLEFORM
CTX-A299
8
CLIP WIRE HARNESS PT.No.WHC-500-01 DIA) RICHCO
9
ASSY OF P.S.U.
CAE-A202
10
ASSY OF PSU/MODULATOR BD. CABLEFORM
CTX-A301
11
CLAMP CABLE
CTX-1305
12
CLIP WIRE HARNESS PT.No.WHC-250-01 (6.5 DIA) RICHCO
35-766-511
13
ASSY OF CONTROL BD./RECEIVER CABLEFORM
CTX-A302
14
ASSY OF CONTROL BD./RX.MONITOR BD. CABLEFORM
CTX-A300
15
BRACKET ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-1290
16
TRANSMITTER CASE
CTX-1252
17
SOCKET CO-AX PANEL MTG TYPE L604/S/Ni BELLING LEE
40-741-139-01
18
TRANSMITTER COVER
CTX-1262
19
SUPPORT HOOK ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-1289
20
BLOCK THREADED
CTX-1304
21
SCREW HEX HEAD STEEL M8 x 35LG ZINC PLATE & PASS
20-251-1223-27
22
SEAL CIRCULATOR
CTX-1265
ASSY OF FITTING KIT FOR MK6 DOWNMAST ‘S’ TRANSCEIVER
CTX-A313
SPARES KIT ‘A’ COASTAL
KSK-1A/39
SPARES KIT ‘B’ DEEPSEA
KSK-2A/21
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
(12.7
35-766-513
Page 8.11
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1434
Figure 4 - Control PCB (CTX-A246) Layout Page 8.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019VVVV
R2
NOT USED
R3
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R4
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R5
100R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-10M
R6
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47M
R7
12K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-12M
R8
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R9
RESISTOR 120R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-12M
R10
RESISTOR 390R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-39M
R11
RESISTOR 150R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-15M
R12
RESISTOR 680R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-68M
R13
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R14
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R15
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R16
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R17
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47M
R18
15K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-15M
R19
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R20
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R21
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R22
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R23
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R24
RESISTOR 220R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-22M
R25
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R26
RESISTOR 75R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-75M
R27
RESISTOR 680R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-68M
R28
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R29
RESISTOR 2K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-27M
R30
470K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-47M
R31
8K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-82M
R32
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R33
680 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-68M
R34
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R35
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R36
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R37
470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-47M
R38
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R39
9K1 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-91M
R40
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
40-518-163-47M
Page 8.13
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R41
27R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-380-27M
R42
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R43
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R44
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R45
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R46
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R47
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R48
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R49
RESISTOR 68R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-68M
R50
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R51
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R52
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R53
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R54
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R55
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R56
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R57
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R58
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R59
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R60
RESISTOR 47R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-47M
R61
1M
40-518-165-10M
R62
RESISTOR 47R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-47M
R63
470K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-47M
R64
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R65
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R66
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R67
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R68
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R69
18K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-18M
R70
20K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-20M
R71
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R72
18K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-18M
R73
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R74
RESISTOR 5K6 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-56M
R75
68K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-68M
R76
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R77
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R78
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R79
RESISTOR 1K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-12M
R80
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R81
220K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-22M
Page 8.14
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R82
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R83
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R84
1M
40-518-165-10M
R85
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R86
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R87
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47M
R88
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R89
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R90
NOT USED
R91
RESISTOR 330R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-33M
R92
RESISTOR 75R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-75M
R93
NOT USED
R94
NOT USED
R95
NOT USED
R96
NOT USED
R97
NOT USED
R98
NOT USED
R99
NOT USED
R100
NOT USED
R101
NOT USED
R102
NOT USED
R103
NOT USED
R104
NOT USED
R105
NOT USED
R106
NOT USED
R107
NOT USED
R108
NOT USED
R109
NOT USED
R110
NOT USED
R111
NOT USED
R112
NOT USED
R113
NOT USED
R114
NOT USED
R115
NOT USED
R116
NOT USED
R117
NOT USED
R118
NOT USED
R119
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R120
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R121
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R122
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
Page 8.15
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R123
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R124
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R125
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R126
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R127
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R128
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCESS 40 101-019
40-518-161-47
RV1
50K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-50
RV2
20K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-20
RV3
20K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-20
RV4
20K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-20
C1
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C2
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C3
6n8F +/-5% 63V TYPE FKP-2
45-565-4862-68
C4
100pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-10
C5
2u2F +/-20% TYPE TAG
40-566-6485-22M
C6
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C7
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C8
470pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-47
C9
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C10
100uF +/-20% 50V TYPE 037-51101
C11
470nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP-47ONK
45-565-4854-47
C12
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C13
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C14
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C15
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C16
1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK
45-565-4842-10
C17
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C18
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C19
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C20
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C21
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C22
10uF +/-20%50V TYPE RSH
45-566-9586-10
C23
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C24
470nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP-47ONK
45-565-4854-47
C25
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C26
1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK
45-565-4842-10
C27
680pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-68
C28
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C29
1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK
45-565-4842-10
Page 8.16
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
C30
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C31
2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K
45-565-4842-22
C32
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C33
10uF +/-20% 25V TYPE TAG
40-566-5186-10M
C34
1uF +/-20% TYPE TAG 1M35
40-566-6485-10M
C35
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C36
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C37
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C38
1uF +/-20% TYPE TAG 1M35
40-566-6485-10M
C39
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C40
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C41
220nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP2-220NK
45-565-4854-22
C42
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C43
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C44
22uF +/-20%25V TYPE TAG22M25
45-566-5186-22M
C45
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C46
330pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-33
C47
NOT USED
C48
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C49
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C50
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C51
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C52
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C53
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C54
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C55
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C56
NOT USED
C57
NOT USED
C58
NOT USED
C59
NOT USED
C60
NOT USED
C61
NOT USED
C62
NOT USED
C63
NOT USED
C64
NOT USED
C65
NOT USED
C66
NOT USED
C67
NOT USED
C68
NOT USED
C69
NOT USED
C70
NOT USED
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.17
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
C71
470nF +/-10% 250V
45-565-5154-47
C72
220nF +/-10% 250 V TYPE MKS4
45-565-5154-22
C73
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C74
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C75
47pF TYPE WDC1J470JPA
45-564-5724-10
C76
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C77
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
L1
INDUCTOR 100m H 0.91A R622LY-10K TOKO
45-676-3777-10
L2
INDUCTOR 100m H 0.91A R622LY-10K TOKO
45-676-3777-10
L3
INDUCTOR 100m H 0.91A R622LY-10K TOKO
45-676-3777-10
D1
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D2
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D3
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D4
L.E.D. AXIAL RED TYPE MV55A
45-628-917
D5
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 18V 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
40-666-3517-01M
D6
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D7
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D8
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D9
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D10
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D11
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D12
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D13
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D14
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D15
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D16
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D17
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D18
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D19
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D20
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D21
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D22
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D23
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D24
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D25
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D26
L.E.D. AXIAL RED TYPE MV55A
45-628-917
D27
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D28
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
Page 8.18
Issue 4. Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
D29
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
D30
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D31
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D32
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D33
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D34
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D35
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 4V7 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
40-666-3157-01M
D36
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D37
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D38
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D39
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D40
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D41
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D42
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D43
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D44
NOT USED
D45
NOT USED
D46
NOT USED
D47
NOT USED
D48
NOT USED
D49
NOT USED
D50
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
D51
NOT USED
D52
NOT USED
D53
NOT USED
D54
NOT USED
D55
NOT USED
D56
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D57
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D58
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D59
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D60
DIODE VOLTAGE REGUALTOR 13V 5% TYPE BZX79-C13
45-666-3517-13
S1
SWITCH SLIDE SPDT TYPE 25436 NAH P.C. MOUNTING
40-612-219
IC1
NOT USED
IC2
I/C VOLTAGE REGULATOR ADJUSTABLE 1.5A TYPE LM317T
45-652-4071
IC3
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM311N
45-652-3009-07
IC4
I/C CMOS HEX INVERTING BUFFER TYPE CD 4049B
45-654-6108
IC5
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC6
I/C HEX SCHMITT TRIGGER CMOS TYPE CD40106BCN
45-654-6067-12
Issue 4, Amdt. 2 (Mar 01)
40-666-2059M
40-666-2059M
Page 8.19
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
IC7
I/C QUAD 2 I/P AND GATE CMOS TYPE CD4081BE
45-654-6068-12
IC8
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P EXCLUSIVE OR GATE TYPE CD4070BE
45-654-6071-12
IC9
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT OR GATE TYPE CD4071BE
45-654-6084-12
IC10
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P NAND GATE TYPE CD4011BE
45-654-6074-12
IC11
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P NOR GATE TYPE CD4001BE
IC12
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P EXCLUSIVE OR GATE TYPE CD4070BE
45-654-6071-12
IC13
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC14
I/C CMOS DUAL ‘D’ TYPE FLIP FLOP TYPE CD4013B
45-654-6111
IC15
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC16
I/C CMOS HEX D TYPE FLIP FLOP TYPECD40174BE
IC17
I/C CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDE BY N 4 BIT BIN. DOWN COUNTER CD4526BE
IC18
I/C QUAD 2 I/P AND GATE CMOS TYPE CD4081BE
45-654-6068-12
IC19
I/C CMOS HEX INVERTING BUFFER TYPE CD 4049B
45-654-6108
IC20
I/C MONO MULTIVIBRATOR TYPE MC14538BPC
45-654-6095-16
IC21
I/C MONO MULTIVIBRATOR TYPE MC14538BPC
45-654-6095-16
IC22
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC23
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC24
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC25
I/C CMOS QUAD AND-OR SELECT TYPE CD4019BE
IC26
I/C CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDE BY N 4 BIT BIN. DOWN COUNTER CD4526BE
IC27
I/C CMOS PROGRAMMABLE TIMER TYPE CD4541BE
IC28
I/C HEX SCHMITT TRIGGER CMOS TYPE CD40106BCN
IC29
NOT USED
IC30
NOT USED
IC31
I/C DUAL VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM393
TR1
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
TR2
TRANSISTOR NPD DARLINGTON TYPE BD675
TR3
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
TR4
TRANSISTOR BC638 PNP
TR5
TRANSISTOR BC557B PNP
TR6
TRANSISTOR BC637 NPN
TR7
TRANSISTOR BC637 NPN
TR8
TRANSISTOR BC638 PNP
TR9
TRANSISTOR BC557B PNP
TR10
TRANSISTOR BC637 NPN
TR11
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
TR12
TRANSISTOR BC557B PNP
TR13
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
Page 8.20
45-654-6107
45-654-6107
45-654-6067-12
45-652-3018
45-666-5298
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
TR14 - TR23
NOT USED
TR24
TRANSISTOR TYPE MPSA92
TR25
TRANSISTOR BC638 PNP
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL10-CL-V NO.123696 (10WAY)
45-718-8051
PLB
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL14-CL-V NO. 123333736 (14WAY)
45-718-5139
PLC
CONNECTOR STRIP 20 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B20P-SHF-1AA
45-743-342
PLD
CONNECTOR STRIP 16 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-16P-SHF-1AA
45-743-2322
PLE
CONNECTOR STRIP 2 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-2P-SHF-1AA
45-741-5026
PLF
CONNECTOR STRIP 12 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-12P-SHF-1AA
45-743-1617
PLG
CONNECTOR STRIP 8 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-8P-SHF-1AA
45-742-6013
PLH
CONNECTOR STRIP 6 WAY TYPA NH PT NO. B-6P-SHF-1AA
45-742-3155
PLJ
CONNECTOR STRIP 3 WAY TYPE 5414 (TRIFUCON) PT NO. 39-26-3030
45-741-6152
PLK
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL5-CL-V NO. 123646 (5WAY)
45-741-5140
PLM
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL6-CL-V NO. 123656 (6WAY)
45-741-5145
LK1,LK2,LK3,LK4, LK5, LK6, LK7, LK8,LK9,LK10, LK11,LK12
PIN HEADER SINGLE ROW (20 PIN) TYPE M20-999-2006
45-743-3202
LK1-10
LINK TYPE M7566-06
45-741-5032
TP1-16,18,20 and TP25 to TP27
TERMINAL TEST RAISED LOOP TYPE 200-207 RED
45-718-5207
FS1
MULTI-FUSE STANDARD TYPE MFR030 (0.3 A 60 V)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.21
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1432
Figure 5 - Modulator Assembly (CTX-A248) Layout Page 8.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 7: Modulator Assembly (CTX-A248) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
ASSY OF MK6 MODULATOR PCB (25KW)
CTX-A247
R12
RESISTOR 15OR 5% W/W STYLE D BS91140-F006
40-511-1231-15
R13
RESISTOR 2R2 5% W/W STYLE D BS91140-F006
40-511-1239-22M
CSR2
THYRISTOR TYPE XT2116-1201-3
45-666-877
SL1
SATURABLE REACTOR
XT3812
C10
CAPACITOR 0.01uF +/-20% 1000V DC WKG POLYPROPYLENE
45-565-4813-10
D9
DIODE FAST RECOVERY 1200V TYPE MF12-1200
45-666-2454
D10
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCH FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E
45-666-2409-05
D11
RECTIFIER 1000V FAST RECOVERY INSULATED TAB TYPE BYT30PI-1000
D12
RECTIFIER 1000V FAST RECOVERY INSULATED TAB TYPE BYT30PI-1000
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.23
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1433
Figure 6 - Modulator (CTX-A247) Layout Page 8.24
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 8: Modulator PCB (CTX-A247) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
OVERSWING NETWORK
CTX-A109
R1
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R2
RESISTOR 47R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-47M
R3
RESISTOR 4R7 1% TYPE MRS25
45-528-4169-47
R4
RESISTOR OR68 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
45-528-324-04
R5
RESISTOR OR68 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
45-528-324-04
R6
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE DX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-224-15
R7
RESISTOR 10R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-10M
R8
RESISTOR 100R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-10M
R9
RESISTOR 100R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-10M
R10
RESISTOR 47R 5% W/W STYLE KB BSCECC 40 201-002
40-513-330-47M
R11
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R14
RESISTOR 270K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-27
R15
RESISTOR 330K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-33M
R16
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-15M
R17
RESISTOR 330K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-33M
C1
CAPACITOR 0.022uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C2
CAPACITOR 0.033uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C3
CAPACITOR 0.033uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C4
CAPACITOR 0.047uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C5
CAPACITOR 0.082uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1631
C6
CAPACITOR 0.082uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1631
C7
CAPACITOR 33nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP-33NK
C8
CAPACITOR 0.47uF 100V 10% TYPE MKS-10
C9
CAPACITOR 0.47uF 100V 10% TYPE MKS-10
L1
COIL (2 TURNS)
45-676-213
L2
COIL (3 TURNS)
45-676-214
L3
COIL-pFN
45-676-207
L4
CHOKE 38uH 1.5A D.C
45-676-371
L5
CHOKE 25mH 1.5A D.C
45-676-212
T1
TOROID P.F.N. ASSY
TH5542-A1
T2
TRANSFORMER-SCR TRIGGER
TH5438
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
45-565-4843-33
Page 8.25
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 8: Modulator PCB (CTX-A247) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
T3
TRANSFORMER PULSE HIGH FREQUENCY TYPE PT8 (FARNELL No.148-919)
T4
ASSY OF PULSE TRANSFORMER
CTX-A104
SL2A1
FERRITE RING CORE TYPE MM625/T3
35-861-010
SL2A2
FERRITE RING CORE TYPE MM625/T3
35-861-010
D1
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D2
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D3
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D4
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D5
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D6
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D7
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E
45-666-2409-05
D8
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D9-D12
NOT USED
D13
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 150V NOM STYLE BZT03-C150
45-666-3516-14
CSR1
SCR TYPE FO 810 NH
45-666-872
RLA
RELAY MINIATURE P.C. 24V COIL 1 POLE C/O TYPE RP420-024 or TYPE 26-750-232-740
45-617-113 (PED only)
RLB
RELAY MINIATURE P.C. 24V COIL 1 POLE C/O TYPE RP420-024 or TYPE 26-750-232-740
45-617-113 (PED only)
RLC
RELAY MINIATURE P.C. 24V COIL 1 POLE C/O TYPE RP420-024 or TYPE 26-750-232-740
45-617-113 (PED only)
S1
SWITCH SLIDE SPDT TYPE 25436 NAH P.C. MOUNTING
40-612-219
PLA
CONNECTOR STRIP 12WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-12P-SHF-1AA
45-743-1617
PLB
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL4-CL-V No.123636 (4WAY)
45-741-8046
PLC
CONNECTOR STRIP 2WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-2P-SHF-1AA
45-741-5026
PLD
CONNECTOR STRIP 8WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-8P-SHF-1AA
45-742-6013
TP1,TP2,TP3,TP4, TP5, TP6,TP7,TP8
TEST TERMINALTYPE 200-207 (RAISED LOOP)
45-718-5207
Page 8.26
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF. TP9,TP10
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
PCB TAB CONNECTOR TYPE P114
35-867-6304
WASHER
CDY-1074A
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.27
KH1250 Chapter 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 8.28
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1435
Figure 7 - Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.29
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 9: Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Parts List (continued) TABLE 9: Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R2
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R3
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R4
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R5
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R6
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R7
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R8
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R9
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R10
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R11
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R12
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R13
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R14
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R15
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R16
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R17
RESISTOR 15K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-15M
R18
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R19
NOT USED
R20
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R21
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R22
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R23
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R24
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R25
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R26
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R27
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R28
RESISTOR 1M 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-165-10M
R29
RESISTOR 75R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-75M
R30
RESISTOR 15K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-15M
R31
RESISTOR 56K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-56M
R32
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R33
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R34
RESISTOR 22R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-22M
Page 8.30
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 9: Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R35
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R36
RESISTOR 100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
RV1
POTENTIOMETER 5K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1582-50
C1
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9617-10
C2
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C3
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C4
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C5
CAPACITOR 4n7F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-4N7K
45-565-4842-47
C6
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C7
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C8
CAPACITOR 1nF+/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 1NK
45-565-4842-10
C9
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C10
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C11
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9617-10
C12
CAPACITOR 220nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP2-220NK
25-565-4854-22
C13
CAPACITOR 220pF 10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-22
C14
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C15
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C16
CAPACITOR 15nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 15NK
45-565-4843-15
C17
CAPACITOR 47nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 47NK
45-565-4843-47
C18
CAPACITOR 15nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 15NK
45-565-4843-15
C19
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C20
CAPACITOR TANTALUM 0.47uF +/-20% 35V TYPE RSH
45-566-6484-47
L1
CHOKE 22uH TYPE SC30
45-676-3514-22
L2
CHOKE 22uH TYPE SC30
45-676-3514-22
D1
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D2
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D3
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D4
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D5
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D6
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D7
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.31
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
D8
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 5V1 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
40-666-389-01M
D9
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D10
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D11
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D12
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D13
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D14
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 24V 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
45-666-3517-24
D15
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D16
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
IC1
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC2
I/C/CMOS DUAL ‘D’ TYPE FLIP FLOP TYPE CD4013BE
45-654-6111
IC3
I/C HEX SCHMITT TRIGGER CMOS TYPE CD40106BCN
45-654-6067-12
IC4
I/C CMOS BINARY UP/DOWN COUNTER TYPE CD4516BE
45-654-6070-12
IC5
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC6
I/C CMOS BINARY UP/DOWN COUNTER TYPE CD4516BE
45-654-6070-12
IC7
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC8
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC9
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE M311N
45-652-3009-07
IC10
I/C CMOS HEX INVERTING BuFFER TYPE CD 4049B
45-654-6108
IC11
I/C OPTO COUPLER TYPE 6N136
45-667-322
IC12
I/C MONO MULTIVIBRATOR TYPE MC14538BPC
45-654-6095-16
IC13
I/C CMOS ANALOGUESWITCH TYPE DG417DJ
45-652-5037
IC14
I/C FET I/P OPERATIONAL AMP TYPE TL082CP
45-652-2118-16
TR1,TR2
TRANSISTOR PNP TYPE BCY70 TO BS9365 F009
40-666-5113M
PLA
CONNECTOR STRIP 12 WAY TYPE NH PT No.B12P-SHF-1AA
45-743-1617
PLB
CONNECTOR STRIP 2 WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-2P-SHF-1AA
45-741-5026
SKC
CO-AX SKT SMC (GOLD PLATED BODY) 50 OHM PCB TYPE C65NO7G999X99
45-741-1921
TP1 to 11
TERMINAL TEST RAISED LOOP TYPE 200-207-RED
45-718-5207
TB12, PCB TAB
CONNECTOR P114
35-867-6304
S1
D.I.L. 4 POLE SPST SWITCH TYPE SDS-4-023
45-612-222
Page 8.32
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1436
Figure 8 - Power Supply PCB (CTX-A283) Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.33
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
R1
RESISTOR 13K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
R2
NOT USED
R3
RESISTOR 6K8 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-68M
R4
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R5
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R6
RESISTOR 2K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-10M
R7
RESISTOR 2K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-10M
R8
RESISTOR 220R +/-5% 1.6W TYPE PR37 MULLARD
45-528-4161-22
R9
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R10
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R11
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R12
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R13
RESISTOR 4R7 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
40-513-239-47
R14
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R15
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R16
RESISTOR 100R 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-601-10M
R17
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R18
RESISTOR 330K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-33M
R19
RESISTOR 56K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-56M
R20
SURGE ARRESTOR TYPE Z21L821 INT. RECTIFIER
45-529-530
R21
RESISTOR 390K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-39M
R22
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R23
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R24
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R25
RESISTOR 33K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-33M
R26
RESISTOR 0R1 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
45-528-324-25M
R27
RESISTOR 8K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-82M
R28
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R29
RESISTOR 220R 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-601-22M
R30
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R31
RESISTOR 1M 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-22M
R32
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R33
RESISTOR 8K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-82M
R34
RESISTOR 2K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-10M
Page 8.34
45-518-603-13M
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
R35
RESISTOR 820K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-604-82M
R36
RESISTOR 15K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-15M
R37
RESISTOR 47K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-47M
R38
NOT USED
R39
NOT USED
R40
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R41
RESISTOR 1K5 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-15M
R42
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-162-47M
R43
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R44
RESISTOR 43K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-43M
R45
RESISTOR 24K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 4O 101-019
45-518-603-24M
R46
RESISTOR 47K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-47M
R47
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R48
RESISTOR 1K8 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-18M
R49
VARISTOR TYPE V33ZA1 (0.5 JOULE) GEN INSTR
45-529-537
R50
VARISTOR TYPE V33ZA1 (1 JOULE) GEN INSTR
45-529-538
RV1
POTENTIOMETER 200K +/-10% TYPE 3299W BOURNS
45-546-1584-20
RV2
POTENTIOMETER 5K +/-10% TYPE 3299W BOURNS
45-546-1582-50
RV3
POTENTIOMETER 5K +/-10% TYPE 3299W BOURNS
45-546-1582-50
C1
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 63V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-851)
45-566-9607-47
C2
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C3
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C4
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA(FARNELL 108-836)
45-566-9617-47
C5
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA(FARNELL 108-836)
45-566-9617-47
C6
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C7
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C8
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA(FARNELL 108-836)
45-566-9617-47
C9
NOT USED
C10
NOT USED
C11
NOT USED
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.35
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
C12
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C13
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C14
CAPACITOR 2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K DUBILIER
45-565-4842-22
C15
CAPACITOR 2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K DUBILIER
45-565-4842-22
C16
CAPACITOR 4u7F +/-20% 50V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-847)
45-566-9575-47
C17
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C18
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C19
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C20
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C21
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C22
CAPACITOR 4700uF +50-10% 63V TYPE 050-58472 MULLARD
45-566-9428-47
C23
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-849)
45-566-9617-10
C24
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C25
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C26
CAPACITOR 4N7F +/-20% 1000V DC WKG TYPE PC/HV/SLCR
45-565-4812-47
C27
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C28
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C29
CAPACITOR 10uF +/-20% 16V TYPE TAG 10M16 ITT
45-566-9316-10
C30
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C31
CAPACITOR SU SERIES 33uF +50/-20% 450V TYPE ECEB2WU330 PANASONIC (FARNELL 446-403)
45-562-9626-33
C32
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C33
CAPACITOR 2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K DUBILIER
45-565-4842-22
C34
CAPACITOR 1000nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP2-1000NK DUBILIER
45-565-4855-10
C35
CAPACITOR 1uF +/-20% 35V TYPE TAG 1M35 ITT
40-566-6485-10M
C36
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C37
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C38
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C39
CAPACITOR 1uF +/-20% 35V TYPE TAG 1M35 ITT
40-566-6485-10M
C40
CAPACITOR 22nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-22NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-22
C41
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 63V TYPE RSH ELNA
40-566-9607-10
Page 8.36
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
C42
CAPACITOR 10uF +/-20% 16V TYPE TAG 10M16 ITT
45-566-9316-10
C43
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 2200pF +/-10% 100V (MED K) TYPE WDKIJ222KBA W/DUBILIER
45-564-5592-22
C44
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C45
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C46
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-849)
45-566-9617-10
C47
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C48
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-849)
45-566-9617-10
S1
SLIDE SWITCH SPDT TYPE 25436 NAH P.C. MOUNTING APR/ISKRA LTD
40-612-219
FS1
FUSE 3A MULTIFUSE TYPE MFR300 BOURNS
FS2
FUSE 2.5A MULTIFUSE TYPE MFR250 BOURNS
FS3
FUSE 0.3A MULTIFUSE TYPE MFR030 BOURNS
FS4
FUSE LINK GLASS 5X20mm 5A TYPE S500 BESWICK
45-615-164-25
FUSEHOLDER PCB MOUNTING (20mm X 5mm) TYPE FX0456 BULGIN FOR FS4
45-712-371
D1
DIODE SCHOTTKY TYPE BYV10-60 SGS THOMSON
45-666-2459
D2
DIODE SCHOTTKY TYPE MBR745 GEN. INTRUMENTSor PBYR745 PHILIPS
45-666-2460
D3
DIODE SCHOTTKY TYPE MBR745 GEN. INTRUMENTSor PBYR745 PHILIPS
45-666-2460
D4
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916 TEXAS
40-666-2059M
D5
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 15V TYPE BZTO3-C15 MULLARD
45-666-3516-10
D6
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D7
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D8
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D9
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D10
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 82V TYPE BZTO3-C82 MULLARD
45-666-3516-06
D11
DIODE FAST RECOVERY TYPE BYV27-100 PHILIPS
45-666-2461
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.37
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
D12
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 82V TYPE BZTO3-C82 MULLARD
45-666-3516-06
D13
DIODE TYPE BAT85 MULLARD
45-666-2421
D14
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 3V3 5% TYPE BZX79-C3V3 TO CECC 50-005-005 MULLARD
40-666-394-01M
D15
DIODE TYPE BAT85 MULLARD
45-666-2421
D16
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916 TEXAS
40-666-2059M
D17
L.E.D. INDICATOR GREEN OVER GREEN BI-LEVEL TYPE 122-314-04 MARL
45-628-935
D18
L.E.D. INDICATOR GREEN OVER GREEN BI-LEVEL TYPE 122-314-04 MARL
45-628-935
IC1
NOT USED
IC2
I/C 5A STEP DOWN DC-DC REGULATOR HIGH VOLTAGE TYPE MAX724HCCK MAXIM OR LT1074HVCT LINEAR TECH
45-652-1012
IC3
I/C 5A STEP DOWN SWITCHING REGULATOR TYPE MAX724CCK MAXIM OR LT1074CTLINEAR TECH
45-652-1011
IC4
I/C 5A STEP DOWN SWITCHING REGULATOR TYPE MAX724CCK MAXIM OR LT1074CTLINEAR TECH
45-652-1011
IC5
I/C PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR TYPE SG3525AN MOTOROLA
45-652-1007
IC6
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555IPA INTERSIL
45-652-6004
IC7
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM311 SIGNETICS/
45-652-3009-07
IC8
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM311 SIGNETICS/
45-652-3009-07
TR1
TRANSISTOR HEXFET TYPE IRF540 MOTOROLA
45-666-791
TR2
TRANSISTOR HEXFET TYPE IRF540 MOTOROLA
45-666-791
TR3
TRANSISTOR NPN TYPE BC547B PHILIPS
45-666-6373
TI
TRANSFORMER 350V
45-671-290
L1
INDUCTOR HIGH CURRENT 1400 SERIES 47uH PT No 1447385 NEWPORT (FARNELL 482-572)
45-676-3686-47
L2
INDUCTOR HIGH CURRENT 1400 SERIES 47uH PT No 1447385 NEWPORT (FARNELL 482-572)
45-676-3686-47
L3
INDUCTOR TYPE 8RBSH HIGH CURRENT 47uH 1.77A DC TOKO PT No. 494 LYF-0088K (CIRKIT 34-62088)
45-676-3696-47
L4
INDUCTOR TYPE 8RBSH HIGH CURRENT 330uH 0.78A DC TOKO PT No. 494 HYF-0134K (CIRKIT 34-26134)
45-676-3697-33
L5
INDUCTOR HIGH CURRENT 1400 SERIES 47uH PT No 1447385 NEWPORT (FARNELL 482-572)
45-676-3686-47
L6
(INDUCTOR) FERRITE BEAD TYPE 4330-030-32120 (FX4002) PHILIPS
35-862-101
L7
CHOKE 17mH 0.5A DC
45-676-206
Page 8.38
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
L8
(INDUCTOR) FERRITE BEAD TYPE 4330-030-32120 (FX4002) PHILIPS
35-862-101
L9
INDUCTOR TYPE 8RBSH HIGH CURRENT 220uH 1.0A DC TOKO PT No. 494 HYF-0132K (CIRKIT 34-26132)
45-676-3697-22
LK1
PIN HEADER SINGLE ROW (20 PIN) TYPE M20-999-2006
45-743-3202
LK2
LINK TYPE M7566-06
45-741-5032
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL14-CL-V No 123736 (14 WAY) KLIPPON
45-718-5139
PLB
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL10-CL-V No 123696 (10 WAY) KLIPPON
45-718-8051
PLC
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL4-CL-V No 123636 (4 WAY) KLIPPON
45-741-8046
TP1 to TP12
TERMINAL TEST RAISED LOOP TYPE 200-207 RED W.HUGHES FARNELL 240-345)
45-718-5207
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.39
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1437
Figure 9 - Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250) Layout
TABLE 11: Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10
R2
RESISTOR 33OR 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-33
R3
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10
R4
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47
R5
RESISTOR 1K5 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-15
R6
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22
C3
CAPACITOR 10% 100nF 63V TYPE MMP1.100K DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
IC1
I/C VOLTAGE REGULATOR ADJUSTABLE 100mA TYPE LM317L NATIONAL
45-652-4069
IC3
I/C OP/AMP TYPE TL081CP TEXAS
45-652-2117-16
D1
DIODE V.REGULATOR BZX79C20 MULLARD
45-666-3517-20
D2
DIODE V.REGULATOR BZX79C18 MULLARD
45-666-3517-18
PLB
CONNECTOR STRIP 4 WAY TYPE NH PT No B4P-SHF-1AA JST/TAKBRO
45-741-8033
PLJ
CONNECTOR STRIP 6 WAY NH TYPE B 6P-SHF-1AA TAKBRO
45-742-3155
Page 8.40
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF. TP1,TP2
DESCRIPTION TEST TERMINAL TYPE 200-207 (RAISED LOOP) W.HUGHES
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
KELVIN HUGHES Part No. 45-718-5207
Page 8.41
KH1250 Chapter 8
OLD LAYOUT
NEW LAYOUT
CD-1438
Figure 10 - HL PCB (CAE-A180): Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.43
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 12: HL PCB (CAE-A180) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
RESISTOR 390R 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-39M
R2
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R3
RESISTOR 1K5 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-15M
R4
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R5
RESISTOR 22R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-22M
R6
RESISTOR 1K5 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-15M
R7
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 4O 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R8
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R9
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R10
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R11
RESISTOR 22R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-22M
R12
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R13
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 4O 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R14
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 4O 101-019
40-518-163-47M
C1
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C2
CAPACITOR 10uF -10+50% 63V TYPE 030-28109 MULLARD
40-566-7606-10
C3
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C4
CAPACITOR 10uF -10+50% 63V TYPE 030-28109 MULLARD
40-566-7606-10
C5
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C6
CAPACITOR 10uF -10+50% 63V TYPE 030-28109 MULLARD
40-566-7606-10
D1
DIODE FAST RECOVERY TYPE BYV27-100 PHILIPS
45-666-2461
D2
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR TYPE BZX79-C12
40-666-341-01M
D3
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR TYPE BZX79-C18
45-666-3517-18
TR1
TRANSISTOR TYPE 2N2904A
45-666-5110
TR2
TRANSISTOR TYPE 2N2904A
45-666-5110
TR3
TRANSISTOR NPN TYPE BC107B TO BS9365 F112 MULLARD
45-666-6352
Page 8.44
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 IC1, IC2
I/C OPTO SWITCH SCHMITT TRIGGER O/P TYPE H0A2001-1 HONEYWELL/FARNELL
45-667-320
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL8-CL-V No.123676 (8 WAY) KLIPPON
45-718-5165
TP1
TERMINAL TEST (RAISED LOOP)
45-718-5207
FIG 11
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.45
KH1250 Chapter 8
CZZ-A14 11
10
5
7 D1
2
17 18
1
13
6
4 16 15 3
+ D2
RLD
P8
RLC
P3
P7
RLB
P4
P6
P5
8 9
DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE
25
14 19
12
CZZ-A14-2 24
22 23
26
29
20
21 - - - L
+
D1
27
N
E
R3**
R20**
R4**
R21** R22##
R5##
+
D2
DANGER
RLD
P8
P3
RLC
P7
P4
RLB
P6
P5
28 A2
A1
HIGH VOLTAGE
CD-1440
Figure 11
Page 8.42
Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*): Layout Diagram
Figure 11
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 Table 13 - Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*) Parts List ITEM No.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
1
ASSY OF 3 PHASE SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159
2
ASSY OF MAIN C/FORM
CZZ-A161
3
NEON/TERMINAL ASSEMBLY
CZZ-A162
4
NEON ASSEMBLY
CZZ-A163
5
CHASSIS (3 PHASE SOFT START)
CZZ-1064
6
COVER (3 PHASE SOFT START)
CZZ-1065
7
SUPPORT BRACKET PSU/PCB ASSY
CZZ-1066
8
CLAMP CABLE (TOP)
CZZ-1071
9
CLAMP CABLE (BOTTOM)
CZZ-1070
10
RESISTOR 10R STYLE C TO BS9114-F006 (R20,R21,R22)
40-511-1130-10M
11
RESISTOR 18R STYLE D TO BS9114-F006 (R3,R4,R5)
40-511-1230-18M
12
TERMINAL BLOCK 3 WAY TYPE BL3 KLIPPON
45-718-5173
13
TERMINAL BLOCK 12 WAY TYPE 500 HDS 12 METWAY
45-718-5135
14
TERMINAL BLOCK 12 WAY 440V 20 AMP TYPE EKS 12/4 KLIPPON
45-718-5213
15
KEYSWITCH 2A 250V TYPE146-811 FARNELL
45-613-4205
16
LED INDICATOR GREEN TYPE 6340-005-5056 VCH
45-628-934
17
INSULATED STANDOFF R-5383/M3
40-716-1104-03
18
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019 (R1,R2)
40-518-384-15M
19
CONTACTOR TYPE SC 24V DC PT.No 28-141100-24 MTE
45-617-1154
20
ASSY OF CABLEFORM, PSU TO TB4
CZZ-A165
21
PLATE TERMINAL
CZZ-1067
22
SUPPORT BRACKET PSU
CZZ-1077
23
LOCATION PIN
CZZ-1078
24
CLAMP CO-AX
CZZ-1086
25
CLIP WIRE HARNESS (6.5mm) PT No. WHC-250-01
35-766-511
26
UHF CABLE JACK TYPE U40E65E010X99 MA/COM GREENPAR
45-741-1943
27
UHF LARGE CABLE ENTRY TYPE U40A01E004X99MA/COM GREENPAR
45-741-1934
28
UHF REDUCING ADAPTOR TYPR U40X08E999X99
45-741-1939
29
POWER UNIT TYPE FET201/24/C UNIPOWER
45-677-112
FITTING KIT
CZZ-A166
SPARES KIT
KSK-A2/24
Note: Overload relays (various options) are supplied as part of the appropriate antenna gearbox or upmast transmitter fitting kit.
Page 8.46
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
TP4
1
PL8
R8
R9
TR2
TP3
R7
RLB
R14 C5
TR1
R6 + RLC
R16
R18
R17
R19
+ C1
D4
R10
R13 R15
IC1
RLD
C6 +
C4
+
C2
D5
R12
+
C3 1
R11 D3
+
PLA
CD-1439
Figure 12 - 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159) Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.47
KH1250 Chapter 8 Table 14 - Soft Start Unit 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
NOT USED
R2
NOT USED
R3
NOT USED
R4
NOT USED
R5
NOT USED
R6
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR TYPE V480LA40A GE-M-V HARRIS
R7
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR TYPE V480LA40A GE-M-V HARRIS
R8
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-15M
R9
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-15M
R10
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR TYPE V480LA40A GE-M-V HARRIS
R11
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R12
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R13
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R14
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R15
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-47M
R16
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R17
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R18
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R19
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
C1
CAPACITOR 100nF 10% 63V TYPE MMP1.100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C2
CAPACITOR 10uF 20% 25V TYPE TAG 10M25 ITT
40-565-5186-10
C3
CAPACITOR 100nF 10% 63V TYPE MMP1.100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C4
CAPACITOR 10uF 20% 25V TYPE TAG 10M25 ITT
40-565-5186-10
C5
CAPACITOR 10uF 20% 25V TYPE TAG 10M25 ITT
40-565-5186-10
C6
CAPACITOR 100nF 10% 63V TYPE MMP1.100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
IC1
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555 INTERSIL
45-652-6004
TR1
TRANSISTOR NPN TYPE BSX20 PHILIPS/SGS
40-666-6090
TR2
TRANSISTOR NPN DARLINGTON TYPE BD675 PHILIPS
45-666-5298
D3,D4
DIODE FAST RECOVERY TYPE BYV27-100 PHILIPS
45-666-2461
D5
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR TYPE BZX79-C12 PHILIPS
40-666-341
RLB,RLC,RLD
RELAY SPNO 24V COIL TYPE V23077-A 402 SERIES SIEMENS
45-617-4236
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL8-CL-V KLIPPON PT.No.123676
45-718-5165
Page 8.48
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 PLB
TERMINAL STRIP OPEN END TYPE SL3V KLIPPON PT.No.011126 HEATSINK TYPE TV215 REDPOINT
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.49
KH1250 Chapter 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 8.50
Issue 4
PUBLICATION KH1250 Issue 4, February 2000
KELVIN HUGHES Kelvin Hughes Ltd. is the Naval and Marine Division of Smiths Industries Aerospace Registered Office: 765 Finchley Road, London NW11 8DS. Incorporated in England No. 1030135
New North Road, Hainault, Ilford, Essex IG6 2UR, England Telephone: 0208 500 1020 Telefax: 0208 559 8522 Telex: 896401
CP 225 CODE OF SAFE WORKING PRACTICES FOR THE INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING OF KELVIN HUGHES LIMITED MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
This code must be followed when installing or commissioning any Kelvin Hughes Limited product. Failure to follow this code invalidates the equipment warranty.
SAFETY Reference must be made to the Safety Warnings located at the beginning of each Kelvin Hughes Limited Manual and must be read and understood. These include but are not limited to, the knowledge and understanding of: ‘Electric Shock Resuscitation’, the safety interlock system, all lethal voltages present, source of supply to all equipment, any hazardous material in the equipment or area of work, radiation hazard from the beam of a Radar Antenna and any antenna rotation hazard. Before working on antennas the following conditions must be met: •
A responsible person (such as the officer of the watch) must be informed that there will be an engineer working on the system.
•
The system interlock must be activated.
•
The source of power to the system must be isolated.
•
Warning notices must be posted at the system power source and at all displays showing ‘MAN WORKING ALOFT DO NOT SWITCH ON’. Local language considerations must be taken into account and included with the English statement above.
•
When working above a height of 1.5 metres safety harnesses must be worn and must be clipped in to the superstructure.
•
All tools must be securely lashed to ensure that they can not present a drop hazard.
Original May 03
1
CP 225 INSPECTION Before commencing work, the proposed installation locations must be inspected and accepted as being suitable for the equipment to be mounted securely following the installation procedures which can be found in the relevant Kelvin Hughes Limited manual under ‘installations’. All characteristics of the equipment must be taken into account when inspecting the proposed location such as weight and torque of turning mechanisms, regulation height of Radar display units and type, length and specification of cables or waveguide. All equipment must be inspected and checked off against the indent on unpacking, if practicable, for completeness and damage. Any discrepancies against the indent or damage to equipment must be reported to Kelvin Hughes Limited as soon as possible but in any case within 24 hours. TECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS Earthing: Earthing is to be completed by following the appropriate installation instructions, ensuring that all screws and bolts are tightened sufficiently and that any cable or braid is routed correctly. Cabling: Cables are to be of correct specification and rating and are to be run in suitable cable trays or guides. Any bulkhead penetrations, which are opened, must be closed thus maintaining existing fire proofing precautions. Metal cable ties must be used when running cable in any deckhead or bulkhead areas. Cables are to be terminated as per current IEEE regulations thus ensuring correct practices are followed. Siting and Mounting of Equipment: The equipment must be mounted following the relevant Kelvin Hughes Limited installation manual. Particular attention must be paid to the tightening of bolts and the use of ‘Nylon’ locking nuts in areas of vibration such as on antennas and turning mechanisms. Stainless steel nuts, washers and bolts must be used for all outdoor installations. No modifications are to be made to any Kelvin Hughes Limited equipment unless previously authorised in writing by Kelvin Hughes Limited and a copy of such authorisation kept with the equipment manual(s). Maintenance and Care of Equipment: Kelvin Hughes Ltd recommends inspection on a three monthly basis of all equipment. Particular attention is to be paid to turning mechanisms and scanners, which must be kept clean using only a soft cloth and soap and water - No chemical agents or corrosive cleaning agents are to be used. Any excessive end-to-end play, or excessive noise in scanners should be reported to Kelvin Hughes Limited within 24 hours of discovery.
Original May 03
2
CONFORMITY STATEMENT This equipment has been designed to comply with IMO regulations and IEC standards.
COPYRIGHT ã
Copyright Kelvin Hughes Ltd. 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, translated or stored in any form or by any means, without the written permission of Kelvin Hughes Limited. Technical details contained in this publication are subject to change without notice.
Page ii
Issue 4
CONTENTS PRELIMINARY PAGES Title Page Contents (this page) Health and Safety Notice Page Emergency Resuscitation Electrostatic Caution Page Amendment Record Page
iii iv vi vii viii
CHAPTERS Chapter 1 - General Description Chapter 2 - Installation Chapter 3 - Commissioning Chapter 4 - Technical Introduction Chapter 5 - Technical Description Annex A - Log Receiver CTX-A297 Chapter 6 - Maintenance Chapter 7 - Specification Chapter 8 - Parts
Issue 4
Page iii
IMPORTANT NOTICES HEALTH AND SAFETY 1
All personnel are required to study these notices and familiarise themselves with all applicable safety precautions and bring them to the attention of others in the vicinity. HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING
CD-0845
LETHAL HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE TRANSCEIVER 2
A current of 100 mA passing through the human body for one second can kill. This can occur at voltages as low as 35 Vac or 50 Vdc. Some equipment in the system uses electrical power that can be lethal. Whenever practical, before carrying out installation, maintenance or repair, personnel involved must: (1)
Isolate the equipment from the electrical supply.
(2)
Make tests to verify that the isolation is complete.
(3)
Ensure that power cannot be accidentally reconnected.
DO NOT OPEN ANY OF THE UNITS WHEN THE RADAR IS OPERATIONAL UNLESS FULLY QUALIFIED TO DO SO. 3
If it is essential to work on the equipment with power connected, work must only be undertaken by qualified personnel who are fully aware of the danger involved and who have taken adequate safety precautions to avoid contact with dangerous voltages. HEALTH HAZARD
CD-0844
4
This equipment contains materials which produce toxic fumes when ignited.
5
The inhalation of dust and fumes or any contact with lubricants when cleaning the equipment may be temporarily harmful to health, depending on individual allergic reactions. Components which are broken or overheated may release toxic fumes or dust and must be treated with caution. Do not inhale the fumes and ensure that the dust and debris do not enter open cuts or abrasions. It is prudent to regard all damaged components as being potentially toxic, requiring careful handling and appropriate disposal.
Page iv
Issue 4
RADIATION HAZARD: NON-IONISING AERIAL RADIATION HAZARD: INJURY CAN RESULT FROM EXPOSURE TO THE MAIN BEAM OF A STATIONARY RADAR AERIAL. DO NOT STAND LESS THAN 2m FROM THE CENTRAL FRONT FACE OF THE AERIAL. 6
It is accepted in most countries that no significant hazard is presented by radio frequency mean power density levels up to 10mW/cm. RF power levels in excess of this may cause harmful effects, particularly to the eyes. 7
Users of cardiac pacemakers should be aware that radio frequency transmissions, can damage some such devices or cause irregularities in their operation. Persons using a pacemaker should ascertain whether their device is likely to be affected before exposing themselves to the risk of malfunction. SAFETY ALOFT AERIAL ROTATION: BEFORE MAINTENANCE TO THE TURNING MECHANISM TAKES PLACE, DISABLE AERIAL ROTATION. 8
When working aloft, ensure that it is brought to the attention of someone in authority at deck or at ground level and that suitably placed warning notices are posted warning that work aloft is in progress. Ensure that the means of access aloft is secure and beware of wet or slippery ladder rungs and working areas. 9
When working on or near a radar scanner and other moving or r.f. radiating equipment, ensure that it is switched off and that the fuses have been removed and retained. PERSONAL PROTECTION
10
Personal protection must be used whenever the possibility of an uncontrolled hazard exists. For example, a suitable face visor, gloves and a body apron should be worn when handling cathode ray tubes, as a precaution against injury in the event of breakage.
Issue 4
Page v
ELECTRIC SHOCK RESUSCITATION
1
SHOUT FOR HELP. SWITCH OFF ELECTRICITY IF POSSIBLE.
2
3
REMOVE FROM DANGER.
REMOVE OBVIOUS OBSTRUCTION TO BREATHING.
Do this immediately. If not possible, don't waste time Safeguard yourself when removing casualty from hazard. If casualty is not breathing start If casualty is still in contact with electricity, and the supply resuscitation at once. searching for a switch. cannot be isolated, stand on a dry non-conducting material (rubber mat, wood, linoleum). Use rubber gloves, dry clothing, length of dry rope or wood to pull or push casualty away from the hazard.
LOOSEN NECKWARE TILT HEAD BACKWARDS AND PUSH CHIN UPWARDS
PINCH THE NOSE COMMENCE VENTILATION FOUR GOOD INFLATIONS MOUTH TO MOUTH
IF CHEST DOES NOT RISE RE-CHECK AIRWAY. REMOVE OBSTRUCTION AND RE-INFLATE
CHECK PULSE
POSITION OF PULSE
PULSE PRESENT
PULSE ABSENT
HEART HAS STOPPED BEATING LAY ON BACK ON FIRM SURFACE eg FLOOR COMMENCE EXTERNAL CHEST COMPRESSION AND CONTINUE MOUTH-TO-MOUTH VENTILATION
ONE FIRST AIDER
15 Compressions of 80 per minute followed by two inflations
CONTINUE INFLATIONS UNTIL RECOVERY OF NORMAL BREATHING
TWO FIRST AIDERS
One conducts chest compressions, without pause at 60 per minute. The other administers mouth-to-mouth ventilation - after each 5th compression
WHEN NORMAL BREATHING COMMENCES PLACE CASUALTY IN RECOVERY POSITION
Check heart beat after first five minutes and then after every three mintutes. Continue external chest compression and mouth-to-mouth ventilation until a normal pulse is felt and colour improves
CONTINUE INFLATIONS UNTIL RECOVERY OF NORMAL BREATHING Keep casualty at rest. Remove on a stretcher. Watch closely, particularly for difficulty in breathing. Lightly cover with blankets or other materials.
MEDICAL ASSISTANCE MAY BE OBTAINED ON / AT............................... CD-1265
Page vi
Issue 4
ATTENTION OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES
CAUTION Handling of Electrostatic-Sensitive Semiconductor Devices Certain semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to static voltage. Observe the following precautions when handling these devices in their unterminated state, or sub-units containing these devices: (1) Persons removing sub-units from an equipment using these devices must be earthed by a wrist strap and a resistor at the point provided on the equipment. (2) Soldering irons used during the repair operations must be low voltage types with earthed tips and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer. (3)
Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static charges.
(4) Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored and transported in anti-static bags. CD-1100
Issue 4
Page vii
AMENDMENT RECORD When an amendment is incorporated into this publication, the details should be recorded below. Where the equipment has been modified, the modification number shown on the Amendment Instruction Sheet is also to be recorded. Amdt. No.
Page viii
Date Inserted
Initials
Mod. No.
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION CONTENTS Paragraph 1 Introduction 3 Upmast Configuration 4 Downmast Configuration 5 Transceiver
Page 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2
Page Upmast Transceiver Configuration Downmast Transceiver Configuration
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
1.5 1.6
Page 1.1
KH1250 Chapter 1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 1.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION 1
The MkVI Transceiver is available as: (1)
(2)
Upmast - where the transceiver electronics are incorporated in the turning mechanism. Two versions are available: (a)
Low Speed - 25rpm
(b)
High Speed - 40 rpm
Downmast - where the transceiver electronics are remote from the turning mechanism, being located in a separate enclosure located below deck. Two versions are available: (a)
Low Speed - 25rpm
(b)
High Speed - 40 rpm
2
A Soft Start Unit, which is required for both versions of the transceiver, switches three phase mains to the antenna motor. A thermal overload trip unit, mounted in the soft start unit, protects the supply to the motor. Access to the trip unit reset button is achieved by removing the soft start unit front cover. The soft start unit may also be fitted with an in-line single phase mains supply, for installations with long cable runs, or installations which are interswitched. UPMAST CONFIGURATION 3
The upmast configuration, shown in Figure 1, is provided with a +27V dc supply for the transceiver electronics and a three phase supply for the antenna motor, via the soft start
unit. DOWNMAST CONFIGURATION 4
The downmast configuration, shown in Figure 2, is provided with a +27V dc supply, from the soft start unit, for the transceiver electronics. The soft start unit also switches the three phase supply for the antenna motor.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 1.3
KH1250 Chapter 1 TRANSCEIVER 5
Both versions of the transceiver are fitted with a logarithmic amplifier and employ fan cooling for the magnetron, AFC tuning, a common modulator control design and common terminal connections. 6
The transceiver is muted whenever the antenna ceases to rotate. Pulse jitter, muting and sector transmission are standard facilities, with options for pre-pulse generation and external synchronisation. 7
Both versions of the transceiver may be interfaced with any of the NUCLEUS Series displays.
8
On the upmast version of the transceiver, one VIDEO and one SYNC coaxial output are accessible. The downmast transceiver provides two SYNC and two VIDEO coaxial outputs.
Page 1.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 1
KELVIN HUGHES CABLE: CODE L
30kW TRANSCEIVER/ TURNING MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE N
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2
* NOTE:
CABLE CODE N IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES UP TO 60m.
CABLE: CODE L
CABLE CODE G IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES GREATER THAN 60m.
DISPLAY
INTERSWITCH UNIT
LOW LOSS CO-AX (2 OFF)
* CABLE:
OR
CODE N OR G
CABLE: CODE K
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN CABLE CODE L
1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES TRANSCEIVER
ANTENNA
25rpm CAE-A37
3.9m CAE-A36
40rpm CAE-A45
2.8m CAE-A39
CABLE G - 25 CORE CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER CABLE N - 38 CORE CABLE P - LOW LOSS CO-AX
CD-5104
Figure 1 - Upmast Transceiver Configuration
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 1.5
KH1250 Chapter 1
KELVIN HUGHES TURNING MECHANISM SEMI-RIGID CO-AXIAL CABLE
* NOTE: S BAND
CABLE: CODE N
CABLE: CODE L *CABLE: CODE N OR G
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2
CABLE: CODE E
CABLE: CODE L
TRANSMITTER (CTX-A7)
CABLE CODE N IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES UP TO 60m. CABLE CODE G IS USED BETWEEN THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT AND THE SOFT START UNIT FOR DISTANCES GREATER THAN 60m.
DISPLAY
INTERSWITCH UNIT
LOW LOSS CO-AX (2 OFF)
OR
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR 80-261-600
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN CABLE CODE L
1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES TURNING MECHANISM 25rpm CAE-A42
ANTENNA 3.9m CAE-A36
40rpm (minimum) CAE-A41 2.8m CAE-A39
CABLE B - 3 CORE SMALL CABLE E - 12 CORE CABLE G - 25 CORE CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER CABLE N- 38 CORE CABLE P - LOW LOSS CO-AX
CD-5105
Figure 2 - Downmast Transceiver Configuration
Page 1.6
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION CONTENTS Paragraph 1 2 3 4 7 9 13 18 21 23 24 25 25 31 32 36 37 42 46 49 50 58 59 60 62 63 65 66 67 74 75 76 77 78 79
General Transceivers Upmast System Downmast System Soft Start Uni Safety Notes EQUIPMENT LOCATION Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) and Turning Mechanism CAE-A41/42) Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14, CZZ-A14-2) Optional Mains Isolator (80-261-600) Head/Receiver Line Amplifiers (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) INSTALLATION Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) Fitting Thermal Overload Trip Unit to Soft Start Unit Fitting the Soft Start Unit Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) and Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41/42) Optional Tx Monitor Arm (CAE-A38) Connection of Tx Mon to Upmast Transceiver Connection of Tx Mon to Downmast Transceiver Turning Mechanism Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Construction Mounting Downmast Transceivers H.F. Co-axial Cable Optional Mains Isolator (80-261-600) Head/Receiver Line Amplifiers (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Cable Specifications 38-Core Custom Built Cable Small Multi-Core Cables Power Cables Co-axial Cable General Cover Removal Upmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism Downmast Transceiver Soft Start Unit Optional Mains Isolator PCB Locations and Cable Routing
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.1
KH1250 Chapter 2 CONTENTS (continued) Paragraph 80 82
Wiring Diagrams CHECKS AFTER FITTING
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4
Page Trip Unit Cableform Connections Trip Unit Dial Positions Cable Codes and Specification Cable Colour Abbreviations
2.7 2.8 2.26 2.27
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Page Thermal Overload Trip Unit Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*): Installation Dimensions Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*): Component Layout Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): Installation Dimensions Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42): Installation Dimensions Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): Installation Dimensions Downmast Transceiver to Turning Mechanism Connection Deck Gland: Fitting Deck Gland: Fitting Mains Isolator (80-261-600): Installation Dimensions Line Head/Receiver Amplifier: Installation Dimensions Cable Gland: Assembly Upmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Downmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Motor Connection Display/DIU/Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2)/Upmast Transceiver Installation: Wiring Display/DIU/Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2)/Downmast Transceiver Installation: Wiring Soft Start Unit With In-Line Power Supply Upmast Transceiver - Interswitched Installation: Wiring Downmast Transceiver - Interswitched Installation: Wiring Nucleus 3 Display to Radar Interface Unit to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Page 2.2
2.6 2.9 2.10 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.19 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.31 2.33 2.34 2.35 2.38 2.39/40 2.41/42 2.43 2.45/46 2.47/48 2.49/50
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION GENERAL 1
This section provides installation information for MkVI Upmast and Downmast S-Band Transceivers.
TRANSCEIVERS 2
There are three versions of the MkVI S-Band Transceiver: (1)
30kW S-Band, Upmast 25 rpm (CAE-A37).
(2)
30kW S-Band, Upmast 40 rpm (Min) (CAE-A45).
(3)
30kW S-Band, Downmast (CTX-A7).
Upmast System 3
The upmast systems, shown in Chapter 1, Figure 1 and Figure 2, incorporate the transceiver electronics in the antenna turning mechanism.
Downmast System 4
The electronics for the downmast system, shown in Chapter 1, Figure 3 and Figure 4, are housed in a separate bulkhead mounted enclosure. The downmast transceiver is connected to the turning mechanism, via semi-rigid co-axial cable. 5
6
Two versions of the turning mechanism are provided with downmast systems: (1)
25 rpm CAE-A42.
(2)
50 rpm CAE-A41.
The 25 rpm turning mechanism is used for normal applications. The 50 rpm turning mechanism is used for high speed craft.
SOFT START UNIT 7
All installations utilise CZZ-A14/2 Soft Start Unit with an in-line power supply unit.
8
Installations with interswitched units, or with long cable runs, i.e. those greater than 60m, utilise Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2), as shown in Chapter 1, Figure 2. This version of the Soft Start Unit is fitted with an in-line power supply.
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.3
KH1250 Chapter 2 SAFETY NOTES Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the front of this manual. 9
Mains supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are to be isolated during installation.
10
A suitable safety platform or harness should be used when siting the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism aloft.
11
Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not enter the area of work.
12
Earthing straps must be connected at the point shown in the appropriate illustration, prior to switching on the transceiver. EQUIPMENT LOCATION
UPMAST Tx/Rx (CAE-A37/A45) AND TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A41/42) 13
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism should be installed in such a position where Blind Arcs, caused by obstructions, i.e. masts, funnels etc, are eliminated or minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other large obstructions can also reflect energy and give rise to spurious echo returns especially in close proximity to land. 14
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must not be mounted where the temperature exceeds 70oC.
15
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must be kept clear of ship’s flexible communication aerials to avoid damage to both.
16
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must be mounted more than 914 mm above any flat surface, when the flat surface is greater than the diameter swept by the antenna. 17
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must not be positioned in the close proximity of any magnetic compass or D/F aerial, etc.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A7) 18
The following points must be considered when selecting a suitable site for the Downmast Transceiver: (1)
The transceiver is designed for bulkhead mounting.
(2)
Consideration must be given to accessibility for servicing and protection from adverse conditions. For ease of maintenance, the top of the transceiver should not be mounted more than 1.6m above the deck.
(3)
Ensure that there is sufficient space below the unit for cable entries, and above the unit to allow for connection of the semi-rigid co-axial cable coupling.
NOTE The semi-rigid co-axial cable has a minimum bend radius of 100mm (4") Page 2.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 (4)
The transceiver should be mounted in a position which allows for ventilation and cooling.
NOTE The transceiver circulation fan must not be obstructed. (5)
Do not fit the transceiver in an acoustic, noise sensitive area, i.e. Bridge or Operations Room.
(6)
Do not fit the transceiver in close proximity to any magnetic compass or D/F aerial.
19
Connecting cables between the display and the transceiver should be limited to a length of 60 metres. Where the distance between transceiver and display exceeds 60 metres, special low loss co-axial cable and Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2 should be used. Where the distance between transceiver and display exceeds 180 metres, special low loss co-axial cable, Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2 and line amplifiers for video and sync must be fitted. 20
Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum length, i.e. less than 30m, with as few bends and twists as possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to be used to eliminate the effects of vibration. SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2) 21
22
The Soft Start Unit must be sited as follows: (1)
Upmast installation, using Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) - near the display.
(2)
Upmast installation with long cable run, using Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) - near the transceiver/turning mech.
(3)
Downmast installation, using Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2) - near the transceiver.
The Soft Start Unit must be sited to allow removal of the front cover.
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 23
The mains isolator must be sited adjacent to the display or in the area of the operators control room and connected in parallel with the main display.
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.5
KH1250 Chapter 2 HEAD/RECEIVER LINE AMPLIFIERS (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) 24
The Head line amplifier should be sited as close to the transceiver as possible. The Receiver line amplifier should be sited as close as possible to the display, or interswitch
unit. INSTALLATION SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14 and CZZ-A14-2) WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE VICINITY OF THE SOFT START UNIT ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. Fitting Thermal Overload Trip Unit To Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*) 25
The thermal overload trip unit is supplied with the gearbox fitting kit.
26
Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the four captive screws.
27
The trip unit, shown in Figure 1, clips on the side of the contactor and is secured in position with relay termination screws 2T1, 4T2, 6T3, 14NO and A2.
3'
2
H
A O
2'
2
2' 2T1
7
I
4T7
6T3 A2/96NC
14/22
95NC
CD-0224
Figure 1 - Thermal Overload Trip Unit
Page 2.6
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 28
Connect the cableform wires as shown in Table 1. TABLE 1: Trip Unit Cableform Connections TERMINAL No.
29
WIRE COLOUR
WIRE No.
MARKERS
FROM
14/22
P
16
BN/BU
A2
95NC
P
28
R/S
KEYSWITCH
2T1
BK
-
-
NEON
P
10
BN/BK
TB1-1
4T2
P
11
BN/BN
TB1-2
6T3
P
12
BN/R
TB1-3
A2/96NC
P
23
R/O
PCB SKA
P
16
BN/BU
14/22
Set the blue trip button to the H (handset) position.
H
A CD-0225
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.7
KH1250 Chapter 2 30
Set the dial position on the trip unit to the position shown in Table 2 TABLE 2: Trip Unit Dial Positions
ANTENNA SPEED
25 rpm
MOTOR VOLTAGE
440 V
THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIP UNIT - PART NO.
DIAL POSITION
1.5A
45-617-1156-04 GM-0152
25 rpm
415 V
1.6A
45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
25 rpm
380 V
1.7A
45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
2.5A 25 rpm
220 V
45-617-1156-06 GM-0157
1.5A 40 rpm
440 V
45-617-1156-04 GM-0152
1.6A 40 rpm
415 V
45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
1.7A 40 rpm
380 V
45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
2.5A 40 rpm
220 V
45-617-1156-06
GM-0157
Fitting the Soft Start Unit 31
Fit the soft start unit to the securing bulkhead using the installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to Figure 2 for dimensions.
Page 2.8
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
CD-1343
368
342
180
119
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00) 9.5kg
o
At Relative Humidity 0% : -15 C to +55 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
o
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Grade I Standard Compass : 1.0 m Grade II & III Steering Compass : 0.7 m Grade IV : 0.5 m
Compass Safe Distances
Soft Start Unit Weight :
3 x M10 FIXINGS
KH1250 Chapter 2
237
159
Figure 2 - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Installation Dimensions
Page 2.9
KH1250 Chapter 2
PSU
TB4
TB2 THREE PHASE SWITCHING PCB CZZ-A159
TB6
TB5 TB3 TB1
THERMAL TRIP OVERLOAD UNIT
CONTACTOR
SOFT START UNIT WITH INLINE PSU CZZ-A14/2
CD-5106
Figure 3 - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Component Layout Page 2.10
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2 UPMAST TRANSCEIVER (CAE-A37) AND TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A42/41) WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER/TURNING MECHANISM ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. CAUTION When Unpacking The Antenna, Ensure That The Semi-rigid Co-axial Cables Are Not Kinked, Crushed Or Bent. Support The Antenna Near Its Centre When Lifting It Out Of Its Packing And When Fitting It Into Position On The Turning Mechanism. Do Not Handle The Antenna By The Semi-rigid Co-axial Cable Input. 32
The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism is supplied in two parts: (1)
Transceiver with gearbox (Upmast System), or gearbox only (Downmast System Turning Mechanism).
(2)
Antenna
33
The ship’s mounting structure must be capable of withstanding the high starting and stopping torque generated by the 0.375 motor fitted in the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism. 34
When mounting the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism observe the following: (1)
Use the fitting pack supplied with the equipment (refer to Figures 4 and 5). The fitting pack contains fixings that have been tested to withstand the stresses detailed in paragraph 33.
(2)
Recommended tensile strengths and torque loadings for the fixings are stated on the installation diagram.
(3)
For upmast transceivers/turning mechanisms mounted in excess of 1.8m above the deck, it is recommended that a service platform and guard rail are fitted.
(4)
Use a suitable jointing compound or sealant to prevent corrosion between the platform and upmast transceivers/turning mechanism.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.11
KH1250 Chapter 2 CAUTION The Antenna Window Must NOT Be Painted. (5) 35
Any chipped or damaged surfaces must be painted with polyurethane paint.
With reference to Figures 4, 5 and 6, install the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism as follows: (1)
Fit the coupling element and sealing ring to the antenna connector.
(2)
Fit the antenna to the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism, ensuring that the connectors are aligned, and loosely secure using the eight M10 retaining bolts, washers and nuts. Cautions when Rotating The Antenna Do Not Apply Excessive Force.
ensure The Semi-rigid Coax Assembly, On The Underside Of The Antenna, Is Not Crushed Or Damaged. (3)
Secure the co-axial connector using the three M6 bolts and washers provided.
(4)
Tighten and torque load the eight antenna retaining bolts to 25 Nm.
CAUTION Failure To Fit Antenna Spoilers Will Reduce System Life And Render The Radar Inoperative In High Winds. (5)
Fit the spoilers to the antenna using the fittings supplied.
(6)
Mark out and drill four 17mm gearbox mounting holes at the mounting position.
(7)
For semi-rigid cable access, on a downmast system, mark out and drill a 100 mm hole in the mounting platform, as shown on Figure 5.
NOTE: The upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is supplied with four M12 bolts, washers and fibre washers. These may be removed, but not discarded, and replaced with eye bolts. Once the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is in position, the eye bolts are to be removed and replaced with the original bolts.
Page 2.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 WARNINGS THE UPMAST TRANSCEIVER/TURNING MECHANISM MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE ANTENNA AND MUST BE HOISTED TO THE FIXING POSITION USING A SECURED BLOCK AND TACKLE, OR, IF NO EYE BOLTS ARE FITTED, BY ROPE STROPS. DO NOT FIT EYE BOLTS IF THERE ARE NO EXISTING FITTINGS. (8)
Install the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism at the mounting position, ensuring correct orientation. Use the shim washers supplied, to take up any distortion in the mounting platform. Failure to do so may cause the casting to crack when bolts are tightened to the correct torque.
(9)
Secure the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism with the four M16 bolts supplied and torque load them to 120Nm.
Optional Tx Monitor Arm (CAE-A38) Note: For an Upmast Transceiver, the Tx Monitor Arm is connected to the Control PCB. For a Downmast Transceiver the Tx Monitor Arm is connected to the Heading Line PCB in the turning mechanism. 36
The Monitor Arm is an optional item and is fitted to outer casing. The monitor arm cable feeds through the small gland beside the aerial motor.
Connection of Tx Mon to Upmast Transceiver 37
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
38
Route the Tx Monitor Arm cableform as shown in Figure 14. To ease routing, proceed as follows: (1)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(2)
Slide the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
39
Connect the Tx Monitor Arm cableform to the Control PCB (CTX-A246) as follows: red to 3PLM 1 and blue to 3PLM 2.
40
Return the electronic chassis to its original position and secure with the six captive screws.
41
Refit the rear cover and secure with the six bolts.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.13
KH1250 Chapter 2 Connection of Tx Mon to Downmast Transceiver Turning Mechanism 42
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
43
Route the Tx Monitor Arm cableform as shown in Figure 15.
44
Connect the Tx Monitor Arm cableform to the Heading Line PCB (CAE-A180) as follows: red to 9PLA 7 and blue to 9PLA 8.
45
Refit the rear cover and secure using the six bolts.
Page 2.14
Issue 4
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
50 kg 110 kg
Compass Safe Distances: Standard Compass Grade I : 4.0 m Steering Compass Grade II & III : 2.5 m Grade IV : 2.0 m
Antenna Weight Tx & Turning Mech -
EARTHING STUD
ON/OFF SWITCH
38 CORE CABLE
o
CD-1344
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 12 OFF WASHER M16 PLAIN 6 OFF WASHER M16 SPLIT 8 OFF NUT M16 FULL 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
}
418
INSTRUCTIONS TIGHTEN BOLT TO PRODUCE A SMALL DEFLECTION IN RUBBER MOUNTING PADS
BOLTS TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE OF 120 Nm. PROTECT AGAINST CORROSION BY PAINTING
MATERIAL MUST BE HIGH TENSILE STEEL. (MIN.80kg f / mm 2 )
SHIP
474
180
200
480
540
2750 or 3910
C/L ROTATION
4 FIXING HOLES O17
7
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED ( ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET FITTED) 4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 4 OFF NUT M16 NYLOC 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
USE SHIM WASHER(S) CAE-1189 AS HEIGHT SPACER UNDER ANTI-NOISE BLOCK IF REQUIRED
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEARBOX FITTED WITH ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED (NO ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET)
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 C to +70 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
o
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
890
672
190
430
MOTOR POWER CABLE FED IN UNDERNEATH THROUGH LARGE HOLE IN BOTTOM PLATE
TX MONITOR ARM (PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 4 - Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): Installation Dimensions
Page 2.15
Page 2.16
o
CD-1345
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 12 OFF WASHER M16 PLAIN 6 OFF WASHER M16 SPLIT 8 OFF NUT M16 FULL 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
}
418
INSTRUCTIONS TIGHTEN BOLT TO PRODUCE A SMALL DEFLECTION IN RUBBER MOUNTING PADS
BOLTS TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE OF 120 Nm. PROTECT AGAINST CORROSION BY PAINTING
MATERIAL MUST BE HIGH TENSILE STEEL. (MIN.80kg f / mm 2 )
SHIP
7
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm 4 OFF NUT M16 NYLOC 6 OFF SHIM WASHER
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED ( ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET FITTED)
180
C/L ROTATION
150
MOTOR POWER CABLE FED IN UNDERNEATH THROUGH LARGE HOLE IN BOTTOM PLATE
190
430
* 100mm HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE REQUIRED FOR S BAND CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
200
540 480
FWD
TX MONITOR ARM (PART OF CAE-A38)
* IF S BAND CO-AX NOT FED THROUGH HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE RAISE UNIT TO ALLOW 150mm CLEARANCE
2750 or 3910
S BAND CO-AX
474
4 FIXING HOLES O17
USE SHIM WASHER(S) CAE-1189 AS HEIGHT SPACER UNDER ANTI-NOISE BLOCK IF REQUIRED
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEARBOX FITTED WITH ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED (NO ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET)
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 C to +70 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
o
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Compass Safe Distances: Standard Compass Grade I : 4.0 m Steering Compass Grade II & III : 2.5 m Grade IV : 2.0 m
45kg 50 kg 100 kg
EARTHING STUD
12 CORE CABLE ON/OFF SWITCH
Antenna Weight (2.8m) (3.9m) Tx & Turning Mech
890
672
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 5 - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42): Installation Dimensions
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
FWD
MOTOR CABLE 38 CORE CABLE
50mm HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE REQUIRED FOR MOTOR CABLE ENTRY
S BAND CO-AX
45
830
0
540 480
200 674 TUBE THICKNESS 12 MM MINIMUM
MAX 2M
4 FIXING HOLES O17
430
474 30 100mm HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE REQUIRED FOR S BAND CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
50
490
750
500
CD-1348
MOUNTING PLATE AND STIFFENING PIECES 15mm STEEL
Figure 6 - Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.17
KH1250 Chapter 2 DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A7) WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. Construction 46
The general construction of the downmast S-Band transceiver comprises a sheet-metal rear plate which is formed, to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two ‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the plate, providing the bulkhead fixing points. 47
The PCBs are mounted both sides of the modulator chassis and are removed as a complete assembly.
48
A wrap-around cover made from sheet-metal, encloses the unit and is fixed by six captive screws. Removing the cover gives access to the front and sides of the Transceiver electronics. Cable entry is at the bottom of the unit. Mounting 49
Fit the transceiver to the securing bulkhead using the installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to Figure 7 for dimensions.
Page 2.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 TOP VIEW
250
85
BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
250
420 88
117 19
720
670 BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
645
15.8mm SLOT
29
CUTOUT SWITCH RESET ACCESS
SYNC. & VIDEO SOCKETS
CABLE ENTRIES
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE o
Transmitter Weight :
30kg
o
At Relative Humidity 0% : -15 C to +55 C o At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
Power Consumption :
200VA
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES :Standard Compass
1.9m (Grade I)
Steering Compass
1.1m (Grade II)
CD-1346
Figure 7 - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): Installation Dimensions
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.19
KH1250 Chapter 2 DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVERS H.F. CO-AXIAL CABLE 50
A semi-rigid co-axial cable is used to connect the S-Band Downmast Transceiver to the Antenna (refer to Figure 8). The cable is supplied cut to length with a connector fitted to each end. It’s general specification is as follows: (1)
Impedance: 50 Ohms
(2)
Attenuation @ 3GHz: 0.1dB per metre
51
The cable is supplied cut to length and with a special coupling fitted to each end. The cable must not be cut, or shortened - any cable surplus should be accommodated in a 900 mm (3 ft) coil along its length. 52
The minimum bend radius is 100 mm (4"); the cable must be worked gradually to achieve the minimum bend and must not be bent across a radius sharper than the minimum bend
radius. 53
The cable must be suitably supported and secured along its length by special plastic cable cleats (Code No. 80-283-605-07) positioned at 1m (39") intervals. On vertical cable runs, where due to its own weight the cable might creep, the intervals between cable cleats at the top of the run should be reduced to 300 mm (12"). 54
The cable may be run with other cables on a common channel plate or cable tray but it must be secured separately using the special plastic cable cleats.
55
Protect the cable from accidental damage by ensuring that any sections exposed to risk are protected by suitable covers. Pay particular attention to protecting the cable entries into transitions. 56
Do not run the cable on any surface or in any area where a temperature of 70oC is exceeded.
57
Use deck gland TCR-1345 (refer to Figures 9 and 10) to pass the cable through watertight decks, etc.
Page 2.20
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2
MK6 TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A42 BOTTOM OF ROTATING JOINT
ROTATE UNTIL 2mm - 5mm OF THREAD IS PROTRUDING
MINIMUM BENDING RADIUS 80mm
ALL PART Nos AS SHOWN FOR TX END
CONNECTOR ZV 9759
*3 BOLTS (FLANGE BOLTS)
*3 SPRING WASHERS
*"O" RING
*COUPLING ELEMENT RF (INNER MALE COUPLING)
*THESE ITEMS SUPPLIED AS FITTING PACK CODE ZV 9758
SEAL PLATES CAE-1437
TOP OF TRANSCEIVER CTX-A2 OR CTX-A7
BOTTOM OF TURNING MECH CAE-A42
CD-1347
3mm THICK SPONGE CAE-1438
Figure 8 - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) to Turning Mechanism Connection
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.21
KH1250 Chapter 2
12 BOLTS HEX. HEAD M6 25mm STEEL (20-251-1200-11) 6 WASHERS M6 STEEL (20-281-1063-11) CLAMP PLATE (2 HALVES) (TCR 1345)
SPACER (2 HALVES) (TCR 1343)
SEAL (2 HALVES) (TCR 1344)
SPACER (2 HALVES) (TCR 1343)
DECKGLAND BODY (TCR 1340)
GASKET (TCR 1342)
DECK PLATE (TCR 1341)
6 WASHERS M6 STEEL (20-281-1063-11)
(A) (see next Figure) CD-1218
Figure 9 - Deck Gland: Fitting
Page 2.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 150
FITTING THE COAXIAL DECK GLAND (TCR A37)
(B)
STEEL DECK
1)
Weld the deck plate (TCR 1341) to the deck.
2)
Pierce the deck with a 64 mm (2.5") diameter hole, concentric with the deck plate.
3)
Place the gasket (TCR A1342) between the deck plate (TCR 1341) and the deck gland body (TCR 1340). Bolt the deck gland body to the deck plate using six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws with spring washers.
67
To fit the deck gland to a steel deck, refer to diagrams (A) (see previous figure) and (E) and proceed as follows:
64
4)
Assemble the gland components in the deck gland body and temporarily secure clamp plates (TCR 1345) using the remaining six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws with washers.
BODY COACH BOLTS GASKET (TCR 1342) WOOD BLOCK
(C)
COMPOSITION
WOODEN OR COMPOSITION & STEEL DECKS
DECK
To fit the deck gland to a wooden, or composition & steel deck, refer to previous figure and Diagrams (C) and proceed as follows: 1)
Where the composition has been removed, a wooden block is secured to the deck (diagram C).
2)
A 64 mm (2.5") diameter hole is bored through the wooden block and the deck. The deck gland body (TCR 1340) and the gasket (TCR 1342) are secured to the wooden block using suitable coach bolts.
3)
Assemble the gland components in the deck gland body and temporarily secure the clamp plates (TCR 1345) using six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws with washers.
DECK PLATE (TCR 1341) WELD
COMPOSITION DECKS To fit the deck gland to a composition deck, refer to previous figure and Diagram (D) and proceed as follows: 1)
A threaded deck tube (shipyard supplied) with a flange at one end is attached to the deck (Diagram D).
2)
The deck plate (TCR 1341) is then welded to the flange and the the deck gland is assembled as for a steel deck fitting.
FLANGED TUBE SHIPYARD SUPPLY
(D)
COMPOSITION
(E)
DECK PLATE (TCR 1341)
DECK
ASSEMBLING THE DECK GLAND TO THE COAXIAL CABLE Refer to previous figure and proceed as follows: 1)
Part the transition from the cable end connector and wrap the transition in a protective cover. DO NOT REMOVE THE END CONNECTOR FROM THE CABLE.
2)
Remove the six screws securing the two halves of the clamp plate (TCR 1345) and remove the gland components.
3)
Pass the coaxial cable through the gland.
4)
Reassemble the gland components as shown (Figure 28) to ensure tat the join between the two halves of each gland component is at 90o to its neighbour.
5)
Fit and tighten the six M6 x 25 mm screws in the clamp plate (TCR 1345) to expand the seal. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN as this may cause distortion of the cable.
6)
Coat the assembled gland with a protective finish.
7)
The transmission is now bolted back on to the cable connector at the most convenient stage of running the coaxial cable.
WELD STEEL DECK
64
CD-1219
Figure 10 - Deck Gland: Fitting
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.23
KH1250 Chapter 2 OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 58
With reference to Figure 11, secure the Mains Isolator in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
80
205
120
160
160
30
WIRING FOR 3 PHASE
WIRING FOR SINGLE PHASE CABLE 211K
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
L1
L1
L2
L2
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
L3
L1
L3
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
CONNECT SCREENS TO EARTH
FIT 20 AMP FUSES
CD-1157
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
FIT 20 AMP FUSES
15 mm 1.D CABLE GLAND
SHIP'S SUPPLY SINGL PHASE 110V/220V
Figure 11 - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions Page 2.24
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 HEAD/RECEIVER LINE AMPLIFIERS (RAN-A26/RAN-A27) 59
With reference to Figure 12, secure the Line Amplifier in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
220
VIDEO IN
DC SUPPLY
SYNC IN
120
VIDEO OUT
SYNC OUT
60
204
82 O 5mm
CD-1158
Figure 12 - Head/ Receiver Line Amplifier: Installation Dimensions Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.25
KH1250 Chapter 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 60
Each cable is identified by a letter code which defines the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code M is a 38-core cable. Table 3 provides specifications for each cable type. Table 4 provides 38-core cable, colour code abbreviations. 61
The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes equipment are to be to the following specification. Failure to use the correct specification cables may result in impaired equipment performance. TABLE 3: Cable Specification CABLE
DESCRIPTION
CODE
CORE
DIAMETER
A
2-core small multi-core
1344-718
16/0.2
6.1mm 7.7mm
B
3-core small multi-core
1344-719
16/0.2
6.4mm 7.2mm
C
4-core small multi-core
1344-720
16/0.2
6.9mm 7.7mm
D
6-core small multi-core
1344-721
16/0.2
7.9mm 8.7mm
E
12-core small multi-core
1344-722
16/0.2
10mm 11mm
F
18-core small multi-core
1344-723
16/0.2
11.5mm 12.3mm
G
25-core small multi-core
1344-724
16/0.2
13.6mm 14mm
H.
TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
J
Co-axial 75 ohms d/s
5344-705
7/0.07
7mm
K
2-core Power
5344-787
7/0.67
12mm
L
3-core Power
5344-788
7/0.67
13mm
N
38-core small multi-core
5344-701
P
Co-axial (Low Loss) Type ECL 125
5344-719 (for long cable lengths only)
Varies
8.3mm
38-Core Custom Built Cable 62
The 38-core composite cable (KH code number 5344-701) is made for Kelvin Hughes and comprises the following: (1)
4 cores of 32/0.2 mm copper wire.
(2)
32 cores of 16/0.2 mm copper wire.
(3)
2 cores of co-axial cable.
Page 2.26
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2 TABLE 4: 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations ABBREVIATION
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
COLOUR
R
RED
B
BLUE
G
GREEN
Y
YELLOW
W
WHITE
Bk
BLACK
Bn
BROWN
V
VIOLET
O
ORANGE
P
PINK
T
TURQUOISE
S
SLATE (grey)
R/B
RED/BLUE
R/G
RED/GREEN
R/Y
RED/YELLOW
R/W
RED/WHITE
R/Bk
RED/BLACK
R/Bn
RED/BROWN
B/Y
BLUE/YELLOW
B/W
BLUE/WHITE
B/Bk
BLUE/BLACK
B/O
BLUE/ORANGE
G/Y
GREEN/YELLOW
G/W
GREEN/WHITE
G/Bk
GREEN/BLACK
G/O
GREEN/ORANGE
G/S
GREEN/SLATE
Bn/Bk
BROWN/BLACK
Bn/Y
BROWN/YELLOW
Bn/W
BROWN/WHITE
S/B
SLATE/BLUE
S/Bn
SLATE/BROWN
V/Bk
VIOLET/BLACK
V/Y
VIOLET/YELLOW
Page 2.27
KH1250 Chapter 2 ABBREVIATION
COLOUR
V/W
VIOLET/WHITE
W/R
WHITE/RED WHITE CO-AX SLATE CO-AX
N/C
NO CONNECTION
Small Multi-Core Cables 63
These cables conform to DEF STAN 61-12 (part 5). Each cable consists of a number of insulated cores, collectively screened and clad in a PVC outer sheath.
64
Core Details (1)
The core details are as follows: Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2 mm diameter tinned copper wire. Nominal cross-section area of conductor = 0.5 mm2. Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93 mm Nominal thickness of insulation = 0.45 mm Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40 mm Minimum diameter of core = 1.75 mm Maximum diameter of core = 1.90 mm
(2)
Braided Screen The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape over which is woven a braiding of 0.2 mm diameter tinned copper wire.
(3)
Outer Sheath A PVC outer sheath is applied by extrusion over the wire braiding.
(4)
Maximum Current Rating The maximum current ratings are as follows: 2.5 A at 1000 V dc 2.5 A at 440 V ac at 1600Hz.
Page 2.28
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2 Power Cables 65
These cables are used for services requiring a moderate current carrying capacity, i.e. main supplies.
2-Core E.P. Rubber (Power): Cable Code K:
KH Reference No. 4344-787
250/440V grade:
7 x 0.67mm (7 x 0.026") cores cross linked polyethylene insulation, braided with 0.2mm (0.0078") diameter tinned copper wire, 79% coverage low smoke, zero halogen outer sheath
Outer diameter:
10mm (0.39 in.).
3-Core E.P. Rubber (Power): Cable Code L: (250/440 V grade): Outer Diameter:
KH Reference No. 5344-788 Specification as for 2-core cable. 11 mm (0.44")
Co-axial Cable 66
Where the distance between the Display and the Transceiver exceeds 60 metres, special co-axial cables and/or Sync and signal amplifiers may be required to obtain optimum results, consult Kelvin Hughes prior to installation of the cables. Co-axial 75 ohms double screened Cable Code J: Specification: Inner Conductor: Dielectric: Screen: : Overall Dia: :
KH Reference No. 5344-705 2003A to CW1229C (BT1229B) TBD 0.61 mm single conductor Polyethylene Close knit braid - double screen 6.9 mm
Electrical Attenuation: Attenuation: Impedance:
Issue 4, Amdt. 2 (Mar 01)
60MHz 9dB/100m MAX 200MHz 18.5dB/100m MAX 75 Ohm
Page 2.29
KH1250 Chapter 2 Co-axial Cable 75 ohms low loss (for extended cable runs) Co-axial Cable: Specification: Inner Conductor: Dielectric: Screen: Overall Dia:
CODE No. 5344-719 Type ECL 125 (Manufacturer’s code) TBD 1.25 mm Single Conductor Air spaced Polyethylene Tape Screen 8.3 mm
Electrical Attenuation: Attenuation: Impedance:
60MHz 3.4dB/100m MAX 100MHz 4.9dB/100m MAX 75 Ohm
GENERAL 67
Before starting electrical connection observe the following: WARNING ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TAKES PLACE.
68
Isolate power supplies as follows: (1)
Turn the Soft Start Unit keyswitch to OFF and remove the key.
(2)
Ensure that the associated display is turned off.
(3)
Remove fuses from mains isolators.
69
The casing of the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism must be securely earthed to the platform with braided copper wire.
70
The casing of the downmast transceiver must be securely earthed to the deck or bulkhead with braided copper wire.
71
Allow sufficient length on all cables to allow for routing through the transceiver. Make sure that there is sufficient slack to allow for extreme movements during sudden shock to the vessel. 72
Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated entry point and that screened cables are earthed to their respected units.
73
Fit glands to cables in accordance with the diagram shown on Figure 13.
Page 2.30
Issue 4
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
CD-0278
BRAID
RUBBER GLAND
640 mm 700 mm
FOR 38-CORE CABLE REMOVE 700 mm OF OUTER COVER AND 640 mm OF BRAID
CABLE OUTER INSULATION
BRASS BUNG NYLON WASHER
CLAMPING NUT
OUTSIDE OF CASTING CASTING
INSIDE OF CASTING
DISCS ARE TO BE LEFT IN UNUSED CABLE GLANDS.
NOTE: SCREENING DISC IS TO BE FITTED IN PLACE OF THE FERRULE UNTIL CABLE INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE.
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS THROUGH GLAND
FERRULE PUSHED INSIDE CABLE OUTER INSULATION
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 13 - Cable Gland: Assembly
Page 2.31
KH1250 Chapter 2 COVER REMOVAL 74
Before any electrical connections can be made, covers have to be removed from the following equipment. (1)
Upmast Transceiver, or
(2)
Downmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism.
(3)
Soft Start Unit.
(4)
Optional Mains Isolator.
Upmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism 75
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
Downmast Transceiver 76
Release the six captive screws securing the cover to the Downmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
Soft Start Unit 77
Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the six captive screws.
Optional Mains Isolator 78
Open the mains isolator cover by releasing the captive screw.
PCB LOCATIONS AND CABLEFORM ROUTING 79
Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the upmast transceiver are shown on Figure 14. Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the turning mechanism are shown on Figure 15. Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the downmast transceiver are shown on Figure 16.
Page 2.32
Issue 4
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
CD-0211
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
RX MON PCB
COAX FROM 38-CORE CABLE
38-CORE
3PLK
TBI
3PLM
3PLB
CONTROL BOARD
PSU PLA
CONTROL BOARD
3PLM
CONTROL BOARD
MODULATOR PCB
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
COAX FROM 38-CORE CABLE
PSU
PSU PLA
TBI
CONTROL BOARD
3PLB
3PLM
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 14 - Upmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing
Page 2.33
Page 2.34
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
CD-0212
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
TBI
12-CORE CABLE
TBI
PLA
12-CORE CABLE
PLA
HEADING LINE PCB
TBI
CABLE FROM Tx MON ARM
PLA
HEADING LINE PCB
KH1250 Chapter 2
Figure 15 - Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2
RF CO-AX TO ANTENNA
RF HEAD
MODULATOR ON BACK OF ELECTRONICS PANEL
CONTROL BOARD
R x
PLB
M O N
PLK PLM
PSU PLA
CO-AXES FROM 38 CORE
3 CORE TO SOFT START UNIT (IF REQUIRED)
12 CORE TO ANTENNA GEARBOX
38 CORE TO DISPLAY OR SOFT START UNIT
CD-0213
Figure 16 - Downmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 2.35
KH1250 Chapter 2 WIRING DIAGRAMS 80
Electrical connections for upmast and downmast transceiver systems are detailed on the following wiring diagrams: (1)
Figure 17 - Motor Connection.
(2)
Figure 18 - Upmast Transceiver System Wiring.
(3)
Figure 19 - Downmast Transceiver System Wiring.
(4)
Figure 20 details the electrical connections for a soft start unit with an in-line power supply.
(5)
Figure 21 details the electrical connections for an interswitched system with an Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37) and a Soft Start Unit with an in-line power supply (CZZ-A14-2).
(6)
Figure 22 details the electrical connections for an interswitched system with a Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) and a Soft Start Unit with an in-line power supply (CZZ-A14-2).
(7)
Figure 23 details the electrical connections for a Nucleus 3 interswitched system with an Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37) using the Radar Interface Unit (NNR-A55) and a Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus link from the RIU to the display.
CAUTION There are two different types of Brown motor which may be used in the MkVI Turning Mechanism. Each type of motor has different connections. (Refer to Figure 17 for details). Take care to ensure that 3-phase motor connections are made correctly for the tyep of motor used. If the motor is identified as an “old style” Brown motor (see below), DO NOT use the wiring disgram on the inside of the cover, as this could damage the motor. The “old style” Brown motor MUST be wired as shown in Figure 17. If there is any doubt about which type of motor is being installed, assume that it is the “old style” type and wire it accordingly (see Figure 17). If the motor does not turn when wired as the “old style” motor, then fit the links as shown for the “new style” motor. 81
The type of motor can be identified as follows: (1)
First remove the wiring cover from the motor.
(2)
Old dtyle motors have wires U5, V5, W5 connected to connectors U1, V1, W1 respectively.
(3)
New style motors DO NOT have any wires marked U5, V5, W5.
Page 2.36
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2 CHECKS AFTER FITTING 82
The upmast transceiver/turning mechanism must be checked for security and freedom to rotate. The downmast transceiver must be checked for security, accessibility, and cabling
‘runs’. 83
Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated entry point and that screened cables are earthed to their respected units.
84
All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting, chafing or damage, and subsequently sealed with a mastic compound.
85
Commissioning instructions are described in Chapter 3.
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.37
KH1250 Chapter 2
TX MONITOR ARM (PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
U1 V1
FROM SOFT START UNIT
W1
MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
TO MONITOR ARM CONTROL BOARD PLM 1
TX MON SIG
2
TX MON 0V
U1
W2
U1
W2
V1
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
3 4
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
5 6
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
W2
U1
W2
V1
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1
CABLE GLAND
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
U1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
PLM
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
U1
W2
W5
U5 V1
V1 U2
U2
U5
V5
MONITOR ARM FITTING & CABLE RUN
W1
W1 W5
V2
V5 V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CD-4845
Figure 17 - Motor Connection
Page 2.38
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 2
MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2) CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY SHIPS MAINS SINGLE PHASE 230V CABLE K
FILTER INPUT TB1
110/220V OUTPUT TB2
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL) 2-CORE POWER CABLE K
N L TB1
CABLE K
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
1 PHASE MAINS IN
1 2 3
1 2 3
BN or 1 BL or 2
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
N L TB2
NOTE 1 FROM DISPLAY TO TRANSCEIVER PLDA-2 or PLDB-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
TO TB2 SKP VIDEO SKO SYNC
WHITE COAX GREY COAX
INTERSWITCH PLT G/Bk SELECT DATA 1 W/Bn RADAR SOURCE 2 Y/Bn Tx CONTROL 3 S/B STATUS 1 4 S/G STATUS 2 5 G/B 0V 6
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PLTA-2 or PLTB-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SK8(10)
SK7(9)
SK2(5)
SK1(4)
PLDA-3 or PLDB-3 6 4 5 7 8 9
U1 U2 U3
LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
SEE INSERT A
1 +27V TO CONTACTOR 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 3 0V
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT (HRC-A9) Tx CONTROL PLV S Tx RUN 1 R/G Tx MUTE 2 B/Y MED PULSE 3 B/W LONG PULSE 4 R/Y TUNE 5 R/W TUNE INDICATOR 6 T or Lt/G READY 7 G/O AZIMUTH 8 9 B/Bk Rx MON 10 G/W HEADING LINE 11 12 13 R/B 0V 14
AERIAL MOTOR
TB
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
TB1
R B G
TO TB6
TB3
TB1
B G R
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT COAX (W)
TB6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO
0V 1 0V 2 0V 3 0V 4 0V 5 0V 6 +26V 7 +26V 8 +26V 9 +26V 10 +26V 11 +26V 12
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2 TB4
U1
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK W/V W/BN R/BK BN
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V Y B Y/V Y/BN O W G R
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK Y B W/V W/BN R/BK BN W G R
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
S/G B/O S/B
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V
Y/V Y/BN O
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
CONTROL BOARD LOCATION 3
PLB
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y R/B
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
S/B B/O S/G
Tx MON 0V Tx MON NEON SIG
6 5 4 3 2 1
B R
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1
W2
U5 V1
U2
V5 W1 V2
W5
PLK CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
COAX (W)
PLM
U1
5 4 3 2 1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
U1
V1
W2
U2
W1
W5
U5
V5 V2
COAX (S)
SYNC
COAX (S)
COAX'S W S
4 3 2 1
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
38-CORE CABLE (CABLE M) NOTES: 1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
CD-3844
Figure 18
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
Display to Dual Interswitch Unit to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 18
Page 2.39/40
KH1250 Chapter 2
MK6 GEARBOX (CAE-A42) (CAE-A41)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2)
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
CABLE K
FILTER INPUT TB1
110/220V OUTPUT TB2
2-CORE POWER
CABLE K
CABLE K
N L
N L
TB1
TB2
R or 1
B or 2 Y or 3
2 3 TB2
2
B or 2
3
Y or 3
B G
1 PHASE MAINS IN
BN or 1 BL or 2
1 2 3
4 5
4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
TO TB2
WHITE COAX
SK7(9)
SK8(10)
GREY COAX
SK1(4)
SK2(5)
COAX
SK3(6)
INTERSWITCH PLT G/Bk 1 SELECT DATA W/Bn 2 RADAR SOURCE Y/Bn 3 Tx CONTROL S/B STATUS 1 4 S/G 5 STATUS 2 G/B 6 0V
PLDA-3 or PLDB-3 6 4 5 7 8 9
B G R
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB6 1 2 3 4 5 6
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V
TB4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NOTES: 1) BLANKING IS USED ONLY IF 2 S-BAND OR 2 X-BAND TRANSMITTERS ARE USED 2) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
10 11 12
T or Lt/G B/BK
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
V/BK G/Y G/BK S/BN BN/BK G/B V P BK Y B Y/V W/V Y/BN W/BN O R/BK BN W G R
U1
W2
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
U1
U5
0V 0V 0V
V1
V5
V2
4 5
0V 0V 0V
W1
W5
W2
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
PLB
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y R/B
COAX (S)
FOR LONG CABLE RUNS LOW LOSS COAX TO BE USED IN PLACE OF 38 COAX TO DISPLAY
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX U2
1 2 3
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
U5 U2
U1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
LOCATION PLM 3 +27V 6 5 0V 4 AZ 3 HL 2 Tx MON 0V 1 Tx MON NEON SIG
PLK 5 4 3 2 1
CABLE E (12-CORE) BK W Y G B R
V2
W5
W1
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
U1
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V U1
W2
U5
CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
4 3 2 1
V5 V1
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
V1
COAX (W)
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
PLA
CONTROL BOARD
S
W5 W2
V1
U2
U2
U5
V5 V2
W1
W1
V2
V5
W5
V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
BN V BK
1 2 3 4
BN B R R B
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
}
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
W2
V1
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2
COAX'S W
Figure 19
U1
MK6 Tx DOWNMAST (CTX-A7)
B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W
S/G B/O S/B
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
R/B R/Y R/W
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
G/BK G/B BN/BK P V BK Y B W/V Y/V W/BN Y/BN R/BK O BN W G R
S/B B/O S/G
CD-3845
SEE INSERT A
V/BK
SYNC COAX (S) 38-CORE CABLE (CABLE M)
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
G/Y S/BN
10 11 12 VIDEO
V1 W1
A
7 8 9
COAX (W)
TB U1
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 0V
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AERIAL MOTOR
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) FROM CZZ-A14/2
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
+27V TO CONTACTOR
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
NOTE 2 FROM DISPLAY TO TRANSCEIVER PLDA-2 or PLDB-2 PLTA-2 or PLTB-2 1 1 2 2 3 3
Tx CONTROL PLV S 1 Tx RUN R/G 2 Tx MUTE B/Y 3 MED PULSE B/W 4 LONG PULSE R/Y 5 TUNE R/W 6 TUNE INDICATOR T or Lt/G 7 READY G/O 8 AZIMUTH 9 B/Bk Rx MON 10 G/W HEADING LINE 11 12 13 R/B 0V 14
BLANK (NOTE 1)
1
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
DISPLAY
VIDEO SCREEN VIDEO SYNC SYNC SCREEN
TB3
1
R
TO TB6 SHIPS MAINS SINGLE PHASE 230V
TB1 R or 1
Y G W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAFETY SWITCH POLE 1
CONT +ve CONTACTOR
SAFETY SWITCH POLE 2
+27V
HL PCB Tx MON 0V Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (0V) +27V AZ HL 0V
CABLE A (2-CORE) TO Tx MON ARM
Display to Dual Interswitch Unit to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Downmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 19
Page 2.41/42
KH1250 Chapter 2
CZZ - A14/2 TB1
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
{
3 PHASE SHIP’S SUPPLY
TB3
R or 1
1
1
R or 1
B or 2
2
2
B or 2
Y or 3
3
3
Y or 3
}
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
TB2 R B G CABLE K (2-CORE POWER) 1 PHASE MAINS IN
{
BN or 1 BL or 2
1
+27V TO CONTACTOR
2
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN
3
0V
L 24V N POWER E SUPPLY SET FOR + 220V OR - 110V INPUT
CABLE G (25 CORE) OR CABLE N (38 CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB4 0V
1
0V
2
0V
3
0V
4
0V
5
0V
6
+26V
7
+26V
8
+26V
9
+26V 10
R/B
TB5 1
R/Y
2
R/Y
R/W
3
R/W
G/Y S/BN G/B P
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V
BK W/V W/BN R/BK
Y B Y/V Y/BN
BN
O W
+26V 11
G
+26V 12
R
0V
R/B
TUNE TUNE IND MP
B/Y
4
B/Y
B/W
5
B/W
S
6
S
R/G
7
R/G
G/O
8
G/O
G/W
9
G/W
T or Lt/G
10
T or Lt/G
B/BK
11
B/BK
LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
12
B G R
TB6 1
S/G
2
B/O
3
S/B
CONTACTOR 0V +27V
CABLE N (38 CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
4 5 6 USE CABLE N (38 CORE) CABLE
7
BETWEEN THE SOFT START UNIT AND
8
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT
9
FOR CABLE RUNS OF UP TO 60 m
10 11
USE CABLE G (25 CORE) CABLE AND TWO
12
CABLE N (LOW LOSS COAXES) BETWEEN THE SOFT START UNIT AND
CO-AX (W)
VIDEO
CO-AX (W)
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT FOR CABLE RUNS GREATER THAN 60 m CO-AX (S)
SYNC
CO-AX (S)
CD-0235
Figure 20 - Soft Start Unit with In-Line Power Supply
Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 2.43
KH1250 Chapter 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2.44
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 2
MK6 Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2) CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
TB1
TB3
1 2 3
1 2 3
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
AERIAL MOTOR
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) FROM CZZ-A14/2
TB U1 V1 W1
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
SEE INSERT A
TB2 R B G
TO TB6
E.S.U (CZZ-A1)
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL) L N
Tx MAINS
Tx READY Tx RUN 0V Tx MUTE TUNE CONTROL OUT TUNE INDICATOR SHORT PULSE MEDIUM PULSE LONG PULSE VERY LONG PULSE Rx MONITOR Tx MONITOR SIGNAL Tx MONITOR 0V
HEADING LINE AZIMUTH PHASE 1 AZIMUTH PHASE 2 EARTH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4
CABLE K 2-CORE (POWER) 1 PHASE MAINS IN
BN or 1 BL or 2
T or Lt/G S R/B R/G
1 2 3
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
R/Y R/W CABLE M (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
B/Y B/W B/BK
*
TB5
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
G/W G/O
W VIDEO COAX S SYNC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A
+27V TO CONTACTOR CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 0V
TB4 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
G/Y V/BK S/BN G/BK G/B BN/BK P V BK Y B W/V Y/V W/BN Y/BN R/BK O BN W G R R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2 V/BK G/Y G/BK S/BN BN/BK G/B V P BK Y B Y/V W/V Y/BN W/BN O R/BK BN W G R
TO TB2
B G R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
*DIODES TO BE FITTED ON INSTALLATION
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
S/G B/O
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
S/B
CABLE N 38-CORE TO TRANSCEIVER
0V 0V
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y
COAX (W)
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U1
U5
V1
V5
V2
W1
W5
W2
U2
U5 U2
U1
0V 0V 0V
V5 V1
V2
+27V +27V +27V +27V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
+27V +27V
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
+27V
U1
W5
W1
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V U1
W2 V1
PLB
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U5
R/B
U2
W5 W2
V1
U2
U5
V5 W1
V2
W1
V2
V5
W5
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
LOCATION 3
Tx MON 0V Tx MON NEON SIG
PLM
6 5 4 3 2 1
B R
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
PLK
SYNC COAX (S)
U1
U2
0V 0V
CONTROL BOARD
VIDEO COAX (W)
W2
V1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
TB6
COAX
U1
PLA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
COAX (S) CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR
S/B B/O S/G
FOR LONG CABLE RUNS LOW LOSS COAX TO BE USED IN PLACE OF 38 COAX TO DISPLAY
COAX'S W S
4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
CD-3846
Figure 21
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
ESU (CZZ-A1) to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 21
Page 2.45/46
KH1250 Chapter 2 MK6 GEARBOX (CAE-A42) (CAE-A41)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2)
AERIAL MOTOR
}
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3 R B G
TO TB6
E.S.U (CZZ-A1) L N
Tx MAINS
CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
T or Lt/G S R/B R/G R/Y R/W
SHORT PULSE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MEDIUM PULSE LONG PULSE VERY LONG PULSE Rx MONITOR
9 10 11 12
B/Y B/W
Tx MONITOR SIGNAL Tx MONITOR 0V
13 14
Tx READY Tx RUN 0V Tx MUTE TUNE CONTROL OUT TUNE INDICATOR
HEADING LINE AZIMUTH PHASE 1 AZIMUTH PHASE 2 EARTH
1 2 3
B/BK
CABLE K 2-CORE (POWER) 1 PHASE MAINS IN
} }
SYNC
BN or 1 BL or 2
1 2 3 TB2 1 2 3
*
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
G/W G/O
G/O
4
G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
COAX S COAX TO TB2
}
B G R
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TB6 1 2 3
1
R or 1
2
B or 2
3
Y or 3
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V +26V
7 8 9 10 11 12
*DIODES TO BE FITTED ON INSTALLATION
TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL
}
SEE INSERT A
R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
S/G B/O S/B
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U1
W2
U1
W2
V1
U2
V1
U2
W1
V2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
V/BK G/Y G/BK S/BN BN/BK G/B V P BK Y B Y/V W/V Y/BN W/BN O R/BK BN W G R
PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
COAX (W) B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G
COAX (S)
S B/W B/Y
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE
COAX'S W S
LOCATION PLM 3 +27V 6 5 0V 4 AZ 3 HL 2 Tx MON 0V 1 Tx MON NEON SIG
U5
U2
V1
V5
V2
W1
W5
W2
CABLE E (12-CORE)
U5
Y G B R
V5
U2
V5 V1
V2
W5
W1
W2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V U1
U1
BK W
U5 U1
V1
V1
U2 V2
W1
W5 W2
W2
W1
U2 V2
U5
V5
W5
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
4 3 2 1
U1
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
CONTROL BOARD PLB 14 13 12
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
+27V +27V
S/B B/O S/G
PLK 5 4 3 2 1
V
BN V BK
1 2 3 4
BN
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
SAFETY SWITCH POLE 1 SAFETY SWITCH POLE 2
} }
CONT +ve CONTACTOR +27V
1 2
HL PCB Tx MON 0V Tx MON (SIG)
Y
3 4 5 6
Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (0V) +27V AZ
G W
7 8
HL 0V
B R R B
}
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
R/W R/Y R/B
Figure 22
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
MK6 Tx DOWNMAST (CTX-A7)
FOR LONG CABLE RUNS LOW LOSS COAX TO BE USED IN PLACE OF 38 COAX TO DISPLAY
CD-0256
TB U1 V1 W1
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
SYNC COAX (S)
}
FROM CZZ-A14/2
G/Y V/BK S/BN G/BK G/B BN/BK P V BK Y B W/V Y/V W/BN Y/BN R/BK O BN W G R R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S
0V
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO
3-CORE (POWER)
A TB4 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 5
COAX (W)
}
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
+27V TO CONTACTOR CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 0V
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
W VIDEO
TB3
TB1
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIP’S SUPPLY
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
ESU (CZZ-A1) to Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-2) to Downmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
Figure 22
Page 2.47/48
KH1250 Chapter 2
PLC CAN HI CAN LO GND HEADING LINE AZIMUTH
GREY COAX
NOTE 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
BLACK WHITE BLUE ORANGE RED YELLOW GREEN
PLW +24V 1 (MOTOR) 2
SK7 - 12 SK19 - 24
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
SYNC OUT
SYNC IN
SK13 - 18
WHITE COAX GREY COAX CABLE B (3-CORE SMALL)
PLA-F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TB3
TB1 1 2 3
1 2 3
CAN ADAPTER PCB NNR-A981 RUN MUTE MP LP TUNE CONTROLS TUNE INDICATORS Tx READY AZIMUTH N/C Rx MON HEADING LINE N/C N/C GROUND
1 2 PLB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
S R/G B/Y B/W R/Y R/W T G/O B/Bk G/W
TO TB2
BN or 1 BL or 2
24V L POWER N SUPPLY E SET FOR +220V OR -110V INPUT
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
B G R
R/B
CABLE N (38-CORE) FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT COAX (W)
COAX (S)
TB6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO
SYNC
POWER UNIT LOCATION 2 TB4 0V 1 0V 2 0V 3 0V 4 0V 5 0V 6 +26V 7 +26V 8 +26V 9 +26V 10 +26V 11 +26V 12
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
CONTACTOR 0V CONT +ve 27V
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK W/V W/BN R/BK BN
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V Y B Y/V Y/BN O W G R
G/Y S/BN G/B P BK Y B W/V W/BN R/BK BN W G R
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
S/G B/O S/B
V/BK G/BK BN/BK V
Y/V Y/BN O
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CABLE N (38-CORE) TO TRANSCEIVER
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rx MON Tx READY HL AZ MUTE RUN LP MP TUNE IND TUNE 0V
Nucleus 3 Display to Radar Interface Unit to Upmast Transceiver: Installation Wiring
V2
4 3 2 1
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
Tx MON 0V Tx MON NEON SIG
U1
W2
V1
U2
W1
V2
PLM 6 5 4 3 2 1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
B R
2-CORE TO Tx MON ARM
OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1
W2
U5 V1
U2
V5 W1 V2
W5
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
PLK CONT +27V 0V CONTACTOR CONT +ve
COAX (W) COAX'S W
U2
W1
SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
LOCATION 3
S/B B/O S/G
COAX (S)
W2
V1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
PLB
B/BK T or Lt/G G/W G/O R/G S B/W B/Y R/W R/Y R/B
U1
PLA
CONTROL BOARD
S
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
SEE INSERT A
U1
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
CD-4555
Figure 23
PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
1 +27V TO CONTACTOR 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 3 0V
R/B R/Y R/W B/Y B/W S R/G G/O G/W T or Lt/G B/BK
B/O G/Y
U1 U2 U3
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
MAINS RELAY
PLC
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
AERIAL MOTOR
TB
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES
TB1
R B G
TO TB6
1 PHASE MAINS IN
12
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY
SK1 - 6
R or 1 B or 2 Y or 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SKO SYNC
WHITE COAX
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY
PLL-S
VIDEO
MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14/2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SKP
38-CORE CABLE
RIU NNR-A55
PLA
NUCLEUS 3 5000, 6000, 7000 INPUT PCB
COMPOSITE 12-CORE CABLE
5 4 3 2 1
U1
V1
W2
U2
W1
W5
U5
V5 V2
0V VIDEO SYNC 0V
Figure 23
Page 2.49/50
KH1250 Chapter 3
CHAPTER 3 COMMISSIONING CONTENTS Paragraph 1 2 5 7 13 13 15 16 17 18 19
Introduction Power Supplies Links/Switch Settings Setting To Work Heading Line Adjustment General Checking the Alignment To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) To Correct an Error (Coarse Adjustment) Performance Monitoring Checks Setting-Up Procedure for Line Amplifiers RAN-A26 and RAN-A27-2
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4 5 6
Page Control Board CTX-A246 Factory Set Link/Switch Settings Modulator Board CTX-A247 Factory Set Switch Settings Power Unit CAE-202 Factory Set Switch Settings Rx Monitor Board CTX-A252 Factory Set Switch Settings Soft Start Unit Neon Indicator Voltage LED Functions
3.4 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.6
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4
Page Soft Start Unit: Link and Fuse Locations Transmission/Receiver Monitor Responses PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Circuit Diagram PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Location of Link 1
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
3.3 3.9 3.13/14 3.15/16
Page 3.1
KH1250 Chapter 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 3.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3
CHAPTER 3 COMMISSIONING INTRODUCTION 1
Interswitched equipments, or equipments interfaced with other radar equipments, are described in their respective Handbooks. CAUTION The transceiver RF output must not be operated into an open circuit or poorly matched feed cable. Damage to the RF head will result.
POWER SUPPLIES 2
Check that all cables have been installed and connected.
3
In the Soft Start Unit check that the thermal overload trip button is set.
4
In the Soft Start Unit check the voltage and fuse settings of the Power Supply (factory set to 220V input). For 110V operation, short out the link pins located beside C6 on the PSU.
LINKS
FUSE
C6
- - - L
N
E
R3**
R20**
R4**
R21** R22##
R5##
A2
A1
CD-1360
Figure 1 - Soft Start Unit: Link and Fuse Locations
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.3
KH1250 Chapter 3 LINK AND SWITCH SETTINGS 5
Ensure that the correct links are fitted to the Display Unit to enable it to work with the MkVI Transceiver.
6
Check that the MkVI Transceiver link/switches are set in accordance with Tables 1 to 4 and ensure that the turning mechanism safety switch is set to ON. TABLE 1: Control Board CTX-A246 Factory Set Link/Switch Settings LINK/SWITCH
NORMAL SETTING
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
LK1
(RUN)
A9
Run or Standby AE start
LK2
(NORM)
F2
High voltage soft start
LK3
(3000)
C4
SP 3000/1500 pps
LK4
(NORM)
E3
Norm/delayed prf (pre-pulse)
LK5
(750)
E5
MP 1500/750 pps
LK6*
(S)
F4
S/X heater current turndown
LK7
(INT)
C4/5
INT/EXT Trig
LK8
(NORM)
E6
H/L sense (trig) Enable
LK9
(GND)
B8
Jitter Enable
LK10
(180)
D7
90/180 secs warm-up time
LK11
B4
Ext Trig Format
LK12
D7
75W
A7
AE Switch
SW1
ON
Termination
* Set to (X) if a Mute Sector of 180º or more is set. TABLE 2: Modulator Board CTX-A247 Factory Set Switch Settings SWITCH
SW1
Page 3.4
NORMAL SETTING
ON
CIRCUIT REF
C7
FUNCTION
Recharge TRIG ON
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3 Table 3: Power Unit CAE-202 Factory Set Switch Settings LINK/SWITCH
NORMAL SETTING
SW1
ON
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
C5
High voltage ON/OFF
RV1
C7
Set SHORT PULSE HT Volts
RV2
C7
Set LONG PULSE HT Volts
RV3
B4
Set CURRENT TRIP
F4
Set HEATER VOLTS
LK
S
Table 4: Rx Monitor Board CTX-A252 Factory Set Switch Settings NOTE: The following are pre-set in the factory and only need to be changed to move the Rx Monitor fingers to a different part of the display (refer to Figure 1). SW1 Pole 4 is not used. SW1 POLE 1
SW1 POLE 2
SW1 POLE 3
FINGERS START
FINGERS STOP
ON
ON
OFF
70º
110º
ON
OFF
ON
127º
167º
OFF
ON
ON
260º
300º
Table 5: Soft Start Unit Neon Indicator Voltage MOTOR VOLTS
PROCEDURE
220 V NOM
Connect a wire link between TP3 and TP4 on PCB (located behind the heatsink). Connect a wire link across one of the two resistors mounted below the keyswitch.
380 TO 440V
No links required.
SETTING TO WORK 7
8
Carry out the following: (1)
Switch on the mains at the Isolators; Single phase for the Display, three phase for the aerial motor.
(2)
Set the Soft Start Unit switch to ON.
(3)
Set the display power switch to ON.
At the display ensure that the Transceiver is entered as MkVI in the installed equipment parameters.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.5
KH1250 Chapter 3 9
Verify that the display indicates TX READY after the warm up period of approximately 3 minutes.
10
Transceiver status is indicated by LEDs located on the power supply and control board. The LEDs may only be viewed with the transceiver cover removed (applies for both Upmast and Downmast versions). 11
On the Tx Power Supply (CAE-A202) all four green LEDs are illuminated.
12
Table 6 details the status of the LEDs on the Control Board (CTX-A246). Table 6: LED Functions
LED REFERENCE
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
COLOUR
STATUS
FUNCTION
D6
D5
GREEN
ON
+27V OK
D24
D5
GREEN
ON
PRF ON
D26*
D5
RED
OFF
MUTE OFF*
D4
D4
RED
OFF
HEATER CURRENT OK
D27
D4
GREEN
FLASHING
HEADING LINE INDICATOR
D36
D4
GREEN
ON AFTER 3 min
Tx READY
D17
D3
GREEN
ON
ON TUNE INDICATOR
* If D26 is illuminated, the Mute facility has been activated by one of the following: - No Heading Line - Mute signal ON - Rx Mon Mute active HEADING LINE ADJUSTMENT NOTE: This procedure is not required for Nucleus 3 Displays. Heading line errors are corrected by the Display ‘skew’ setting. General 13
This section provides procedures for the following: (1)
Checking the alignment of the Antenna and Heading Line and adjustment to give maximum bearing accuracy.
(2)
Checking the orientation of the monitor neon (if fitted) to give a satisfactory plume on the display (approximately 6nm long on the 12nm range). See Figure 1 for a typical response plume. NOTE When the plume has been checked, and it is established that the transmission shows maximum performance, the plume length should recorded for future reference. Page 3.6
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
KH1250 Chapter 3 14
During the Heading Line alignment procedure, the ship must be stationary on a known fixed heading and must have bearing information from the gyro compass. The ship should be alongside; less accurate results will be obtained if at anchor or at a buoy. Checking the Alignment 15
With the vessel stationary, proceed as follows: (1)
Switch ON the Display.
(2)
Select HEAD UP mode and a 6 mile range.
(3)
Select a stationary target which can be seen by the eye and which paints an echo on the screen.
(4)
Take a compass bearing of the target, and compare this with the bearing of the echo paint on the display. Note the degree and direction of discrepancy.
To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) 16
Any error is present in the Heading Line may be adjusted as follows: (1)
Switch the Gearbox Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Switch all supplies to STANDBY.
(3)
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
(4)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(5)
Slide the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(6)
Slacken the two pillars securing the HL PCB assembly.
(7)
Hold the antenna secure.
(8)
Move the pcb assembly the required amount to correct the mis-alignment. (Graduations on the bracket are at 2 degree intervals).
Note: Movement of the PCB in the direction of the aerial rotation will cause the bearing reading of the echo paint to move in a counter clockwise direction and vice versa. (9)
Tighten the two pillars to secure the HL PCB assembly.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis back to its normal position and secure with the six captive screws.
(11)
Refit the outer cover. DO NOT TIGHTEN.
(12)
Set the safety switch to ON.
(13)
Set the display to RUN and check the visual and PPI display bearing of the known target.
(14)
To make any further adjustment, repeat step (8)
(15)
Secure the rear cover.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.7
KH1250 Chapter 3 To Correct an Error (Coarse Adjustment) 17
The Heading Line Opto Disc is factory set, however if the fine adjustmet does not achieve the required correction, proceed as follows: (1)
Perform Paragraph 14, steps (1) to (5).
(2)
Disconnect the plug to the Heading Line PCB.
(3)
Remove the Heading Line PCB, ensuring that the opto sensor does not foul against the opto disc.
(4)
With the array facing forward, check that the leading edge of the heading line disc recess is in line with the array centre line.
(5)
The heading line disc recess may be corrected by slackening the three M4 retaining bolts. Do not remove the bolts completely.
(6)
Manually rotate the disc to the new position required and retighten the bolts.
(7)
Refit and reconnect the Heading Line PCB by sliding the opto device over the edge of the opto disc.
(8)
Refit the retaining pillars and reconnect the plug.
(9)
To check that the Heading Line is correct, refer to the Fine Adjustment Paragraph.
Page 3.8
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3 Performance Monitoring Checks 18
A performance monitor check is carried out to check the efficiency of the Transceiver magnetron and RF component.To carry out the performance monitor check, proceed as follows : (1)
Switch the display power to ON.
(2)
After waiting 3 minutes, the screen should indicate TX READY, select GO TO RUN and then select TX A.
(3)
Select the 12 nautical mile range and PERF.MON, (indicated on the top left hand side of the screen).
(4)
Using the VRM facility, measure the diameter of the radar fingers (Figure 2) that appear at the 130 to 160 degrees sector of the display.
(5)
For future reference, record the diameter in the operators record under the PERFORMANCE MONITOR heading. RX.... nm
(6)
Using the VRM facility, measure the plume (Figure 2), at a bearing of approximately 320 degrees and record as in (5) under TX.........nm. heading.
RAD 1
MP
MON
350
000
010
340
12
RANGE
020
330
GYRO 130 deg SPD16.5 kts L(M)
2
RINGS 030
N UP 320
CORR 1 VIDEO NORM
040
310
CD 050
300
HL 060
Tx MON
19.0 deg
STAB
SEA
SET
SEA
DRIFT
SEA
2.0 min
TCPA LIMIT
20.0 min
LONG 270
3 min (R/T)
CPA LIMIT
080 LAT
nom 6 miles
15 min (R/T)
TRAILS
070
Rx MON
280
000 deg
SMG
VECTOR
nom 6 miles only
290
CMG
050
00.45 N
001
23.45 E
090
100
260
110
250 120
240
VRM 7nm EBL 105.6
130
230 140
220
4 9 9 R5 S G
210
150 200 190
180
170
160
WAY Pt
NAV
PLOT
MAPS
TRIAL
CRT
CD-1361
Figure 2 - Typical Tx/Rx Monitor Responses
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.9
KH1250 Chapter 3 SETTING UP PROCEDURE FOR LINE AMPLIFIERS RAN-A26 AND RAN-A27-2 19
The setting up procedure requires the following: (1)
a square wave to be transmitted from RAN-A26.
(2)
the value of some of the components in Line Receiver RAN-A27 to be altered to restore the shape of the received waveform to a square wave.
Note: If the Line Receiver is being used with a Nucleus display, resistors R7 and R23 in the Line Receiver must be changed from 1K to 680R to allow it to operate from 12V. 20
Proceed as follows: (1)
Set Line Amp (RAN-A26) switches to ‘Test’ (SW1 set to Position 2, SW2 set to Position 1), to generate the square wave test signal. Monitor the outputs from both the Sync and Video sockets and adjust potentiometers RV1 (sync) and RV2 (video) to give an output of 5V peak at both.
(2)
In Line Receiver RAN-A27 connect a 10nF capacitor across position C5.
(3)
Connect an oscilloscope to the input side of resistor R9. The distorted test wave should have a rounded leading edge.
(4)
Connect another 10nF capacitor across the capacitor at position C5 and check the effect on the displayed waveform. If the waveform is degraded, reduce the value of the second capacitor to 5nF and re-check the waveform. Continue to increase or decrease the capacitance at C5 until a waveform with minimum distortion is achieved.
Note: The resultant waveform does not need to be too precise, as the signal is ‘fine tuned’ later in the procedure. (5)
Connect a 2.2nF capacitor across position C1 and a 22W resistor position R16, and check the effect on the displayed waveform. If the waveform is degraded, reduce the size of the capacitor until the waveform improves.
(6)
Using the same procedure as step (5), add capacitors across positions C2 and C4, to restore the leading edge of the test signal to a square wave (each capacitor should be smaller than the previous one in the chain). The process is designed to match the amplifier to the cable and the process of adding the extra capacitors ‘fine tunes’ the circuit. It is not necessary to have all the capacitors fitted if the best waveform is found without them.
(7)
Once the optimum waveform has been achieved, connect a 10nF capacitor across position C8 and connect the oscilloscope to the Line Receiver Sync output, at the top of R14. Monitor the test waveform.
(8)
Adjust RV1 to give an output of 5V.
(9)
To optimise the waveform, repeat the procedure decribed in step (4), but for position C8.
Page 3.10
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3 21
The Video driver circuit also requires setting-up. Normally, the same procedure used for the Sync driver setting-up will provide the required waveform. However, if this does not give a similar waveform, repeat steps (1) to (8) for the Video driver circuit, substituting the following components in the text: C1 = C12 C2 = C13 C3 = C14 22
C4 = C15 C8 = C19 RV1 = RV2
R9 = R25 R14 = R30 R16 = R32
On completion, return the switches in Line Amplifier RAN-A26 to the normal position.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 3.11
KH1250 Chapter 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 3.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 3
Figure 3
Issue 4
In-Line PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Circuit Diagram
Figure 3
Page 3.13/14
KH1250 Chapter 3
Ensure that Link1 is fitted.
Figure 4
Issue 4
In-Line PSU 45-677-112 (Part of Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14-2): Location of Link 1
Figure 4
Page 3.15/16
KH1250 Chapter 4
CHAPTER 4 TECHNICAL INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Paragraph 1 4 8 9
Upmast Transceiver Downmast Transceiver Antenna Turning Mechanism Soft Start Unit
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6
Page Upmast Transceiver Block Diagram Upmast Transceiver System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 1) Upmast Transceiver System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 2) Downmast Transceiver Block Diagram Downmast Tx System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 1) Downmast Tx System Interconnection Diagram (Sht 2)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
4.5/6 4.7 4.8 4.9/10 4.11 4.12
Page 4.1
KH1250 Chapter 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 4
CHAPTER 4 TECHNICAL INTRODUCTION UPMAST TRANSCEIVER 1
The upmast transceiver is mounted in a fabricated enclosure, which also houses the Antenna Turning Mechanism. The enclosure has a front cover which can be removed to provide access to the AE motor. 2
The rear cover provides access to the RF head, electronics and cable terminations. The electronic chassis provides mounting for the Control PCB with its terminal strips, the Rx Monitor PCB, the Modulator PCB and power components. The chassis may be removed/hinged down to provide access to the modulator and RF head components. 3
A block diagram of the Upmast Transceiver is shown in Figure 1. A system interconnection diagram is shown on Figure 2, sheets 1 and 2.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER 4
The downmast transceiver comprises a sheet metal rear plate which is formed to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two ‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the rear plate to provide the bulkhead fixing points. 5
The main sub units are bolted to the rear plate. The PCBs are located on the electronic chassis. The electronic chassis has to be removed to gain access to the modulator and pulse transformer. 6
A sheet metal wrap-around cover, secured in position by six captive screws, provides access to the front and sides of the unit. Cable entry is at the bottom of the unit. An earth bonding point is situated on the top. 7
A block diagram of the Downmast Transceiver is shown in Figure 3. A system interconnection diagram is shown on Figure 4, sheets 1, 2 and 3.
ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 8
A separate Antenna Turning Mechanism is required when a Downmast Transceiver is used. The unit is based on the same gearbox as the Upmast Transceiver. The Antenna Turning Mechanism is available as 25 r.p.m. with a 3.9m antenna or as 40 r.p.m. (minimum) with a 2.8m antenna. SOFT START UNIT 9
The soft start unit comprises a sheet metal rear plate which is formed to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two ‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the rear plate to provide the bulkhead fixing points.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 4.3
KH1250 Chapter 4 10
The main sub units are bolted to the rear plate.
11
A sheet metal wrap-around cover is secured in position by six captive screws.
12
The RESET button for the Antenna Motor overload trip is located on the contactor, inside the unit.
Page 4.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 4 S-BAND ANTENNA Mk2 CAE-A36 OR CAE-A39 MONITOR ARM PART OF CAE-A38 (OPTIONAL) LOC. 11 TX. MON NEON
2 CORE CABLE A
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2 MOTOR PROTECTION & ISOLATION SWITCH
220/440V MOTOR
GEARBOX ROTATING JOINT
AZ/HL PCB LOC 9
DELAY
INLINE PSU
HEATSINK
PLB
PLH
NOT USED
PLC
4mm 3mm
MAGNETRON LOC.5
BRAID HEATSINK
RECEIVER LOC. 7
PLA
PLA
RX MONITOR LOC. 8
1 TB LOC. 1 VIDEO O/P
PLA TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 LOC. 6
PART OF 38 CORE CABLE
PLJ
PLC
SYNC. O/P
PLM
(NOT USED PRE. PULSE O/P)
CTX-A248 MODULATOR & POWER SUPPLY HV MON SUPPLY LOC. 4
TP's
HEATSINK
CTX-A246 CONTROL CIRCUITS Tx MON DETECTOR & POWER SUPPLY/SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION PANEL LOC.3
PLG
PLB
TERMS
PLD
PLA
PLK
(NOT USED EXT. TRIG. IN)
PLA
EXTERNAL SAFETY SWITCH LOC.1
RF HEAD CIRCULATOR LIMITER MIXER L.N.F.E. LOC. 5
HEATSINK
PLB
NOISE DIODE
PLB
PSU CAE-A202 LOC. 2
PLC
PLA
RF HEAD LOC. 5
PLC
PART OF CAE-A38 OPTIONAL
TB2
PLA
TB4
PLB
TB5,6
3 CORE POWER CABLE L
PLB
CABLE M
L N E
SOFT START LOC 10
PLC
1 PHASE MAINS FROM DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH
TRANSCEIVER CAE-A37 CAE-A45
TP's
3 PHASE MAINS IN FROM ISOLATOR
38 CORE FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
AERIAL START LOC 10
TB3 LOC 1
PLA
CONTACTOR TB1
PLJ
PLE
PLF
PLD
FAN
CD-3803
Figure 1
Issue 4
Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): System Block Diagram
Figure 1
Page 4.5/6
KH1250 Chapter 4
POWER SUPPLY CAE-A202 2PLA
FROM DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
MODULATOR CTX-A248
2PLC 0V -350V 0V +9.5V
4PLB
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
0V -350V 0V +9.5V
CURRENT PULSE
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
0V 1 -15V 2 3 +15V 4 0V 5 +27V 6 7 SPV 8 SOFT START 9 HV OFF 10
SAFETY SWITCH (TURNING MECH CHASSIS) FROM DISPLAY
FROM DISPLAY
3PLA 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SYNC (SIG) 1 0V 2
3PLC -150V MP RELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON-VE
1 2 3 +15V 4 5 0V 6 +27V +27V 7 8 SPV 0V 9 SOFT START HTR MON 10 HV OFF 11 12 0V -15V
3PLK
DUMMY TRIG 4 LINK 0V 1 CONT & VE Rx TRIG 2 CONTACTOR 0V 3 0V CSR2 TRIG 5 LINK 0V CSR1 TRIG 3PLB 0V 1 0V 2 TUNE 3 TUNE IND. 4 M.P. 5 L.P. 6 Tx RUN 7 8 MUTE 9 AZ 10 HL 11 Tx READY 12 Rx MON 13 14
BRAID
4PLC
(PART OF)
2PLB
0V
Y GN
MAGNETRON CTX - A309
TB1 2 SYNC 1 0V
}
TO DISPLAY
4PLA 5 10 11 3 7
-150V MP RELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON-VE
12 +27V 8 0V 9 HTR MON 1 4 6 8
4PLD 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DUMMY TRIG 0V Rx TRIG 0V CSR2 TRIG 0V CSR1 TRIG 0V
CD-1366
Figure 2 - Upmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 1)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 4.7
KH1250 Chapter 4
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
RECEIVER CTX-A297
(PART OF)
7PLA
3PLD +15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND. RX TRIG RX TRIG 0V LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V -15V TX MON PULSE +27V 1 NEON (SIG) LPVLP SP 2 NEON (0V) +6V
3 2 12 10 14 13
5 7
3 4 5 6
FOR PRE-PULSE OPTION
FOR EXT. TRIGGER OPTION
CD-1367
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6PLB
6PLJ
HL AZ 0V +27V
3PLG
4 6 5 1 2 3
3PLE +27V 1 FAN ON 2
+15V 0V PRF DELAY PRF LSP LMP 3PLF LLP RX MON 1 LVLP +27V 2 +15V 3 0V 4 -15V 5 AZ 6 HL 7 3PLH MON TRIG 8 1 +15V RX TRIG 0V 9 2 RX MUTE 10 3 EXT TRIG SYNC 11 4 EXT TRIG 12 5 3000Hz 6 0V
LNFE CAE-A217
TUNE SUPPLY CTX-A250
9PLA 7 6 8 5 1 2 3 4
7PLB 1 2 VIDEO 3 0V 4
-15V VIDEO 5 Tx MON PULSE 0V 6
TB1 3 VIDEO 4 0V
TO Rx MON
HL/AZ CAE-A180 HL AZ 0V +27V 0V TX MON (SIG) TX MON (SIG) 0V
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND Rx TRIG Rx TRIG 0V
}
3PLM FROM TX MON ARM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FAN
VARACTOR +VE 0V 0V TUNE LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V +12V +27V
}
1 2 3 4
5PLB 5 6 7 4 3 2 1
5PLA
0V 4 - 24V 0V +12V
IF 0V
COAX
6 4 8 1 9 11
SP +6V (NOT USED) VARACTOR +VE LP TUNE IND (NOT USED) NOISE IND (NOT USED) 7PLC
7PLD1
IF 0V
NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
7PLD2 NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
FROM RECEIVER PLB
Rx MONITOR CTX-A252 8PLB 1 2
VIDEO 0V
8PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MON 0V +27V +15V 0V -15V AZ HL RX TRIG 0V TX MUTE
8PLC DIODE DRIVE 0V
NOISE DIODE CAE-A213
(PART OF CIRCULATOR)
Figure 3 - Upmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 2) Page 4.8
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 4 S-BAND ANTENNA Mk2 CAE-A36 OR CAE-A39 MONITOR ARM PART OF CAE-A38 (OPTIONAL) LOC. 11 TX. MON NEON
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2
38 CORE FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
CABLE M
L N E
220/440V MOTOR
AZ/HL PCB LOC 9
GEARBOX ROTATING JOINT
EXTERNAL SAFETY SWITCH (TB1) LOC.1
DELAY
INLINE PSU
TB5,6
3 CORE POWER CABLE L
TB4
RF CO-AX
1 PHASE MAINS FROM DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH
SOFT START LOC 10
2 CORE CABLE A
TB1
MOTOR PROTECTION & ISOLATION SWITCH
3 PHASE MAINS IN FROM ISOLATOR
TB3 LOC 1
AERIAL START LOC 10
PLA
CONTACTOR TB1
TB2
TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42
PLB
PLA PLH NOT USED
PLC PLJ
PLE
PLF
MAGNETRON LOC.5
BRAID HEATSINK
PLA
PLA PLB
PLC
PLA PLB
RX MONITOR LOC. 8
1 TB LOC. 1 VIDEO O/P
PLA TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 LOC. 6
PART OF 38 CORE CABLE
PLJ
PLC
SYNC. O/P
PLM
(OPTION PRE. PULSE O/P)
4mm 3mm
HEATSINK
CTX-A246 CONTROL CIRCUITS Tx MON DETECTOR & POWER SUPPLY/SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION PANEL LOC.3
PLG
PLB (OPTION EXT. TRIG. IN)
TERMS
PLD
PLA
CTX-A248 MODULATOR & POWER SUPPLY HV MON SUPPLY LOC. 4
TP's
RECEIVER LOC. 7
PLB
HEATSINK
PLB
PLK
RF HEAD CIRCULATOR LIMITER MIXER L.N.F.E. LOC. 5
PLC
HEATSINK
NOISE DIODE
TP's
PLA
PSU CAE-A202 LOC. 2
PLC
RF HEAD LOC. 5
3 CORE CABLE B
38 CORE CABLE M
PART OF CAE-A38 OPTIONAL
12 CORE CABLE E
PLD
FAN
TRANSCEIVER CTX-A7
CD-3796
Figure 4
Issue 4
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): System Block Diagram
Figure 4
Page 4.9/10
KH1250 Chapter 4
POWER SUPPLY CAE-A202 2PLA
FROM DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
MODULATOR CTX-A248
2PLC
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V +27V
0V -350V 0V +9.5V
4PLB
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
0V -350V 0V +9.5V
CURRENT PULSE 0V
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
0V 1 -15V 2 3 +15V 4 0V 5 +27V 6 7 SPV 8 SOFT START 10 9 HV OFF
3PLA 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3PLC -150V MP RELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON-VE
1 2 3 +15V 4 5 0V 6 +27V +27V 7 8 SPV 0V 9 SOFT START HTR MON 10 HV OFF 11 12 0V -15V
BRAID
4PLC
(PART OF)
2PLB
Y GN
4PLA
SYNC (SIG) 1 0V 2
MAGNETRON CTX - A309
TB1 2 SYNC 1 0V
}
TO DISPLAY
5 -150V 10 MP RELAY 11 LP RELAY 3 HTR RELAY 7 MON-VE 12 +27V 8 0V 9 HTR MON 1 4 6 8
4PLD
3PLB
FROM DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0V TUNE TUNE IND. M.P. L.P. Tx RUN MUTE AZ HL Tx READY Rx MON
DUMMY TRIG 0V Rx TRIG 0V CSR2 TRIG 0V CSR1 TRIG 0V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DUMMY TRIG 0V Rx TRIG 0V CSR2 TRIG 0V CSR1 TRIG 0V
CD-1365
Figure 5 - Downmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 1) Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 4.11
KH1250 Chapter 4
CONTROL BOARD CTX-A246
RECEIVER CTX-A297
(PART OF)
7PLA
3PLD
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND. RX TRIG RX TRIG 0V LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V
TO TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A42 OR CAE-A41
3PLK 2 3 4 1 5
CONTACTOR 0V LINK CONT +VE LINK
1 2 3 4 5 6
FOR EXT. TRIGGER OPTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LNFE CAE-A217
TUNE SUPPLY CTX-A250 6PLB
6PLJ 4 6 5 1 2 3
VARACTOR +VE 0V 0V TUNE LO +VE SELECT LO 9/12V +12V +27V
3PLE +27V 1 FAN ON 2
7PLB 1 2 VIDEO 3 0V 4
TB1
}
3 VIDEO TO 4 0V DISPLAY
TO Rx MON
NEON (SIG) NEON (0V) HL AZ 0V +27V
+15V 0V PRF DELAY PRF LSP LMP LLP LVLP
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND Rx TRIG Rx TRIG 0V
5 VIDEO 5 7 -15V 0V 6 Tx MON PULSE
3PLM
3PLG FOR PRE-PULSE OPTION
+27V LPVLP SP +6V
3 2 12 10 14 13
}
TO SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14
-15V TX MON PULSE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
}
FAN
5PLB 5 6 7 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
0V 4 - 24V 0V +12V
5PLA IF 0V
6 4 8 1 9 11
COAX
SP +6V (NOT USED) VARACTOR +VE LP TUNE IND (NOT USED) NOISE IND (NOT USED) 7PLC
7PLD1
IF 0V
NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
7PLD2 NOISE 1 0V 2
} NOISE MEASUREMENT
FROM RECEIVER PLB
Rx MONITOR CTX-A252 8PLB 1 2
8PLC
8PLA
3PLF
RX MON +27V +15V 0V -15V AZ HL 3PLH MON TRIG 1 +15V RX TRIG 0V 2 RX MUTE 3 EXT TRIG SYNC 4 EXT TRIG 5 3000Hz 6 0V
VIDEO 0V MON 0V +27V +15V 0V -15V AZ HL RX TRIG 0V TX MUTE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DIODE DRIVE 0V
NOISE DIODE CAE-A213
(PART OF CIRCULATOR)
TURNING MECHANISM CAE-A41 CAE-A42 CAE-A180 Tx MON (0V)
9PLA 1
Tx MON (SIG)
2
Tx MON (SIG) Tx MON (0V)
3 4
+27V
5
AZ
6 7
HL PCB
HL
8
0V
}
}
TO Tx MONITOR ARM
TO TRANSCEIVER
SAFETY SWITCH CONT +ve
TB1 1
CONTACTOR
2
+27V
3
SW +27V
4
}
CD-1363
Figure 6 - Downmast Transceiver Interconnection Diagram (Sheet 2)
Page 4.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
CHAPTER 5 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION CONTENTS Para 1 3 4 5 10 12 14 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 34 35 36 37 40 43 44 45 46 49 54 56 56 68 69 71 72 72 81
INTRODUCTION POWER UNIT CAE-A202 Functional Description Circuit Description Low Voltage Power Supplies (+15 V to -15 V) High Voltage Power Supply Voltage Control Shutdown and Overload Trip Soft Start Output CONTROL/TERMINALS PCB CTX-A246 Functional Description Circuit Description Magnetron Heater Timer 3kHz Oscillator 42Hz Oscillator and 3kHz Jitter Frequency Pulse Length Decoding Heater Current Sense Magnetron Heater Turndown MUTE Functions HL Sense AE Switch FAN ON Local Oscillator Voltage Pre-Pulse External Trigger Tx Monitor MODULATOR UNIT CTX-A247/248 Functional Description Circuit Description Charging Cycle Modulator Waveforms -150 V Supply for Tx Monitor Neon RECEIVER MONITOR CTX-A252 Functional Description Circuit Description Sector Enable Noise Level Measurement
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.1
KH1250 Chapter 5 CONTENTS (Continued) Para
88 89 92 93 97 100 103 105 106 108 109 112 113 121 122
TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 Functional Description Circuit Description HL PCB CAE-A180 Functional Description Circuit Description Azimuth Pulses Heading Line Pulses LOG RECEIVER ASSEMBLY CTX-A297 Functional Description Circuit Description RF HEAD Signal Paths High Power Low Power ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM SAFETY SWITCH SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/*
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4 5
Page LED Functions Test Point Functions Link Functions Modulator Test Points Switch SW1 Settings
5.10 5.10 5.11 5.13 5.16
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Page Power Unit CAE- A202 Block Diagram Power Unit CAE- A202 Circuit Diagram Control PCB CTX-A246 Block Diagram 1 Control PCB CTX-A246 Block Diagram 2 Control PCB CTX-A246 Circuit Diagram Sheet 1 Control PCB CTX-A246 Circuit Diagram Sheet 2 Modulator Unit Block Diagram Modulator Unit Circuit Diagram Receiver Monitor CTX-A252 Block Diagram Receiver Monitor CTX-A252 Circuit Diagram Tune Supply PCB CTX-A250 Circuit Diagram HL PCB CAE-A180 Circuit Diagram Log Receiver Assembly CTX-A297 Block Diagram Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14 Block Diagram Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14 Circuit Diagram
Page 5.2
5.23/24 5.25/26 5.27 5.29/30 5.31/32 5.33/34 5.35/36 5.37/38 5.39/40 5.41/42 5.43 5.45/46 5.47 5.48 5.49/50
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
CHAPTER 5 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION 1
This chapter provides functional and technical descriptions for the electronic units comprising the Mk VI S-Band Transceiver. The transceiver is used for both Upmast and Downmast installations. Upmast and Downmast Transceivers comprise the following electronic units:
2
(1)
Power Unit CAE-A202.
(2)
Control/Terminals PCB CTX-A246.
(3)
Modulator Unit CTX-A248.
(4)
Rx Monitor PCB CTX-A252 (optional) and Noise Diode with Mount.
(5)
Tune Supply PCB CTX-A250.
(6)
HL/AZ PCB CAE-A180 (part of the Mechanism for a Downmast System).
(7)
Assembly of True Log Receiver CTX-A297.
(8)
Magnetron and RF Head with Low Noise Front End.
Antenna
Turning
A brief description is also provided for the following: (1)
Antenna Turning Mechanism.
(2)
Safety Switch.
(3)
Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/* (which also forms part of the system).
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.3
KH1250 Chapter 5 POWER UNIT CAE-A202 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 1) 3
The Power Unit CAE-A202 comprises PCB CTX-A283 mounted on a chassis. A +27 V dc input to the power unit is normally provided from a display. The power unit derives all the supplies required by the transceiver from the +27 V dc input, using switching regulators. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 2) 4
The following paragraphs provide a circuit description for the Power Unit.
Low Voltage Power Supplies (+15 V, +9.5 V and -15 V) 5
The +15 V dc supply is derived by applying +27 V dc to a switching regulator, comprising IC2, L1 and their associated components. Overcurrent protection is provided by self resetting fuse FS1. The fuse resets, provided the fault is cleared, when the PSU is switched off and then on. The +15 V dc supply output is via PLB pin 4. The +15 V dc supply is also used to derive the +9.5V and -15 V dc supplies. 6
The +9.5 V dc supply required to power the S-Band magnetron heaters is derived by applying +15 V dc to a switching regulator, comprising IC3, L2 and their associated components. The +9.5 V dc supply output is at PLC pin 4 via self resetting fuse FS2. The fuse resets when the PSU is switched off and then on, provided the fault is cleared. 7
The +8.5 V dc supply required to power the X-Band magnetron heaters is achieved by shorting out R2 in the IC3 feedback loop.
8
The -15 V dc supply is derived by applying +15 V dc to a switching regulator comprising IC4 and L3 and their associated components. The -15 V dc supply output is via PLB pin 2.
9
Low voltage supply indication is provided by the following LEDs: (1)
D18-A, +15 V.
(2)
D18-B, +9.5 V.
(3)
D17-A, +27 V HV Supply (S1) ON.
(4)
D17-B, -15 V.
Page 5.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 High Voltage Power Supply 10
The HT supply of -350 V for the 30 kW modulator is produced from a Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS), comprising control and drive circuit IC5, HEXFETs TR1 and TR2, Transformer T1, diodes D6 to 9, choke L7 and capacitor C31. The 30kHz pulse width modulation frequency is controlled by R15, R16 and C33. Capacitors C24, C25 and C27 are used to limit Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) across diodes D6 to 9. Spike suppression is provided by voltage dependent resistor R20. 11
Operation of Switch S1 disconnects the 27 V supply from transformer T1, so that the control circuit may be tested with the high voltage section disabled.
Voltage Control 12
The output voltage across C31 is divided by the resistor network R18, R21 and R9 relative to the +5 V dc reference supply. The voltage dropped across R9 is compared with the output of RV2 at pins 1 and 2 of pulse width modulator IC5. The pulse width modulator adjusts the pulse width drive to TR1 and TR2 to provide the stabilised output voltage of -350 V. 13
The relative amplitude of the short pulse current compared to the medium and long pulse currents may be adjusted using RV1. With the short pulse selected, R11 changes the reference voltage applied to RV2 when D4 is held at +15 V dc. This provides a lower output voltage of approximately -320 V for a short pulse. Shutdown and Overload Trip 14
The SMPS is shut down, during magnetron warm up and at standby, by TR3 which drives pin 10 of IC5 high.
15
Any over-currents in TR1 and TR2 are sensed by the voltage developed across the current sensing resistor R26. This voltage is compared with the current trip voltage set by RV3. An over-current condition triggers IC6 and repeatedly shuts down the SMPS for a period of 0.5 s until the fault recovers or is rectified. Soft Start Output 16
When IC5 pin 10 goes low, capacitor C35 slowly charges, gradually increasing the pulse width at IC5 pins 11 and 14. This soft start function limits the rate at which the output current and voltage are applied to C31. The output voltage from comparator IC8 pin 7 is held high until C35 is charged to approximately 3.8 V at which point the pin 7 goes low to activate the charge trigger circuit on the control board. This ensures that the full working voltage is available for the modulator before the Pulse Forming Network can be charged up.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.5
KH1250 Chapter 5 CONTROL PCB CTX-A246 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figures 3 and 4) 17
External cables from the Display/Interswitch Box, Tx Monitor Arm and the Scanner (Downmast Systems only) are terminated on the Control/Terminals PCB. The PCB receives standby, run, pulse length, tune, Rx monitor and Tx monitor commands from the display and converts them to the correct format to produce the triggers for the rest of the transceiver units. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figures 5 and 6) 18
The following paragraphs provide a circuit description for the Control/Terminals PCB.
Magnetron Heater Timer 19
The 90/180 second timer circuit, comprising IC24, IC25, IC26, IC27, IC28 and their associated components, is initialised at power-up. The timer circuit inhibits all transmit triggering functions to allow sufficient time for the magnetron valve to ‘warm up’. 20
At switch on, reset pin 6 of IC27 is held in reset mode until power up reset gate IC6C is triggered low. Output pin 8 of the single cycle timer IC27 is low. The frequency of oscillator IC24 is set by R76, RV4, R82 and C43 and is used to trigger programmable divider IC26. A four channel change-over switch IC25 acts on the data pins of IC26 to set the division rate. The A inputs of IC25 are active at switch on, giving the correct ratio for 180 or 90 second timing depending on the setting of Link 10. 21
Once output pin 8 of IC27 timer has switched to high, capacitor C44 is charged via D34 and R77. The next time the supply is turned off, D34 is reverse biased, causing C44 to slowly discharge via R84, R81 and the input current of Schmitt trigger IC28A. The four channel change-over switch, IC25, is switched to B inputs and R85 connected across IC24 timing resistors, for a period equal to the time C44 has high enough potential to trigger IC28A. Provided that power down is not more than three seconds this mechanism allows the timer to reduce the warm up time to less than five seconds. If power down is greater than three seconds the timer runs for the full 90 or 180 seconds, depending on the setting of Link 10. Green LED D36 illuminates at the end of the warm-up period. 3kHz Oscillator 22
Timer circuit IC23 provides the basic 3kHz oscillator frequency to produce the required pulse repetition frequency. Diode D31 ensures that the output is an approximate square
wave.
Page 5.6
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 42 Hz Oscillator and 3kHz Jitter Frequency 23
Timer circuit IC22 provides the basic 42Hz oscillator frequency to control the latching sequences. Diode D32 ensures that the output is an approximate square wave. The ramp waveform of the timer circuit at RV1 is fed via Link 9 and C41 to the 3kHz oscillator IC23, to produce a jitter frequency on top of the 3kHz. Pulse Length Decoding 24
Two encoded pulse length input lines MP and LP enter the board via PLB pins 4 and 5 respectively and are decoded by IC9C, IC11B, IC11C, IC18A and TR9 to give four control lines as follows:
25
(1)
Short.
(2)
Medium.
(3)
Long.
(4)
Long Pulse Low p.r.f.
The four outputs are fed to state latch IC16 and exclusive OR gates IC8A and IC12A to D. The associated outputs from IC16 are also fed to IC8A and IC12.
26
At switch on IC16 is cleared by holding pin 1 low, via the power-up reset circuit comprising R30, C15, D10, IC6C and IC4B. When C15 is charged enough to trigger IC6C, IC16 pin 1 is enabled with the correct output information. 27
If an input is different to an output (e.g., as pulse length is changed) the appropriate exclusive OR gate is switched to provide a positive output at TP4. This positive input to IC14A pin 5 starts a trigger sequence in IC14A and IC14B which shuts down the charge triggers, via IC10A, and applies 3kHz trigger pulses to IC16 latch for 1.5 timing cycles of the 42Hz oscillator (approximately 36 ms). 28
The triggers to IC16 change the latch output to match the new input data. The 36 ms shut down of the charge trigger allows time for any relays to change over in the modulator. Discharge triggers for the modulator run all the time, ensuring that the modulator pulse forming network is discharged before the relays have time to respond. 29
The latching cycle and CSR1 triggers are inhibited, via TR5 and D18, if the +27 V supply is low (approximately +20 V) or if the HVPS (-350 V) soft start output is high from the power supply. Link 2 overrides the input for testing purposes. 30
The pulse length outputs from IC16 latch are used to program p.r.f. divider IC17. The output can be set to 3000, 1500, 750 or 375 pulses per second. Links 3 and 5 allow a choice of p.r.f. to be set for short and medium pulse. 31
When Link 4 is set to NORM, IC17 triggers the 10 m s monostable IC15, which switches driver TR10 (CSR2 Trigger Pulse Output).
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.7
KH1250 Chapter 5 32
IC17 is also used to trigger dummy sync monostable IC5, which is enabled by RUN, MUTE, Timer and Mag Heater Current Sense inputs via IC7A, B and C. The output from IC5 is used to trigger TR6 and TR4 drivers to give low impedance sync pulses. The dummy trigger pulses are OR gated with the modulator trigger pulse on the modulator to keep the display triggered for Sector Mute. The two pulses are OR gated on the Control PCB to give the Rx monitoring at PLF-8. 33
IC17 also triggers re-triggerable monostable IC20A to illuminate green LED D24.
Heater Current Sense 34
The input voltage (HTR MON) from the modulator circuit enters the board at PLC pin 10 and is the input to comparator IC3. If the input voltage is low, IC3 output is low, causing the HV output, CSR1 triggers and dummy sync pulses to be inhibited. Magnetron Heater Turndown 35
The LP selector line from IC16 latch is gated by IC18B with the Run input to turn on TR11, which operates the modulator circuit heater relay RLC. With Link 6 set to ‘X’, TR11 will always be off. Turndown only works for S-Band. MUTE Functions 36
There are three MUTE inputs as follows: (1)
Sector Mute (Mute from the display).
(2)
Mute from the Receiver Monitor Circuit - to enable the receiver monitor sector to stand out when selected.
(3)
Mute as a result of loss of the HL input due to no aerial rotation.
HL Sense 37
HL pulses from the HL PCB are routed with the AZ pulses, via the Control PCB. HL pulses are used to trigger 10s monostable IC21A. IC21A, Pin 7 (Q output) is low and D29 reversed, provided HL pulses occur more frequently than every 10s. If the HL pulses stop, D29 goes high, muting the other circuit and turning green LED D27 off. 38
Green LED D27 flashes for 0.4 seconds for every HL pulse to indicate that the HL is triggering via IC21B. With Link 8 set to the TEST position 42 Hz is fed to IC21A trigger, to operate the HL sense circuit for board test. 39
If a mute condition occurs Red LED D26 illuminates for the muted period.
AE Switch 40
The three phase contactor in the Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/*) is operated by the AE switch circuit, via PLK.
Page 5.8
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 41
The +27V is fed to the contactor, via resetable fuse FS1 and the external safety switch. The return is controlled on the PCB by S1 and TR2.
42
With LK1 in the ‘FIXED’ position, the AE rotates all the time the transceiver is switched on. With LK1 in the ‘RUN’ position the AE rotates when the transceiver is set to RUN and stops when set to STANDBY. FAN ON 43
TR7 switches the fan on when the transceiver is set to run.
Local Oscillator Voltage 44
IC2 is an adjustable positive voltage regulator configured to provide a +9V output. R10 is connected in parallel with R11 to produce +12V when an S Band local oscillator is connected to PLD (Receiver) cableform. Pre-Pulse 45
A pre-pulse is provided by setting LK4 to the DELAY position and connecting a delay circuit to PLG.
External Trigger 46
An external trigger is provided by setting LK7 to EXT and connecting an external trigger to PLH.
47
A simple circuit comprising R19, D42 and D43 is fitted. LK11 may be set to provide a direct input or a protected input. LK12 enables the 75W termination.
48
A positive pulse (EXT TRIG SYNC) enters the board at PLH pin 3 to reset counter IC17 so that EXT TRIGGER PULSES can be pre-synchronized.
Tx Monitor 49
PLM pins 1 and 2 provide connection for the neon signal from the optional Tx Monitor arm.
50
With the monitor turned OFF, PLB-11 is open circuit, TR25 is OFF and TR24 is ON, causing a short circuit across the neon.
51
With the monitor turned ON, PLB-11 is at -12V, TR25 is ON and TR24 is OFF. The neon is partially ionized from the -350V supply and the current limiting resistors on the modulator board, which is connected to TR24 collector via C71 and R121. With no neon connected the voltage is limited to -150V by a voltage regulator diode on the modulator board. 52
The struck neon voltage is approximately 56V to 70V with a current of 0.6mA through it.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.9
KH1250 Chapter 5 53
Capacitor C71 holds the supply voltage stable. The microwave energy from the AE passing over the neon, causes the neon to strike harder and consequently the current to increase. This current increase changes the voltage across R121 producing a 1 to 2V positive pulse on top of the -56V at TR24 collector. Capacitor C72 ac couples TR24 collector to the input of comparator IC31A. The positive comparator reference input is the voltage across D59. When a positive input signal from R121 exceeds the voltage at D59, IC31A output goes from positive to 0V for the signal duration. The output of IC31A is fed via PLD-11 into the output circuit of the receiver to produce a Tx monitor plume. TABLE 1: LED Functions LED REFERENCE
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
COLOUR
D4
D6
Heater current OFF
RED
D6
D5
+27V OK
GREEN
D17
D3
Tune Indicator
GREEN
D24
D5
prf ON
GREEN
D26
D5
Mute ON
RED
D27
D6
HL I/P OK
GREEN
D36
D6
Tx Ready
GREEN
TABLE 2: Test Point Functions TEST POINT
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
TP1
D1
Dummy Trig
TP2
F3
Charge S-D
Charge trig shutdown
TP3
F2
CSR1 Trig
Recharging trig
TP4
D6
Change sensor
State change
TP5
D2
CSR2 Trig
Magnetron trig
TP6
C3
Prf
Divider o/p
TP7
E4
Run
TP8
A5
Trig Sync
EXT trig synchronizing pulse
TP9
C5
Latch Clock
State latch clock
TP10
C4
Trig In
prf divider input
TP11
F3
Mute
Mute and AZ mute
TP12
E6
42Hz
TP13
A3
3kHz
TP14
F7
Tx Ready
End of warm-up time
TP15
E6
LF Osc
Timer circuit
TP16
D8
HF Osc
Timer circuit
TP17
N/A
TP18
G4
AZ In
AZ input from opto PCB
Page 5.10
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 TABLE 2: Test Point Functions (Continued) TEST POINT
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
TP19
N/A
TP20
G4
HL In
HL input from opto PCB
TP21
G9
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP22
A9
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP23
A1
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP24
E6
0V
Scope/Meter earth
TP25
B2
Rx Mon
Rx Mon enable
TP26
C1
Neon Sig
TP27
A2
Tx Mon
Tx Mon O/p pulses
TABLE 3: Link Functions LINK
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
LK1
A9
Run or Standby AE start
LK2
F2
High voltage soft start
LK3
C4
SP 3000/1500 pps
LK4
E3
Norm/delayed prf (pre-pulse)
LK5
E5
MP 1500/750 pps
LK6
F4
S/X heater current turndown
LK7
C4
INT/EXT Trig
LK8
E6
H/L (sense - trig) Enable
LK9
B8
Jitter Enable
LK10
D7
90/180 secs warm-up time
LK11
B4
Ext Trig Format
LK12
D7
75W
Termination
MODULATOR UNIT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 7) 54
The modulator unit comprises chassis CTX-A248 and PCB CTX-A247. This equipment utilises a line type modulator circuit where the Pulse Forming Network (PFN) capacitors are charged to double the HT supply by the resonance of the charging choke with the PFN capacitance. The line impedance is matched to the magnetron impedance by the pulse transformer. 55
The modulator circuit comprises a Charging Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) CSR1, Charging Choke L5, Saturable Reactor SL1, Pulse Forming Network, Pulse Transformer T4, Discharge SCR CSR2, and “Tail Biter” SL2 which is used for short pulses. Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.11
KH1250 Chapter 5 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 8) Charging Cycle 56
Charging SCR CSR1 applies -350V to the resonant circuit formed by L5 and PFN capacitors, when triggered by a positive pulse from T3. When the charging current falls to zero, diode D7 prevents the PFN discharging and the line remains charged at double the supply voltage. Switch S1 may be used to switch off CSR1 triggers. 57
When CSR2 is turned ON by the positive mod trigger pulse from isolating trigger transformer T2, SL1 holds the main discharge current off. Capacitor C10 is discharged into CSR2, via resistor R12, to ensure CSR2 is correctly primed before the main current, in excess of 200A, is switched by Saturable Reactor SL1. 58
When SL1 switches, the energy stored in the PFN is discharged via Pulse Transformer T4 into the magnetron. Any residual energy at the end of the pulse causes the current to reverse flow through SL1, via D12 and ‘reset’ the magnetic flux ready for the next transmission. Voltage reversal on Pulse Transformer T4 primary winding is prevented by D11. 59
Mismatch of the PFN and Pulse Transformer T4 to the magnetron causes overswing voltage and current in the secondary winding of T4. This is dissipated via R10, D14, D15 and D16 in the overswing unit. 60
The secondary winding of T4 is also shunted by C12, C13 and C14, located in the overswing unit, increasing the rate of rise of current into the magnetron.
61
The PFN comprises capacitors and inductors connected together as a lumped element transmission line. Relays RLA and RLB select the components required for each of the three pulse lengths. RLA also switches in Saturable Reactor SL2, to divert the tail current from the magnetron when in the short pulse mode. 62
The discharge SCR CSR2 is triggered at the required PRF via Isolating Transformer T2. CSR2 cathode and gate are at a high negative voltage (700 V).
63
The magnetron heater current is fed via R4, R5 and T4 secondary windings to allow the magnetron terminals to swing to -8.5 kV.
64
Resistor R4 is shorted out, except when LP and RUN modes are selected for an S-Band magnetron. The heater volts to the magnetron are then reduced to compensate for the heat generated by the magnetron operation. 65
The dc voltage drop across R5 is fed to the control board to indicate that heater current is flowing. If no current is flowing the control board inhibits the charging pulses. C9 across R5 provides an ac short circuit for pulses generated at R5. 66
The discharge current of the PFN through T1 primary winding, produces a Sync Pulse for the Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) and to trigger the Display.
Page 5.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 67
Dummy sync pulses are diode gated with transmission sync pulses by D5 and D4. Dummy sync pulses are generated by the Control Board if the Sector Mute function is in
use. Modulator Waveforms 68
Modulator Waveforms are as follows: (1)
Modulator Trigger (CSR2) Input to T2 is a positive pulse at the PRF. +15V
10m s
0V
CD-1374
(2)
Modulator SCR (Cathode) CSR2
0V
-700V PULSE INTERVAL
CSR1 TRIGGERED PFN DISCHARGED TO MAGNETRON
CD-1375
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.13
KH1250 Chapter 5 (3)
Charging Voltage (CSR1 end of the charging choke L5) Low charging current (40mA) to prevent main CSR2 latching on. 0V
-350V
-700V CD-1376
-150V Supply for Tx Monitor Neon 69
This supply is derived on the Modulator PCB using a 150V diode regulator, R14 and R16 connected to the -350V dc supply.
70
Sensing resistors R11, R15, and R17 and diode D8 may be used for monitoring the -350V supply, e.g. as an alternative HVPS control route. TABLE 4: Modulator Test Points TEST POINT
CIRCUIT REFERENCE
FUNCTION
TP1
B1
Dummy Trigger Pulse I/P from Control PCB
TP2
A1
Sync Pulse and Dummy Trig Pulse O/P to Display
TP3
B1
Rx Trigger Pulse. AFC Trigger Pulse to Receiver
TP4
B1
CSR2 Trigger. -ve going pulse from Control PCB
TP5
B5
CSR1 Trigger. -ve going pulse from Control PCB
TP6
H4
Heater Voltage Supply
TP7
G7
Heater Current Monitor Voltage
TP8
C4
-350V Supply Input from Power Supply Unit
TP9
H3
Scope/Meter Earth
TP10
A6
Scope/Meter Earth
Page 5.14
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
RECEIVER MONITOR CTX-A252 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 9) 71
The Rx Monitor circuit utilises a noise diode fitted in the receiver waveguide branch of the RF Head Circulator. When enabled the noise diode is switched on for a sector of the Display Azimuth. The ratio of the Receiver noise to the noise diode output is compared using a ramp, which provides a time related noise sector. As the noise ratio reduces the noise sector becomes a shorter radius on the display. The noise sector is split into ‘fingers’ to enable it to stand out from the Tx Monitor plume and any land masses. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 10) Sector Enable 72
The sector enable section of the circuit produces a pulse to enable the noise diode to be switched ON.
73
Azimuth and Heading Line pulse inputs to the board are shaped by schmitt trigger input gate IC3, to prevent erratic triggering.
74
Counters IC4 and 6 are cascaded and clocked by the azimuth pulses. The Heading Line pulse resets the counters to zero each aerial revolution. The parallel outputs of the counters are fed to the ‘A’ inputs of comparators IC1, 5, 7, 8. 75
SW1 and hard wired inputs set the B inputs of IC1 and 5. When the A inputs match the ‘B’ inputs, the A=B pulse is activated to produce the ‘Start Sector’ pulse. IC7 and 8 produce the ‘Stop Sector’ in a similar manner. 76
The actual sector produced is approximately 40º wide and is moved to pre-determined positions relative to the Heading Line, using SW1.
77
The ‘START SECTOR’ Pulse triggers the set input of ‘D’ type flip-flop IC2A and the ‘STOP’ Pulse triggers the reset input. The set pulse must occur before the reset pulse. The input to IC2A is inhibited by TR3 ‘ON’ when the monitor function is OFF. 78
The ‘SECTOR ENABLE’ Pulse from IC2A is used as the Reset input for IC2B. IC2B is triggered by the Azimuth Divider and toggles to split the 40º pulse into approximately 3.5º ON/OFF sections. 79
The ‘SECTOR ENABLE’ Pulse is buffered by IC10A as an output to the control board to give a transmission mute signal for the sector period.
80
The ‘WEDGE ENABLE’ output of IC2B is diode gated into IC12A to enable the noise diode circuit.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.15
KH1250 Chapter 5 Noise Level Measurement 81
The Rx and Dummy trigger inputs from the Modulator, via the Control PCB, are voltage limited by R21, D12 and D13, to trigger 150m s monostable IC12A. When IC12A is enabled by the MON ON and sector enable circuits, its output pin 6 and IC10E output go high, switching off opto IC11A emitter current. This causes IC11B to turn OFF, enabling C12 to charge up via the constant current circuit of TR1 and op-amp IC14A and produce a linear ramp at TP6 (IC9 pin 2). 82
The pulse at IC12A pin 6 also switches on the noise diode via TR4 and TR2. The video signal from the Receiver is connected to PLB. The noise signal is filtered from the video by C16, L1, C17, L2, C18 and R29. The filter output is connected, via R32, to IC9 pin 3 and analog switch IC13. IC13 is switched OFF for the 150m s period of IC12A, stopping the large video signals at close range from influencing the noise floor level integrator, which comprises R27 and C15. 83
With IC13 enabled, the noise floor level integrator charges C12, which has a time constant of 20 ms. The level at C12 is buffered by IC14A to give the same voltage at a higher current capability. Using floating output opto device IC11A enables this voltage level to be the starting level of the ramp. When IC11B switches OFF the capacitor charges from dc level at IC14A output to the level set by the noise diode output at IC9 pin 3. Resistors R32 and R31 ensure that IC9 pin 3 is more positive than pin 2, to prevent noise switching IC9 at low signal levels. 84
When the ramp and noise diode signal level cross, IC9 pin 7 goes high, producing a negative pulse at IC10C pin 6. This resets Monostable IC12A causing the noise diode to switch off and IC11B to switch ON, discharging C12. 85
The time for which the noise diode is on determines the radius of the ‘fingers’ on the display. As the noise floor increases or the Rx noise ratio reduces, the ramp time reduces and the finger radius become shorter. A good plume will be 8 Nm, reducing by 2 Nm for 10 dB loss of performance. 86
The settings of SW1 set the start of the 40º sector as follows: TABLE 5: Switch SW1 Settings Pole 1
87
Pole 2
Pole 3
Start Angle (degrees)
OFF
ON
ON
260
ON
OFF
ON
127
ON
ON
OFF
70
Link LK1 provides selection of either +15 V or +27 V for the noise diode drive. The link is normally set to +15 V.
Page 5.16
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 88
This board is used to dc offset the Receiver AFC tuned output voltage (approximately 5.5V) to the voltage required to tune the Low Noise Front End (approximately 12V).
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 11) 89
The 20V supply for IC3 is derived by regulating the + 27 V input supply using D1.
90
IC3 is connected as a unity gain buffer so that the original receive circuit is not loaded. The output level of IC3 is the reference level of the adjustable voltage regulator IC1. The resultant output level is used as the tune supply for the LNFE via PLB-2. 91
PLJ pins 1 and 5 are connected to the Control PCB to set the LO supply regulator to +12V. HL PCB CAE-A180
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 92
Heading Line and Azimuth data is produced by interrupting two opto coupler devices with a slotted disk mounted on the antenna final drive shaft.
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Figure 12) 93
The scanner unit is fitted with a slotted disk to give azimuth pulses from a ring of 180 slots and Heading Line from a single slot.
94
The PCB contains two opto coupler devices IC1 and IC2 to read the slots.
95
The ICs are powered by 12V, derived from the +27V supply using voltage regulator diode D2 and resistor R1. D1 provides reverse polarity protection.
96
The opto emitters IC1A and IC2A are connected in series and via R2 to the 12V supply to give a constant emitter current.
Azimuth Pulses 97
Opto emitter IC1 scans each of the 180 slots on the slotted disk. Output pin 4 of IC1 is high for a slot and goes low when interrupted.
98
When the output goes low, TR1 switches ON to produce a positive pulse at its collector.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.17
KH1250 Chapter 5 99
Capacitor C4 and resistor R7 provide ac coupling to PLA-4. Capacitor C3 and resistor R5 provide Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) suppression and short circuit protection.
Heading Line Pulses 100
Opto emitter IC2 scans the single slot. Output pin 4 of IC2 is high for the slot and low when interrupted. As the output goes high at the start of the slot, TR3 and TR2 switch
ON. 101
Capacitor C6 and resistor R13 ac couple the output to PLA-3. Capacitor C5 and resistor R11 provide RFI suppression and short circuit protection.
102
The +27V supply input and AZ/HL outputs are connected to the Transceiver Control PCB SKM. LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Figure 13) 103
The Receiver comprises a logarithmic IF amplifier, Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) circuitry and tuning indicator circuitry.
104
Received radar returns are mixed in the RF head with the local oscillator output to provide a 60 MHz Intermediate Frequency (IF) which is applied to the receiver input
SKC. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 105
For a full technical description, layout and parts list, refer to Annex A. RF HEAD
106
The RF Head comprises the following: (1)
30kW ‘S’ Band Magnetron
(2)
Ferrite Circulator
(3)
Pulse Limiter
(4)
Low Noise Front End (LNFE)
107
The Low Noise Front End combines an RF amplifier, balanced mixer, electronically tuned local oscillator and IF head amplifier. Therefore, there is no means to mechanically tune the local oscillator, or to replace mixer crystals.
Page 5.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 SIGNAL PATHS 108
There are two types of signal path: (1)
High Power
(2)
Low Power
High Power 109
The modulator provides a high voltage low impedance pulse to drive the magnetron. Typical pulse conditions for the magnetron are as follows: (1)
Short Pulse : 30 to 60ns at 5 A (peak)
(2)
Medium Pulse : 220 to 300ns at 7 to 8 A (peak)
(3)
Long Pulse : 850 to 1000ns at 7.5 to 9 A (flat top)
110
The magnetron energy is fed into port 2 of the circulator, and due to the rotational properties of the circulator, emerges at port 3 and out of the rotating joint or RF co-axial cable to the antenna. 111
A small amount of the magnetron energy leaks across the ferrite junction and into the pulse limiter. The limiter in turn limits this energy to a safe level for the low noise front end to use as a tune signal. Low Power 112
Signals which are target returns are received by the antenna and are fed to port 3 of the circulator, via the rotating joint. The signals emerge at port 1, and are then fed to the pulse limiter. These signals are normally of low amplitude and will not be limited by the pulse limiter. The limited signals are amplified by the LNFE, mixed, and then down converted to 60MHz, to interface with the main IF receiver. ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 113
This unit is used for both Upmast and Downmast Transceiver installations. Two versions are provided (1)
25rpm
(2)
40rpm
114
The 25 rpm and 40 rpm versions are fitted with different motors.
115
The basic unit contains the Antenna Motor, Gearbox, RF Rotating Joint and Mount for the Antenna.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.19
KH1250 Chapter 5 116
A slotted disc on the final drive provides 180 azimuth pulses and a heading line pulse per revolution of the antenna.
117
The HL PCB (CAE-A180) is mounted so that the slotted disc rotates within the opto coupler slots on the PCB.
118
The PCB is fitted to an adjustable mounting bracket assembly. Loosening the mounting pillars allows the assembly to be moved positive or negative six degrees for fine heading line adjustment. The slotted disc can be rotated if the fine adjustment is not enough. 119
For Downmast Transceiver installations, a semi-rigid co-axial cable is connected to the rotating joint, via an access hole fitted with a seal.
120
For Upmast Transceivers, the casing also contains the RF head and electronic units. The access hole is fitted with a bung. SAFETY SWITCH
121
An ON/OFF switch is located by the cable entries on the outside of the case provides: (1)
Switching for the motor.
(2)
Control of the supply voltage to the HL PCB, so that the Transmitter mutes when there is no heading line pulse (Downmast Transceivers only).
(3)
Control of the High Voltage Power Supply enable line (Upmast Transceivers only). SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14 (/2) (Figures 14 and 15)
122
The soft start unit comprises a three phase contactor, thermal overload, three sets of power resistors and a controlling PCB. At switch on, the contactor coil is energised via the transceiver Control PCB CTX-A246. The coil current is fed through the thermal overload switch to the contactor coil, which turns ON. The three phase supply to the motor passes through the current limiting resistor chain to reduce the motor start torque. 123
As the contactor switches on, its auxiliary contact connects the coil supply voltage to IC1 on the Control PCB, providing a 1.5 s delay at switch on.
124
At the end of the 1.5 s delay, the output from IC1 goes low, causing transistor TR1 to switch off, transistor TR2 to turn on and Relays RLB, RLC and RLD to energise. The relays short out the resistor chain to apply full current to the motor. 125
The CZZ-A14/2 version of the Soft Start Unit, used for interswitched installations, or installations with 60m+ cable runs, is provided with a mains power supply and terminal blocks for use as an in-line power unit.
Page 5.20
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 126
The neon indicators for the three phase supply are provided with series resistors which may be shorted out to allow for different motor voltages.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.21
KH1250 Chapter 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
+27V TO CONTROL BOARD +15V TO CONTROL BOARD GREEN LED D18-A
FILTER C19, L4, C2 +27V dc
GREEN LED D18-B
FS4 5A
POWER IN RF1 FILTER L5, C21
27V FLT 1
SWITCHING REGULATOR IC2, L1
FS1 +15V 3A
SWITCHING REGULATOR IC3, L2
LK1
HV ON/OFF SW1
SWITCHING REGULATOR IC4, L3
+9.5V MAG. HEATERS TO MODULATOR
X S
GREEN LED D17-A
FS2 2.5A
FILTER L5, C46
GREEN LED D17-B
FS3 0.3A
-15V TO CONTROL BOARD
-350V SENSING FEEDBACK FROM CONTROL BOARD
SPV
TRIM SP VOLTS RV1
SWITCH MODE CONTROLLER IC5 SENSE V
SET VOLTS RV2
VOLTAGE REF FROM IC1
POWER SWITCHES TR1, TR2
SET V
POWER TRANSFORMER T1 27V IN -350 V OUT (1400 V PEAK)
SHUTDOWN
BRIDGE RECTIFIER WITH RFI CAPACITORS & SURGE SUPPRESSOR D6-9, C24, C25, C27, C28, R20
SMOOTHING CHOKE & CAPACITOR
-350V TO MODULATOR
L1, C31
CURRENT SENSE R26
FROM CONTROL BOARD
HV OFF
HV SWITCH CIRCUIT TR3
SHUTDOWN OR GATE D13, D15
CURRENT TRIP IC6, IC7
SOFT START SENSE CIRCUIT
SET CURRENT TRIP LEVEL RV3
CD-1377
Figure 1 Issue 4
SOFT START (INHIBIT TO CONTROL BOARD)
Power Unit CAE-A202: Block Diagram
Figure 1 Page 5.23/24
KH1250 Chapter 5
C48 100uF 25V
+15V PLB-4
C44 100NF
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES TP2
TP1 HEATSINK +27FILT1
5 C1 470uF 63V
C2 100NF
2
VIN VSW 4 MAX724 IC2 VC COM FB 1
+15V C5 470uF 25V
R40 2K7 C3 100NF
1nF R7 2K2
C18 1nF
5
FS1
13k C13
MBR745 D2
C15 2n2F
3A
47uH R1
3 R5 2K7
HEATSINK
L1
C4 470uF 25V
VIN VSW MAX724 IC3 VC COM FB
2
3 R4 2K7
C14 2n2F
MARL D18-A
L2
4
47uH
1
MBR745 D3
2.5A
+9V5 C6 1nF
R2 1K
LK1
+9V5
FS2
C7 100NF
C8 470uF 25V
R3
PLC-4 L3 50uH
MARL D18-B
5K6
R6 2K2
MAG HTR
R41 1K5
5
VIN
VSW MAX724 IC4 VC COM FB 3
2
C17 1nF
C45 10OnF
4
C16 4u7F 25V
C12 100NF
PSU INPUT (22 TO 27V DC)
R46 R43 2K7
D1 BYV10-60
R47 4K7
C47 10NF
L9
L5
T5A
+27V IN
FS4
R49 V33 ZA5
C21 100nF
HV ON/OFF
47uH
R10 4K7
PLB-8
1N916 D4
R11
C42 10UF 16V
R9 4K7
3
SET HT VOLTS RV2
22K
BZY79C3V3
TR3 BC547B
D14 R28 4K7
SWITCH MODE CONTROLLER
R14 4K7
R15 22K
R16 100
16 2 1 6 7 5 8
Vref +Vin +INP Vc -INP OUTB RT OUTA DIS COMP CT GND S/ST S/DWN
MARL D17-A
R8 220
13 15 14 11 9 12 10
TP5
BZT03 C15V D5
C23 100UF 25V
SG3525AN
10K
C33 2200PF
R23 4K7
R42 4K7
RV1 200K
C29 10uF 16V
TP7
S1
C22 4700UF 63V
R50 V33 ZA1
5K
R24
-15V PLB-2
FS3
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES
+27FILT1 +27V
SPV
HVOFF PLB-10
0.3A
TP4
PLA
TP6
MARL D17-B
47K
220uH 14KL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
C46 100uF 25V
24K
1
R48 1K8
R44 43K
R45
HEATSINK D IRF540
R12 10K
BZT03 C82V D10
L6 R17 22K
IC5
C34 1UF
R19 56K
C35 1UF 35V
TR1
S
HEATSINK D IRF540
R22 10K
L8
HT SHUTDOWN TP9
BAT85
TR2
2 BYV27100 D11
C28 470PF 1000V R20 VDR Z21L -821
BZT03 C82V D12
G
FERRITE BEAD
3
C41 47UF 63V
C32 100NF
D6-9 BYW96E
C27 470PF 1000V
7 8
14
C25 470PF 1000V
1 4
T1
TP8
C24 470PF 1000V
2
15 16
C26 4.7NF 1000V
G
FERRITE BEAD
C30 100NF
17
R13 4R7
R18 330K
C31 33UF 450V 4KL
R21 390K
L7
-VE350V
17mH +9V5
S
D13
1 2 3 4
TO MODULATOR
PLC BAT85 D15
R25 33K
C43 2N2F
R26 0.1
C36 10NF
R27 8K2
10KL HT SHUTDOWN TIMER
R29
R32 10K SET CURRENT TRIP
RV3
R33
5K
8K2
C37 1NF
220
5 6 8 3 2
-
7 311 + IC7 1 4 -15V
R31 1M
R30 22K 2 3
8
4
IC6 7555 1 5
L4 330uH
6 7 C38 100NF 63V
+27V
C19 100nF C39 1UF 35V
C20 100nF
TO CONTROL BOARD
PLB
+15V
C40
TP11
TP10
0V 1 -15V 2 3 +15V 4 0V 5 +27VFILT2 6 7 SPV 8 SOFTSTART 9 HVOFF 10
22NF 1N916
R35
D16
820K
R34 2K2
5 6 8 3
R36
2
15K
-
7 311 + IC8 1 4
TP12
SOFTSTART PLB-9
R37 47K
CD-1386
Figure 2
Issue 4
-15V
Power Unit CAE-A202: Circuit Diagram
Figure 2
Page 5.25/26
KH1250 Chapter 5
180 90 SEC LK10
WARM-UP TIMER 180, 90, 3 SECONDS IC24, 25, 26, 27 RV4 TIMER SET
POWER ON RESET (SHEET 2)
3 SECOND SELECT
TX READY TO DISPLAY
PSU INTERRUPT SENSE C44, IC28A, B
HEATER 1 SENSE IC3
HTR I MON FROM MODULATOR
HEADING LINE FROM GEARBOX
HV OFF GATING IC7A, B, C
HEADING LINE SENSE IC21A & LK8 OVERRIDE 42Hz
HV OFF TO POWER UNIT
DUMMY SYNC GATE IC7C MUTE OR GATE D25, D29, D39
TO DUMMY TRIG PULSE GENERATOR (SHEET 2) TO CHARGE SHUTDOWN GATE (SHEET 2)
MUTE 1 FROM DISPLAY Rx MON MUTE +24 V
AE MOTOR CONTACTOR SWITCH TR2 WITH LK1 SELECTED
FAN ON TR7
RUN From Display
FROM RF HEAD TO RECEIVER
FS1 0.3A
TO SOFT START UNIT VIA Tx/Rx SAFETY SWITCH FROM SOFT START UNIT
TO FAN
L.O. +ve SELECT L.O. 9/12V
+15V
LOCAL OSCILLATOR REGULATOR IC2 (ADJUSTABLE)
R11
R10
SET VOLTAGE RESISTORS
CD-1378
Figure 3 - Control PCB CTX-A246: Block Diagram (Sheet 1)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.27
KH1250 Chapter 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5.28
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
TX MONITOR BLOCK ON SWITCH TR25, TR24
RX MON ON (FROM DISPLAY) NEON (SIG) TO MONITOR ARM
SENSE RESISTOR R121
-150V FROM MODULATOR
AC COUPLING C72
COMPARATOR IC13A
TX MON PULSE TO RECEIVER
STORAGE CAPACITOR C71
PULSE LENGTH/PRF SWITCHING BLOCK SOFT START FROM MODULATOR
STATE COMPARATOR IC8, 12
SOFT START GATE & LK2 IC9A
LATCH ENABLE GATING IC7, 10, 14 42Hz
MP LP
PULSE LENGTH DECODE CIRCUIT IC9, 11, 18, TP9
BANDWIDTH SWITCHING IC9D, TR12
MUTE GATE (SHEET 1)
RECEIVER
CHARGE SHUTDOWN GATE IC9B, 11A
CHARGE DELAY TIMER IC5
CSR1 TR1G DRIVER TR8
CSR1 TRIG TO MODULATOR
TRIG MONO IC15
CSR2 TR1G DRIVER TR10
CSR2 TRIG TO MODULATOR
DUMMY TRIG. PULSE GENERATOR IC5
DUMMY TRIG DRIVER TR4
3KHz
PRF DIVIDER IC17 LK3, 5
STATE LATCH IC16
PRE-PULSE LK4 PLG
PRF
PRE-PULSE OPTION
POWER ON RESET
DUMMY SYNC GATE (SHEET1)
WARM-UP TIMER SHEET 1
RUN
DUMMY TRIG TO MODULATOR
Rx TRIG FROM MODULATOR Rx MON TRIG GATE D40, 41
MAG HEATER RELAY DRIVE IC18, TR11 LK6
HEATER RELAY
Rx TRIG TO Rx MON TRIG TO Rx MONITOR TO MODULATOR
EXT TRIG. SYNC EXT TRIG.
CD-1379
Figure 4 Issue 4
TRIG SELECT LK7, 11, 12
42 Hz OSC IC22, IC22
3 kHz OSC IC23
JITTER ENABLE LK9, RV1
Control PCB CTX-A246: Block Diagram (Sheet 2)
Figure 4 Page 5.29/30
KH1250 Chapter 5 +15V
+27V
5KL
S1 +15V
T O R E C E I V E R
16NH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3KL 1 2 OV 3
C47 100NF
SIG
+15V 0V TUNE TUNE IND RX TRIG RX TRIG 0V LO+VE SELECT LO9/12V
R3
D1 LM317T O/P IC2 ADJ
I/P PLC-15 PLC-16
LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
C2 100NF
R10
R11 150
R12 680
R19 1K
HTR MON
AE ON RUN
TR5 BC557B
6K8 BZX79 18V D5
-15V
MV52 GREEN 1N916 D6
BD675 TR2
D7
R29 2K7
R6 470
R8 15K
PLC-3
TR3 BC547B
PLC-10
R4 22k
R7 12k
R13 22K
C45 100NF
R23 1K
3
-
2
+
40106
R28
7
311
MV55A RED D4
IC3
7555 RS Vcc 8 TR OP 3 DIS CV 5 THR 0V 1 IC5
4 2 7 6
HTR I SENSE
R17 C4
R25
TR6 BC637
1K
100PF
R27 680
TP1
TR4 BC638
470
C5 2U2 35V
R26 75
1N916 D8
C7 10NF
C8 470PF
+15V
120
6N8
DUMMYSYNC +15V
R22 2K2
-15V
IN916 D2
R14 10K
C6 100NF TR7 BC637
4K7
R9
+15V R15 22K
MPRELAY LP RELAY HTR RELAY MON -V
R5 100
+15V
HTR OFF
20NH -150V [2] 1 2 3 4 5 6 +27V +27V 7 8 9 HTRMON 10 11 12 DUMMYTRIG 13 DUMTR OV 14 RX TRIG 15 RXTR 0V 16 CSR2 TRIG 17 CSR2 TR 0V 18 CSR1 TRIG 19 CSR1 TR 0V 20
+15V
C3
R24 220
FAN ON PLE-2
TO SOFT START UNIT
PLK
C1 100NF
1 4
+15V
1 2 3 4 5
R90 22K
+15V
5 6 8
1N916 D3
14 IC6A 1 2
TR4 +15V
1 IC4A R16 2 22K 4049
3
R21 100K
LPRELAY
CONT+VE CONTACTOR
2
0.3A
AE SWITCH
LK1
FIXED
+15V
+15V
R20
+27V
+27V LPVLP SP +6V
R1 47K
+27V
390 R18 15K
-15V TX MON PULSE [2]
PLC-2
TR1 BC547B
22K
PLJ RXTRIG RXTRIG 0V
MP RELAY
BYV27100
+15V RX TRIG O/P
FS1
1
CONTACTOR
+27V PLD (RX)
L1 1 2 100uH
R87 470R
F R O M P O W E R U N I T
10KL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C53 100nF
HV OFF SOFT START SPV
C10 100UF 50V
C9 100NF
C13 100NF
C54 100nF
C55 100nF
R30 470K
STATE CHANGE SENSOR
5
IC6C
D I S P L A Y
R40 47K
R X M O N
+15V 4081 IC18A 3
40174 D0 Q0 D1 Q1 D2 Q2 D3 Q3 D4 Q4 D5 Q5 CLR CK IC16
2 5 7 10 12 15 16
LSP LMP LLP LVLP
6 5 4 3
6 5
IC14A 40106 11
R36 22K
42HZ
C21 10NF
IC18B
R53 10K
C50 100nF
LK6 'X'
+15V
1500 +15V
10
R58
D25 1N916
10K
-15V
D18 IN916
R45 100K
R46 100K
R47 100K
IC18C
10
R52
DUMMY TRIG PLC-13
100NF
1OK
4071 12 13 IC9D
R55 100K
3 4 5
R60
R61
47R
1M
1 2 C RC VDD 16 6 A1 4538 Q Q 7 A0 IC21A
13 12
R49 68R
4049 11 5
4
R56 22K
TR12 BC557B
4K7
+15V
R68
D29
4K7
15 14 13 C RC 10 R Q 12 A1 4538 11 A0 Q 9
NORM LK8
H/L
MUTE ON
MV52 GREEN D27
TEST
42HZ
470R R76 D60 22K RV4
TIMER ADJ 20K 1N916 D38
IN916 D37 R82 6K8
C40 100NF
R128 HF OSC 4 7 6 2
7555 8 RS Vcc 3 DIS OP THR CV 5 1 TR 0V IC24
TP16 180SEC LK10 90SEC C42 10NF
C43 100NF
R85 6K8
C56 2n2F
6 7 4 5 2 3 15 1 9 14
4019 A0 B0 Q0 A1 B1 Q1 A2 Q2 B2 Q3 A3 B3 SA SB IC25
IC10B
+15V
16 10 11 12 13
180/90 OR 10SEC SELECT
+15V
PRF TP6 NORM
R39 9K1
C26
LK4
4 2 7 6
1NF
DELAY
C22 10uF 50V
C23 100UF 25V
7555 RS Vcc 8 TR OP 3 DIS CV 5 THR 0V 1 IC15
PLC-19
CSR1 TR 0V
PLC-20
TP5
R37 470
C24 470NF
C25
R42 4K7
C28 10NF
C27 680PF
CSR2 TRIG
100NF
R41 27R
C29 1NF
TR10 BC637
PLC-17
D19 BYV27- 100 CSR2TR 0V
PLC-18
BYV27- 100 D44
1N916 D21
PREPULSE +15V
8NH C30
+15V 1 0V 2 PRF 3 DELAY PRF 4 LSP 5 LMP 6 LLP 7 LVLP 8
100NF
+15V 3 4 5
R48
PRF
100K
1 2 C RC R VDD 16 Q 6 A1 4538 7 A0 Q
MV52 GREEN D24 R50 2K2
3
1 4049 2 EXT TRIGGER
IC19A +15V
IC20A
TP8
TRIG SYNC
6NH +15V 1 2 EXT TRIG SYNC 3 EXT TRIG 4 3000HZ 5 0V 6
R54
EXTB +15V BYV27100 D42
TP10 TRIG IN
C46 330pF
EXTA
LK11
PLH
R91 OPEN
BYV27100 D43
330R
LK12
3K3
3KHZ TP13
INT EXT
75
R92 75R
R89
42HZ
MV55A RED D26
LK7
+15V
12 IC4E R70 20K
R69 18K
JITTER SET RV1
90/180 SEC TIMER
PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDER
CSR1 TRIG
+27V
TP13
IC4F
4526 16 CF PE DP0 12 DP1 '0' DP2 DP3 INH MR CK IC26
+15V
4
R74 5K6
50K
13 3 5 11 14 2 4 10 6
1N916 D13
1NF
10K
TP12
+15V
C19 10NF
C20 10NF
R64 2K2
4049 11
15
TR8 BC638
4K7 C16
8
IC6D
11
8 3 5 1
C12 100UF 25V
C11 470NF
1N916 D11 R32
LPVLP
LATCH CLOCK
R65 2K2
4049 14
4 2 7 6
TP3
PLD-14
IC21B
1 +27V 2 FAN ON +15V
40106 9
+15V
470K
4
IC9B
7555 RS Vcc TR OP DIS CV THR 0V IC13
R57 22K
R63
47R C34 1UF 35V
PLC +15V
4011
5 6
+15V C31 2.2NF
PLA-1
R33 680
2NH
PLE (FAN)
5 6
PLG
+15V
1N9I6
HV OFF
R31 8K2
4071
42HZ TP12 R62
R
R73 +27V
2 1
MUTE/AZ
+15V
R71 22K
4011 IC10A 3
TP2
+15V
C33 10UF 25V
1N916 D30
R88 1K
10 IC4D
CHARGE TRIG
+15V 4001 IC11A 3
14
TP11
+15V
R66
4526 CF VDD 16 PE DP0 12 DP1 '0' DP2 DP3 INH MR CK IC17
TR11 BC547B
22K HEATER TURNDOWN
+15V
1N916 D28
13 3 5 11 14 2 4 10 6
HTR RELAY PLC-4
TP9
D39
C35
9
M O D U L A T O R
+15V
3KHZ
D20 IN916
LK5 750
14
4081 12 13 IC7D
IC14B
4081
R59 47K
RX TRIG PLC-15
6
MUTE/AZ 4013 8 S Q 9 D 10 R 11 Q
PRF DIVIDER
3000 1500 750 375
1500
IC19B
H/L SENSING BYV27100
4 8 9
+15V 'S'
1N916
4049
4049
CHARGE TRIG S/D
IC6E
TP12
IN916
LK3
D22 IN916
MAG HEATER VOLTS TURNDOWN
4081
1K
12NH 1 RX MON[1][2] 2 +27V 3 +15V 4 0V 5 -15V 6 AZ [2] 7 HL [1][2] 8 MONTRIG 9 RX TRIG 0V RXMUTE 10 11 12
10
CHARGE SHUTDOWN
+15V
4013 14 S D Q 1 R Q 2
3000
STATE LATCH
14
1 2
R51
D41
4
IC11B
10
IC11C
R44 47K
RUN TP7
D40 BYV27100
4001
5 6
C32 100nF
IC7C
PLA-2
1 2
STATE CHANGE
D23
PLF
T O F A N
3 4 6 11 13 14 1 9
4001
10K
+27V
T O
IC12D 11
TEST
D15 1N916
R35 22K
10
IC9C
8 9
PLB
4081
8 9
+15V
4071 3 IC9A
4071
8 9
R43
4070
TP4
D16
10K
C49 100nF
4081 3
7
SOFT START
14
2 1
4070 1N916 IC12A 3 D12 4070 1N916 6 5 IC12B 4 D14 4070 1N916 9 8 IC12C 10 12 13
R34 22K
C48 100nF
IC7A
LK2
14
1 2
RESET IC27-6
TR9 BC557B
MV52 D17
0V TUNE TUNE IND MP LP TXRUN MUTE AZ [2] HL[1][2] TXRDY RXMON
14
1 2
NORM
D9
TUNE IND
F R O M
4
IC7B
+15V
R86 100K
+15V
IC4B
PULSE LENGTH DECODING
R38
4070 1N916 IC8A 3
4
+15V
-15V
14
4049 6
POWER-UP RESET
1 2 100uH
14KL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
+15V
4081
+15V 2 1
C18 100UF 25V
L3
PLA
1N916 D10 40106 5
C15 100NF
C14 100UF 25V
C17 100NF
5 6
C51 100UF 25V
IC4C
+15V
1 L2 2 100uH
+27V(IN) 0V +15V(IN) +6V -15V(IN) 0V
C52 100NF
T O
LFOSC TP15
RESET IC6C-6
R75 68K
+15V 4541 1 RTC 14 VDD 2 CTC Q 8 3 RS 5 ARST 6 MR 10 MODE 9 Q/ QS 12 A 13 B IC27 SINGLE CYCLE TIMER
TIMER TP14
1N916 D33
R81
TX READY
PSU INTERRUPT RESET +15V 1
14 IC28A 2
220K R84 1M
40106 C44 22uF 25V
42Hz ADJ
7555 RS Vcc OP DIS THR CV 0V TR IC22
C36 100NF
8 3 5 1
C38 1UF 35V
R67 22K
R72 18K C37 100NF
RV3 20K
3KHz ADJ
BAT85 D31
4 7 6 2
7555 RS Vcc DIS OP THR CV TR 0V IC23
8 3 5 1
3KHZ
C39 10NF
+15V
1N916 D34 R77 6K8
RV2 20K
BAT85 D32
4 7 6 2
40106 3
4
R80 22K
MV52 GREEN D36 R79 1K2
42HZOSC
ON BZX79 4V7 D35
OFF
3KHZ OSC
C41 LK9 220NF
R78 1K
IC28B R83 4K7
TR13 BC547B
330HZ OSC
CD-4590
Figure 5 Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
Control PCB CTX-A246: Circuit Diagram (Sheet 1)
Figure 5 Page 5.31/32
KH1250 Chapter 5
+15V
C73 100UF 25V
C74 10NF
C76 100UF 25V
C77 10NF
TP25 1 PLB-11
-15V
NEON SIG
TO OPTO pcb
1
NEON SIG
2
NEON 0V
3
HL [1]
4
AZ [1]
1N916
R120
D50
10K
TP20
TP18
1
1
1
TR25 BC638 TR24 MPSA92
R127 10K
AZ IN
TP26 6KL TO TX MON ARM
HL IN
RX MON [1]
R119 2K2
-15V
5 6
PLC-1
+27V
R121
-150V [1]
22K C71 470nF 250V
PLM
0V
0V
0V
0V
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP24
1
1
1
1
+15V
C72 220nF 250V
TX MON COMPARATOR
R124 3K3
1N916 D56
R122 10K
R123 15K 3 2
8 LM393N 1
+ 4 IC31A
C75 47pF
R126 100K
1N916 D58
1N916 D59
-15V 6 5
CD-4591
Figure 6
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
TP27 MON O/P 1
R125
TX MON PULSE [1]
PLD-11
2K2 1N916 D57
LM393N 7 + IC31B
Control PCB CTX-A246: Circuit Diagram (Sheet 2)
Figure 6
Page 5.33/34
KH1250 Chapter 5
RELAY COIL
RELAY HEATER TURN DOWN
RELAY COIL
MP RELAY (FROM CONTROL BOARD) LP RELAY (FROM CONTROL BOARD) HEATER TURNDOWN. (FROM CONTROL BOARD) DUMMY TRIGGER (FROM CONTROL BOARD)
SYNC PULSE OR GATE D4, D5
SYNC PULSE TO DISPLAY
Rx TRIGGER (TO CONTROL BOARD)
FROM POWER UNIT -350 V
-150 V (TO CONTROL BOARD)
MON -ve VOLTAGE (TO CONTROL BOARD)
CHARGE CSR1
CHARGING CHOKE L5
BLOCKING DIODE D7
HOLD OFF REACTOR SL1
TX MON SUPPLY
PULSE FORMING NETWORK AND RELAYS L1, L2, L3, C1 TO C6
SYNC PULSE TRANSFORMER T1
SHORT PULSE TAILBITER SL2
CSR2 TRIGGER (FROM CONTROL BOARD)
DC HEATERS FROM POWER UNIT
HEATER RFI FILTER L4 HEATER MONITOR R5
HV MONITOR
HEATER I MONITOR
CHARGE TRIGGER TRANSFORMER T3
CSR1 TRIGGER (FROM CONTROL BOARD)
HEATER TURNDOWN RELAY & RESISTOR RLC, R4
PULSE TRANSFORMER
OVERSWING NETWORK & COMPENSATING CAPACITORS
S1
DISCHARGE TR2 TRANSFORMER
DISCHARGE CSR2 & PRIMING CIRCUIT
MAGNETRON LEADS
MAGNETRON
CD-3823
Figure 7 Issue 4
Modulator Unit CTX-A247/CTX-A248: Block Diagram
Figure 7 Page 5.35/36
KH1250 Chapter 5
TP2
TP1 DUMMY TRIG
D4 BYV27-100
8NH 1 2 3 FROM 4 CONTROL 5 BOARD 6 7 8
DUMMY TRIG DUMMY TR OV RX TRIG RX TR OV CSR2 TRIG CSR2TR OV CSR1 TRIG CSR1TR 0V
R2
4R7
R4
TP4 CSR2 TRIG
PULSE FORMING NETWORK
5 1
T1 L1
CHARGE TRIG ON/OFF OV TP10
R8 S1
100R
TP5 CSR1 TRIG
C7 33NF
6
2
5
1
T3
4KL 1 MAG HTR +VE 2 MAG HTR 0V 3 -VE 350V 4
R7 10R
R9 100R
TX MON V
R14 270K
R15 330K
BZT03 C150 D13
L3C
C3 33NF 1500V
C4 47NF 1500V
C5 82NF 1500V
RLB-1 LP RELAY
D7
MAG HTR 0V PLB-2
C6 82NF 1500V R5 0R68
FO810NH CSR1
5
6
7
MF121200 D9
BYW96E D10
C10 10NF
PRIMING CURRENT AND RRV LIMIT
RLA-1 MP RELAY
R12 150
HTR I MON PLA-9
C8
C9 470NF
*NOT FITTED
HOLD-OFF REACTOR
R10
SL2A
47R 1
2 T4a
T4b
D11 BYT30PI1000
SL1
R13 D12 BYT30PI1000
8
2R2
OVERSWING LOAD
HEATSINK
TP7
SL2B
470NF
DISCHARGE SWITCH
PLB
L3B
BYW96E
-350V TP8
R17 330K
C2 33NF 1500V
L3A
HTR TURNDOWN RELAY
RLC-1 3
L4 38 uH
XT2116 -1201-3 CSR2
R16 150K
L2 C1 22NF 1500V
T2
150K L5 25mH
BYV27100 D6
MAG HTR +VE PLB-1
0R68
R6
DISPLAY SYNC
HTR V TP6
R3
47R
2NH 1 2
PLC
BYV27100 D5
TP3 RXTRIG
RESONANT CHARGING
FROM POWER SUPPLY UNIT
SYNC (SIG) SYNC 0V
R1 1K
PLD
OV TP9
SYNC PULSE AND DUMMY TRIG
C11
PULSE TRANSFORMER CTX-A104
100NF 4mm
3mm
GN
Y
3
4
C12 68pF 6kV
BYX90G OR PF75 D14
C13 68pF 6kV
BYW96E D15
C14 68pF 6kV
BYX90G OR PF75 D16 CTX-A109
D8 1N916
OVERSWING UNIT
R11 1K MAGNETRON LEADS 7
12NH 1 2 3 4 FROM 5 CONTROL 6 BOARD 7 8 9 10 11 12
7 RLC HTR RELAY
8 HTR RELAY
BYV27100 D3
RLA 8 MP RELAY
BYV27100 D1
7 RLB 8
BYV27100 D2
LP RELAY
-VE 150V MON -V 0V HTR I MON MP RELAY LP RELAY +27V
PLA
CD-1409
Figure 8 Issue 4
Modulator PCB CTX-A247/A248: Circuit Diagram
Figure 8 Page 5.37/38
KH1250 Chapter 5
HEADING LINE FROM CONTROL PCB AZIMUTH FROM CONTROL PCB
180 PULSE COUNTER IC4, 6
START COMPARATOR IC1, 5
START/STOP DATA LINES SW1 Tx MUTE TO CONTROL PCB INHIBIT TR3
Rx MON ON FROM CONTROL PCB
Rx TRIG FROM CONTROL PCB
VIDEO IN FROM RECEIVER
STOP COMPARATOR IC7, 8
START PULSE STOP PULSE
CURRENT SOURCE TR1
AND GATE D5, 7, 10
100 s MONOSTABLE IC12A
OPTO COUPLER IC11
RF FILTER L1, L2 C16, 17, 18
ANALOGUE SWITCH IC13
RAMP C12
NOISE FLOOR INTEGRATOR R27, C15
START/STOP ENVELOPE FLIP FLOP IC2A
WEDGE FLIP FLOP IC2B
COMPARATOR IC9
DIFFERENTIATOR C8, R18, IC10C
NOISE FLOOR LEVEL BUFFER IC14
NOISE DIODE DRIVER TR2, 4 LK1
+15V
TO RF HEAD NOISE DIODE
CD-3848
Figure 9
Issue 4
Receiver Monitor PCB CTX-A252: Block Diagram
Figure 9
Page 5.39/40
KH1250 Chapter 5 +15V +15V
+15V C1 100µF 25V
+27V
+15V
C2 10nF
4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
C3 10nF
+15V
+15V
-15V
12NH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C5
R2
4n7
4K7
1N916 D1
MONON
1N916 D3
R7 2K2
4 12 13 3 1 10 9 5 15
40106 IC3A 2 3 4
40106
IC3B
Q0 P0 Q1 P1 Q2 P2 Q3 P3 PL TC U/D MR CE CP IC4
+15V
6 11 14 2 7
+15V 4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
+15V
16
5
40106
4 12 13 3 1 10 9 5 15
IC3C
1N916 D4
4516 Q0 P0 Q1 P1 Q2 P2 Q3 P3 PL TC U/D MR CE CP IC6
10K
D6
1N916 D9
4049
12
4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
+15V
4 6 5 10 7 2 15 11 9 1 14
+15V
4585 A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
1K C13 220PF
+15V
1N916 D13
PLB
L1 220µH C16 15nF
3
1 IC10A 2 4049
1K
12
R9 1K
+15V C6 10nF R36 100K
C20 0.47µF 35V
1N916 D15 4049
15
IC10F
D16 1N916
12
R14 1K
BZX79C5V1 D8
C7 10nF
R31 56K RAMP TP6
+15V
-
2
+
1 4
IC9
1nF
1
4049
9
+15V
4049 11 12
10
IC10D
6N136
3
Vb 7
7
6 IC11B 6N136 5
R23 10K
4
VL
+V
IC13 DG417
NC
1 IP
+27V
220µH -V 7
GND 3
2 3
R27 ANALOG SWITCH
NOISE BASE TP9
+15V
C14 10nF
OP 8
10K
R28 1M
IC10C
-15V
IC10E
+15V
5
R18 10K
1
6
C12 220nF
+15V
6 EN
R29 75R
8 Vcc
IC11A
7 1N916 D11
4049
C11 47µF 25V
C10 10nF
2
TP7
TP5 C8
7
311
PULSE END
R16 10K
5 6 8 3
R20 2K2
NOISE DIODE ON
1
C18 15nF
+15V
+15V
5K
+
8 TL082
1
LK1
R26
R24 22K
R32 1K
TR4 BC107B R25 2K2
1
22K
R33 2K2 TR2 BCY70
R35 22K
R34 22R
BZX79C24 D14
SKC
TO NOISE DIODE
4 IC14A
C15 100nF -15V
C19 10nF
1 -15V
Issue 4
TR3 BC107B
15K
R10
3
RV1
0V TP12
Figure 10
1
1C2B
13
+15V
1 2 6 C RC R Q 4538 16 A1 7 Q A0
L2
C17 47nF
1
+15V
+15V
FILTERED VIDEO TP11
1
TP1 4013 13 8 Q 9 S D 10 R 12 11 Q
16
1
IC12A 100µS PULSE
VIDEO TP10 2NH 1 2
4 5
R30
8
IC3D
3
+15V
10nF
3
8 7 6 5
13
BAT85
C9
1
40106 9
14
R17 15K
VIDEO INPUT
R5 47K
16
+15V
1N916 D12
14 1 Q Q 2
4585
R15 2K2
R22 10K
R4 47K
1 2 3 4
D10
SYNC TP8
4013
IC2A
D5 BAT85
+15V
WEDGE ENABLE
SECTOR ENABLE TP2
+15V
D7
IC10B
R21
6 S 5 D 4 R 3
R3 47K
+15V
R11 10K
BAT85
4
+15V
13 3
TR1 BCY70
RXTRIG
C4 10nF
+15V
16
+15V
+15V
5
1K
12
4585 A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
16
+15V
R12 10K
R1
3
+15V
6 11 14 2 7
+15V
BAT85
16 13
SW1
6
PLA
R13
A>B A=B AB A1 A2 A=B A3 B0 A
+15V
1
R8 10K
TXMUTE
1
AZ TP4
+15V AZ HL RXTRIG
14
1
1N916 D2
R6 22K
+15V
+15V
H/L TP3
4516
4585
Receiver Monitor PCB CTX-A252: Circuit Diagram
6 5
+
TL082
7
IC14B
CD-1410
Figure 10 Page 5.41/42
KH1250 Chapter 5
TP1 4WAY 1 1
3 R1 560
6WAY 1
+VE SUPPLY
BZX79 C18V D2
BZX79 C20V D1
LM317 IN IC1 OUT ADJ V(8-15V) 1
3 +VARACTOR V Vo SELECT
4
R4
5
470R
1
R5
0V + TUNE
2 3
1K5
4 R2 33OR
R6 22K
+12VSUPPLY
PLB
RV1
C3 100nF
2K
2
+27V
2
2 7 3 + 4
1
TL081 6 IC3
R3
330R
TP2
6
0V
PLJ CD-1414
Figure 11 - Tune Supply PCB CTX-A250: Circuit Diagram
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.43
KH1250 Chapter 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5.44
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5 8KL
BYV27-100 +27VB
+27V
D1
R1 390 +12V
C2 10uF 63V
BZX79- C12 D2
C1 100nF
1
TXMON0V
2
TXMONSIG
3
TXMONSIG
4
TXMON0V
5
+27V
6
AZ
7
HL
8
0V
FROM MON ARM
PLA
0V
0V
+12V
+27VB
R3 1K5
R2 1K 1
AZ OPTO
3
IC1B
IC1A H21L1 2
BZX79- C18 4 D3
5
TR1 2N2904A
R4
C3
1K
10nF
H21L1
R6 1K5
C4
R5
10UF 63V
22R
AZ
R7 22K 0V
+12V
+27VB TP1
R8 10K R14
TR2 2N2904A
R9 10K
1 HL OPTO
3
IC2B
IC2A H21L1 2
4 5
22R
C5 R10 2K2 TR3 BC107B
1
C6
R11
10UF 63V
22R
10nF
R12 4K7
H21L1
HL
R13 22K 0V
CD-1412
Figure 12
Issue 4
Heading Line PCB CAE-A180: Circuit Diagram
Figure 12
Page 5.45/46
KH1250 Chapter 5
+14V -14V +14V -14V 0V
I/P AMP & BANDPASS FILTER TR34
I/F I/F SCR.
5 STAGE LOG AMP
SELECTABLE BANDPASS FILTER
BAND SELECT
3 STAGE LOG AMP
DETECTOR TR33/TR37
IC5 DISCRIMINATOR
MOD SYNC
IC6 SAMPLE & HOLD
LOWPASS FILTER
3 x VIDEO OUTPUT IC2 TUNE AMP
VIDEO VID.SCR.
IC3 AMP
TUNE
IC3 SUM
IC4 TUNE AMP
TUNE INDICATOR
LNFE TUNE
CD-3795
Figure 13 - Log Receiver Assembly CTX-A297: Block Diagram
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 5.47
KH1250 Chapter 5
CURRENT AND PHASE SENSING OVERLOAD
3 PHASE MAINS IN
CONTACTOR
STARTING CURRENT LIMITING RESISTORS
CON 1
R3, 20 R4, 21 R5, 22
MAINS IN NEON & 440/220V LINK
CONT +ve
3 PHASE TO AERIAL MOTOR
RL1
MOTOR ON NEON & 440/220V LINK
STARTER ON LED
KEY-SWITCH
CONTACTOR
SOFT START OVER LED
VOLTAGE REGULATOR R12, D5
0V
0.5 sec TIMER IC1
RELAY DRIVER TR1, 2
RLB RLC RLD
RELAYS RLB, RLC & RLD
0V
3 PHASE SWITCHING PCB CZZ-A159 NOTE: CZZ-A14/2 HAS AN ADDITIONAL MAINS POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND TERMINAL BLOCK
FITTED TO VERSION CZZ-A14/2 SINGLE PHASE MAINS 25 CORE FROM DISPLAY OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
PSU (+27V)
27V
TB4 TB5
TB6 UHF CONNECTOR
38 CORE TO TRANSCEIVER
SYNC COAX UHF CONNECTOR VIDEO COAX
CD-1382
Figure 14 - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Block Diagram
Page 5.48
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5
3PH MAINS IN
P1
3 PHASE SUPPLY FROM ISOLATOR
150K LINK FOR 220V MOTOR R2
TP1
NEON LP1 GREEN
TP2
150K P2
SW1
1
SW1 KEYSWITCH
CONTACTOR
OVERLOAD
3WAY 1 2 3
2 3
R3
R20
2
1
2
1
18R 50W
10R 25W
4
3
4
3
R4
R21
6
5
6
5
18R 50W
10R 25W
14
14
13
A2
A2
TB1
FROM TRANSCEIVER VIA 38 CORE
PINBOARD
R1
95
R5
R22
18R 50W
10R 25W
3WAY 1 2 3
TO AERIAL MOTOR
TB3
A1 CON1 24V
THERMAL RL1
3WAY 1 CONT+VE 2 CONTACTOR 3 0V TB2
P3
3PH SWITCHING PCB (CZZ-A159)
P4
P5
P6
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
P7
P8
N/O
RUN
MV52 D1 GREEN
COILONV OV COIL-V COIL+V COIL+V LEDA
KLBP8 1 2 3 4 5 6
KLV8 1 2 3 4 5 6
SKA-1
PLA-1
RLB-1 COILONV OV COIL-V COIL+V D3 COIL+V LEDA BYV27-100
R6 V480LA -40A VDR
R7 V480LA-40A VDR
TP3
N/O
TP4 LINK FOR 220V MOTOR R8
RLC-1
150K
R10 V480LA -40A VDR
R9 150K
KLV3 1 2 3
KLBP3 1 2 3
PLB
SKB
N/O
R11
RLD-1
3K3
KLV8 COILONV 7 LEDB 8 BYV-27 100 D4
RLB
RLC
R12 1K
SOFT START OVER MV52 D2 GREEN
PLA-2 SKA-2
RLD
R13 3K3
C1 100nF
BZX79C12V D5
KLBP8 7 8
MOTOR ON B NEON LP2 GREEN A
C2 10uF 25V
R15 47K C3 100NF
C4 10uF 25V
7555
R16 10K
C5 10uF 25V
R14 10K
4 7 6 2 R18 10K
RS Vcc DIS OP THR CV TR 0V IC1
1.5 SECOND MOTOR ON TIMER
8 3 5 1
R17
TR1 BC107B
10K C6 100nF
BD675 TR2
R19 2K2
CD-1413
Figure 15
Issue 4
Soft Start PCB (CZZ-A159): Circuit Diagram
Figure 15
Page 5.49/50
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
ANNEX A LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297 CONTENTS Para 1 2 2 3 7 9
Introduction Technical Description RF Input Stages Logarithmic Amplifier with Switchable Bandwidths Video Detector and Amplifier AFC and Tune Indication
TABLE Table 1
Page Log Receiver CTX-A297 Parts List
5A.9
ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1 2
Issue 4
Page Log Receiver CTX-A297: Component Layout Log Receiver CTX-A297: Circuit Diagram
5A.5 5A.7/8
Page 5A.1
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 5A.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
ANNEX A LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297 INTRODUCTION 1
The receiver comprises the following: (1)
RF input stages.
(2)
Logarithmic amplifier with switchable bandwidths.
(3)
Video detector and amplifier with three independent outputs.
(4)
Tune indicating and AFC functions.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION RF Input Stages 2
The input signal at SKA is fed to FET amplifier TR34, via a source matching network comprising inductor L24 and capacitor C98. Resistor R127 and capacitor C97 set the source self bias. FET amplifier TR34 forms a pre-amplifier and roofing filter function prior to main amplification by an eight stage logarithmic amplifier. The Drain load, comprising inductor L23 and capacitors C67 and C99, provides a filter of approximately 12MHz bandwidth and an additional skirt selectivity for the primary filter (see paragraph 6). The drain load is damped to provide wideband operation by switching diode D8 via inverting amplifier IC2b. Logarithmic Amplifier with Switchable Bandwidths Logarithmic Amplifier 3
There are eight broadly similar amplifier stages, therefore only the first is described in detail.
4
Transistor TR22 forms an input buffer emitter follower. Transistor TR1 forms a unity gain amplifier with the net collector load impedance equal to the emitter resistor, R30. Transistor TR8 operates in parallel with TR1, with a gain of approximately 12dB and forms an emitter coupled limiting amplifier in conjunction with transistor TR15. The bias potential for each stage is nominally 9V, obtained via voltage regulator IC1. This also provides a reference for the switching functions (see paragraph 6). 5
Issue 4
Diode D17 is unique to this stage and is used to limit the signal excursion in order to prevent undesirable log amplifier characteristics.
Page 5A.3
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A Switching 6
Link LK6 is set to position B for the MkVI transmitter. When switching line SP is taken high (12-15V), the wideband operation is selected via analogue switching logic IC2 and IC9. Diode D5 is always biased off for the MkVI transmitter. When narrowband operation is selected (long transmitter pulse), transistors TR12 and TR5 collector loads are shunted via diode D4 with a tuned circuit, comprising inductor L20 and capacitors C27 and C40, to provide selectivity and reduce the pre-detector wideband noise floor. When wideband operation is selected (medium or short transmitter pulses), diode D1 shunts inductor L20 to prevent undesirable coupling, and diode D19 substitutes a resistive load with a higher than normal impedance to offset the gain reduction at FET amplifier TR34 drain, due to damping resistor R113. Video Detector and Amplifier Detector 7
Transistor TR35 provides drive from the final log. stage to T1 phase splitter, which in turn drives a balanced detector circuit comprising transistors TR33 and TR37. The collector load, comprising inductor L11 and capacitors C46 and C45, forms a fixed bandwidth video filter . Video Amplifier 8
Transistors TR29 and TR45 form level shifting unity gain buffer amplifiers. Three video outputs at the collectors of transistors TR39, 41 and 44 provide a 5.5V drive into a 75 ohm
load. AFC and Tune Indicator Function 9
The main transmitter pulse breakthrough is fed in parallel with the input signal to buffer amplifier TR36. A phase shift network, comprising inductor L21, capacitors C44 and C49 and variable capacitor CV1, provide a 90 degree phase difference between the inputs to double balanced mixer IC5, which forms a discriminator function. The circuits following are all referenced to 5.6V zener diode D11. Analogue gate IC6 is switched via monostable IC8b after suitable delays, which are selected via links LK2 LK3 and LK4, in order to accommodate time differences between the main system sync. pulse and the RF appearing at SKA. 10
The sampled pulse is integrated by capacitors C71 and C78 and fed via difference amplifier IC3a to AFC limiter amplifier IC3b and tune indicator amplifier IC4a.
AFC function 11
The degree of control to be applied by limiting amplifier IC3b may be selected via link LK5. The signal is applied to level shift amplifier IC3c which ground references the input signal. This signal is summed with the manual tune voltage input via offset/summing amplifier IC3d. The tuning voltage to the low noise front end varactor tuning control is routed via resistor R117.
Page 5A.4
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A Tune indication 12
The amplified tune signal at IC4a output is fed to a rectifier stage IC4b and IC4c. The output from this stage (still referenced to 5.6V) is then fed to another amplifier/buffer stage IC4d/TR32. The main indication is available via R101 series limiting resistor.
Issue 4
Page 5A.5
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
CD-1416
Figure 1- Log Receiver CTX-A297: Component Layout
Page 5A.6
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A C36 10nF
PLD-1
PLD-2 1 2 +15V
R129 390R
R8 2K2
L24 220nH C98 68pF
d
g
TR34 SST310
R29 2K2
D8 BAT18
L12
R43 1K5
C20 1nF
C33 1nF
+15V
A
8
IC2A
2 B
TL072ID
IC9A
8
2
D6 LP1
___ MED
1
3
SP1
IC2B
6
TR18 BFS19
R37 2K2
R38 240R
TR26 BFT92
10nF
R46 1K5
L6 1uH
C6 100nF
R27 100K
C21 10nF
10nF R48 1K5
10nF R62 5K1
R49 1K5
R61 11K
R60 5K1
C37 10nF
C34
TR28 BFT92
R146 240R
R148 2K2
3
6
3
T1 616PT-1028 6
2
TR33 BFS19
10nF R134 5K1
C41 10nF
D12 BAT18 R131 11K
C23 100uF 6V3
C35 100nF
R108 100K
R136 100K
+15V
C52 AFC
TR36 BFR92
C44 10pF
560R
C49 5.6pF
1 CV1 2-6pF
R100 180R +9V R107 3K9
OSCIN
100pF
L21 560nH
R75
R105 10M
C74 10nF
IC5 NE612AD 1
VCC 6
R79 150R C73
I/PA
IC6A HEF4016BT A B 2
4
O/PB
5
2 3
3 2
100pF R89 56R
B
A
4
IC6C HEF4016BT C76 1nF 8
R120 IC3A 1
1 1
C71 100nF
IC6D HEF4016BT A B 9
D13 BAT18
R69 100K R22
R78
C62
100K
1K R99
22nF
220K R103
7
5
100K
IC3B TL074ID
IC3C
9
8
10
TL074ID
R64
R157
56K
56K
C72 100nF
C51 100nF
C85 10nF
1
C60 100nF
REXT/CEXT
5 4 3
B A CLR
C42 4.7uF 35V
Note: Short LK1 for S Band
C59 100nF
SYNC 330R R122 75R
R142 10K
D15 BAT18
+15V
IC8A HEF4528BT 1 R81 4K7
LP
110K 13
B
6
Q
7
LK3 2
REXT/CEXT
5 4 3
B A CLR
Q
6
Q
7
LK4
LK2
R87 4K7
15 C47 56pF 14 11 12 13
R98 43K
Noisemon
Tuning voltage in
R155
NEG
A
11
Q
9
R23 390K
15 C58
R65 330R
R73 +5V6
100nF 14 11 12 13
6
IC4B 7 TL074ID
IC4A
2
10K
5
4 1
3
R104 10K
12 R86 22K
IC4D
D3 TR32 BFS19
14
13
TL074ID
D9
BAT18
TP3
TP1 R101
R85 10K
220R
Tuning indicator
TL074ID
REXT/CEXT B A CLR
R74 10K
10nF R77 27K
CEXT
Note: NEG1 = -12 to -15V
R83
+5V6
IC7B HEF4528BT
C56 1nF
C55 1nF
C102 10nF
D14
+15V
TP4 10
NEG1 L8
+15V
Q
PLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4.7uH
C79
REXT/CEXT B A CLR
SP
C110 10nF
L22 4.7uH
C84 10uF 25V
BAT18
CEXT
POS
14
12
C31 100nF
IC6B HEF4016BT Q
VSS
R135 22K
56K
IC8B HEF4528BT
+15V
CEXT
TP2
NEG
+15V
+15V
C91 1nF
Tune voltage out
100K +15V
0R0
C92 1nF
1 2 10
R106
Tune supply
4.7uH
R117 220R
C
CEXT
2
TR31 SST310
LK1
R28 100K
6 IC7A HEF4528BT
+15V
L19
d
IC3D TL074ID
C NEG
g R130 180R
R95
6
10K
TL074ID
R96 10M
C
+5V6
10M 4
s
C101 10nF
R97
1 3
Note: R130,TR31,C42,C92,C91,L19,R106 for evaluation purposes only +15V
A
1nF
R94 10M C78 100nF
C O/PA
I/PB
3
TXMON
*IC9B noise monitor not used on MkVI
D2 BAV99
C100
5
GND
5
+5V6
LK5 B
8
R121 10K
D18 BAV99
C87 10nF
+5V6
R118 1K5
C70
VIDEO OUTPUT 75ohm 5V pk
TL072ID +15V
10nF
R133 150R
*IC9B 7
6
D11 BZX84C5V6
R132 150R
D16 BAT17
R112 120R
7
C64 10uF 10V
R88 150R
R25 100K
R124 100R
+5V6
PLB 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
C105 TR30 BFT92
R63 11K
C38 10nF
25V
160R
C45 27pF
C46 3.3pF
C15 10uF
R80 33R BFG31 TR41
160R R91
TR29 BF550
4.7uH
TR37 BFS19
R76 33R BFG31 TR39
160R R137
L11
4
R66 33R BFG31 TR44
R90
TR45 FMMT720
R68 680R
R154 680R
TR42 BFS19
R147 1K5
R128 560R
L13 2.2uH
R71 560R
TR35 BFT92 TR43 BFS19
R126 47R
TR21 BFS19
R102 560R
D20 BAT18
R156 33R
C88 10nF 2
D10 BAT18
R116 3K9 ____ WIDE
R59 11K
C93 10nF
L36 1uH
TR40 BFS19
C54 10nF
R42 240R
R93 1K
C83 10uF 25V
R70 390R
C61 100nF TR14 BFS19
R41 2K2
C32
+9V 1
4.7uH
C7 100nF
L7 1uH
C63 100uF 6V3
RV1 100R
C29 100nF
TR7 BFS19
R125 47R
TR27 BFT92
IF
VDD IC1 LM78L05ACM
R21 390R
TR13 BFS19 R40 240R
R39 2K2
8
R20 2K2
C14 10nF
TR6 BFS19
C13 10nF
TL072ID
L17
R7 390R
R141 2K2
TR20 BFS19
R114
C40 56pF
IF
10nF R58 5K1
R47 1K5
R57 11K
R56 5K1
C25 100nF
BAT18
C57 10nF
TR19 BFS19 C30
C19
C28
C27 68pF
L20 220nH BAT18 TR12 BFS19
R158 47R
TR25 BFT92
R55 11K
NEG
____ WIDE
7
5
R92 10K
C86 1nF
C65 1nF
D1 R24 3K9
TR5 BFS19
10nF
R6 390R
+9V
R19 390R
BAT18
4.7uH
C66 1nF
R45 1K5
R53 11K
C12 10nF
R36 240R
R35 2K2
10nF
10nF R54 5K1
+9V R18 2K2
SP1
NEG
+15V
L5 1uH
TR11 BFS19
C18
TR24 BFT92
C17 10nF
R5 390R
+9V
4 TL072ID
BAT18 D7
L16
POS
R72 680R
+15V
4
WIDE (SP) = ACTIVE HIGH
C81 1nF
___ NRW
1
3
SP
R16 2K2
C5 100nF
+5V6
R139 3K9
+5V6
LK6
Note: LK6 Naval A Commercial B
R52 5K1
R44 1K5
C4 100nF
BAT18
2.2uH
C69 10nF +15V
R109 10K
R51 11K
L4 1uH
TR4 BFS19
R153 47R
R34 240R
C26
C24 10nF
R15 390R
C11 10nF
TR17 BFS19
TR23 BFT92
C16 10nF
C22 10nF
R50 5K1
R31 2K2
R33 2K2
TR16 BFS19
TR22 BFT92
LP1
4.7uH
R151 47R
+9V L18 2.2uH C48 10nF
R26 680R
D4 TR10 BFS19
R152 47R
R32 240R
R14 2K2
C3 100nF
L3 1uH
C50 10nF
L10
C77 100nF
TR3 BFS19
C10 10nF
TR2 BFS19
R13 390R
R4 390R
___ NRW
BAT18 D5
R127 180R
C97 1nF
NARROW (LP) = ACTIVE HIGH
R30 240R
C99 4.7pF
R12 2K2
L2 1uH
+9V
R3 390R
TR9 BFS19
TR15 BFS19
R113 1K2 LP
C2 100nF
R11 390R
TR8 BFS19
C67 6.8pF
s
R10 2K2 C9 10nF
R17 39R
TR1 BFS19
L23 820nH
AFC
D17 BAS16
L1 1uH
C1 100nF
R9 390R
C8 10nF
C39 100nF
SKA RF
R1 390R
+9V
C82 10nF
+9V
R2 390R
D19
C68 10nF
R138 3K9
___ MED +9V
R67 1K
R123 3K9
____ WIDE
1 2
Q
10
Q
9
1 1
C75 10nF
+5V6
9 10
BAT18 8 IC4C TL074ID
R82 100K C43 100nF
NEG
CD-1417
Figure 2
Issue 4
Log Receiver CTX-A297: Circuit Diagram
Figure 2
Page 5A.7/8
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
PCB PANEL RECEIVER BOARD
CAPACITORS C1
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C2
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C3
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C4
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C5
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C6
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C7
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C8
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C9
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C10
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C11
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C12
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C13
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C14
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C15
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 25V TAJC106K025 AVX-KYOCERA
C16
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C17
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C18
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C19
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C20
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C21
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C22
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C23
100uF TAJD TANT 10% 6V3 TAJD107K006 AVX-KYOCERA
C24
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C25
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C26
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C27
68pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A680KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C28
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C29
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C30
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C31
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C32
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C33
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C34
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C35
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
Issue 4
Page 5A.9
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
C36
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C37
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C38
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C39
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C40
56pF C0805 COG 5% 08055A560KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C41
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C42
4.7uF TAJD TANT 10% 35V TAJD475K035 AVX-KYOCERA
C43
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C44
10pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A100KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C45
27pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A270KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C46
3.3pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A3R3KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C47
56pF C0805 COG 5% 08055A560KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C48
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C49
5.6pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A5R6KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C50
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C51
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C52
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C53
NOT USED
C54
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C55
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C56
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C57
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C58
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C59
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C60
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C61
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C62
22nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C223KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C63
100uF TAJD TANT 10% 6V3 TAJD107K006 AVX-KYOCERA
C64
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 10V TAJC106K010 AVX-KYOCERA
C65
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C66
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C67
6.8pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A6R8KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C68
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C69
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C70
100pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055C101KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C71
100nF C0805 X7R 10% 25V 08055C104KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
Page 5A.10
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
C72
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C73
100pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055C101KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C74
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C75
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C76
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C77
100nF C0805 Z5U 20% 50V GR40Z5U104M MURATA
C78
100nF C0805 X7R 10% 25V 08055C104KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C79
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C80
NOT USED
C81
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C82
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C83
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 25V TAJC106K025 AVX-KYOCERA
C84
10uF TAJC TANT 10% 25V TAJC106K025 AVX-KYOCERA
C85
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C86
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C87
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C88
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C89
NOT USED
C90
NOT USED
C91
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C92
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C93
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C94
NOT USED
C95
NOT USED
C96
NOT USED
C97
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C98
68pF C0805 COG 5% 50V 08055A680KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C99
4.7pF C0805 COG 0.5PF 50V 08055A4R7KAT00JAVX-KYOCERA
C100
1nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C102KAT00J AVX-KYOCERA
C101
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C102
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C103
NOT USED
C104
NOT USED
C105
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
C106
NOT USED
C107
NOT USED
C108
NOT USED
C109
NOT USED
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.11
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
C110
10nF C0805 X7R 10% 50V 08055C103KAT00 JAVX-KYOCERA
CV1
2-6pF TZBX4Z060BA110 25V MURATA
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
RESISTORS
R1
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R2
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R3
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R4
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R5
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R6
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R7
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R8
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R9
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R10
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R11
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R12
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R13
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R14
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R15
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R16
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R17
39R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R18
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R19
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R20
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R21
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R22
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R23
150K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R24
3K9 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R25
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R26
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R27
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R28
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R29
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R30
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R31
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R32
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Page 5A.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R33
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R34
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R35
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R36
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R37
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R38
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R39
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R40
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R41
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R42
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R43
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R44
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R45
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R46
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R47
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R48
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R49
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R50
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R51
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R52
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R53
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R54
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R55
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R56
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R57
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R58
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R59
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R60
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R61
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R62
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R63
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R64
56K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R65
330R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R66
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R67
1K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R68
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R69
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R70
390R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.13
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R71
560R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R72
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R73
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R74
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R75
560R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R76
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R77
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R78
1K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R79
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R80
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R81
4K7 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R82
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R83
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R84
NOT USED
R85
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R86
22K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R87
4K7 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R88
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R89
56R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R90
160R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R91
160R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R92
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R93
1K R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R94
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R95
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R96
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R97
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R98
43K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R99
110K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R100
180R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R101
220R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R102
560R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R103
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R104
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R105
10M R1206 WCR 1% 0.125W WELWYN
R106
0R0 R0805 RC11 0.125W PHILIPS
R107
3K9 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R108
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Page 5A.14
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R109
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R110
NOT USED
R111
NOT USED
R112
120R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R113
1K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R114
330R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R115
NOT USED
R116
3K9 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R117
220R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R118
1K5 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R119
NOT USED
R120
10K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R121
22K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R122
75R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R123
3K9 R1206 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R124
100R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R125
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R126
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R127
180R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R128
560R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R129
390R R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R130
180R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R131
11K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R132
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R133
150R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R134
5K1 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R135
22K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R136
100K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R137
160R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R138
3K9 R1206 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R139
3K9 R1206 RC01 5% 0.25W PHILIPS
R140
NOT USED
R141
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R142
1K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R143
NOT USED
R144
NOT USED
R145
NOT USED
R146
240R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.15
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
R147
1K5 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R148
2K2 R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R149
NOT USED
R150
NOT USED
R151
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R152
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R153
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R154
680R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R155
56K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R156
33R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R157
56K R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
R158
47R R0805 RC11 5% 0.125W PHILIPS
RV1
100R 3304W 101 BOURNS
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
DIODES D1
BAT18 SOT23
D2
BAV99 SOT23
D3
BAT18 SOT23
D4
BAT18 SOT23
D5
BAT18 SOT23
D6
BAT18 SOT23
D7
BAT18 SOT23
D8
BAT18 SOT23
D9
BAT18 SOT23
D10
BAT18 SOT23
D11
BZX84C5V6 SOT23
D12
BAT18 SOT23
D13
BAT18 SOT23
D14
BAT18 SOT23
D15
BAT18 SOT23
D16
BAT17 SOT23
D17
BAS16 SOT23
D18
BAV99 SOT23
D19
BAT18 SOT23
D20
BAT18 SOT23
Page 5A.16
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS IC1
LM78L05ACM
IC2
TL072ID
IC3
TL074ID
IC4
TL074ID
IC5
NE612AD PHILIPS
IC6
HEF4016BT
IC7
HEF4528BT
IC8
HEF4528BT
IC9
TL072ID
INDUCTORS L1
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L2
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L3
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L4
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L5
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L6
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L7
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
L8
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L9
NOT USED
L10
2.2uH 32CS 380LB2R2K 10% TOKO
L11
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L12
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L13
2.2uH 32CS 380LB2R2K 10% TOKO
L14
NOT USED
L15
NOT USED
L16
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L17
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L18
2.2uH 32CS 380LB2R2K 10% TOKO
L19
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L20
220nH 5CE 432AN1056Z 5% TOKO
L21
560nH 32CS 380NBR56M 20% TOKO
L22
4.7uH 32CS 380LB4R7K 10% TOKO
L23
820nH 5CE 432AN1063Z 5% TOKO
L24
220nH 32CS 380NBR22M 20% TOKO
L25
NOT USED
L26
NOT USED
Issue 4
Page 5A.17
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
L27
NOT USED
L28
NOT USED
L29
NOT USED
L30
NOT USED
L31
NOT USED
L32
NOT USED
L33
NOT USED
L34
NOT USED
L35
NOT USED
L36
1uH 32CS 380LB1R0K 10% TOKO
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
LINKS LK1
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK2
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK3
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK4
HEADER M20-977-0206 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK5
HEADER M20-977-0306 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
LK6
HEADER M20-977-0306 HARWIN JUMPER M7566-05 HARWIN
CONNECTORS PLA
BS14P-SHF-1AA JST
PLB
BSP-SHF-1AA JST
PLD-1, PLD-2
B-2P-SHF-1AA JST
SKA
GE65207 SMB GREENPAR
TRANSFORMERS T1
616PT-1028 B5FL TOKO
TRANSISTORS
TR1
BFS19 SOT23
TR2
BFS19 SOT23
TR3
BFS19 SOT23
TR4
BFS19 SOT23
TR5
BFS19 SOT23
Page 5A.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
TR6
BFS19 SOT23
TR7
BFS19 SOT23
TR8
BFS19 SOT23
TR9
BFS19 SOT23
TR10
BFS19 SOT23
TR11
BFS19 SOT23
TR12
BFS19 SOT23
TR13
BFS19 SOT23
TR14
BFS19 SOT23
TR15
BFS19 SOT23
TR16
BFS19 SOT23
TR17
BFS19 SOT23
TR18
BFS19 SOT23
TR19
BFS19 SOT23
TR20
BFS19 SOT23
TR21
BFS19 SOT23
TR22
BFT92 SOT23
TR23
BFT92 SOT23
TR24
BFT92 SOT23
TR25
BFT92 SOT23
TR26
BFT92 SOT23
TR27
BFT92 SOT23
TR28
BFT92 SOT23
TR29
BF550 SOT23
TR30
BFT92 SOT23
TR31
SST310 SOT23 SILICONIX
TR32
BFS19 SOT23
TR33
BFS19 SOT23
TR34
SST310 SOT23 SILICONIX
TR35
BFT92 SOT23
TR36
BFR92 SOT23
TR37
BFS19 SOT23
TR38
NOT USED
TR39
BFG31 SOT223 PHILIPS
TR40
BFS19 SOT23
TR41
BFG31 SOT223 PHILIPS
TR42
BFS19 SOT23
TR43
BFS19 SOT23,
Issue 4
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Page 5A.19
KH1250 Chapter 5, Annex A
TABLE 1: Log Receiver PCB (CTX-A297) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
TR44
BFG31 SOT223 PHILIPS
TR45
FMMT720 SOT23 ZETEX
Page 5A.20
KELVIN HUGHES Part Number
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE CONTENTS Para 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Introduction Preventive Maintenance Diagnostic Maintenance Pre-Requisites Failure Messages Test Equipment Indicators Corrective Maintenance Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) Access Electronic Assembly - Removal Control Board - Removal Rx Monitor Board - Removal Fan Assembly - Removal Receiver Board - Removal Tune PCB - Removal Power Supply Assembly - Removal Heading Line Assembly - Removal Heading Line Assembly - Refitting Magnetron - Removal Magnetron - Refitting RF Head Assembly - Removal RF Head Assembly- Refitting Heading Line Setting-up Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Access Electronic Assembly - Removal Control Board - Removal Rx Monitor Board - Removal Receiver Board - Removal Tune PCB - Removal Power Supply Assembly - Removal Magnetron - Removal Magnetron - Refitting Fan Assembly - Removal RF Head Assembly - Removal RF Head Assembly - Refitting
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.1
KH1250 Chapter 6 CONTENTS (continued) Para 41 42 43 44
Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41 or CAE-A42) Heading Line Assembly - Removal Heading Line Assembly - Refitting Heading Line Setting-up
TABLES Table 1 2 3
Page Failure Messages Fuses Indicators
6.4 6.4 6.4
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page Flowchart 1 Flowchart 2 Flowchart 3 Flowchart 4 Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations Power Supply Assembly RF Head Assembly Rotating Joint Downmast Transceiver: Module Locations
Page 6.2
6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.22 6.23 6.24 6.25 6.26
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION 1
This Chapter is divided into two parts: (1)
Preventive Maintenance.
(2)
Diagnostic Maintenance.
(3)
Corrective Maintenance.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2
The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance, however periodically (around every 6 months) check that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free from corrosion, and wipe the scanner clean using a soft cloth with mild detergent. DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT. ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE CARRIED OUT BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN. 3
The Algorithms in this chapter provide an aid to fault diagnosis in the transceiver. The algorithms enable fault diagnosis down to module level and also identify wiring faults. Entry to the algorithms is via Failure Messages generated by the display. Pre-Requisites 4
Before any rectification is carried out, the radar system must be in a configuration, as shown at the top of the algorithm.
standard
Failure Messages 5
These failure messages appear in the data field of the display monitor if certain signals are missing. See Table 1 for details.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.3
KH1250 Chapter 6 TABLE 1: Failure Messages
6
SIGNAL
FAILURE MESSAGE
SIGNAL
FAILURE MESSAGE
Sync.
No Sync.
Azimuth
No Azimuth
Video
No Video
Heading Line
No Heading Line
Fault diagnosis algorithms covering these failures are provided in Figures 1 to 4.
Test Equipment 7
Routine field maintenance requires fault location down to fuse replacement level. The only test equipment required for fault finding is a high impedance Multimeter. TABLE 2: Fuses FUSE No
LOCATION
RATING
FS1
Power Unit
Resettable
FS2
Power Unit
Resettable
FS3
Power Unit
Resettable
FS1
Control Board
Resettable
FS1
Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/2
Time Lag 5A for 220V Time Lag 6.3A for 110V
Indicators 8
Indicators provided on PCBs are detailed in Table 3. TABLE 3: Indicators PCB
Component Ref.
Indication
PSU
D18-A
+15 V Low Supply
PSU
D18-B
+9.5 V Low Supply
PSU
D17-A
+6 V Low Supply
PSU
D17-B
-15 V Low Supply
Control
D4
Heater current OFF
Control
D6
+27V OK
Control
D17
Tune Indicator
Control
D24
prf ON
Control
D26
Mute ON
Control
D27
HL I/P OK
Control
D36
Tx Ready
Page 6.4
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 6
START DISPLAY ON
AFTER 3 MINUTES Tx READY?
YES
SWITCH TO RUN
NO
IS +27V SUPPLY AVAILABLE AT Tx?
NO
CHECK +27V FROM DISPLAY OR IN-LINE PSU & CABLES
YES
ARE PSU LEDs ON?
FAILURE MESSAGE
FAILURE MESSAGE
NO SYNC NO VIDEO
NO AZIMUTH NO HEADING LINE
TO FIGURE 3
NO
YES
CHECK CONNECTIONS TO CONTROL PANEL REPAIR CONNECTIONS WHERE NECESSARY
ARE ALL 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & +27V LED (ON CONTROL BOARD) OFF?
NO
TO FIGURE 2
DISCONNECT PSU PLB & PLC. SWITCH OFF TO COOL FUSE LINKS
YES
CHECK THAT PSU SW1 IS ON
ARE ALL 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & +27V LED (ON CONTROL BOARD) OFF?
NO
PSU FAULT
YES
CONNECT PLB & PLC. DISCONNECT ALL BOARDS FROM CONTROL PCB RETRY
ARE ALL 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & +27V LED (ON CONTROL BOARD) OFF?
NO
CONTROL PCB FAULT
YES
CD-0293 25.04.01
CONNECT OTHER UNITS ONE AT A TIME TO FIND FAULTY UNIT REPLACE FAULTY UNIT
Figure 1 - Flowchart 1 Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 6.5
KH1250 Chapter 6 FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE NO AZIMUTH NO HEADING LINE
IS THE ANTENNA TURNING?
YES
FAULT IN HL PCB OR INTERCONNECTIONS
NO
IS TURNING MECHANISM SAFETY SWITCH ON?
NO
SWITCH ON
YES
IS SOFT START UNIT SWITCHED ON?
NO
SWITCH ON
YES
ARE ALL FOUR SOFT START INDICATORS ON?
YES
NO
IS MAINS IN INDICATOR ON?
NO
CHECK 3-PHASE SUPPLY
YES
IS STARTER ON INDICATOR ON?
NO
NO
HAS THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIPPED?
YES
CHECK WIRING, SWITCH S1 (ON CONTROL BOARD) ON, RUN SIGNAL TO TRANSCEIVER
YES
RESET WITH BLUE BUTTON
IS SOFT START OVER INDICATOR ON?
NO
3-PHASE SWITCHING PCB FAULT OR CONNECTION FAULT
NO
HAS THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIPPED?
YES
IS MOTOR ON INDICATOR ON?
YES
CD-0294 25.04.01
YES
RESET WITH BLUE BUTTON
NO
FAULTY WIRING TO AE MOTOR OR MOTOR FAULT
Figure 2 - Flowchart 2 Page 6.6
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 6 FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE SET TO LONG PULSE
NO SYNC NO VIDEO
POOR SIGNALS BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
NO VIDEO
NO SYNC
TO FIGURE 4
ARE CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS OK?
NO
ARE CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS OK?
REPAIR FAULTY CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS
YES
REPAIR FAULTY CO-AX CABLE CONNECTION(S)
NO
IS PSU +9.5V LED ON?
NO
NO
RECEIVER FAULT
YES
NO
CHECK CONTROL BOARD LEDs
IS LED D4 OFF (HEATER CURRENT OK)?
YES
ARE RECEIVER CONNECTIONS OK FROM LOW NOISE FRONT END & CABLEFORMS?
REPAIR CONNECTIONS
SET TO STANDBY BY SWITCHING OFF GEARBOX SAFETY SWITCH
IS PSU +9.5V LED ON?
NO
PSU FAULT
REMOVE PSU PLC YES
YES
INTERCONNECTION OR MAGNETRON HEATER OPEN CIRCUIT
CHECK CONTROL BOARD LEDs
IS LED D26 OFF (MUTE OFF)?
YES
NO
INTERCONNECTION OR MAGNETRON HEATER SHORT CIRCUIT
SET SWITCH S1 TO ON
MUTE INPUT FROM Rx MON PCB
HL OVERRIDE FAULT
YES NO
IS PSU +27V LED ON?
NO
SET LK8 (CCT REF E6) TO TEST
IS PSU SWITCHED ON?
REMOVE CONTROL BOARD SKF
YES
YES
SWITCH TO STANDBY BY SWITCHING OFF GEARBOX SAFETY SWITCH, THE AE WILL STOP
IS LED D26 OFF (MUTE OFF)?
PSU FAULT
NO
NO
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
YES
TURN AE AWAY FROM YOU. SWITCH CONTROL BOARD S1 OFF (AE TURNING INHIBIT). SET CONTROL BOARD LK8 (CCT REF E6) TO TEST. SET TO RUN. SAFETY SWITCH ON
IS MODULATOR FIRING? (CONTINUOUS AUDIBLE NOTE, 800MHz)
YES
IS THERE A MODULATOR PLC CONNECTOR OR CONNECTON FAULT TO CONNECTOR?
Rx MON PCB FAULT OR CABLEFORM FAULT
CABLE FAULT
NO
INTERMITTENT NOTE?
YES
NO
MODULATOR FAULT
NO
AT RUN, IS -350V AT PSU PLC-2, WRT TO CHASSIS OK?
IS PSU PLB-10 AT LEAST +10V WRT CHASSIS?
NO
YES
NO
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
IS PSU PLB-9 AT LEAST 1V WRT CHASSIS?
CABLEFORM MODULATOR OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
REPAIR FAULT
IS LED D26 OFF (MUTE OFF)?
NO
PSU FAULT
YES
PSU FAULT OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT OR MODULATOR FAULT
CD-0295 25.04.01
Figure 3 - Flowchart 3 Issue 4, Amdt. 3 (Oct 01)
Page 6.7
KH1250 Chapter 6
POOR SIGNALS BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
SWITCH MON ON AT DISPLAY 12m RANGE
IS Tx MON PLUME GOOD? (5 MILES)
NO
POOR MAGNETRON OR WAVEGUIDE FAULT
YES
ARE Rx MON FINGERS GOOD? (3 MILES OR MORE RADIUS. ADJUST TUNE FOR STRONGEST SIGNAL)
NO
IF 3 MILES OR LESS FAULTY LIMITER, LNFE, OR RECEIVER
YES
SIGNAL STRENGTH NOT AFFECTED BY TUNE CONTROL. TUNE INDICATOR NOT WORKING SET TO STANDBY USING SAFETY SWITCH
CHECK VOLTAGE AT TUNE SUPPLY PCB
IS VOLTAGE AT TP2 +12V w.r.t. CHASSIS?
NO
DISCONNECT SKB FROM TUNE PCB
YES
IS VOLTAGE AT TP2 +12V w.r.t. CHASSIS?
YES
FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
NO
IS 12V FROM CONTROL BOARD PRESENT AT PLD-8?
CHECK VOLTAGE AT TUNE SUPPLY PCB
AFTER DISCONNECTING CONTROL BOARD SKD IS PLD-8 9V?
NO
YES
IS VOLTAGE AT TP1 APPROX 9.5V +11V w.r.t. CHASSIS?
YES
FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
NO
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
YES
USE METER PROBE TO SHORT PLD PINS 8 & 7 TOGETHER.
TUNE SUPPLY PCB FAULT
NO
ADJUST DISPLAY TUNE (ONLY POSSIBLE DURING WARM UP TIME WITH TRANSMISSION INHIBITED)
IS TP1 BETWEEN +3V & +13V MIN?
YES
RECEIVER FAULT
YES
FAULTY TUNE SUPPLY PCB, OR FAULTY CONNECTIONS
NO
DISCONNECT SKB FROM TUNE SUPPLY PCB
. DOES VOLTAGE AT TP1 CHANGE?
NO
YES
FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
IS 12V PRESENT?
NO
CAN TUNE INPUT TO CONTROL PCB NO PLB-2 BE VARIED BETWEEN 0 & -10 VIA THE DISPLAY DURING WARM UP?
CONTROL BOARD FAULT
DISPLAY OR INTERCONNECTION FAULT
YES
RECEIVER OR CABLEFORM FAULT
CD-0296 25.04.01
Figure 4 - Flowchart 4 Page 6.8
Issue 4, Amdt 3 (Oct 01)
KH1250 Chapter 6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT. ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE CARRIED OUT BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN. CAUTIONS (1)
Handling Of Electrostatic Sensitive Semiconductor Devices. Semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to static voltage. Observe the following precautions when handling these devices in their unterminated state, or modules containing these devices. Persons removing modules from an equipment using these devices should be earthed by a wrist strap and a resistor. Soldering irons used during repair operations must be low voltage types with earth tips and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer. Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static voltages. Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored and transported in anti-static bags. Fit new devices in a special handling area. For detailed information, refer to British Standard BS 5783 or other equivalent standard.
9
(2)
Open waveguides must be kept free of dirt and moisture by moisture by using plastic aperture seals when left unattended.
(3)
Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. When a module is to be refitted, or a new one fitted, the refitting process is in the reverse order of the removal procedure unless stated otherwise.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.9
KH1250 Chapter 6 UPMAST TRANSCEIVER (CAE-A37/A45) 10
The locations of the modules and assemblies in the upmast transceiver are shown on Figure 5.
Access 11
Access to the modules and assemblies is attained by using a 12 mm spanner to remove the six bolts securing the cover in position and then hinging the cover down.
Note: When securing the cover, take care not to damage the RF sealing strip. Electronic Assembly - Removal 12
The electronic assembly is the assembly of the control board and Rx monitor board onto the modulator unit, ie the modulator unit is what is left after the control board and Rx board are removed. The assembly may be removed as one unit, or the boards comprising the assembly may be removed separately. To remove the electronic assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Hinge the cover down.
(3)
Disconnect the external cableforms from plugs PLB and PLK on the Control board.
(4)
Disconnect the internal cableforms from plugs PLA, C, D, E and M on the Control board.
(5)
Disconnect PLB and PLC on the Rx Monitor board, if fitted.
(6)
Release the cableforms from the quick release cable clamps.
(7)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic assembly in position. Slide the electronic assembly forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(8)
Disconnect PLC from the Modulator and note the position of the two magnetron cables which connect the RF Head magnetron to the modulator.
(9)
Remove the safety block and then disconnect the two cables from the modulator.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis off of the hinge pins.
Page 6.10
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 Control Board - Removal 13
The Control Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Control Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Hinge the cover down.
(3)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(4)
Remove the nine pillars securing the Control Board to the electronic assembly.
Rx Monitor Board - Removal 14
The Rx Monitor Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Rx Monitor board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Hinge the cover down.
(3)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(4)
Remove the five pillars securing the Rx Monitor board to the electronic assembly.
Fan Assembly - Removal 15
To remove the Fan Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(2)
Note the position of wiring to the fan and disconnect.
(3)
Loosen the two bolts securing the Fan Assembly to the transceiver casing and remove the Fan Assembly.
Receiver Board - Removal 16
To remove the Receiver Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.11
KH1250 Chapter 6 (2)
Note the position of wiring to the Receiver Assembly and disconnect.
(3)
Remove the three pillars securing the cover to the Receiver Assembly.
(4)
Remove the five pillars securing the Receiver Board to the chassis and remove the board.
Tune PCB - Removal 17
To remove the Tune PCB, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(2)
Remove the three pillars securing the Receiver assembly to the R.F. Head Low Noise Front End (LNFE). Support the Receiver Assembly.
(3)
Disconnect wiring to the Tune PCB.
(4)
Remove the two pillars securing the Tune PCB to the rear of the Receiver Assembly and remove the pcb.
Power Supply Assembly - Removal (See Figure 6) 18
To remove the Power Supply Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove the Electronic Assembly as detailed in paragraph 12.
(2)
Remove the Fan Assembly as detailed in paragraph 15, steps (2) and (3).
(3)
Remove connectors from the Power Supply Assembly.
(4)
Refer to Figure 6 and release the four captive screws securing the Power Supply Assembly to the bottom of the transceiver casing. Remove the Power Supply Assembly.
Heading Line Assembly - Removal 19
To remove the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of the pointer on the heading line scale.
(2)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(3)
Remove the connector from the Heading Line Assembly.
(4)
Remove the cableform from the quick release cable clamp.
Page 6.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 (5)
Release the two shouldered pillars and remove the assembly.
Heading Line Assembly - Refitting 20
To refit the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Butt the assembly up against the top of the casting.
(2)
Slide the assembly towards the disc. when the assembly is in position loosely secure with the shouldered pillars.
(3)
Adjust the position of the assembly so that the pointer is in the same position as prior to removal. Secure the pillars.
(4)
Refer to Heading Line Setting-up, paragraph 25.
Magnetron - Removal (See Figure 7) CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 21
To remove the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Lower the electronic assembly as detailed in paragraph 12, steps (1), (2) and (6).
(2)
Disconnect wiring to the Magnetron.
(3)
Remove the power supply assembly as detailed in paragraph 18.
(4)
Remove the four bolts, (two located at the front, two located at the back), securing the Magnetron to the RF Head assembly.
(5)
Remove the Magnetron and retain the RFI gasket.
Magnetron - Refitting CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 22
To refit the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Fit the RFI gasket between the Magnetron and Circulator.
(2)
Perform the reverse of paragraph 21, ensuring that the earth braid is connected.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.13
KH1250 Chapter 6 RF Head Assembly - Removal (See Figure 7) 23
To remove the RF Head Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove the Electronic Assembly as detailed in paragraph 12.
(2)
Remove the Power Supply Assembly as detailed in paragraph 18.
(3)
Remove the three screws securing the rotating joint to the circulator.
(4)
Loosen the bolts securing the RF Head angle brackets in position.
Note: When removing the RF Head angle brackets support the RF Head. (5)
Remove the angle brackets.
(6)
Lower the RF Head to release the coupling element.
(7)
Swivel the RF Head to remove it from the transceiver casing.
RF Head Assembly - Refitting 24
To refit the RF Head assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Fit the coupling element to the EIA output on the RF Head assembly.
(2)
Adjust the collar on the rotating joint until the bottom of the collar is approximately 2 mm above the bottom of the rotating joint (see Figure 8).
(3)
Fit the coupling element to the rotating joint, ensuring that the coupling element is positioned correctly.
(4)
Fit the three screws and washers into the collar and EIA connector.
(5)
Support the RF Head by loosely securing the bracket assemblies in position.
(6)
Tighten the three rotating joint screws.
(7)
The gap between the collar and EIA connector must be set so that the joint between the two is not at an angle.
(8)
Tighten the bracket assembly screws to secure the RF Head in position.
Heading Line Setting-up 25
Check the heading line alignment after Heading LIne PCB replacement. During the Heading Line alignment procedure, the ship must be stationary on a known fixed heading and must have bearing information from the gyro compass. The ship should be alongside; less accurate results will be obtained if at anchor or at a buoy.
Page 6.14
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 Checking the Alignment 26
With the vessel stationary, proceed as follows: (1)
Switch ON the Display.
(2)
Select HEAD UP mode and a 6 mile range.
(3)
Select a stationary target in visual range and which paints an echo.
(4)
Compare a compass bearing of the target with the bearing of the echo paint on the display. Note the degree and direction of discrepancy.
To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) 27
Any error present in the Heading Line may be adjusted as follows: (1)
Switch the Gearbox Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Switch all supplies to STANDBY.
(3)
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
(4)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(5)
Slide the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(6)
Slacken the two pillars securing the HL PCB assembly.
(7)
Hold the antenna secure.
(8)
Move the pcb assembly the required amount to correct the mis-alignment (graduations on the bracket are at 2 degree intervals).
NOTE: Movement of the PCB in the direction of the aerial rotation will cause the bearing reading of the echo paint to move in a counter clockwise direction and vice versa. (9)
Tighten the two pillars to secure the HL PCB assembly.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis back to its normal position and secure.
(11)
Refit the outer cover. DO NOT TIGHTEN.
(12)
Set the safety switch to ON.
(13)
Set the display to RUN and check the visual and PPI display bearing of the known target.
(14)
To make any further adjustment, repeat step (8) and secure the cover.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.15
KH1250 Chapter 6 DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A7) 28
The locations of the modules and assemblies in the Downmast transceiver are shown on Figure 9.
Access 29
Access to the modules and assemblies is attained by releasing the six captive screws securing the cover in position and then removing the cover.
Note: When securing the cover, take care not to damage the RF sealing strip. Electronic Assembly - Removal 30
The electronic assembly is the assembly of the control board and Rx monitor board onto the modulator unit, ie the modulator unit is what is left after the control board and Rx board are removed. The assembly may be removed as one unit, or the boards comprising the assembly may be removed separately. To remove the electronic assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Disconnect the external cableforms from plugs PLB and PLK on the Control board.
(3)
Disconnect the internal cableforms from plugs PLA, C, D, E and M on the Control board.
(4)
Disconnect PLB and PLC on the Rx Monitor board, if fitted.
(5)
Release the cableforms from the quick release cable clamps.
(6)
Disconnect PLC from the Modulator and note the position of the two magnetron cables which connect the RF Head magnetron to the modulator.
(7)
Remove the safety block and then disconnect the two cables from the modulator.
(8)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic assembly in position and remove the assembly.
Page 6.16
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 Control Board - Removal 31
The Control Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Control Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(3)
Remove the nine pillars securing the Control Board to the electronic assembly and remove the board.
Rx Monitor Board - Removal 32
The Rx Monitor Board may be removed with the electronic assembly in situ. To remove the Rx Monitor board, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2)
Note which cableform is connected to which socket on the board and disconnect the cableforms.
(3)
Remove the five pillars securing the Rx Monitor board to the electronic assembly and remove the board.
Receiver Board - Removal 33
To remove the Receiver Board, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of wiring to the Receiver Assembly and disconnect.
(2)
Remove the three pillars securing the cover to the Receiver Assembly.
(3)
Remove the five pillars securing the Receiver Board to the chassis and remove the board.
Tune PCB - Removal 34
To remove the Tune PCB, proceed as follows: (1)
Disconnect wiring to the Tune PCB.
(2)
Remove the two pillars securing the Tune PCB to the rear of the Receiver Assembly and remove the pcb.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.17
KH1250 Chapter 6 Power Supply Assembly - Removal (See Figure 6) 35
To remove the Power Supply Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove connectors from the Power Supply Assembly.
(2)
Refer to Figure 9 and release the four captive screws securing the Power Supply Assembly to the transceiver casing. Remove the Power Supply Assembly.
Magnetron - Removal (See Figure 7) CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 36
To remove the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Disconnect wiring to the Magnetron.
(2)
Remove the six bolts, (three located at the front, three located at the back), securing the Magnetron to the RF Head assembly.
(3)
Remove the Magnetron and retain the RFI gasket.
Magnetron - Refitting CAUTION Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron. 37
To refit the Magnetron, proceed as follows: (1)
Fit the RFI gasket between the Magnetron and Circulator.
(2)
Perform the reverse of paragraph 36, ensuring that the earth braid is connected.
Fan Assembly - Removal 38
To remove the Fan Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of wiring to the fan and disconnect.
(2)
Loosen the four bolts securing the Fan Assembly to the RF Head and remove the Fan Assembly.
Page 6.18
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 RF Head Assembly - Removal (See Figure 7) 39
To remove the RF Head Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Remove the three screws securing the semi-rigid co-ax cable to the RF outlet.
(2)
Remove the bolts securing the sealing flange to the top of the case.
(3)
Remove the bolts securing the circulator to the top of the case.
(4)
Remove the bolts securing the RF Head angle brackets to the back of the case.
Note: When removing the RF Head angle brackets support the RF Head. (5)
Lift the semi-rigid co-ax and/or lower the RF Head to release the coupling element.
(6)
Remove the RF Head from the transceiver.
RF Head Assembly - Refitting 40
To refit the RF Head assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Loosely secure the RF Head assembly in position on its mounting brackets.
(2)
Fit the bolts to secure the circulator to the top of the case and tighten.
(3)
Tighten the bracket securing bolts.
(4)
Refit the top seal.
(5)
Refit the semi-rigid co-ax, ensuring that the joint is touching all the way round and is not at an angle.
(6)
Ensure that the gap between the flanges is not at an angle.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.19
KH1250 Chapter 6 TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A41 or CAE-A42) 41
Access to the Heading Line PCB is attained by using a 12 mm spanner to remove the six bolts securing the cover in position and then hinging the cover down.
Heading Line Assembly - Removal 42
To remove the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Note the position of the pointer on the heading line scale
(2)
Remove the connector from the Heading LIne Assembly.
(3)
Remove the cableform from the quick release cable clamp.
(4)
Release the two shouldered pillars and remove the assembly.
Heading Line Assembly - Refitting 43
To refit the Heading Line Assembly, proceed as follows: (1)
Butt the assembly up against the top of the casting.
(2)
Slide the assembly towards the disc. when the assembly is in position loosely secure with the shouldered pillars.
(3)
Adjust the position of the assembly so that the pointer is in the same position as prior to removal. Secure the pillars.
(4)
Refer to Heading Line Setting-up, paragraph 44.
Heading Line Setting-up 44
Check the heading line alignment after Heading LIne PCB replacement. During the Heading Line alignment procedure, the ship must be stationary on a known fixed heading and must have bearing information from the gyro compass. The ship should be alongside; less accurate results will be obtained if at anchor or at a buoy. Checking the Alignment 45
With the vessel stationary, or at anchor, proceed as follows: (1)
Switch ON the Display.
(2)
Select HEAD UP mode and a 6 mile range.
(3)
Select a stationary target which can be seen by the eye and which paints an echo on the screen.
(4)
Take a compass bearing of the target, and compare this with the bearing of the echo paint on the display. Note the degree and direction of discrepancy.
Page 6.20
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6 To Correct an Error (Fine Adjustment) 46
Any error present in the Heading Line may be adjusted as follows: (1)
Switch the Gearbox Safety Switch to OFF.
(2)
Switch all supplies to STANDBY.
(3)
Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing the rear cover to the Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism and remove the cover.
(4)
Release the six captive screws securing the electronic chassis in position.
(5)
Move the electronic chassis forward and lower onto the hinge pins.
(6)
Slacken the two pillars securing the HL PCB assembly.
(7)
Hold the antenna secure.
(8)
Move the pcb assembly the required amount to correct the mis-alignment. (Graduations on the bracket are at 2 degree intervals).
Note: Movement of the PCB in the direction of the aerial rotation will cause the bearing reading of the echo paint to move in a counter clockwise direction and visa versa. (9)
Tighten the two pillars to secure the HL PCB assembly.
(10)
Slide the electronic chassis back to its normal position and secure with the six captive screws
(11)
Refit the outer cover. DO NOT TIGHTEN.
(12)
Set the safety switch to ON.
(13)
Set the display to RUN and check the visual and PPI display bearing of the known target.
(14)
To make any further adjustment, repeat step (8)
(15)
Secure the rear cover.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.21
KH1250 Chapter 6
HEADING LINE PCB MODULATOR ASSEMBLY ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY (HINGED DOWN)
RECEIVER BOARD
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
RF HEAD ASSEMBLY
ROTATING JOINT
CONTROL BOARD
CD-0282
Figure 5 - Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations
Page 6.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
FOUR CAPTIVE SCREWS
CD-0280
Figure 6 - Power Supply Assembly
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.23
KH1250 Chapter 6
CIRCULATOR/MAGNETRON SUPPORT BRACKET
MAGNETRON
MAGNETRON EARTH BRAID CABLE
RECEIVER BOARD
TUNE SUPPLY PCB
RECEIVER/LNFE SUPPORT BRACKET LOW NOISE FRONT END
OPTIONAL NOISE SOURCE
CD-0281
Figure 7 - RF Head Assembly Page 6.24
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 6
BOTTOM OF ROTATING JOINT
ROTATE UNTIL 2mm - 5mm OF THREAD IS PROTRUDING
COUPLING ELEMENT
CD-0298
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 6.25
KH1250 Chapter 6
RF HEAD ASSEMBLY
1
3
6SKB
DANGER High Voltage
CONTROL BOARD
RECEIVER BOARD
16kV 8PLA
MODULATOR ASSEMBLY
TUNE SUPPLY PCB
3PLA
FAN ASSEMBLY
3PLB 3SKF 3PLC
3PLM
RECEIVER MONITOR PCB
8PLB
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
DANGER
3SKD
CD-0297
Figure 9 - Downmast Transceiver: Module Locations
Page 6.26
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 7
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATION CONTENTS
Para 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Transmitter Frequency Magnetron Rating Magnetron Life Pulse Length and PRF Sync Output Receiver Type I.F. Video Output System Overall Noise Figure Operating Temperature Ranges Turning Mechanism, Upmast Transceiver Soft Start Unit, Downmast Transceiver
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 7.1
KH1250 Chapter 7
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 7.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 7
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1
The technical specifications for the MkVI Transceiver are as follows:
Transmitter: Frequency:
3050 ±10MHz
Magnetron Rating:
30kW nominal
Magnetron Life:
10,000 Hours typical
Pulse length and P.R.F: Short(S)
nominal 0.055m s 3000pps ±100 or 1500pps ±40
Medium(M)
nominal 0.25m s 750pps ±20 or 1500pps ±40
Long(L)
nominal 0.95m s 750pps ±20
Long-Low PRF(VL)
nominal 0.95m s 375pps ±10
Sync. Output:
NOTE
1 x 75 Ohm output (Upmast) 2 x 75 Ohm outputs (Downmast) not less than +12V amplitude
(1) The PRF oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency range of 2400-3400 Hz (nominal 3000 Hz). (2) Short pulse can be set to 3000 or 1500 Hz base. (3) Medium pulse can be set to 1500 or 750 Hz base. (4) Pulse to pulse jitter can be selected and set to ±15ms from nominal.
Receiver specifications are detailed overleaf.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 7.3
KH1250 Chapter 7 Receiver: Type
Logarithmic Receiver
I.F.
60MHz
Video Output
1 x 75W (Upmast) 2 x 75W( Downmast) +5.5 V to 6 V peak signal
System Overall Noise Figure
Nominal 4.5dB
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES Turning Mechanism, Upmast Transceiver Ambient Range 95% Humidity
-25° C to +70°C +40°C
Soft Start Unit, Downmast Transceiver Ambient Range 95% Humidity
Page 7.4
-15°C to +55°C +40°C
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CHAPTER 8 PARTS LIST CONTENTS Paragraph 1
Introduction
TABLES Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Page MkVI Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190/*) Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41(40RPM), CAE-A42 (25RPM) Antenna (CAE-A36 (3.9m)), (CAE-A39 (2.8m High Speed)) Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Control PCB (CTX-A246) Modulator Assembly (CTX-A248) Modulator PCB (CTX-A247) Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) MKIV Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250) HL PCB (CAE-A180) Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*) Soft Start Unit 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159)
8.5 8.6 8.6 8.9 8.11 8.13 8.23 8.25 8.29 8.33 8.38 8.41 8.43 8.45
ILLUSTRATIONS Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Page MkVI Gearbox Assembly Turning Mechanism/Upmast Transceiver Assembly Downmast Transceiver Assembly Control PCB (CTX-A246): Layout Modulator Assembly (CTX-248): Layout Modulator (CTX-A247): Layout Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252): Layout Power Supply PCB (CTX-A238): Layout Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250): Layout HL PCB (CAE-A180): Layout Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*): Layout 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159): Layout
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
8.4 8.8 8.10 8.12 8.22 8.24 8.28 8.32 8.38 8.40 8.42 8.44
Page 8.1
KH1250 Chapter 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 8.2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CHAPTER 8 PARTS LIST INTRODUCTION 1
This Chapter provides Parts Lists and drawings, showing layout and location information, to support the two versions of the MkVI Transceiver.
2
The Parts Lists are presented in tabular form and provide a description and Kelvin Hughes part number for each item labelled on the associated drawing. Items are cross referenced to the parts list by a number within a circle, or by a circuit reference.
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.3
KH1250 Chapter 8
15 16 17 11
2
34
8
27
32
6
30 9 37 7
35 25
29 10
24 36 33
39 40
18
5 13 14 1 20
19
23
26 41 42 44 3
22
21
43
12
28 38
2
4 45
31
CD-0656
Figure 1
Page 8.4
Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190-*): Layout Diagram
Figure 1
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 Table 1: MkVI Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190/*) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
1
OPTO UNIT ASSY
CAE-A188
2
OPTO DISC
CAE-1027
3
SCREENING DISC (A225 GLAND)
CAE-1317
4
SCREENING DISC (A216 GLAND)
CAE-1319
5
LABEL 440V
CAE-1324
6
GEARWHEEL & PINION 2ND STAGE (HELICAL)
CAE-1355
7
GEARWHEEL 3RD STAGE (HELICAL)
CAE-1356
8
TOP PLATE
CAE-1357
9
BEARING SPACER (UPPER)
CAE-1359
10
BEARING CLAMP (LOWER)
CAE-1402
11
BEARING CLAMP (TOP)
CAE-1361
12
OPTO DISC HOLDER
CAE-1363
13
BOLT SPECIAL (COVER PLATE)
CAE-1366
14
WASHER M8 RETAINING (FIBRE)
CAE-1367
15
SHIM (0.05)
CAE-1368/2
16
SHIM (0.13)
CAE-1368/3
17
SHIM (0.25)
CAE-1368/4
18
TOP COVER
CAE-1370
19
MOTOR COVER
CAE-1371
20
OPTO POINTER
CAE-1395
21
BEARING CLAMP (LOWER
CAE-1558
22
CABLE BLANK (M16)
CAE-1510
23
PILLAR OPTO BRACKET
CAE-1511
24
PINION & SHAFT
CAE-1548
25
GEARWHEEL & PINION 1ST STAGE (HELICAL)
CAE-1359
26
MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE
CAE-1550
27
SEALING RING
TCR-1205
28
CIRCLIP TYPE 1300-55-CS-ZD ANDERSON
35-581-012
29
NILOS RING TYPE 7213AVH RING BELT LTD
35-613-004
30
NILOS RING TYPE 7217AVH RING BELT LTD
35-613-005
31
SEAL TYPE A65 x 80 x 8 NBR-02 BARNWELL
35-781-741
32
BEARING ANGULAR CONTACT 85 x 150 x 28 TYPE 7217B TVP FAG
45-173-1552
33
BEARING ANGULAR CONTACT 65 x 120 x 23 TYPE 7213B TVB FAG
45-173-1553
34
BEARING 30 x 62 x 16 TYPE 6206-2RSR FAG
45-173-1554
35
BEARING 12 x 28 x 8 TYPE 6001-2RSR FAG
45-173-1557
36
BEARING 20 x 47 x 14 TYPE 6204-2RSR FAG
45-173-1558
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.5
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 1: MkVI Gearbox Assembly (CAE-A190/*) Parts List (continued) ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
37
BEARING 25 x 52 x 15 TYPE 6205-2RSR FAG
45-173-1555
38
BEARING 30 x 55 x 13 TYPE 6006-2RSR FAG
45-173-1556
39
LOVEJOY JAW COUPLING No.U4-26-480 SIMPLATROLL LTD
ZM1757
40
COUPLING SPIDER (STANDARD) No.U4-26-736 SIMPLATROLL LTD
45-176-003
41
CAE-A190 (25 rpm) MOTOR 3PH 0.37kW 4 POLE 220/440V 50 Hz GORTON ENG
45-682-2007
42
CAE-A190/2 (40 rpm) MOTOR 3PH 0.37kW 2 POLE 220/440V 50 Hz GORTON ENG
45-682-2008
43
TUBE CARBON LOADED 6.75 O/D x 1 mm WALL RFI SHIELDING LTD
5445-928
44
CABLE GLAND 85-267-885 BRIGHT NICKEL PLATE TO BS1224 LAPP CABLE
ZM-1672
45
CABLE GLAND 85-267-887 BRIGHT NICKEL PLATE TO BS1224 LAPP CABLE
ZM-1674
TABLE 2: Turning Mechanism CAE-A41 (40 RPM), CAE-A42 (25 RPM) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
ASSY OF ROTATING JOINT (Mk 6)
CAE-A181
ASSY OF COAX TERMINALS BRACKET
CAE-A205
ASSY OF FITTING KIT FOR S BAND Mk 6
CAE-A220
ASSY OF CABLEFORM (SW1)
CAE-A227
SHIM WASHER
CAE-A1189
SEAL PLATE (Mk 6)
CAE-A1437
SEAL (Mk 6)
CAE-A1438
ASSY OF Mk 6 GEARBOX (25 RPM)
CAE-A190
FITTING KIT
CAE-A223
SPARES KIT
KSK-A2/23
ASSY OF Mk 6 GEARBOX (40 RPM)
CAE-A190/2
FITTING KIT
CAE-A222
SPARES KIT
KSK-A2/22
TABLE 3: Antenna (CAE-A36 (3.9m)), (CAE-A39 (2.8m High Speed)) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
Page 8.6
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
SPARES KIT 3.9m (CAE-A36)
KSK-A1/40
SPARES KIT 2.8m (CAE-A39)
KSK-A1/41
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION SEMI-RIGID RF CO-AXIAL CABLE S-BAND RF CABLE FITTING KIT
KELVIN HUGHES Part No. CAE-A43
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.7
KH1250 Chapter 8
1
8
2
5 12
11
10
6
3
7
4
9
CD-1418
Figure 2
Page 8.8
Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45): Layout Diagram
Figure 2
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 4: Upmast Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45) Parts List ITEM NUMBER 1
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
ASSY OF ROTATING JOINT
CAE-A181
COVER ROTATING JOINT
CAE-1430
2
ASSY OF MK VI GEARBOX
CAE-A190 or A190/2
3
ASSY OF PSU
CAE-A202
4
ASSY OF (UPMAST) RF HEAD ‘S’ BAND
CAE-A203
ASSY OF L.N.F.E. UNIT
CAE-A217
ASSY OF TUNE SUPPLY PCB
CTX-A250
ASSY OF RECEIVER UNIT
CTX-A296
ASSY OF EARTH BRAID MAGNETRON
CTX-A308
ASSY OF MAGNETRON
CTX-A309
ASSY OF OPTO/CONTROL BD C/FORM
CAE-A204
ASSY OF CO-AX TERMINAL BRACKET
CAE-A205
ASSY OF PSU/MODULATOR C/FORM
CAE-A207
ASSY OF CONT/RECEIVER C/FORM
CAE-A208
ASSY OF R.X. MON. BD TO NOISE DIODE C/FORM
CAE-A213
FITTING KIT FOR S-BAND MK VI
CAE-A220
ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-A294
5
6
ASSY OF CONTROL PCB
CTX-A246
ASSY OF (CHASSIS) MK6 MODULATOR 25kW
CTX-A248
ASSY OF CONTROL BD/RX MON. C/FORM
CTX-A300
TUNE VOLT BD TO LNFE C/FORM
CTX-A303
ASSY OF FAN
CTX-A312
SHIM WASHER
CAE-1189
BRACKET FAN
CAE-1421
8
SHROUD ROTATING JOINT
CAE-1431
9
BUNG
CAE-1436
LABEL UNIT
CAE-1493
10
BRACKET ELECTRONICS PANEL (RIGHT)
CAE-1513
11
BRACKET ELECTRONICS PANEL (LEFT)
CAE-1514
12
HOOK-ELECTRONICS UNIT SUPPORT
CTX-1289
SPARES KIT A COASTAL
KSK-A1/18
SPARES KIT B DEEPSEA
KSK-A2/20
7
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.9
KH1250 Chapter 8
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
17 11
3
4 10
5
6
8
7
9 18
19
20
22
21
CD-0267
Figure 3
Page 8.10
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7): Layout Diagram
Figure 3
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 5: Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A7) Parts List ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
1
CLIP WIRE HARNESS PT.No.WHC-375-01 (9.5 DIA) RICHCO
35-766-512
2
ASSY OF RF HEAD ‘S’ BAND DOWN MAST
CTX-A290
ASSY OF L.N.F.E. UNIT
CAE-A217
ASSY OF TUNE SUPPLY PCB
CTX-A250
ASSY OF RECEIVER UNIT
CTX-A296
ASSY OF EARTH BRAID MAGNETRON
CTX-A308
ASSY OF MAGNETRON
CTX-A309
3
MOUNTING BAR R.H.
CTX-1302
4
SEAL PLATE-LOWER
CTX-1263
4
SEAL PLATE UPPER
CTX-1264
5
MOUNTING BAR L.H.
CTX-1303
6
ASSY OF ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-A294
ASSY OF CONTROL PCB
CTX-A246
ASSY OF (CHASSIS) MK6 MODULATOR 25kW
CTX-A248
7
ASSY OF PSU/CONTROL BOARD CABLEFORM
CTX-A299
8
CLIP WIRE HARNESS PT.No.WHC-500-01 DIA) RICHCO
9
ASSY OF P.S.U.
CAE-A202
10
ASSY OF PSU/MODULATOR BD. CABLEFORM
CTX-A301
11
CLAMP CABLE
CTX-1305
12
CLIP WIRE HARNESS PT.No.WHC-250-01 (6.5 DIA) RICHCO
35-766-511
13
ASSY OF CONTROL BD./RECEIVER CABLEFORM
CTX-A302
14
ASSY OF CONTROL BD./RX.MONITOR BD. CABLEFORM
CTX-A300
15
BRACKET ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-1290
16
TRANSMITTER CASE
CTX-1252
17
SOCKET CO-AX PANEL MTG TYPE L604/S/Ni BELLING LEE
40-741-139-01
18
TRANSMITTER COVER
CTX-1262
19
SUPPORT HOOK ELECTRONICS UNIT
CTX-1289
20
BLOCK THREADED
CTX-1304
21
SCREW HEX HEAD STEEL M8 x 35LG ZINC PLATE & PASS
20-251-1223-27
22
SEAL CIRCULATOR
CTX-1265
ASSY OF FITTING KIT FOR MK6 DOWNMAST ‘S’ TRANSCEIVER
CTX-A313
SPARES KIT ‘A’ COASTAL
KSK-1A/39
SPARES KIT ‘B’ DEEPSEA
KSK-2A/21
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
(12.7
35-766-513
Page 8.11
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1434
Figure 4 - Control PCB (CTX-A246) Layout Page 8.12
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019VVVV
R2
NOT USED
R3
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R4
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R5
100R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-10M
R6
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47M
R7
12K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-12M
R8
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R9
RESISTOR 120R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-12M
R10
RESISTOR 390R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-39M
R11
RESISTOR 150R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-15M
R12
RESISTOR 680R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-68M
R13
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R14
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R15
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R16
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R17
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47M
R18
15K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-15M
R19
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R20
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R21
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R22
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R23
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R24
RESISTOR 220R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-22M
R25
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R26
RESISTOR 75R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-75M
R27
RESISTOR 680R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-68M
R28
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R29
RESISTOR 2K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-27M
R30
470K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-47M
R31
8K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-82M
R32
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R33
680 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-68M
R34
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R35
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R36
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R37
470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-47M
R38
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R39
9K1 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-91M
R40
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
40-518-163-47M
Page 8.13
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R41
27R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-380-27M
R42
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R43
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R44
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R45
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R46
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R47
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R48
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R49
RESISTOR 68R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-68M
R50
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R51
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R52
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R53
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R54
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R55
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R56
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R57
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R58
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R59
47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R60
RESISTOR 47R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-47M
R61
1M
40-518-165-10M
R62
RESISTOR 47R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-47M
R63
470K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-47M
R64
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R65
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R66
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R67
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R68
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R69
18K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-18M
R70
20K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-20M
R71
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R72
18K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-18M
R73
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R74
RESISTOR 5K6 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-56M
R75
68K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-68M
R76
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R77
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R78
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R79
RESISTOR 1K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-12M
R80
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R81
220K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-22M
Page 8.14
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R82
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R83
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R84
1M
40-518-165-10M
R85
6K8 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
R86
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R87
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47M
R88
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R89
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R90
NOT USED
R91
RESISTOR 330R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-33M
R92
RESISTOR 75R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-75M
R93
NOT USED
R94
NOT USED
R95
NOT USED
R96
NOT USED
R97
NOT USED
R98
NOT USED
R99
NOT USED
R100
NOT USED
R101
NOT USED
R102
NOT USED
R103
NOT USED
R104
NOT USED
R105
NOT USED
R106
NOT USED
R107
NOT USED
R108
NOT USED
R109
NOT USED
R110
NOT USED
R111
NOT USED
R112
NOT USED
R113
NOT USED
R114
NOT USED
R115
NOT USED
R116
NOT USED
R117
NOT USED
R118
NOT USED
R119
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R120
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R121
22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R122
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
Page 8.15
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R123
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R124
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R125
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R126
100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
R127
10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R128
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCESS 40 101-019
40-518-161-47
RV1
50K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-50
RV2
20K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-20
RV3
20K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-20
RV4
20K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1583-20
C1
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C2
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C3
6n8F +/-5% 63V TYPE FKP-2
45-565-4862-68
C4
100pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-10
C5
2u2F +/-20% TYPE TAG
40-566-6485-22M
C6
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C7
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C8
470pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-47
C9
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C10
100uF +/-20% 50V TYPE 037-51101
C11
470nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP-47ONK
45-565-4854-47
C12
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C13
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C14
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C15
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C16
1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK
45-565-4842-10
C17
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C18
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C19
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C20
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C21
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C22
10uF +/-20%50V TYPE RSH
45-566-9586-10
C23
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C24
470nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP-47ONK
45-565-4854-47
C25
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C26
1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK
45-565-4842-10
C27
680pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-68
C28
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C29
1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK
45-565-4842-10
Page 8.16
Issue 4, Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
C30
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C31
2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K
45-565-4842-22
C32
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C33
10uF +/-20% 25V TYPE TAG
40-566-5186-10M
C34
1uF +/-20% TYPE TAG 1M35
40-566-6485-10M
C35
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C36
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C37
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C38
1uF +/-20% TYPE TAG 1M35
40-566-6485-10M
C39
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C40
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C41
220nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP2-220NK
45-565-4854-22
C42
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C43
100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C44
22uF +/-20%25V TYPE TAG22M25
45-566-5186-22M
C45
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C46
330pF +/-10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-33
C47
NOT USED
C48
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C49
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C50
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C51
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C52
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C53
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C54
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C55
CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA
45-564-5724-10
C56
NOT USED
C57
NOT USED
C58
NOT USED
C59
NOT USED
C60
NOT USED
C61
NOT USED
C62
NOT USED
C63
NOT USED
C64
NOT USED
C65
NOT USED
C66
NOT USED
C67
NOT USED
C68
NOT USED
C69
NOT USED
C70
NOT USED
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.17
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
C71
470nF +/-10% 250V
45-565-5154-47
C72
220nF +/-10% 250 V TYPE MKS4
45-565-5154-22
C73
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C74
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
C75
47pF TYPE WDC1J470JPA
45-564-5724-10
C76
100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9618-10
C77
10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK
45-565-4843-10
L1
INDUCTOR 100m H 0.91A R622LY-10K TOKO
45-676-3777-10
L2
INDUCTOR 100m H 0.91A R622LY-10K TOKO
45-676-3777-10
L3
INDUCTOR 100m H 0.91A R622LY-10K TOKO
45-676-3777-10
D1
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D2
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D3
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D4
L.E.D. AXIAL RED TYPE MV55A
45-628-917
D5
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 18V 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
40-666-3517-01M
D6
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D7
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D8
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D9
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D10
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D11
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D12
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D13
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D14
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D15
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D16
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D17
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D18
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D19
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D20
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D21
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D22
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D23
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D24
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D25
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D26
L.E.D. AXIAL RED TYPE MV55A
45-628-917
D27
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D28
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
Page 8.18
Issue 4. Amdt 2 (Mar 01)
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
D29
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
D30
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D31
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D32
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D33
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D34
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D35
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 4V7 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
40-666-3157-01M
D36
L.E.D. AXIAL GREEN TYPE MV52
45-628-918
D37
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D38
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D39
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D40
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D41
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D42
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D43
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D44
NOT USED
D45
NOT USED
D46
NOT USED
D47
NOT USED
D48
NOT USED
D49
NOT USED
D50
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
D51
NOT USED
D52
NOT USED
D53
NOT USED
D54
NOT USED
D55
NOT USED
D56
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D57
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D58
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D59
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE IN916
40-666-2059M
D60
DIODE VOLTAGE REGUALTOR 13V 5% TYPE BZX79-C13
45-666-3517-13
S1
SWITCH SLIDE SPDT TYPE 25436 NAH P.C. MOUNTING
40-612-219
IC1
NOT USED
IC2
I/C VOLTAGE REGULATOR ADJUSTABLE 1.5A TYPE LM317T
45-652-4071
IC3
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM311N
45-652-3009-07
IC4
I/C CMOS HEX INVERTING BUFFER TYPE CD 4049B
45-654-6108
IC5
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC6
I/C HEX SCHMITT TRIGGER CMOS TYPE CD40106BCN
45-654-6067-12
Issue 4, Amdt. 2 (Mar 01)
40-666-2059M
40-666-2059M
Page 8.19
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
IC7
I/C QUAD 2 I/P AND GATE CMOS TYPE CD4081BE
45-654-6068-12
IC8
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P EXCLUSIVE OR GATE TYPE CD4070BE
45-654-6071-12
IC9
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT OR GATE TYPE CD4071BE
45-654-6084-12
IC10
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P NAND GATE TYPE CD4011BE
45-654-6074-12
IC11
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P NOR GATE TYPE CD4001BE
IC12
I/C CMOS QUAD 2 I/P EXCLUSIVE OR GATE TYPE CD4070BE
45-654-6071-12
IC13
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC14
I/C CMOS DUAL ‘D’ TYPE FLIP FLOP TYPE CD4013B
45-654-6111
IC15
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC16
I/C CMOS HEX D TYPE FLIP FLOP TYPECD40174BE
IC17
I/C CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDE BY N 4 BIT BIN. DOWN COUNTER CD4526BE
IC18
I/C QUAD 2 I/P AND GATE CMOS TYPE CD4081BE
45-654-6068-12
IC19
I/C CMOS HEX INVERTING BUFFER TYPE CD 4049B
45-654-6108
IC20
I/C MONO MULTIVIBRATOR TYPE MC14538BPC
45-654-6095-16
IC21
I/C MONO MULTIVIBRATOR TYPE MC14538BPC
45-654-6095-16
IC22
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC23
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC24
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555
45-652-6004
IC25
I/C CMOS QUAD AND-OR SELECT TYPE CD4019BE
IC26
I/C CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDE BY N 4 BIT BIN. DOWN COUNTER CD4526BE
IC27
I/C CMOS PROGRAMMABLE TIMER TYPE CD4541BE
IC28
I/C HEX SCHMITT TRIGGER CMOS TYPE CD40106BCN
IC29
NOT USED
IC30
NOT USED
IC31
I/C DUAL VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM393
TR1
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
TR2
TRANSISTOR NPD DARLINGTON TYPE BD675
TR3
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
TR4
TRANSISTOR BC638 PNP
TR5
TRANSISTOR BC557B PNP
TR6
TRANSISTOR BC637 NPN
TR7
TRANSISTOR BC637 NPN
TR8
TRANSISTOR BC638 PNP
TR9
TRANSISTOR BC557B PNP
TR10
TRANSISTOR BC637 NPN
TR11
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
TR12
TRANSISTOR BC557B PNP
TR13
TRANSISTOR BC547B NPN
Page 8.20
45-654-6107
45-654-6107
45-654-6067-12
45-652-3018
45-666-5298
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 6: Control PCB (CTX-A246) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
TR14 - TR23
NOT USED
TR24
TRANSISTOR TYPE MPSA92
TR25
TRANSISTOR BC638 PNP
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL10-CL-V NO.123696 (10WAY)
45-718-8051
PLB
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL14-CL-V NO. 123333736 (14WAY)
45-718-5139
PLC
CONNECTOR STRIP 20 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B20P-SHF-1AA
45-743-342
PLD
CONNECTOR STRIP 16 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-16P-SHF-1AA
45-743-2322
PLE
CONNECTOR STRIP 2 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-2P-SHF-1AA
45-741-5026
PLF
CONNECTOR STRIP 12 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-12P-SHF-1AA
45-743-1617
PLG
CONNECTOR STRIP 8 WAY TYPE NH PT NO. B-8P-SHF-1AA
45-742-6013
PLH
CONNECTOR STRIP 6 WAY TYPA NH PT NO. B-6P-SHF-1AA
45-742-3155
PLJ
CONNECTOR STRIP 3 WAY TYPE 5414 (TRIFUCON) PT NO. 39-26-3030
45-741-6152
PLK
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL5-CL-V NO. 123646 (5WAY)
45-741-5140
PLM
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL6-CL-V NO. 123656 (6WAY)
45-741-5145
LK1,LK2,LK3,LK4, LK5, LK6, LK7, LK8,LK9,LK10, LK11,LK12
PIN HEADER SINGLE ROW (20 PIN) TYPE M20-999-2006
45-743-3202
LK1-10
LINK TYPE M7566-06
45-741-5032
TP1-16,18,20 and TP25 to TP27
TERMINAL TEST RAISED LOOP TYPE 200-207 RED
45-718-5207
FS1
MULTI-FUSE STANDARD TYPE MFR030 (0.3 A 60 V)
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.21
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1432
Figure 5 - Modulator Assembly (CTX-A248) Layout Page 8.22
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 7: Modulator Assembly (CTX-A248) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
ASSY OF MK6 MODULATOR PCB (25KW)
CTX-A247
R12
RESISTOR 15OR 5% W/W STYLE D BS91140-F006
40-511-1231-15
R13
RESISTOR 2R2 5% W/W STYLE D BS91140-F006
40-511-1239-22M
CSR2
THYRISTOR TYPE XT2116-1201-3
45-666-877
SL1
SATURABLE REACTOR
XT3812
C10
CAPACITOR 0.01uF +/-20% 1000V DC WKG POLYPROPYLENE
45-565-4813-10
D9
DIODE FAST RECOVERY 1200V TYPE MF12-1200
45-666-2454
D10
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCH FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E
45-666-2409-05
D11
RECTIFIER 1000V FAST RECOVERY INSULATED TAB TYPE BYT30PI-1000
D12
RECTIFIER 1000V FAST RECOVERY INSULATED TAB TYPE BYT30PI-1000
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.23
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1433
Figure 6 - Modulator (CTX-A247) Layout Page 8.24
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 8: Modulator PCB (CTX-A247) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
OVERSWING NETWORK
CTX-A109
R1
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R2
RESISTOR 47R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-47M
R3
RESISTOR 4R7 1% TYPE MRS25
45-528-4169-47
R4
RESISTOR OR68 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
45-528-324-04
R5
RESISTOR OR68 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
45-528-324-04
R6
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE DX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-224-15
R7
RESISTOR 10R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-10M
R8
RESISTOR 100R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-10M
R9
RESISTOR 100R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-10M
R10
RESISTOR 47R 5% W/W STYLE KB BSCECC 40 201-002
40-513-330-47M
R11
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R14
RESISTOR 270K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-27
R15
RESISTOR 330K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-33M
R16
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-15M
R17
RESISTOR 330K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-33M
C1
CAPACITOR 0.022uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C2
CAPACITOR 0.033uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C3
CAPACITOR 0.033uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C4
CAPACITOR 0.047uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1625
C5
CAPACITOR 0.082uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1631
C6
CAPACITOR 0.082uF 5% 1500V TYPE PS1631
C7
CAPACITOR 33nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP-33NK
C8
CAPACITOR 0.47uF 100V 10% TYPE MKS-10
C9
CAPACITOR 0.47uF 100V 10% TYPE MKS-10
L1
COIL (2 TURNS)
45-676-213
L2
COIL (3 TURNS)
45-676-214
L3
COIL-pFN
45-676-207
L4
CHOKE 38uH 1.5A D.C
45-676-371
L5
CHOKE 25mH 1.5A D.C
45-676-212
T1
TOROID P.F.N. ASSY
TH5542-A1
T2
TRANSFORMER-SCR TRIGGER
TH5438
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
45-565-4843-33
Page 8.25
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 8: Modulator PCB (CTX-A247) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
T3
TRANSFORMER PULSE HIGH FREQUENCY TYPE PT8 (FARNELL No.148-919)
T4
ASSY OF PULSE TRANSFORMER
CTX-A104
SL2A1
FERRITE RING CORE TYPE MM625/T3
35-861-010
SL2A2
FERRITE RING CORE TYPE MM625/T3
35-861-010
D1
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D2
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D3
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D4
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D5
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D6
DIODE RECTIFIER TYPE BYV27-100
45-666-2461
D7
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E
45-666-2409-05
D8
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D9-D12
NOT USED
D13
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 150V NOM STYLE BZT03-C150
45-666-3516-14
CSR1
SCR TYPE FO 810 NH
45-666-872
RLA
RELAY MINIATURE P.C. 24V COIL 1 POLE C/O TYPE RP420-024 or TYPE 26-750-232-740
45-617-113 (PED only)
RLB
RELAY MINIATURE P.C. 24V COIL 1 POLE C/O TYPE RP420-024 or TYPE 26-750-232-740
45-617-113 (PED only)
RLC
RELAY MINIATURE P.C. 24V COIL 1 POLE C/O TYPE RP420-024 or TYPE 26-750-232-740
45-617-113 (PED only)
S1
SWITCH SLIDE SPDT TYPE 25436 NAH P.C. MOUNTING
40-612-219
PLA
CONNECTOR STRIP 12WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-12P-SHF-1AA
45-743-1617
PLB
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL4-CL-V No.123636 (4WAY)
45-741-8046
PLC
CONNECTOR STRIP 2WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-2P-SHF-1AA
45-741-5026
PLD
CONNECTOR STRIP 8WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-8P-SHF-1AA
45-742-6013
TP1,TP2,TP3,TP4, TP5, TP6,TP7,TP8
TEST TERMINALTYPE 200-207 (RAISED LOOP)
45-718-5207
Page 8.26
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF. TP9,TP10
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
PCB TAB CONNECTOR TYPE P114
35-867-6304
WASHER
CDY-1074A
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.27
KH1250 Chapter 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 8.28
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1435
Figure 7 - Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.29
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 9: Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Parts List (continued) TABLE 9: Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R2
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R3
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R4
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R5
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-47M
R6
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R7
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R8
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R9
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R10
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R11
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R12
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R13
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R14
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R15
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R16
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R17
RESISTOR 15K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-15M
R18
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R19
NOT USED
R20
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R21
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R22
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R23
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R24
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R25
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R26
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R27
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R28
RESISTOR 1M 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-165-10M
R29
RESISTOR 75R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-75M
R30
RESISTOR 15K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-15M
R31
RESISTOR 56K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-56M
R32
RESISTOR 1K
2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R33
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R34
RESISTOR 22R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-22M
Page 8.30
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 9: Rx Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R35
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R36
RESISTOR 100K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-10M
RV1
POTENTIOMETER 5K +/-10% TYPE 3299W
45-546-1582-50
C1
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9617-10
C2
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C3
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C4
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C5
CAPACITOR 4n7F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-4N7K
45-565-4842-47
C6
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C7
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C8
CAPACITOR 1nF+/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 1NK
45-565-4842-10
C9
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C10
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C11
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH
45-566-9617-10
C12
CAPACITOR 220nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP2-220NK
25-565-4854-22
C13
CAPACITOR 220pF 10% TYPE FKC2
45-565-4881-22
C14
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C15
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK
45-565-4844-10
C16
CAPACITOR 15nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 15NK
45-565-4843-15
C17
CAPACITOR 47nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 47NK
45-565-4843-47
C18
CAPACITOR 15nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 15NK
45-565-4843-15
C19
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1- 10NK
45-565-4843-10
C20
CAPACITOR TANTALUM 0.47uF +/-20% 35V TYPE RSH
45-566-6484-47
L1
CHOKE 22uH TYPE SC30
45-676-3514-22
L2
CHOKE 22uH TYPE SC30
45-676-3514-22
D1
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D2
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D3
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D4
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D5
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D6
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D7
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.31
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
D8
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 5V1 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
40-666-389-01M
D9
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D10
DIODE TYPE BAT85
45-666-2421
D11
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D12
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D13
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D14
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 24V 5% TYPE BZX79 TO CECC 50-005-005
45-666-3517-24
D15
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
D16
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916
40-666-2059M
IC1
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC2
I/C/CMOS DUAL ‘D’ TYPE FLIP FLOP TYPE CD4013BE
45-654-6111
IC3
I/C HEX SCHMITT TRIGGER CMOS TYPE CD40106BCN
45-654-6067-12
IC4
I/C CMOS BINARY UP/DOWN COUNTER TYPE CD4516BE
45-654-6070-12
IC5
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC6
I/C CMOS BINARY UP/DOWN COUNTER TYPE CD4516BE
45-654-6070-12
IC7
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC8
I/C 4 BIT CMOS MAGNITUDE COMPARATOR 4585BE
45-654-6218
IC9
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE M311N
45-652-3009-07
IC10
I/C CMOS HEX INVERTING BuFFER TYPE CD 4049B
45-654-6108
IC11
I/C OPTO COUPLER TYPE 6N136
45-667-322
IC12
I/C MONO MULTIVIBRATOR TYPE MC14538BPC
45-654-6095-16
IC13
I/C CMOS ANALOGUESWITCH TYPE DG417DJ
45-652-5037
IC14
I/C FET I/P OPERATIONAL AMP TYPE TL082CP
45-652-2118-16
TR1,TR2
TRANSISTOR PNP TYPE BCY70 TO BS9365 F009
40-666-5113M
PLA
CONNECTOR STRIP 12 WAY TYPE NH PT No.B12P-SHF-1AA
45-743-1617
PLB
CONNECTOR STRIP 2 WAY TYPE NH PT No.B-2P-SHF-1AA
45-741-5026
SKC
CO-AX SKT SMC (GOLD PLATED BODY) 50 OHM PCB TYPE C65NO7G999X99
45-741-1921
TP1 to 11
TERMINAL TEST RAISED LOOP TYPE 200-207-RED
45-718-5207
TB12, PCB TAB
CONNECTOR P114
35-867-6304
S1
D.I.L. 4 POLE SPST SWITCH TYPE SDS-4-023
45-612-222
Page 8.32
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1436
Figure 8 - Power Supply PCB (CTX-A283) Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.33
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
R1
RESISTOR 13K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
R2
NOT USED
R3
RESISTOR 6K8 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-68M
R4
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R5
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R6
RESISTOR 2K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-10M
R7
RESISTOR 2K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-10M
R8
RESISTOR 220R +/-5% 1.6W TYPE PR37 MULLARD
45-528-4161-22
R9
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R10
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R11
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R12
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R13
RESISTOR 4R7 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
40-513-239-47
R14
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R15
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R16
RESISTOR 100R 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-601-10M
R17
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R18
RESISTOR 330K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-33M
R19
RESISTOR 56K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-56M
R20
SURGE ARRESTOR TYPE Z21L821 INT. RECTIFIER
45-529-530
R21
RESISTOR 390K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-39M
R22
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R23
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R24
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R25
RESISTOR 33K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-33M
R26
RESISTOR 0R1 5% W/W STYLE JB BSCECC 40 201-002
45-528-324-25M
R27
RESISTOR 8K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-82M
R28
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R29
RESISTOR 220R 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-601-22M
R30
RESISTOR 22K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-22M
R31
RESISTOR 1M 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-22M
R32
RESISTOR 10K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-10M
R33
RESISTOR 8K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-82M
R34
RESISTOR 2K2 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-10M
Page 8.34
45-518-603-13M
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
R35
RESISTOR 820K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-604-82M
R36
RESISTOR 15K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-15M
R37
RESISTOR 47K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-47M
R38
NOT USED
R39
NOT USED
R40
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R41
RESISTOR 1K5 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-15M
R42
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-162-47M
R43
RESISTOR 2K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-27M
R44
RESISTOR 43K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-43M
R45
RESISTOR 24K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 4O 101-019
45-518-603-24M
R46
RESISTOR 47K 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-603-47M
R47
RESISTOR 4K7 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-47M
R48
RESISTOR 1K8 1% STYLE GZ BSCECC 40 101-019
45-518-602-18M
R49
VARISTOR TYPE V33ZA1 (0.5 JOULE) GEN INSTR
45-529-537
R50
VARISTOR TYPE V33ZA1 (1 JOULE) GEN INSTR
45-529-538
RV1
POTENTIOMETER 200K +/-10% TYPE 3299W BOURNS
45-546-1584-20
RV2
POTENTIOMETER 5K +/-10% TYPE 3299W BOURNS
45-546-1582-50
RV3
POTENTIOMETER 5K +/-10% TYPE 3299W BOURNS
45-546-1582-50
C1
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 63V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-851)
45-566-9607-47
C2
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C3
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C4
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA(FARNELL 108-836)
45-566-9617-47
C5
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA(FARNELL 108-836)
45-566-9617-47
C6
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C7
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C8
CAPACITOR 470uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA(FARNELL 108-836)
45-566-9617-47
C9
NOT USED
C10
NOT USED
C11
NOT USED
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.35
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
C12
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C13
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C14
CAPACITOR 2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K DUBILIER
45-565-4842-22
C15
CAPACITOR 2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K DUBILIER
45-565-4842-22
C16
CAPACITOR 4u7F +/-20% 50V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-847)
45-566-9575-47
C17
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C18
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C19
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C20
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C21
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C22
CAPACITOR 4700uF +50-10% 63V TYPE 050-58472 MULLARD
45-566-9428-47
C23
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-849)
45-566-9617-10
C24
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C25
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C26
CAPACITOR 4N7F +/-20% 1000V DC WKG TYPE PC/HV/SLCR
45-565-4812-47
C27
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C28
CAPACITOR CERAMIC HIGH VOLTAGE ECKD SERIES 470pF +/-10% 2KV PANASONIC PT No.ECKD 3D471KBP
45-564-5731-47
C29
CAPACITOR 10uF +/-20% 16V TYPE TAG 10M16 ITT
45-566-9316-10
C30
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C31
CAPACITOR SU SERIES 33uF +50/-20% 450V TYPE ECEB2WU330 PANASONIC (FARNELL 446-403)
45-562-9626-33
C32
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C33
CAPACITOR 2n2F +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-2N2K DUBILIER
45-565-4842-22
C34
CAPACITOR 1000nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP2-1000NK DUBILIER
45-565-4855-10
C35
CAPACITOR 1uF +/-20% 35V TYPE TAG 1M35 ITT
40-566-6485-10M
C36
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C37
CAPACITOR 1nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-1NK DUBILIER
45-565-4842-10
C38
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C39
CAPACITOR 1uF +/-20% 35V TYPE TAG 1M35 ITT
40-566-6485-10M
C40
CAPACITOR 22nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-22NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-22
C41
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 63V TYPE RSH ELNA
40-566-9607-10
Page 8.36
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 10: MKVI Transmitter Power Supply (CTX-A283) Parts List (continued) CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
C42
CAPACITOR 10uF +/-20% 16V TYPE TAG 10M16 ITT
45-566-9316-10
C43
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 2200pF +/-10% 100V (MED K) TYPE WDKIJ222KBA W/DUBILIER
45-564-5592-22
C44
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C45
CAPACITOR CERAMIC 100nF +/-10% 100V TYPE SR201C104KTA AVX-KYOCERA
45-564-5724-10
C46
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-849)
45-566-9617-10
C47
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C48
CAPACITOR 100uF +/-20% 25V TYPE RSH ELNA (FARNELL 108-849)
45-566-9617-10
S1
SLIDE SWITCH SPDT TYPE 25436 NAH P.C. MOUNTING APR/ISKRA LTD
40-612-219
FS1
FUSE 3A MULTIFUSE TYPE MFR300 BOURNS
FS2
FUSE 2.5A MULTIFUSE TYPE MFR250 BOURNS
FS3
FUSE 0.3A MULTIFUSE TYPE MFR030 BOURNS
FS4
FUSE LINK GLASS 5X20mm 5A TYPE S500 BESWICK
45-615-164-25
FUSEHOLDER PCB MOUNTING (20mm X 5mm) TYPE FX0456 BULGIN FOR FS4
45-712-371
D1
DIODE SCHOTTKY TYPE BYV10-60 SGS THOMSON
45-666-2459
D2
DIODE SCHOTTKY TYPE MBR745 GEN. INTRUMENTSor PBYR745 PHILIPS
45-666-2460
D3
DIODE SCHOTTKY TYPE MBR745 GEN. INTRUMENTSor PBYR745 PHILIPS
45-666-2460
D4
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916 TEXAS
40-666-2059M
D5
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 15V TYPE BZTO3-C15 MULLARD
45-666-3516-10
D6
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D7
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D8
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D9
RECTIFIER DIODE AVALANCHE FAST SOFT RECOVERY 1000V BYW96E MULLARD
45-666-2409-05
D10
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 82V TYPE BZTO3-C82 MULLARD
45-666-3516-06
D11
DIODE FAST RECOVERY TYPE BYV27-100 PHILIPS
45-666-2461
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.37
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
D12
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 82V TYPE BZTO3-C82 MULLARD
45-666-3516-06
D13
DIODE TYPE BAT85 MULLARD
45-666-2421
D14
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR 3V3 5% TYPE BZX79-C3V3 TO CECC 50-005-005 MULLARD
40-666-394-01M
D15
DIODE TYPE BAT85 MULLARD
45-666-2421
D16
DIODE FAST SWITCHING TYPE 1N916 TEXAS
40-666-2059M
D17
L.E.D. INDICATOR GREEN OVER GREEN BI-LEVEL TYPE 122-314-04 MARL
45-628-935
D18
L.E.D. INDICATOR GREEN OVER GREEN BI-LEVEL TYPE 122-314-04 MARL
45-628-935
IC1
NOT USED
IC2
I/C 5A STEP DOWN DC-DC REGULATOR HIGH VOLTAGE TYPE MAX724HCCK MAXIM OR LT1074HVCT LINEAR TECH
45-652-1012
IC3
I/C 5A STEP DOWN SWITCHING REGULATOR TYPE MAX724CCK MAXIM OR LT1074CTLINEAR TECH
45-652-1011
IC4
I/C 5A STEP DOWN SWITCHING REGULATOR TYPE MAX724CCK MAXIM OR LT1074CTLINEAR TECH
45-652-1011
IC5
I/C PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR TYPE SG3525AN MOTOROLA
45-652-1007
IC6
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555IPA INTERSIL
45-652-6004
IC7
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM311 SIGNETICS/
45-652-3009-07
IC8
I/C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR TYPE LM311 SIGNETICS/
45-652-3009-07
TR1
TRANSISTOR HEXFET TYPE IRF540 MOTOROLA
45-666-791
TR2
TRANSISTOR HEXFET TYPE IRF540 MOTOROLA
45-666-791
TR3
TRANSISTOR NPN TYPE BC547B PHILIPS
45-666-6373
TI
TRANSFORMER 350V
45-671-290
L1
INDUCTOR HIGH CURRENT 1400 SERIES 47uH PT No 1447385 NEWPORT (FARNELL 482-572)
45-676-3686-47
L2
INDUCTOR HIGH CURRENT 1400 SERIES 47uH PT No 1447385 NEWPORT (FARNELL 482-572)
45-676-3686-47
L3
INDUCTOR TYPE 8RBSH HIGH CURRENT 47uH 1.77A DC TOKO PT No. 494 LYF-0088K (CIRKIT 34-62088)
45-676-3696-47
L4
INDUCTOR TYPE 8RBSH HIGH CURRENT 330uH 0.78A DC TOKO PT No. 494 HYF-0134K (CIRKIT 34-26134)
45-676-3697-33
L5
INDUCTOR HIGH CURRENT 1400 SERIES 47uH PT No 1447385 NEWPORT (FARNELL 482-572)
45-676-3686-47
L6
(INDUCTOR) FERRITE BEAD TYPE 4330-030-32120 (FX4002) PHILIPS
35-862-101
L7
CHOKE 17mH 0.5A DC
45-676-206
Page 8.38
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES PART No.
L8
(INDUCTOR) FERRITE BEAD TYPE 4330-030-32120 (FX4002) PHILIPS
35-862-101
L9
INDUCTOR TYPE 8RBSH HIGH CURRENT 220uH 1.0A DC TOKO PT No. 494 HYF-0132K (CIRKIT 34-26132)
45-676-3697-22
LK1
PIN HEADER SINGLE ROW (20 PIN) TYPE M20-999-2006
45-743-3202
LK2
LINK TYPE M7566-06
45-741-5032
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL14-CL-V No 123736 (14 WAY) KLIPPON
45-718-5139
PLB
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL10-CL-V No 123696 (10 WAY) KLIPPON
45-718-8051
PLC
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL4-CL-V No 123636 (4 WAY) KLIPPON
45-741-8046
TP1 to TP12
TERMINAL TEST RAISED LOOP TYPE 200-207 RED W.HUGHES FARNELL 240-345)
45-718-5207
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.39
KH1250 Chapter 8
CD-1437
Figure 9 - Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250) Layout
TABLE 11: Tune Supply PCB (CTX-A250) Parts List CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10
R2
RESISTOR 33OR 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-33
R3
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10
R4
RESISTOR 470R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-161-47
R5
RESISTOR 1K5 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-15
R6
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-22
C3
CAPACITOR 10% 100nF 63V TYPE MMP1.100K DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
IC1
I/C VOLTAGE REGULATOR ADJUSTABLE 100mA TYPE LM317L NATIONAL
45-652-4069
IC3
I/C OP/AMP TYPE TL081CP TEXAS
45-652-2117-16
D1
DIODE V.REGULATOR BZX79C20 MULLARD
45-666-3517-20
D2
DIODE V.REGULATOR BZX79C18 MULLARD
45-666-3517-18
PLB
CONNECTOR STRIP 4 WAY TYPE NH PT No B4P-SHF-1AA JST/TAKBRO
45-741-8033
PLJ
CONNECTOR STRIP 6 WAY NH TYPE B 6P-SHF-1AA TAKBRO
45-742-3155
Page 8.40
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 CIRCUIT REF. TP1,TP2
DESCRIPTION TEST TERMINAL TYPE 200-207 (RAISED LOOP) W.HUGHES
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
KELVIN HUGHES Part No. 45-718-5207
Page 8.41
KH1250 Chapter 8
OLD LAYOUT
NEW LAYOUT
CD-1438
Figure 10 - HL PCB (CAE-A180): Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.43
KH1250 Chapter 8 TABLE 12: HL PCB (CAE-A180) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
RESISTOR 390R 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-381-39M
R2
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R3
RESISTOR 1K5 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-15M
R4
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R5
RESISTOR 22R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-22M
R6
RESISTOR 1K5 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-15M
R7
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 4O 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R8
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R9
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R10
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
R11
RESISTOR 22R 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-160-22M
R12
RESISTOR 4K7 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-47M
R13
RESISTOR 22K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 4O 101-019
40-518-163-22M
R14
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 4O 101-019
40-518-163-47M
C1
CAPACITOR 100nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C2
CAPACITOR 10uF -10+50% 63V TYPE 030-28109 MULLARD
40-566-7606-10
C3
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C4
CAPACITOR 10uF -10+50% 63V TYPE 030-28109 MULLARD
40-566-7606-10
C5
CAPACITOR 10nF +/-10% 63V TYPE MMP1-10NK DUBILIER
45-565-4843-10
C6
CAPACITOR 10uF -10+50% 63V TYPE 030-28109 MULLARD
40-566-7606-10
D1
DIODE FAST RECOVERY TYPE BYV27-100 PHILIPS
45-666-2461
D2
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR TYPE BZX79-C12
40-666-341-01M
D3
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR TYPE BZX79-C18
45-666-3517-18
TR1
TRANSISTOR TYPE 2N2904A
45-666-5110
TR2
TRANSISTOR TYPE 2N2904A
45-666-5110
TR3
TRANSISTOR NPN TYPE BC107B TO BS9365 F112 MULLARD
45-666-6352
Page 8.44
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 IC1, IC2
I/C OPTO SWITCH SCHMITT TRIGGER O/P TYPE H0A2001-1 HONEYWELL/FARNELL
45-667-320
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL8-CL-V No.123676 (8 WAY) KLIPPON
45-718-5165
TP1
TERMINAL TEST (RAISED LOOP)
45-718-5207
FIG 11
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.45
KH1250 Chapter 8
CZZ-A14 11
10
5
7 D1
2
17 18
1
13
6
4 16 15 3
+ D2
RLD
P8
RLC
P3
P7
RLB
P4
P6
P5
8 9
DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE
25
14 19
12
CZZ-A14-2 24
22 23
26
29
20
21 - - - L
+
D1
27
N
E
R3**
R20**
R4**
R21** R22##
R5##
+
D2
DANGER
RLD
P8
P3
RLC
P7
P4
RLB
P6
P5
28 A2
A1
HIGH VOLTAGE
CD-1440
Figure 11
Page 8.42
Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*): Layout Diagram
Figure 11
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 Table 13 - Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*) Parts List ITEM No.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
1
ASSY OF 3 PHASE SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159
2
ASSY OF MAIN C/FORM
CZZ-A161
3
NEON/TERMINAL ASSEMBLY
CZZ-A162
4
NEON ASSEMBLY
CZZ-A163
5
CHASSIS (3 PHASE SOFT START)
CZZ-1064
6
COVER (3 PHASE SOFT START)
CZZ-1065
7
SUPPORT BRACKET PSU/PCB ASSY
CZZ-1066
8
CLAMP CABLE (TOP)
CZZ-1071
9
CLAMP CABLE (BOTTOM)
CZZ-1070
10
RESISTOR 10R STYLE C TO BS9114-F006 (R20,R21,R22)
40-511-1130-10M
11
RESISTOR 18R STYLE D TO BS9114-F006 (R3,R4,R5)
40-511-1230-18M
12
TERMINAL BLOCK 3 WAY TYPE BL3 KLIPPON
45-718-5173
13
TERMINAL BLOCK 12 WAY TYPE 500 HDS 12 METWAY
45-718-5135
14
TERMINAL BLOCK 12 WAY 440V 20 AMP TYPE EKS 12/4 KLIPPON
45-718-5213
15
KEYSWITCH 2A 250V TYPE146-811 FARNELL
45-613-4205
16
LED INDICATOR GREEN TYPE 6340-005-5056 VCH
45-628-934
17
INSULATED STANDOFF R-5383/M3
40-716-1104-03
18
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE EX BSCECC 40 101-019 (R1,R2)
40-518-384-15M
19
CONTACTOR TYPE SC 24V DC PT.No 28-141100-24 MTE
45-617-1154
20
ASSY OF CABLEFORM, PSU TO TB4
CZZ-A165
21
PLATE TERMINAL
CZZ-1067
22
SUPPORT BRACKET PSU
CZZ-1077
23
LOCATION PIN
CZZ-1078
24
CLAMP CO-AX
CZZ-1086
25
CLIP WIRE HARNESS (6.5mm) PT No. WHC-250-01
35-766-511
26
UHF CABLE JACK TYPE U40E65E010X99 MA/COM GREENPAR
45-741-1943
27
UHF LARGE CABLE ENTRY TYPE U40A01E004X99MA/COM GREENPAR
45-741-1934
28
UHF REDUCING ADAPTOR TYPR U40X08E999X99
45-741-1939
29
POWER UNIT TYPE FET201/24/C UNIPOWER
45-677-112
FITTING KIT
CZZ-A166
SPARES KIT
KSK-A2/24
Note: Overload relays (various options) are supplied as part of the appropriate antenna gearbox or upmast transmitter fitting kit.
Page 8.46
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8
TP4
1
PL8
R8
R9
TR2
TP3
R7
RLB
R14 C5
TR1
R6 + RLC
R16
R18
R17
R19
+ C1
D4
R10
R13 R15
IC1
RLD
C6 +
C4
+
C2
D5
R12
+
C3 1
R11 D3
+
PLA
CD-1439
Figure 12 - 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159) Layout Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.47
KH1250 Chapter 8 Table 14 - Soft Start Unit 3 Phase Switching PCB (CZZ-A159) Parts List
CIRCUIT REF.
DESCRIPTION
KELVIN HUGHES Part No.
R1
NOT USED
R2
NOT USED
R3
NOT USED
R4
NOT USED
R5
NOT USED
R6
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR TYPE V480LA40A GE-M-V HARRIS
R7
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR TYPE V480LA40A GE-M-V HARRIS
R8
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-15M
R9
RESISTOR 150K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-384-15M
R10
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR TYPE V480LA40A GE-M-V HARRIS
R11
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R12
RESISTOR 1K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-10M
R13
RESISTOR 3K3 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-33M
R14
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R15
RESISTOR 47K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-164-47M
R16
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R17
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R18
RESISTOR 10K 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-163-10M
R19
RESISTOR 2K2 2% STYLE FX BSCECC 40 101-019
40-518-162-22M
C1
CAPACITOR 100nF 10% 63V TYPE MMP1.100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C2
CAPACITOR 10uF 20% 25V TYPE TAG 10M25 ITT
40-565-5186-10
C3
CAPACITOR 100nF 10% 63V TYPE MMP1.100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
C4
CAPACITOR 10uF 20% 25V TYPE TAG 10M25 ITT
40-565-5186-10
C5
CAPACITOR 10uF 20% 25V TYPE TAG 10M25 ITT
40-565-5186-10
C6
CAPACITOR 100nF 10% 63V TYPE MMP1.100NK DUBILIER
45-565-4844-10
IC1
I/C IPA TIMER TYPE ICM7555 INTERSIL
45-652-6004
TR1
TRANSISTOR NPN TYPE BSX20 PHILIPS/SGS
40-666-6090
TR2
TRANSISTOR NPN DARLINGTON TYPE BD675 PHILIPS
45-666-5298
D3,D4
DIODE FAST RECOVERY TYPE BYV27-100 PHILIPS
45-666-2461
D5
DIODE VOLTAGE REGULATOR TYPE BZX79-C12 PHILIPS
40-666-341
RLB,RLC,RLD
RELAY SPNO 24V COIL TYPE V23077-A 402 SERIES SIEMENS
45-617-4236
PLA
TERMINAL STRIP CLOSED END (MALE) TYPE SL8-CL-V KLIPPON PT.No.123676
45-718-5165
Page 8.48
Issue 4
KH1250 Chapter 8 PLB
TERMINAL STRIP OPEN END TYPE SL3V KLIPPON PT.No.011126 HEATSINK TYPE TV215 REDPOINT
Issue 4, Amdt. 1 (Mar 00)
Page 8.49
KH1250 Chapter 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 8.50
Issue 4
Related Documents
Mk Vi Workshop Manual
February 2021 1
Mk
March 2021 0
Powerbands Workshop Manual
January 2021 1
914 Workshop Manual
February 2021 0
Workshop Manual Dp200.pdf
January 2021 5
Workshop Manual Mtu4000r41
February 2021 5More Documents from "AnuruddhaSamaradiwakara"
Mk Vi Workshop Manual
February 2021 1
Introduction To Well Testing
March 2021 0
Pafa-115 (large)
February 2021 1
Engineering.economics 2020
February 2021 1
Ruqyah Darus'syifa
January 2021 0